SKILL DEVELOPMENT SCHEMES FOR FARMERS

The Government has initiated and is implementing the following schemes aimed to provide farmers with latest skilling requirements.

The Government is implementing Skill Training of Rural Youth (STRY) with the objective to impart short term skill training (7 days duration) to rural youths and farmers in agriculture and allied sectors for upgradation of their knowledge and skills and promote wage/self employment in rural areas. The component aims at providing short duration skill based training programs to rural youth and farmers on agri-based vocational areas for creating a pool of skilled manpower. Recently, the STRY programme has been subsumed under ATMA cafeteria.  

The Government is implementing skill development programmes through Krishi Vigyan Kendra (KVK) under Indian Council of Agricultural Research (ICAR) in different States of the Country to serve as single window agricultural knowledge, resource and capacity development centres with mandate of technology assessment and demonstration for its use and capacity building. As part of its activities, the KVKs are imparting training to the farmers, farm women and rural youths on different aspects of agriculture and allied sectors (Crop Production, Horticulture, Soil Health and Fertility Management, Livestock Production and Management, Home Science/Women empowerment, Agril. Engineering, Plant Protection, Fisheries, Production of Input at site, Agro forestry etc.) for their capacity building.

A Centrally Sponsored Scheme on โ€˜Support to State Extension Programmes for Extension Reformsโ€™ popularly known as Agriculture Technology Management Agency (ATMA) is implemented across the country by the Ministry of Agriculture & Farmers Welfare. The scheme promotes decentralized farmer-friendly Extension system in the country with an objective to support State Governmentโ€™s efforts to revitalize the extension system and making available the latest agricultural technologies and good agricultural practices in different thematic areas of agriculture and allied areas to farmers, farm women and youth, through various interventions like Farmers Training, Demonstrations, Exposure Visits, Kisan Melas etc.  Presently, the scheme is being implemented in 739 districts of 28 States & 5 UTs in the country.

The Ministry of Agriculture and Farmers Welfare is implementing โ€˜Sub Mission on Agricultural Mechanizationโ€™ (SMAM). For implementation of this scheme Four Farm Machinery Training & Testing Institutes (FMTTIs) located at Budni (Madhya Pradesh), Hissar (Haryana), Geraldine (Andhra Pradesh) and Biswanath Chariali (Assam) are engaged in the country for imparting skill development training courses to different categories of beneficiaries like farmers, technicians, under graduate engineers, entrepreneurs on selection, operation, repair and maintenance, energy conservation and management of agricultural equipments.

Rashtriya Krishi Vikas Yojana (RKVY), an umbrella scheme of Ministry of Agriculture & Farmers Welfare, is implemented for ensuring holistic development of agriculture and allied sectors. There is provision for allowing the states to choose their own agriculture and allied sector development activities including training programmes as per the district/state agriculture plan.

The Government has launched National Skill Development Mission under the Ministry of Skill Development and Entrepreneurship (MSDE) in July 2015, under which the DA&FW has been operationalizing skill training courses of minimum 200 hours duration for rural youth and farmers as per the approved Qualification Packs developed by Agriculture Skill Council of India (ASCI) in the areas of agriculture and allied sectors. Recently, this programme has been subsumed under ATMA cafeteria. 

The details of the number of farmers benefited/trained under the skill development schemes implemented by the Ministry of Agriculture and Farmers Welfare during the last three years, year-wise is given as under:

S.No.SchemesNumber of Farmers TrainedTotal
2021-222022-232023-24
1.STRY10456116342094043030
2.KVK1691744195322021563635801327
3.ATMA1359069142844612072073994722
4.SMAM13261154401497143672
5.RKVY379929516750
6.MSDE347037157187903
 Total3078000341625434031509897404

The funds allotted/utilized under respective schemes in the districts of Tiruchirappalli and Pudukottai are given as under:

District : Tiruchirappalli.

(Rs. in Lakhs)

S.NoSchemes2021-222022-232023-24
  Funds allotedFunds utilizedFunds allotedFunds utilizedFunds allotedFunds utilized
1.STRY0.420.420.420.421.261.26
2.ATMA51.551.524.924.92121
3.TNSDC STRY0.887040.887040.685440.68544
 Total52.8070452.8070426.0054426.0054422.2622.26

Source: State Department of Agriculture, Government of Tamil Nadu

District : Pudukottai

(Rs. in Lakhs)

S.NoSchemes2021-222022-232023-24
  Funds allotedFunds utilizedFunds allotedFunds utilizedFunds allotedFunds utilized
1.STRY0.840.840.420.421.261.26
2.ATMA56.4056.4039.5039.5019.6019.60
3.TNSDC STRY1.691.650.600.58
 Total58.9358.8940.5240.5020.8620.86

Source: State Department of Agriculture, Government of Tamil Nadu.

Gentrification: A Socio-Economic Transformation

Daily writing prompt
What is your favorite drink?

By Aayush Gupta

Definition and Concept

Gentrification refers to the process of urban transformation where lower-income neighborhoods undergo redevelopment, leading to an influx of middle- and upper-class residents. This often results in rising property values, increased commercial investments, and displacement of original residents.

Image Credit: Rigolon, A., & Nรฉmeth, J. (2019). Toward a socioecological model of gentrification: How people, place, and policy shape neighborhood change. Journal of Urban Affairs41(7), 887โ€“909. https://doi.org/10.1080/07352166.2018.1562846

Causes of Gentrification

  1. Urban Redevelopment โ€“ Governments and private investors initiate renewal projects to modernize deteriorating areas.
  2. Economic Growth โ€“ Expansion of industries, businesses, and job opportunities attracts wealthier populations.
  3. Improved Infrastructure โ€“ Investments in public transport, green spaces, and cultural hubs make areas more desirable.
  4. Cultural and Social Appeal โ€“ Artists, students, and young professionals often drive early waves of gentrification.
  5. Policy Interventions โ€“ Zoning laws, tax incentives, and housing policies influence neighborhood transformations.

Key Features of Gentrification

  1. Demographic Shift โ€“ Wealthier, often younger, populations move into historically working-class or marginalized areas.
  2. Rising Property Values โ€“ Increased demand leads to higher real estate prices and rents.
  3. Displacement of Low-Income Residents โ€“ Original inhabitants may be forced out due to unaffordable costs.
  4. Change in Local Businesses โ€“ Small, local businesses are replaced by upscale restaurants, cafes, and retail chains.
  5. Urban Aesthetic Transformation โ€“ Old buildings are renovated, and modern architectural developments emerge.

Social and Economic Impacts

  1. Positive Effects
    • Improved infrastructure and amenities.
    • Increased property values benefiting homeowners.
    • Reduction in crime rates in some cases.
    • Economic revitalization through new businesses.
  2. Negative Effects
    • Loss of cultural and social identity of neighborhoods.
    • Displacement of lower-income residents due to unaffordable rents.
    • Social tensions between newcomers and long-term residents.
    • Homelessness and increased socio-economic disparities.

Gentrification in the Modern Context

  1. Gentrification in Global Cities โ€“ London, New York, San Francisco, and Berlin have witnessed rapid gentrification, affecting housing affordability.
  2. Government Policies and Interventions โ€“ Rent control laws, affordable housing policies, and community-led development initiatives aim to mitigate negative impacts.
  3. Sustainable Urban Planning โ€“ Efforts to balance economic development with social equity, ensuring inclusive growth.

Gentrification is the process by which urban neighborhoods, often those that have long been home to lower-income residents, experience redevelopment through the influx of middle- and upper-class populations. This urban transformation is driven by a combination of economic forces, policy interventions, and cultural shifts. While gentrification can stimulate economic growth and improve public infrastructure, it frequently also results in the displacement of longstanding communities and the loss of cultural identity.

Definition and Causes

  • Urban Redevelopment Initiatives:
    Government-led programs and private investments often target dilapidated areas for revitalization. Infrastructure improvementsโ€”such as upgraded transportation, parks, and utilitiesโ€”create a more attractive environment for new investments.
  • Economic Growth:
    As industries expand and job opportunities increase, wealthier populations are drawn to urban centers. The rise in demand for modern amenities and lifestyle-oriented housing leads to increased property values.
  • Cultural Shifts:
    Artists, young professionals, and creative entrepreneurs are frequently the early adopters of gentrification, drawn by affordable spaces and the vibrant energy of urban life. Their presence, while culturally enriching, can alter the original social fabric.
  • Policy and Zoning Changes:
    Changes in zoning laws, tax incentives, and housing policies can accelerate redevelopment. These policies are often designed to promote economic growth but may inadvertently contribute to the exclusion of lower-income residents.

Key Features of Gentrification

  1. Demographic Shifts:
    The influx of wealthier, often younger, populations reshapes the social demographics of a neighborhood.
  2. Rising Property Values and Rents:
    Increased demand drives up the cost of housing, often pricing out long-term residents.
  3. Displacement:
    Original residents, frequently from marginalized communities, may be forced to relocate as affordable housing becomes scarce.
  4. Transformation of Local Businesses:
    Traditional local stores and markets give way to upscale boutiques, cafes, and restaurants tailored to new residents.
  5. Urban Aesthetic Changes:
    Historical buildings are renovated or replaced, and new architectural styles emerge that reflect modern tastes.

Figure 1: The Gentrification Process Flowchart

[Urban Decay]

     โ”‚

     โ–ผ

[Government & Private Investments]

     โ”‚

     โ–ผ

[Infrastructure Improvements & Zoning Changes]

     โ”‚

     โ–ผ

[Attraction of Middle/Upper-Class Residents]

     โ”‚

     โ–ผ

[Increased Property Values & Economic Revitalization]

     โ”‚

     โ–ผ

[Displacement of Long-Term, Lower-Income Residents]

Figure 1 illustrates the flow of the gentrification processโ€”from initial urban decay through investment and renewal to the resulting economic and social shifts that can lead to displacement.


Table 1: Impact of Gentrification

AspectPositive ImpactNegative Impact
EconomicBoosts local economy; increases tax revenueRising costs; displacement of low-income groups
SocialReduction in crime rates; enhanced public servicesSocial tensions; erosion of long-standing community ties
CulturalRevitalizes neighborhoods with creative inputsLoss of cultural identity; homogenization of urban spaces
HousingRenovation of housing stock; improved amenitiesEscalating rents; loss of affordable housing

Table 1 summarizes the dual nature of gentrification impacts, showing that while there are economic and social benefits, these gains often come at the cost of affordability and cultural diversity.


Conclusion

Gentrification is a multifaceted phenomenon that brings about both revitalization and disruption. While the influx of investment and economic growth can lead to better infrastructure and reduced crime, the displacement of long-standing, lower-income residents poses serious challenges. Sustainable urban planning that incorporates affordable housing and community engagement is essential for ensuring that redevelopment benefits all stakeholders without eroding the unique cultural character of urban neighborhoods. This balanced approach is key to fostering inclusive growth in rapidly changing urban environments.

Gentrification is a double-edged sword, bringing economic growth but also deepening social inequalities. While it revitalizes urban spaces, it raises concerns about affordability, displacement, and cultural erosion. Sustainable policies and inclusive urban planning are essential to ensure that development benefits all residents.

References

Almeida, R., Patrรญcio, P., Brandรฃo, M., & Torres, R. (2022). Can economic development policy trigger gentrification? Assessing and anatomising the mechanisms of state-led gentrification. Environment and Planning A: Economy and Space54(1), 84-104.

Dehalwar, K., & Sharma, S. N. (2024). Social Injustice Inflicted by Spatial Changes in Vernacular Settings: An Analysis of Published Literature.

Rigolon, A., & Nรฉmeth, J. (2019). Toward a socioecological model of gentrification: How people, place, and policy shape neighborhood change. Journal of Urban Affairs41(7), 887โ€“909. https://doi.org/10.1080/07352166.2018.1562846

Kovรกcs, Z. (2009). Social and economic transformation of historical neighbourhoods in Budapest. Tijdschrift voor economische en sociale geografie100(4), 399-416.

Saleh, H., & Remmang, H. (2018). Economic gentrification and socio-cultural transformation metropolitan suburban of Mamminasata.

Thomas, J., & Vogel, B. (2018). Intervention gentrification and everyday socio-economic transactions in intervention societies. Civil Wars20(2), 217-237.

Track2Training International Conference on Urban Growth Simulation and GIS Applications

Track2Training International Conference on Urban Growth Simulation and GIS Applications

๐Ÿ“… Date: 21 March 2025
๐Ÿ“ Mode: Online (Virtual Conference)
๐ŸŽฏ Theme: Harnessing GIS and Simulation Models for Sustainable Urban Development


About the Conference

Urban areas around the world are undergoing rapid transformation, leading to challenges in infrastructure, environment, and sustainable development. Accurate simulation of urban growth patterns, combined with advanced Geographic Information System (GIS) techniques, is becoming essential for informed decision-making, effective urban planning, and policy formulation.

The Track2Training International Conference brings together leading researchers, planners, GIS professionals, policymakers, and industry experts to discuss innovations, research findings, and real-world applications of Urban Growth Simulation and GIS technologies.

This conference will provide a platform for presenting cutting-edge research, exchanging ideas, and fostering collaborations to shape future cities.


Conference Objectives

  • Explore urban growth simulation models such as CA-ANN, SLEUTH, and agent-based modeling.
  • Discuss integration of GIS tools in urban planning and environmental management.
  • Share successful case studies from developing and developed countries.
  • Highlight data-driven decision-making for sustainable city growth.
  • Promote collaboration between academia, government, and industry in GIS-based urban planning.

Key Topics

  1. Urban Growth Simulation Models โ€“ CA-ANN, cellular automata, machine learning, and predictive models.
  2. GIS Applications in Urban Planning โ€“ Spatial analysis, mapping, and decision support systems.
  3. Land Use and Land Cover (LULC) Change Detection.
  4. Smart City Planning and GIS.
  5. Environmental Impact Assessment using GIS.
  6. Case Studies โ€“ Successful urban growth simulations in cities like Indore, Delhi, and Bhopal.
  7. Policy Implications and Governance in Urban Development.

Who Should Attend?

  • Urban Planners & City Development Authorities
  • GIS Analysts & Remote Sensing Specialists
  • Civil Engineers & Environmental Scientists
  • Policy Makers & Government Officials
  • Research Scholars & Students in Urban Studies, Geography, and Civil Engineering

Call for Papers & Presentations

Researchers are invited to submit original research papers, case studies, and project reports related to the conference theme. Selected papers will be published in Track2Training Conference Proceedings and may be considered for special issues of partnered journals.

Abstract Submission Deadline: 20 February 2025
Full Paper Submission Deadline: 10 March 2025
Notification of Acceptance: 15 March 2025


Registration Details

  • Students / Research Scholars: $20
  • Academicians: $30
  • Industry Professionals: $50
  • International Participants: $60

Registration Fee Includes:
โœ… Access to all conference sessions
โœ… Digital certificate of participation/presentation
โœ… E-copy of the conference proceedings


Keynote Speakers (Tentative)

  • Dr. Shashikant Nishant Sharma โ€“ Expert in Urban Planning & GIS, multiple publications in SCI journals on urban growth modeling.
  • Dr. K. Dehalwar โ€“ Specialist in sustainable development and transport planning.
  • Prof. G. Kumar โ€“ Researcher in environmental health and waste management in urban areas.

How to Participate

๐Ÿ“ฉ Submit Papers & Register: Email to conference@track2training.com
๐ŸŒ Conference Portal: Track2Training


This conference promises to be an enriching experience for anyone involved in shaping the cities of tomorrow, with a focus on predictive urban growth models and GIS-powered solutions for sustainable development.

Sustainable Development Goals and the Role of Social Works

Daily writing prompt
Name an attraction or town close to home that you still haven’t got around to visiting.

By Shashikant Nishant Sharma

The Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs), established by the United Nations in 2015, represent a global commitment to address critical challenges such as poverty, inequality, climate change, and access to education and healthcare. These 17 goals aim to create a sustainable future by balancing economic growth, social inclusion, and environmental protection. Social work, as a profession dedicated to fostering social justice and improving the well-being of individuals and communities, plays a pivotal role in achieving these goals.

Understanding the SDGs

The SDGs encompass a broad spectrum of interconnected objectives, including:

  1. No Poverty (Goal 1): Eradicating extreme poverty and ensuring access to resources and opportunities for all.
  2. Zero Hunger (Goal 2): Addressing food security and promoting sustainable agriculture.
  3. Good Health and Well-Being (Goal 3): Ensuring healthy lives and access to quality healthcare.
  4. Quality Education (Goal 4): Providing inclusive and equitable education for all.
  5. Gender Equality (Goal 5): Promoting gender equity and empowering women and girls.
  6. Clean Water and Sanitation (Goal 6): Ensuring access to safe water and sanitation.
  7. Affordable and Clean Energy (Goal 7): Promoting renewable energy and energy efficiency.
  8. Decent Work and Economic Growth (Goal 8): Advocating for inclusive and sustainable economic growth.
  9. Industry, Innovation, and Infrastructure (Goal 9): Building resilient infrastructure and fostering innovation.
  10. Reduced Inequalities (Goal 10): Addressing disparities in income and opportunities.
  11. Sustainable Cities and Communities (Goal 11): Creating safe and sustainable urban environments.
  12. Responsible Consumption and Production (Goal 12): Encouraging sustainable consumption patterns.
  13. Climate Action (Goal 13): Tackling climate change through mitigation and adaptation.
  14. Life Below Water (Goal 14): Protecting marine ecosystems.
  15. Life on Land (Goal 15): Promoting the sustainable use of terrestrial ecosystems.
  16. Peace, Justice, and Strong Institutions (Goal 16): Promoting peaceful and inclusive societies.
  17. Partnerships for the Goals (Goal 17): Strengthening global collaboration to achieve the SDGs.

The Role of Social Work

Social work contributes significantly to the realization of the SDGs through its core values of social justice, human rights, and empowerment. Below are some of the key ways in which social work aligns with and advances the SDGs:

  1. Poverty Alleviation: Social workers engage in community development programs, advocate for social welfare policies, and provide direct assistance to marginalized populations, addressing the root causes of poverty.
  2. Promoting Health and Well-Being: Social workers play a critical role in healthcare settings, offering counseling, case management, and support services to improve mental and physical health outcomes.
  3. Advancing Education: Social workers support access to education by working with schools, families, and communities to address barriers such as poverty, discrimination, and lack of resources.
  4. Gender Equality and Social Justice: Through advocacy and intervention, social workers combat gender-based violence, promote womenโ€™s empowerment, and challenge societal norms that perpetuate inequality.
  5. Building Resilient Communities: Social workers assist communities in disaster preparedness, recovery, and resilience, aligning with goals such as climate action and sustainable cities.
  6. Addressing Inequalities: Social workers work tirelessly to reduce inequalities by advocating for inclusive policies, combating discrimination, and ensuring equitable access to resources and opportunities.
  7. Environmental Sustainability: Recognizing the interconnectedness of social and environmental issues, social workers engage in initiatives that promote environmental justice, sustainable practices, and awareness of climate change.
  8. Strengthening Institutions and Partnerships: Social workers collaborate with governments, NGOs, and other stakeholders to design and implement programs that foster peace, justice, and effective governance.

Challenges and Opportunities

While social work has immense potential to advance the SDGs, it also faces challenges such as resource constraints, political resistance, and systemic inequities. However, these challenges present opportunities for innovation, advocacy, and collaboration. By leveraging technology, fostering partnerships, and emphasizing community-driven approaches, social workers can amplify their impact.

Conclusion

The SDGs provide a comprehensive framework for creating a sustainable and equitable world. Social work, with its commitment to social justice and human dignity, is uniquely positioned to contribute to these goals. By addressing systemic issues, empowering communities, and fostering resilience, social workers play a crucial role in transforming the vision of the SDGs into reality. As the world navigates complex global challenges, the integration of social work practices with the SDGs offers a pathway to a more inclusive and sustainable future.

References

Amadi, L. A., Ogbanga, M. M., & Agena, J. E. (2015). Climate change and feminist environmentalism in the Niger Delta, Nigeria. African Journal of Political Science and International Relations9(9), 361-371.

Adonye, F. G., & Ogbanga, M. M. (2024). THE CONTRIBUTION OF CHRISTIAN WOMEN GROUPS TO COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT IN OPOBO/NKORO LOCAL GOVERNMENT AREA OF RIVERS STATE NIGERIA; IMPLICATIONS AND OPPORTUNITIES FOR SOCIAL WORK PRACTICE. The Professional Social Work Journal, 31.

Ogbanga, M. M. (2024). Migration and Transformation: Understanding the Impact on Destination Countries in the Age of Mobility.

Jack, J. T. C. B., Ogbanga, M. M., & Odubo, T. R. (2018). Energy poverty and environmental sustainability challenges in Nigeria. Ilorin Journal of Sociology10(1), 19-31.

Ramsey-Soroghaye, B. N., & Ogbanga, M. (2022). Socio-cultural determinants hindering research among social workers in Nigeria. African Journal of Social Work12(4), 153-162.

Ogbanga, M. M., & Bukie, B. F. (2024). Traditional Institutions and Conflict Resolution in Nigeria: A Social Work Analysis.

Ogbanga, M. M. (2024). Vulnerabilities of Youths to Climate Change Impacts: A Case Study of Phalga Local Government Area.

Amadi, L., Imoh-Ita, I., & Ogbanga, M. (2016). Exploring knowledge management and green corporate strategy (GCS) nexus. International Journal of Social Science and Humanities Research4(1), 66-82.

Ogbanga, M. M., & Sharma, S. N. (2024). Climate Change and Mental Heat.

Ngowari, G. B., & Ogbanga, M. (2020). The effects of cultural practices and knowledge systems on community development. Management Insight16(02), 9-16.

Nwakanma, E., & Ogbanga, M. M. Assessing disaster preparedness and Indigenous disaster management systems of at-risk communities in Isoko-South LGA of Delta State, Nigeria.

Uzobo, E., & Ogbanga, M. M. (2017). The Role of Civil Registration and Vital Statistics in the Attainment of Selected Sustainable Development Goals in Nigeria. Indian Journal of Sustainable Development3(2), 1-10.

What is Extension Education

By Shashikant Nishant Sharma

Extension education is a process of educating people, particularly in rural areas, about new technologies, practices, and innovations in various fields such as agriculture, health, nutrition, and community development. The primary goal of extension education is to improve the quality of life of individuals and communities by providing them with relevant knowledge, skills, and attitudes.

Key Objectives of Extension Education

  1. Dissemination of knowledge: Sharing new technologies, practices, and innovations with the community.
  2. Skill development: Enhancing the skills of individuals and communities to improve their productivity and income.
  3. Behavior change: Encouraging positive behavior change among individuals and communities to improve their overall well-being.
  4. Community empowerment: Empowering communities to take charge of their own development and decision-making processes.

Methods of Extension Education

  1. Demonstrations: Showcasing new technologies and practices through demonstrations.
  2. Training programs: Organizing training programs for individuals and communities.
  3. Workshops: Conducting workshops to share knowledge and skills.
  4. Mass media: Using mass media such as radio, television, and newspapers to disseminate information.
  5. Interpersonal communication: Using interpersonal communication to share information and build relationships with the community.

Importance of Extension Education

  1. Improves productivity: Extension education helps individuals and communities to improve their productivity and income.
  2. Enhances knowledge and skills: Extension education enhances the knowledge and skills of individuals and communities.
  3. Promotes behavior change: Extension education promotes positive behavior change among individuals and communities.
  4. Empowers communities: Extension education empowers communities to take charge of their own development and decision-making processes.

Challenges Facing Extension Education

  1. Limited resources: Extension education often faces limited resources, including funding, personnel, and infrastructure.
  2. Reaching remote areas: Extension education often struggles to reach remote and hard-to-reach areas.
  3. Changing behavior: Extension education often faces challenges in changing the behavior of individuals and communities.
  4. Sustainability: Extension education often faces challenges in ensuring sustainability of projects and programs.

Best Practices in Extension Education

  1. Participatory approach: Involving the community in the planning, implementation, and evaluation of extension programs.
  2. Need-based approach: Focusing on the needs and priorities of the community.
  3. Collaboration and partnerships: Collaborating with other organizations and stakeholders to leverage resources and expertise.
  4. Monitoring and evaluation: Regularly monitoring and evaluating extension programs to ensure their effectiveness and impact.

STATA- A powerful statistical software

By Shashikant Nishant Sharma

Stata is a powerful and user-friendly statistical software package widely used in academia, research, and professional fields for data analysis, data management, and graphics. It is especially popular among social scientists, economists, epidemiologists, and biostatisticians due to its comprehensive features and ease of use.

Key Features

1. Data Management

Stata offers a wide range of data management tools to efficiently handle datasets:

Import/export data from various formats like Excel, CSV, SPSS, SAS, and more.

Merge, append, reshape, and sort datasets.

Generate new variables, recode existing ones, and label data for clarity.

Handle missing data effectively with built-in commands.

2. Statistical Analysis

Stata supports a broad range of statistical analyses, including:

Descriptive Statistics: Mean, median, standard deviation, frequencies, and cross-tabulations.

Inferential Statistics: Hypothesis testing, t-tests, ANOVA, chi-square tests.

Regression Analysis: Linear, logistic, multinomial, and panel data regression.

Time-Series Analysis: ARIMA, VAR, and cointegration models.

Survival Analysis: Kaplan-Meier, Cox regression, and survival curves.

Multivariate Techniques: Factor analysis, principal component analysis, and clustering.

3. Graphics and Visualization

Stata provides advanced visualization tools to create:

Scatterplots, histograms, and boxplots.

Line graphs and bar charts.

Customizable publication-quality graphics.

Interactive dashboards through integrated external tools like Stata Graph Editor.

4. Programming and Automation

Stata allows users to automate repetitive tasks and enhance functionality by:

Writing scripts (do-files) to run sequences of commands.

Creating custom programs (ado-files) for specialized tasks.

Integrating with Python or R for additional computational power.

5. User-Friendly Interface

Stata has a straightforward interface that includes:

Command Line: For executing specific commands.

Menu System: For point-and-click operations.

Data Viewer: To browse and edit datasets directly.

6. Extensibility and Community Support

Stata supports third-party plugins and extensions available via:

The Stata Journal and Stata user community.

Built-in access to repositories like SSC (Statistical Software Components).

Applications

1. Economics: Modeling economic growth, forecasting, labor market analysis.

2. Health Sciences: Analyzing clinical trials, epidemiological studies, and survival rates.

3. Social Sciences: Public policy evaluation, survey analysis, and social behavior research.

4. Business and Marketing: Predictive modeling, market segmentation, and financial analytics.

Pros and Cons

Pros

Comprehensive suite of features.

Intuitive syntax and user-friendly interface.

Highly active user community and robust documentation.

Suitable for both beginners and advanced users.

Cons

Steep learning curve for non-technical users.

Can be expensive compared to alternatives like R or Python.

Limited in advanced machine learning functionalities compared to specialized tools.

Getting Started with Stata

1. Installing Stata:

Visit Stata’s official website to purchase and download.

Install based on your operating system (Windows, Mac, or Linux).

2. Basic Commands:

Load a dataset:

use filename.dta

Summarize data:

summarize varname

Create a new variable:

generate newvar = expression

Run a regression:

regress y x1 x2

3. Learning Resources:

Stata’s inbuilt help system (help command).

Online tutorials, courses, and webinars.

Books and user guides provided by StataCorp.


Stata Editions

Stata offers various editions tailored to user needs:

1. Stata/MP: Multi-core processing for large datasets.

2. Stata/SE: Standard edition for moderately large datasets.

3. Stata/IC: Basic edition for smaller datasets.

4. Small Stata: Entry-level edition for educational purposes.

Stata remains a robust choice for data analysis due to its versatility and reliability, offering tools for handling complex data challenges across various fields.

PhD Supervisor and PhD work

PhD Students – How can you help your supervisors to give you the best supervision for your PhD?

In a PhD program, supervisor-supervisee relationship is very important.

Here are 10 things you can do on your part to get the best out of your PhD supervisors.

๐Ÿ. ๐’๐ก๐จ๐ฐ, ๐๐จ๐ง’๐ญ ๐ญ๐ž๐ฅ๐ฅ: Instead of telling your supervisor what you have worked on, show him/her the progress. For example, instead of saying that I have read 5 papers, you should say here are the critical summaries and 5 takeaways from these 5 papers that I think are useful for my research in these ways.

๐Ÿ. ๐“๐š๐ค๐ž ๐Ÿ๐ž๐ž๐๐›๐š๐œ๐ค ๐ฉ๐จ๐ฌ๐ข๐ญ๐ข๐ฏ๐ž๐ฅ๐ฒ: If your supervisor criticizes you, actually he/she is not criticizing you but your work. This criticism is only for the purpose of improving your research and helping you to succeed.

๐Ÿ‘. ๐’๐ก๐š๐ซ๐ž ๐ฆ๐ž๐ž๐ญ๐ข๐ง๐  ๐š๐ ๐ž๐ง๐๐š ๐š๐ง๐ ๐ฆ๐ข๐ง๐ฎ๐ญ๐ž๐ฌ: Send upfront the points about which you want to talk about in the meeting. Similarly, share what has been discussed in the meeting. It will only take around 10 minutes of your time.

๐Ÿ’. ๐€๐ฌ๐ค, ๐๐จ๐ง’๐ญ ๐š๐ฌ๐ฌ๐ฎ๐ฆ๐ž: Do not assume outcomes from your supervisors. Instead, ask in a polite way. For example, do not assume that your supervisors will not allow you to apply for a research internship. Ask them.

๐Ÿ“. ๐Ž๐ฐ๐ง ๐ฒ๐จ๐ฎ๐ซ ๐๐ก๐ƒ: Your PhD is your project. After around 6 months, you are likely more expert on the topic than your supervisors. They are there to guide you through the process.

๐Ÿ”. ๐‘๐ž๐ฆ๐ข๐ง๐ ๐ญ๐ก๐ž๐ฆ: Supervisors have many things on their plates. It’s possible that their minds skip something. Give them a soft reminder if they need to get back to you on something such as feedback on a paper.

๐Ÿ•. ๐’๐ž๐ž๐ค ๐ญ๐ข๐ฆ๐ž๐ฅ๐ฒ ๐Ÿ๐ž๐ž๐๐›๐š๐œ๐ค: Sending a paper draft to a supervisor one day before a submission deadline is a mistake on your end. Even if he/she provides the feedback, it might be shallow. Give them time.

๐Ÿ–. ๐‚๐จ๐ฆ๐ฆ๐ฎ๐ง๐ข๐œ๐š๐ญ๐ž ๐œ๐ฅ๐ž๐š๐ซ๐ฅ๐ฒ: Communicate clearly to your supervisors about any obstacles you are facing and any expectations you have. They have the experience to guide you accordingly but first, they need to know.

๐Ÿ—. ๐ƒ๐จ๐ง’๐ญ ๐ซ๐ž๐ฉ๐ž๐š๐ญ ๐ญ๐ก๐ž ๐ฌ๐š๐ฆ๐ž ๐ฆ๐ข๐ฌ๐ญ๐š๐ค๐ž๐ฌ: If your supervisors have corrected you about something, try not to repeat it. It will give them the impression that you did not value their feedback. If you don’t agree, discuss it with them.

๐Ÿ๐ŸŽ. ๐‘๐ž๐ฌ๐ฉ๐ž๐œ๐ญ, ๐ซ๐ž๐ฌ๐ฉ๐ž๐œ๐ญ, ๐š๐ง๐ ๐ซ๐ž๐ฌ๐ฉ๐ž๐œ๐ญ: Doesn’t matter how good or bad your relationship is with your supervisor, always respect them. I have hardly seen anyone successful who does not respect his/her teachers and supervisors.

Journalism Internship Opportunity at Track2Training

Are you passionate about journalism and eager to gain real-world experience in the media industry? Track2Training, a leading platform dedicated to skill development and professional growth, is offering an exciting internship opportunity for aspiring journalists. This internship is your chance to sharpen your writing, reporting, and media skills while contributing to a platform that values creativity and impactful storytelling.

About Track2Training

Track2Training is a dynamic platform focused on providing quality training and internship opportunities to students and professionals. It operates across multiple domains, including journalism, education, technology, and social impact. With a mission to nurture talent and foster innovation, Track2Training offers a robust learning environment for individuals looking to enhance their skills and make meaningful contributions to society.

Why Join the Journalism Internship at Track2Training?

This internship offers a unique blend of hands-on learning, mentorship, and professional exposure. Hereโ€™s why you should consider applying:

  1. Practical Experience:
    • Work on real-time projects, including news reporting, feature writing, and content creation.
    • Gain experience in researching, editing, and publishing articles on a well-recognized platform.
  2. Skill Development:
    • Develop essential journalism skills, including fact-checking, storytelling, and multimedia content creation.
    • Learn about journalistic ethics, audience engagement, and digital content strategies.
  3. Guidance from Experts:
    • Receive mentorship from seasoned journalists and content creators at Track2Training.
    • Get valuable feedback to refine your writing and reporting skills.
  4. Portfolio Building:
    • Publish your articles with bylines on Track2Training, building a professional portfolio to showcase your work.
  5. Flexible Work Options:
    • The internship is designed to be remote, enabling you to work from anywhere.
  6. Career Growth Opportunities:
    • Exceptional interns may be offered long-term collaborations or freelance opportunities with Track2Training.

Roles and Responsibilities

As a journalism intern at Track2Training, you will:

  • Research and write articles, blogs, and feature stories on various topics.
  • Conduct interviews and gather firsthand insights from subject matter experts.
  • Edit and proofread content to ensure accuracy, clarity, and relevance.
  • Collaborate with the editorial team to plan and execute engaging content.
  • Assist with multimedia projects, including podcasts, videos, and graphics.
  • Promote published content on social media to reach a wider audience.

Eligibility Criteria

Track2Training welcomes applications from students and recent graduates who meet the following requirements:

  • A background in journalism, mass communication, or related fields (preferred but not mandatory).
  • Strong writing and editing skills with a good command of the English language.
  • A passion for storytelling, current events, and digital media.
  • Familiarity with basic digital tools and social media platforms.
  • Self-motivated and able to meet deadlines in a fast-paced environment.

Internship Duration and Benefits

  • The internship duration ranges from 1 to 6 months, depending on the candidateโ€™s availability and performance.
  • All interns will receive a certificate of completion at the end of the internship.
  • Top-performing interns may be considered for advanced roles or long-term opportunities.

How to Apply

To apply for the journalism internship at Track2Training, follow these steps:

  1. Prepare a resume detailing your skills, education, and achievements.
  2. Write a cover letter expressing your interest in journalism and why you want to join Track2Training.
  3. Attach 2-3 samples of your written work (articles, essays, or blogs).

Submit your application via email to info@track2training.com with the subject line โ€œApplication for Journalism Internship.โ€

What Our Interns Say

  • โ€œThe internship at Track2Training was a turning point for me. The guidance I received helped me understand the nuances of journalism and build confidence in my abilities.โ€ โ€“ Kavita Sharma
  • โ€œTrack2Training gave me the opportunity to publish my work and gain hands-on experience. The flexibility and mentorship were invaluable.โ€ โ€“ Rohit Gupta

Conclusion

The journalism internship at Track2Training is more than just an opportunityโ€”itโ€™s a platform to learn, grow, and make a mark in the media industry. By joining this program, youโ€™ll gain practical experience, build a strong portfolio, and develop the skills needed to succeed in journalism.

Donโ€™t miss this chance to kickstart your journalism career. Apply now and become a part of Track2Trainingโ€™s mission to empower aspiring professionals!

Free legal templates and information online

Daily writing prompt
What positive events have taken place in your life over the past year?

FormsPal.comย is a dedicated organization that works to better support our communities and every individual, regardless of gender, age, nationality, or religion, by providing high-quality free legal templates and information online.
This resource provides thousands of templates that are available for download with detailed instructions for filling. While everyone needs to have fundamental legal arrangements in place, such as a will of inheritance, real estate insurance, power of attorney in case of an emergency, and rental agreements, minorities are at a disadvantage when it comes to paying high attorney fees, taking time off their demanding jobs, and dealing with pre-tenancy issues.ย FormsPalย solves this issue by providing legal documents for free. Thousands of templates are available for download with detailed instructions for filling.

Writing and Editing Services from Track2Training

Track2Training offers comprehensive writing and editing services tailored to meet the diverse needs of students, researchers, and professionals. Whether you are preparing academic manuscripts, articles, research papers, or creative works, their services ensure high-quality content with a professional touch.

Services Offered

  1. Academic Writing Assistance
    • Research papers
    • Theses and dissertations
    • Essays and coursework
  2. Editing and Proofreading
    • Grammar and syntax checks
    • Formatting as per specific style guides (APA, MLA, Chicago, etc.)
    • Ensuring clarity, coherence, and logical flow
  3. Content Development
    • E-books
    • Articles and blog posts
    • Reports and white papers
  4. Resume and Cover Letter Writing
    • Professional CV creation
    • Custom cover letters tailored for job applications
  5. Creative Writing
    • Stories, poetry, and scripts
    • Editing for tone, style, and audience engagement
  6. Plagiarism Checking and Reduction
    • Advanced tools for plagiarism detection
    • Assistance in rephrasing and citation

Why Choose Track2Training?

  • Expert Team: Experienced professionals from diverse fields.
  • Quick Turnaround: Timely delivery without compromising quality.
  • Customized Solutions: Services tailored to individual project requirements.
  • Affordable Rates: Competitive pricing with high value.

For more details, visit Track2Training or contact their support team to get started on your writing and editing needs.

AuthorAID: Empowering Researchers from Developing Countries

Daily writing prompt
If you could live anywhere in the world, where would it be?

AuthorAID is a global network and online platform aimed at helping researchers in developing countries, especially early-career researchers, improve their academic writing, publication skills, and overall research capabilities. It is an initiative that supports the development of high-quality research by providing mentorship, resources, and training to researchers who often face significant challenges in accessing academic publishing, funding, and networking opportunities.

The program is a project of the International Network for the Availability of Scientific Publications (INASP), a UK-based development organization that works to improve the quality and accessibility of research and knowledge in developing countries.

Photo by Mikhail Nilov on Pexels.com

Mission and Goals of AuthorAID

AuthorAIDโ€™s mission is to bridge the gap between researchers from developed and developing countries in terms of research development, capacity building, and access to scientific knowledge. Specifically, AuthorAID aims to:

  1. Improve Research Quality: Help researchers enhance the quality of their academic papers and publications through training, feedback, and peer review support.
  2. Facilitate Publication: Assist early-career researchers in navigating the academic publishing process, including how to write, format, and submit papers for journals.
  3. Mentorship: Connect early-career researchers with mentors from around the world who can provide guidance on improving research and career development.
  4. Foster Networking and Collaboration: Encourage collaboration between researchers across different countries, regions, and academic disciplines.
  5. Enhance Capacity: Provide training and resources on a wide range of research-related topics, from research methodology and grant writing to effective communication and academic writing skills.

Key Features and Services of AuthorAID

  1. Online Platform and ResourcesAuthorAID offers a comprehensive online platform that includes:
    • Webinars and Online Courses: Free webinars and self-paced online courses on various topics, such as writing research papers, publishing in journals, understanding impact factors, and navigating peer review.
    • Research and Writing Guides: A library of articles, manuals, and guides on research methods, writing techniques, and publication strategies tailored to the needs of researchers in developing countries.
    • Discussion Forums: A platform for researchers to share experiences, ask questions, and discuss challenges related to academic writing, publishing, and research.
  2. Mentorship ProgramOne of the core offerings of AuthorAID is its mentorship program, which connects early-career researchers with experienced mentors in their respective fields. Mentors provide advice and guidance on a wide range of issues, including:
    • Improving research methodology and writing skills.
    • Navigating the complexities of the peer review process.
    • Identifying appropriate journals for submission.
    • Developing successful grant proposals.
    • Career guidance and professional development.
    Researchers seeking mentorship can sign up through the AuthorAID platform, where they are matched with mentors who have expertise in their specific areas of research.
  3. Researcher NetworkingThe AuthorAID platform facilitates networking among researchers through the following:
    • Collaborative Projects: Researchers can find potential collaborators, both within their country and internationally, for joint research projects, papers, and publications.
    • Social Media and Community Engagement: Through social media groups (e.g., LinkedIn, Twitter, and Facebook), AuthorAID connects researchers, providing opportunities for interaction and knowledge-sharing.
  4. Publication and Peer Review SupportOne of the most significant barriers for researchers from developing countries is navigating the publication process. AuthorAID offers a variety of tools to assist researchers, including:
    • Publication Advice: Practical advice on how to write and submit manuscripts for peer review and how to interpret reviewer feedback.
    • Peer Review Training: Offering workshops and materials to help researchers become better at reviewing papers and understanding the peer review process.
    • Journal Matching Service: A tool that helps researchers find appropriate journals for their work based on the content of their papers.
  5. Grants and Funding InformationWhile AuthorAID does not provide direct funding, the platform offers valuable information and advice on where to find research funding and how to write successful grant proposals. This includes:
    • Funding Databases: Access to information about various funding opportunities for researchers in developing countries.
    • Grant Writing Workshops: Practical training on how to write strong and competitive research grant applications.

Impact of AuthorAID

AuthorAID has made a significant impact on the research community, particularly in the Global South. By providing critical support to researchers in low- and middle-income countries, the platform has:

  • Improved Research Outcomes: Many researchers have been able to successfully publish in high-impact journals, leading to greater visibility for their work.
  • Enhanced Collaboration: By connecting researchers from around the world, AuthorAID has helped establish research partnerships that may not have otherwise occurred.
  • Increased Confidence: Early-career researchers who may have felt isolated or unsure about their work have gained confidence through mentoring and peer support.
  • Capacity Building: The wide variety of resources and training available on the platform has helped researchers build essential skills for their academic careers.

Challenges and Future Directions

Despite its success, AuthorAID faces several challenges:

  1. Language Barriers: Many researchers in developing countries struggle with English-language proficiency, which can limit their ability to publish in international journals. AuthorAID is working to address this by offering resources and support in multiple languages.
  2. Funding Limitations: While AuthorAID helps researchers find funding, the availability of grants and financial support for researchers in developing countries remains a critical issue.
  3. Infrastructure and Access to Technology: In some regions, internet access and access to the necessary tools for online research and publication remain barriers.

Looking to the future, AuthorAID aims to expand its services, enhance the reach of its mentorship program, and continue developing resources tailored to the needs of researchers in diverse settings.

Conclusion

AuthorAID plays a vital role in strengthening the research capacity of scholars in developing countries. By providing mentorship, resources, and training on academic writing, publishing, and networking, the platform empowers researchers to overcome the barriers they face and contribute valuable knowledge to the global scientific community. It is a powerful tool for anyone seeking to make a meaningful impact through research and to foster greater collaboration between the Global South and Global North.

The initiative stands as a testament to the importance of global cooperation in advancing knowledge and research, ensuring that scholars from all parts of the world have the resources and support they need to succeed.

References

Bruijns, S. R., Banner, M., & Jacquet, G. A. (2017). Improving publication quality and quantity for acute care authors from low-and middle-income settings.ย Annals of Emergency Medicine,ย 69(4), 462-468.

Dehalwar, K., & Sharma, S. N. (2023).ย Fundamentals of Research Writing and Uses of Research Methodologies. Edupedia Publications Pvt Ltd.

Gastel, B. (2013). AuthorAID: An international service and chance to serve.ย Medical Writing,ย 22(4), 284-287.

Gastel, B. (2015). AuthorAID and editors: collaborating to assist authors in developing countries.

Harris, S. (2019). Truth and Lies in Academic Publishing: Distrust in Research Highlights the Importance of Education in Critical Thinking Skills.ย Refer,ย 35(2), 30-34.

Nobes, A. (2016). AuthorAIDโ€“supporting early career researchers in developing countries.ย The Biochemist,ย 38(5), 39-41.

Obino, F., Salomon, S., & Zanfini, L. (2023). Financing without doing harm: for virtuous mechanisms to support African social science research. Inย Financing without doing harm: for virtuous mechanisms to support African social science research: Obino, Francesco| uSalomon, Sophie| uZanfini, Linda. Paris, France: ร‰ditions AFD.

Shashok, K. (2010). How AuthorAID in the Eastern Mediterranean helps researchers become authors.ย The Write Stuff,ย 9(1), 43-6.

Top Statistical Software for Research uses

Daily writing prompt
What does it mean to be a kid at heart?

By Shashikant Nishant Sharma

Statistical software is essential for data analysis across various fields such as social sciences, medicine, economics, and more. Below is a detailed discussion of four popular statistical software packages: SPSS, R, STATA, and SAS.

1. SPSS (Statistical Package for the Social Sciences)

SPSS is widely used in the social sciences, market research, health research, and various other fields for data management and statistical analysis.

Key Features:

  • User-Friendly Interface: SPSS is known for its intuitive graphical interface, making it easy to use even for those with limited programming knowledge. It offers a drag-and-drop feature and allows users to run statistical analyses through menus.
  • Statistical Procedures: It offers a range of statistical tests such as t-tests, chi-square tests, ANOVA, regression (linear and logistic), factor analysis, and more.
  • Data Handling: SPSS allows for efficient data management, such as handling missing data, merging files, and transforming data. It also supports large datasets.
  • Graphical Representation: Users can create various types of graphs (e.g., histograms, bar charts, scatterplots) to visualize data.
  • Integration with Other Software: SPSS integrates well with Excel, databases, and other statistical tools. It also offers scripting capabilities through its syntax language.
  • Applications: SPSS is commonly used in academia for research projects, surveys, and experiments. Itโ€™s also popular in businesses for data mining and forecasting.

Advantages:

  • Easy to learn and user-friendly.
  • Ideal for basic to intermediate statistical analysis.
  • Good for quick data analysis without needing to learn extensive programming.

Limitations:

  • Can be limited for more advanced or complex analyses.
  • Expensive for individual users and institutions compared to some open-source alternatives.

2. R (for Statistical Computing and Graphics)

R is an open-source statistical software used extensively for statistical analysis, graphics, and data visualization. Itโ€™s highly popular among data scientists, researchers, and statisticians.

Key Features:

  • Programming Language: R is both a software environment and a programming language specifically designed for statistical computing and graphics. It allows users to write custom scripts for complex statistical analyses.
  • Advanced Statistical Capabilities: R supports advanced statistical techniques such as machine learning, time-series analysis, multivariate statistics, and Bayesian analysis. It has thousands of user-contributed packages in CRAN (Comprehensive R Archive Network) for specialized tasks.
  • Graphical Capabilities: R is known for producing publication-quality graphics and visualizations. Packages like ggplot2 offer extensive customizability for creating detailed graphs.
  • Open-Source and Community-Driven: R is free and open-source, with an active community constantly contributing packages and updates.
  • Data Handling: R handles a wide range of data types and can process large datasets efficiently. It also integrates well with databases and other software (e.g., Python, SQL).

Advantages:

  • Free and open-source.
  • Capable of handling complex and cutting-edge statistical techniques.
  • Strong visualization tools for both basic and advanced users.
  • Highly flexible and customizable through numerous packages.

Limitations:

  • Steeper learning curve compared to SPSS or other GUI-based tools.
  • Less user-friendly for beginners due to its command-line interface.
  • Memory-intensive, which can limit its performance for very large datasets.

3. STATA (Data Analysis and Statistical Software)

STATA is a powerful software used for data management, statistical analysis, graphics, and simulations. Itโ€™s popular in fields such as economics, sociology, and epidemiology.

Key Features:

  • Comprehensive Statistical Tools: STATA supports a wide range of statistical methods, including linear and nonlinear models, time series analysis, panel data analysis, survival analysis, and more.
  • User Interface: STATA offers both a graphical user interface (GUI) and a command-line interface. The GUI is user-friendly and allows users to perform tasks without programming knowledge, while the command-line is favored by advanced users.
  • Data Management: STATA excels in managing large datasets, providing tools for reshaping, combining, and manipulating data.
  • Reproducible Research: It supports dynamic documents for reproducible research, meaning that users can combine code, output, and written reports in one place.
  • Econometric Focus: STATA is particularly strong in econometric analysis and is widely used in academic and policy research for this reason.
  • Automation and Customization: Users can write custom STATA programs (known as “do-files”) to automate repetitive tasks or create custom analyses.

Advantages:

  • Excellent for handling large datasets efficiently.
  • Widely used in econometrics, social sciences, and health research.
  • Strong community support and extensive documentation.
  • Good balance between ease of use and depth of statistical tools.

Limitations:

  • Expensive for individuals, though it offers different pricing tiers based on use.
  • Not as flexible as R when it comes to customization and adding cutting-edge techniques.
  • Graphical capabilities are more limited compared to R.

4. SAS (Statistical Analysis System)

SAS is a robust software suite for advanced analytics, business intelligence, data management, and predictive analytics.

Key Features:

  • Advanced Analytics: SAS offers a broad range of statistical and mathematical procedures, including descriptive statistics, predictive modeling, forecasting, econometrics, data mining, and machine learning.
  • Data Integration and Management: SAS is excellent at handling, transforming, and managing large, complex datasets. It integrates seamlessly with a variety of data sources.
  • Programming and GUI: SAS provides a mix of programming (through the SAS programming language) and a graphical interface, allowing users flexibility depending on their expertise. Its GUI is particularly useful for business users who may not be familiar with coding.
  • Enterprise-Level Solution: SAS is designed for large-scale, enterprise-level applications and is used by organizations for decision-making, fraud detection, risk management, and more.
  • Custom Procedures: Users can write custom SAS procedures using its macro language and integrate these into existing workflows.
  • Security and Compliance: It is known for its strong data security and compliance features, making it popular in industries like healthcare and finance.

Advantages:

  • Best suited for large-scale, enterprise applications.
  • Strong in advanced analytics, particularly for business applications.
  • Excellent data management and integration capabilities.
  • Scalable and secure, with features to handle compliance and governance.

Limitations:

  • High cost, making it less accessible for individuals or smaller organizations.
  • Steep learning curve, especially for those unfamiliar with the SAS language.
  • Not open-source, limiting flexibility in terms of updates and customizations compared to R.

Summary Comparison:

Feature/SoftwareSPSSRSTATASAS
Ease of UseHighLowMediumMedium
CostPaidFreePaidPaid
Advanced StatsModerateHighHighHigh
CustomizationLowHighMediumMedium
Best ForBeginners, social scientistsData scientists, statisticiansEconometricians, health researchersEnterprise-level analytics

Each of these statistical software packages has unique strengths and is suited for different types of users and projects. The choice depends on the complexity of the analysis, budget, and familiarity with programming languages.

References

Asprey, S. P., & Macchietto, S. (2000). Statistical tools for optimal dynamic model building.ย Computers & Chemical Engineering,ย 24(2-7), 1261-1267.

ฤŒรญลพek, P., Hรคrdle, W., Weron, R., & Hรคrdle, W. (2011).ย Statistical tools for finance and insurance. Berlin: Springer.

Dehalwar, K., & Sharma, S. N. (2023).ย Fundamentals of Research Writing and Uses of Research Methodologies. Edupedia Publications Pvt Ltd.

Dehalwar, K. (Ed.). (2024).ย Basics of Research Methodology-Writing and Publication. EduPedia Publications Pvt Ltd.

Dehalwar, K., & Sharma, S. N. (2024). Exploring the Distinctions between Quantitative and Qualitative Research Methods.ย Think India Journal,ย 27(1), 7-15.

Dehalwar, K., & Sharma, S. N. (2024). Social Injustice Inflicted by Spatial Changes in Vernacular Settings: An Analysis of Published Literature.

Lin, L., Hedayat, A. S., & Wu, W. (2012). Statistical tools for measuring agreement.

Meeker, W. Q., & Hamada, M. (1995). Statistical tools for the rapid development and evaluation of high-reliability products.ย IEEE transactions on reliability,ย 44(2), 187-198.

Sharma, S. N., Dehalwar, K., & Singh, J. (2024). Emerging Techniques of Solid Waste Management for Sustainable and Safe Living Environment. Inย Solid Waste Management: Advances and Trends to Tackle the SDGsย (pp. 29-51). Cham: Springer Nature Switzerland.

Sharma, S. N., Prajapati, R., Jaiswal, A., & Dehalwar, K. (2024, June). A Comparative Study of the Applications and Prospects of Self-healing Concrete/Biocrete and Self-Sensing Concrete. Inย IOP Conference Series: Earth and Environmental Scienceย (Vol. 1326, No. 1, p. 012090). IOP Publishing.

Tanner, M. A. (1993).ย Tools for statistical inferenceย (Vol. 3). New York: Springer.

Soundscape Research Technique

Daily writing prompt
What are you most proud of in your life?

By Shashikant Nishant Sharma

Soundscape research is a technique used to study the auditory environment, focusing on how people perceive, interact with, and respond to sounds in their surroundings. It involves the analysis of both natural and human-made sounds, taking into account the physical, social, and cultural aspects of sound in different environments. This interdisciplinary research is used in fields such as urban planning, ecology, and architecture.

Photo by cottonbro studio on Pexels.com

Key Aspects of Soundscape Research:

  1. Acoustic Measurements: Objective measurements, such as sound level (decibels) and frequency analysis, are conducted to understand the intensity and characteristics of different sounds in a specific area. Tools like sound level meters and frequency analyzers are commonly used.
  2. Subjective Perception: This involves the human experience of soundscapes, including how pleasant or annoying certain sounds are. Researchers use surveys, interviews, or psychoacoustic experiments to gather data on human responses to sounds in specific environments.
  3. Contextual Factors: Soundscape research does not just focus on sounds in isolation but considers how context, such as the time of day, the location, and the activity taking place, influences sound perception. For example, a busy marketplace might be perceived differently from a quiet park, even if both have similar sound levels.
  4. Qualitative Sound Mapping: Sound maps visually represent the distribution of sounds across a space, showing where particular sounds dominate. This can help in identifying noise pollution hotspots or areas where certain sounds (e.g., birdsong) enhance the environment.
  5. Biophony, Geophony, and Anthrophony: Soundscape research often categorizes sounds into these three broad types:
    • Biophony: Sounds produced by living organisms, like birds or insects.
    • Geophony: Sounds from non-biological natural sources, like wind or rain.
    • Anthrophony: Human-generated sounds, such as traffic or industrial noise.

Applications of Soundscape Research:

  1. Urban Design and Planning: Soundscape research informs city planners about how to create more pleasant acoustic environments, reducing noise pollution and improving public spaces’ sound quality.
  2. Conservation and Ecology: Ecologists use soundscape analysis to monitor biodiversity. The presence or absence of certain animal sounds can provide insight into the health of ecosystems.
  3. Public Health: Understanding the impact of noise on mental and physical well-being is an important aspect of soundscape research. Studies have shown that excessive noise can lead to stress and other health problems, making this research vital for improving urban health policies.
  4. Architecture: Architects use soundscape techniques to design buildings and spaces that optimize acoustic comfort, such as theaters or public squares, where sound quality is a critical design factor.

By combining acoustic data with human perception, soundscape research offers a holistic approach to understanding and improving the auditory experiences in various environments.

References

Chen, C., Jain, U., Schissler, C., Gari, S. V. A., Al-Halah, Z., Ithapu, V. K., … & Grauman, K. (2020). Soundspaces: Audio-visual navigation in 3d environments. Inย Computer Visionโ€“ECCV 2020: 16th European Conference, Glasgow, UK, August 23โ€“28, 2020, Proceedings, Part VI 16ย (pp. 17-36). Springer International Publishing.

Harrison, J. (1998). Sound, space, sculpture: some thoughts on the โ€˜whatโ€™,โ€˜howโ€™and โ€˜whyโ€™of sound diffusion.ย Organised Sound,ย 3(2), 117-127.

Kraugerud, E. (2016).ย Spaces of sound: Meanings of spatiality in recorded soundย (Master’s thesis).

Solomos, M. (2018). From sound to sound space, sound environment, soundscape, sound milieu or ambianceโ€ฆ.ย Paragraph,ย 41(1), 95-109.

Different Planning Theories and Concepts and Scholar who proposed that

By Shashikant Nishant Sharma

Planning theories and concepts are diverse and multidisciplinary, reflecting the wide range of issues that urban and regional planning addresses. Here is a comprehensive list of key planning theories and concepts along with the theorists or scholars who proposed or significantly developed them:

1. Rational Planning Model

Proponent: Herbert A. Simon, Robert M. Solow

Concept: This model emphasizes logical and scientific decision-making, where planners identify goals, gather information, generate alternatives, and select the best solution through cost-benefit analysis.

2. Incrementalism

Proponent: Charles E. Lindblom

Concept: Also known as “muddling through,” this theory suggests that planning occurs in small, incremental steps rather than through comprehensive, large-scale planning. It acknowledges the limitations of complete rationality in decision-making.

3. Advocacy Planning

Proponent: Paul Davidoff

Concept: Emphasizes the need for planners to act as advocates for underrepresented or marginalized groups. It promotes multiple voices and perspectives in the planning process, rather than a single โ€œobjectiveโ€ approach.

4. Communicative Planning

Proponent: Judith Innes, John Forester, Patsy Healey

Concept: Focuses on communication and dialogue between stakeholders in the planning process. It highlights collaboration, consensus-building, and the importance of public participation.

5. Collaborative Planning

Proponent: Patsy Healey

Concept: An extension of communicative planning, this approach focuses on bringing diverse stakeholders together to collectively solve planning problems, with an emphasis on power relations and social equity.

6. Transactive Planning

Proponent: John Friedmann

Concept: This theory emphasizes the interaction between planners and the public, where knowledge is co-produced through dialogue and mutual learning. The focus is on understanding and adapting to local needs through a process of action and feedback.

7. Equity Planning

Proponent: Norman Krumholz

Concept: Argues for planning to focus on redistributive policies that address social inequalities and injustices, particularly in urban settings. Equity planning seeks to ensure that marginalized groups benefit from urban development.

8. Radical Planning

Proponent: Stephen Grabow, John Heskin

Concept: Advocates for a bottom-up approach to planning that challenges existing power structures and promotes social change through community empowerment and direct action.

9. Just City Theory

Proponent: Susan Fainstein

Concept: This theory advocates for the development of cities that prioritize justice, equity, and fairness, rather than efficiency or economic growth alone. It integrates ideas of social justice into urban planning practice.

10. New Urbanism

Proponents: Andrรฉs Duany, Elizabeth Plater-Zyberk, Peter Calthorpe

Concept: A movement that promotes walkable, mixed-use, and human-scaled urban environments. It seeks to counter urban sprawl and create sustainable, livable communities.

11. Sustainable Development

Proponents: Gro Harlem Brundtland (Brundtland Commission, 1987)

Concept: Focuses on meeting the needs of the present without compromising the ability of future generations to meet their own needs. This concept integrates environmental, social, and economic dimensions into planning.

12. Smart Growth

Proponents: Various urban planners, U.S. EPA (Environmental Protection Agency)

Concept: A set of planning principles that promote sustainable urban growth through compact, transit-oriented, walkable, and mixed-use development to curb urban sprawl.

13. Growth Machine Theory

Proponent: Harvey Molotch

Concept: Focuses on the coalition of business, political, and social elites who work to influence urban growth and land development for economic gains. It examines how these interests drive urban policy and development.

14. Urban Regime Theory

Proponents: Clarence Stone, Regime theorists

Concept: Examines how coalitions of public and private actors work together to govern cities. Urban regimes influence the distribution of resources and decision-making in cities.

15. Modernist Planning

Proponents: Le Corbusier, Ebenezer Howard, Frank Lloyd Wright

Concept: A style of planning that emerged in the early 20th century, emphasizing rationality, functional zoning, large-scale urban development, and the separation of land uses (residential, commercial, industrial).

16. Garden City Movement

Proponent: Ebenezer Howard

Concept: Proposes self-contained, planned communities surrounded by greenbelts to combine the best elements of both urban and rural life. The goal was to counteract the overcrowded, unhealthy conditions of industrial cities.

17. City Beautiful Movement

Proponent: Daniel Burnham

Concept: Advocates for beautification and monumental grandeur in cities to promote civic pride and improve urban living conditions. It emphasized formal planning, public spaces, and neoclassical architecture.

18. Central Place Theory

Proponent: Walter Christaller

Concept: This geographic theory explains the distribution of services, settlements, and market centers in a region, based on a hierarchy of central places that provide goods and services to surrounding areas.

19. Concentric Zone Theory

Proponent: Ernest Burgess

Concept: A model of urban land use that suggests cities grow outward in concentric rings, with the central business district at the core, followed by zones of residential and industrial development.

20. Sector Model

Proponent: Homer Hoyt

Concept: This theory suggests that urban areas develop in wedge-shaped sectors radiating outward from the city center, with different types of land uses occupying these sectors.

21. Multiple Nuclei Theory

Proponents: Chauncy Harris, Edward Ullman

Concept: Proposes that cities have multiple centers (nuclei) around which different types of activities cluster, as opposed to having a single central business district.

22. Participatory Planning

Proponent: Sherry Arnstein (Ladder of Citizen Participation)

Concept: Promotes the involvement of citizens in decision-making processes in planning. Arnsteinโ€™s “Ladder of Citizen Participation” outlines different levels of public involvement, from tokenism to full citizen control.

23. Postmodern Planning

Proponent: David Harvey, Edward Soja

Concept: Challenges the uniform, top-down approaches of modernist planning and promotes diverse, context-sensitive approaches that acknowledge complexity, multiplicity, and the importance of place.

24. Political Economy of Planning

Proponents: Manuel Castells, David Harvey

Concept: This theory focuses on how economic and political power influences planning and urban development. It emphasizes the role of capital, class struggle, and economic systems in shaping cities.

25. Ecological Urbanism

Proponent: Mohsen Mostafavi, Gareth Doherty

Concept: Emphasizes the integration of ecological and environmental principles into urban planning and design, addressing sustainability, climate change, and the balance between natural and built environments.

Conclusion

These theories and concepts reflect the evolution of planning thought over time, from early rational models to more contemporary approaches that prioritize equity, sustainability, and public participation. Each theory offers a distinct perspective on how cities should grow and be managed, influenced by social, political, and economic forces.

References

1.Rational Planning Model

Proponent: Herbert A. Simon, Robert M. Solow

2. Incrementalism

Proponent: Charles E. Lindblom

3. Advocacy Planning

Proponent: Paul Davidoff

4. Communicative Planning

Proponent: Judith Innes, John Forester, Patsy Healey

5. Collaborative Planning

Proponent: Patsy Healey

6. Transactive Planning

Proponent: John Friedmann

7. Equity Planning

Proponent: Norman Krumholz

8. Radical Planning

Proponent: Stephen Grabow, John Heskin

9. Just City Theory

Proponent: Susan Fainstein

10. New Urbanism

Proponents: Andrรฉs Duany, Elizabeth Plater-Zyberk, Peter Calthorpe

11. Sustainable Development

Proponents: Gro Harlem Brundtland (Brundtland Commission, 1987)

12. Smart Growth

Proponents: Various urban planners, U.S. EPA (Environmental Protection Agency)

13. Growth Machine Theory

Proponent: Harvey Molotch

14. Urban Regime Theory

Proponents: Clarence Stone, Regime theorists

15. Modernist Planning

Proponents: Le Corbusier, Ebenezer Howard, Frank Lloyd Wright

16. Garden City Movement

Proponent: Ebenezer Howard

17. City Beautiful Movement

Proponent: Daniel Burnham

18. Central Place Theory

Proponent: Walter Christaller

19. Concentric Zone Theory

Proponent: Ernest Burgess

20. Sector Model

Proponent: Homer Hoyt

21. Multiple Nuclei Theory

Proponents: Chauncy Harris, Edward Ullman

22. Participatory Planning

Proponent: Sherry Arnstein (Ladder of Citizen Participation)

23. Postmodern Planning

Proponent: David Harvey, Edward Soja

24. Political Economy of Planning

Proponents: Manuel Castells, David Harvey

25. Ecological Urbanism

Proponent: Mohsen Mostafavi, Gareth Doherty

What Extended Services Can Users Find on an Institutional Cryptocurrency Platform?

Daily writing prompt
What would you do if you lost all your possessions?

The cryptocurrency sector is getting mature, and the demand for secure, scalable, and efficient platforms for institutional needs is growing rapidly. Institutional crypto platforms offer services that go far beyond the scope of typical retail trading platforms, making it a preferred choice for large financial entities, hedge funds, and corporations. An example is the institutional crypto platform WhiteBIT – the largest European exchange that offers advanced tools for companies tapping into the crypto market. Letโ€™s see what services can be found on platforms like WhiteBIT.

Photo by David McBee on Pexels.com

The Essence of Institutional Cryptocurrency Trading

Institutional crypto trading differs significantly from individual or retail trading in several key aspects. While retail traders may focus on short-term gains and smaller trades, institutions often deal with substantial volumes of cryptocurrency assets, requiring more robust trading infrastructures. These entities engage in large-scale, high-frequency trading, which demands access to deep liquidity pools, advanced trading algorithms, and over-the-counter (OTC) markets that offer higher transaction limits.

Advantages of Using an Institutional Trading Platform

Institutional crypto exchanges offer various extended services and specialized tools to enhance trading efficiency, security, and compliance. Below are some of the key services available on these platforms:

  • Market-making. It provides liquidity to the market by ensuring that buy and sell orders are consistently filled. Institutions benefit from market-making because it minimizes the slippage and volatility that can arise from large-volume trades. Institutional traders often engage in liquidity provision themselves or partner with market makers to optimize their trading strategies.
  • Token listing. Institutional platforms typically provide a seamless and secure environment for token listings, which is essential for projects looking to attract institutional investors. On the other hand, institutions that plan to launch their own crypto can also use institutional cryptocurrency exchange services, including launchpads and marketing solutions.
  • Lending and borrowing. Lending services are particularly appealing to institutional investors who may need to leverage their positions or borrow assets for strategic purposes. A b2b crypto exchange may offer dedicated lending platforms where businesses can lend out digital assets, often under favorable terms compared to retail platforms.
  • Over-the-counter (OTC) trading. OTC trading desks provide institutions with the ability to execute large trades without directly impacting the market price. OTC trades are negotiated directly between two parties, allowing institutions to buy or sell large volumes of cryptocurrency without causing price fluctuations.
  • Advanced security and AML/KYC compliance. Institutional cryptocurrency platforms are equipped with advanced security protocols, including multi-signature wallets, cold storage, and encrypted data transfers. Additionally, these platforms must comply with rigorous AML and KYC requirements, ensuring that all transactions are transparent and meet regulatory standards.

Institutional crypto exchanges are a critical part of the digital asset landscape, offering extended services and tools that meet the specific needs of large financial institutions, fun

Assessment of Commonly Used Forms of Energy in the Study Area in Okrika Local Government Area

Daily writing prompt
What’s your #1 priority tomorrow?

Mina Margaret Ogbanga

River State University.

Department of Social Work

Mina.Ogbanga@ust.edu.ng

Abstract

The present paper is on the assessment of commonly used forms of energy in the study area in Okrika Local Government Area. The researcher adopted the descriptive survey research design. Taro Yamene was used to derive a representative sample size from the target population. Data were sourced from both primary and secondary sources. Primary data were generated with use of a close-ended questionnaire. Secondary data which were used to compliment the primary data were collected from journal articles. Descriptive method of data analysis was employed for the analysis of primary data. This involved the use of percentage and frequency distribution tables, pie charts and bar charts. The results of the analysis show high level of non-patronage for clean energy. It was recommended that there is need for enlightenment on the long term economic and environmental cost benefits of clean energy for cooking.

Photo by Lum3n on Pexels.com

Introduction

For the past decades, the world has been dominated by fossil fuel energy sources; and literature evidence has proved that the heavy reliance on fossil-fuel based energy sources remains at the heart of the current global challenge of significant climate change which poses severe threat to the generality of mankind. Realising the huge environmental and social costs of using fossil fuel energy sources, there has been a call from international organisations, as well as researchers for the adoption of clean energy which is believed to hold the key potential to displace greenhouse gas emissions from fossil fuel-based sources of energy. Notwithstanding, many nations of the world still rely heavily on the use of traditional sources of energy, especially in the sphere of cooking at the household level (Crosby, 2016). In Nigeria, this challenge has gone for decades despite the abundance of other natural resources such as liquid natural gaswhich could be utilised for the generation of clean energy for cooking purposes (Azubuike, 2016). In most Nigerian societies, mosthouseholds can only access or use traditional energy sources and non-clean fuel such as firewood (traditional biomass), charcoal, kerosene, plant residue and animal waste; which are of very low technological-base. On daily basis, women, who do the major household cooking are seen engaging in fuel-gathering which they depend on for cooking. The cooking fuel mainly consists of cut wood, twigs, small branches, thorns, small herbs and crop residues, and dung-cakes.The use of these substances poses serious environmental and social health problems. Since major household cooking is done by the women, this study has been designed to examine the role women organisations could play to promote the use of clean energy for household cooking purposes.

Aim and objective of the study

The aim of this paper is to assess the commonly used forms of energy for household cooking.

Research question

What are the commonly used forms of energy for household cooking?

Significance of the study

Theoretical significance: this study is designed to investigate the place of women organisations is promoting the adoption of clean energy for household cooking. This is an area that does not enjoy major scholarly documentations. Therefore, findings made from this study would fill a major gap in literature. Also, the data generated from this study would prove useful for the conduct of future researches related to the subject matter.

Scope of the study

The study examines the role of women organisations in promoting the use of clean energy for household cooking.  The specific issues to be considered are: the factors that influence a familyโ€™s cooking energy; the barriers affecting the adoption of clean energy for household cooking; the potential of women organisations in promoting the use of clean energy for household cooking and the implications of heavy use of non-clean energy for household cooking. All these would follow a critical look at the commonly used forms of energy. The study locale is Okrika Local Government Area of Rives State.

Definition of terms

Women: these are members of the female gender

Organisations: a group of people with an explicit purpose and written rules.

Women organisations: these are cultural associations comprising women who unite on the bases of certain socio-cultural factors such as age, marital status and economic standing.

Energy: a substance that allows people to do work.

Clean energy: clean energy refers to any source of fuel that is efficient and poses less environmental health challenges.

Promotion: a practice is promoted when its use is supported ad encouraged

Household: a household is a family, comprising people who are related by blood or other some socially recognised process such as adoption and marriage.

Cooking: this refers to the activity or preparing food for personal or public consumption.

An overview of the concept of clean energy.

Concept of clean energy

The term clean energy refers to fuels which are more environmentally sustainable, energy efficient and when used do not have any harm on the health of those in the households (IEA, 2017). The following sources of clean energy are commonly cited in literature:

Hydropower:

Hydropower is an essential energy source harnessed from water (Asumadu-Sarkodie, Owusu, and Jayaweera, 2015; Asumadu-Sarkodie, Owusu, and Rufangura, 2015). It is generated from reservoirs created in dams, run-off-rivers or in-streams. When water is released, the reservoir level changes to some extent and accordingly influences electricity production (Fรธrsund, 2015). Hydropower discharges practically no particulate pollution, can upgrade quickly, and is capable of storing energy for many hours (Hamann, 2015).

Bioenergy:

Bioenergy is a renewable energy source derived from biological sources. Bioenergy is an important source of energy which can be used for transport using biodiesel, electricity generation, cooking and heating. Electricity from bioenergy attracts a large range of different sources, including forest byproducts such as wood residues; agricultural residues such as sugar cane waste; and animal husbandry residue such as cow dung. One advantage of biomass energy-based electricity is that fuel is often a by-product. Significantly, it does not create a competition between land for food and land for fuel (Urban and Mitchell, 2018). Presently, global production of biofuels is comparatively low, but continuously increasing (Ajanovic, 2017). The annual biodiesel consumption in the United States was 15 billion litres in 2006. It has been growing at a rate of 30โ€“50% per year to achieve an annual target of 30 billion litres at the end of year 2020 (Ayoub and Abdullah, 2015). Biomass has a large potential which meets the goal of reducing greenhouse gases and could insure fuel supply in the future. A lot of research is being done in this area trying to quantify global biomass technology. According to Hoogwijk, Faaij, Eickhout, de Vries, and Turkenburg (2015), the theoretical potential of bioenergy at the total terrestrial surface is about 3,500 EJ/year. The greater part of this potential is located in South America and Caribbean (47โ€“221 EJ/year), Sub-Saharan Africa (31 โ€“ 317 EJ/year), the Commonwealth of Independent States (C.I.S) and Baltic states (45โ€“199 EJ/ year). The yield of biomass and its potential varies from country to country, from medium yields in temperature to high level in sub tropic and tropic countries. With biomass, a lot of research is focusing on an environmentally acceptable and sustainable source to mitigate climate change (Demirbas, Balat, andBalat, 2019).

Direct solar energy:

The word โ€œdirectโ€ solar energy refers to the energy base for those renewable energy source technologies that draw on the Sunโ€™s energy directly. Some renewable technologies, such as wind and ocean thermal, use solar energy after it has been absorbed on the earth and converted. Solar energy technology is obtained from solar irradiance to generate electricity using photovoltaic (PV) (Asumadu-Sarkodie and Owusu, 2016) and concentrating solar power (CSP) to produce thermal energy, to meet direct lighting needs and, potentially, to produce fuels that might be used for transport and other purposes (Edenhofer, 2016). According to the World Energy Council (2013), the total energy from solar radiation falling on the earth was more than 7,500 times the Worldโ€™s total annual primary energy consumption of 450 EJโ€ (Urban and Mitchell, 2018).

Geothermal energy:

Geothermal energy is obtained naturally from the earthโ€™s interior as heat energy source (Barbier, 2017). Heat is mined from geothermal reservoirs using wells and other means. Reservoirs that are naturally adequately hot and permeable are called hydrothermal reservoirs, while reservoirs that are satisfactorily hot but are improved with hydraulic stimulation are called enhanced geothermal systems (ESG). Once drawn to the surface, fluids of various temperatures can be used to generate electricity and other purposes that require the use of heat energy (Edenhofer, 2016).

Wind energy:

The emergence of wind as an important source of the Worldโ€™s energy has taken a commanding lead among renewable sources. Wind exists everywhere in the world, in some places with considerable energy density (Manwell, McGowan, and Rogers, 2016). Wind energy harnesses kinetic energy from moving air. The primary application of the importance to climate change mitigation is to produce electricity from large turbines located onshore (land) or offshore (in sea or fresh water) (Asumadu-Sarkodie & Owusu, 2016). Onshore wind energy technologies are already being manufactured and deployed on large scale (Edenhofer, 2016). Wind turbines convert the energy of wind into electricity.

Ocean energy (tide and wave):

Surface waves are created when wind passes over water (Ocean). The faster the wind speed, the longer the wind is sustained; the greater distance the wind travels, the greater the wave height, and the greater the wave energy produced (Jacobson & Delucchi, 2016). The ocean stores enough energy to meet the total worldwide demand for power many times over in the form of waves, tide, currents and heat. The year 2008 saw the beginning of the first generation of commercial ocean energy devices, with the first units being installed in the UK-SeaGen and Portugal-Pelamis. There are presently four ways of obtaining energy from sea areas, namely from Wind, Tides, Waves and Thermal differences between deep and shallow Sea water (Esteban and Leary, 2014).

 

Research Methodology

Research Design

According to Cooper and Schindler (2016), a research design is like a plan by which a given research work is to be carried out. The descriptive survey research design is adopted for this study. The descriptive survey design is a method of collecting information by interviewing or administering a questionnaire to a sample of individuals (Kombo & Tromp, 2016). This type of design is also useful when collecting information about peopleโ€™s attitudes, opinions, and habits (Kombo and Tromp, 2016).  Since this falls within the focus of this study, the descriptive survey would be the most appropriate design to be used.  

Population of the study 

According to Mugenda and Mugenda (2019), the population of a study is that population to which a researcher wants to generalise the results of the study. The target population for this study are women in Okrika Local Government Area of Rivers State. According to the National Population Commissionโ€™s (2016) projection, the number of women in Okrika Local Government Area is 108,323.

Sample Size and Sampling Techniques

A sample is a smaller part of a statistical population where properties are studied to gain information about the whole (Kombo and Tromp, 2016). A sample size of 399 is adopted for the study. This is based on the application of the Taro Yamene statistical formula as represented below:

Where n is the subject of the formula

1 is constant

E2 = margin of error (0.05)

N is the study population of the study (108323).

Therefore,

n = 108323/1+ 108323 (0.0025).

n = 108323/1+270.8075

n = 108323/271.8075

n = 399

The selection of the sample elements will be based on the accidental sampling technique. The accidental sampling technique involves selecting available individuals who indicate readiness to participate in the study. The respondents do not have to meet any predetermined criteria. Ten out of the towns/villages that make up Okrika LGA are selected for the study. This is based on the simple random sampling technique which involves writing the names of all constituent towns in separate pieces of papers which are put in a hat; and picking ten pieces after the hat would have shaken to shuffle the pieces of papers. From each of the selected communities, at least 39 respondents would be chosen to ensure fair representation. (See table 1 below for details)

Table 1           showing selected communities and sample size.

Serial  numberList of randomly selected townsSample size
1.Abamโ€“Ama39
2Okochiri39
3Opuado-Ama39
4Sara- Ama39
5Semembiri-Ama39
6Otobipi39
7Okujagu-Ama39
8Okumgba-Ama39
9Omoaobi43
10Ogoloma44
Total10399

Sources of data

Two kinds of data are used for this work. First are primary data which are sourced first hand by the researcher from the field using questionnaires. The other are secondary data, sourced from secondary materials including books, magazines, journal articles, newspaper publications and encyclopedia.

Research setting

Okrika is one of the local Government areas of Rivers State. It has its headquarters located in Okrika town. The local government area is made up of several villages with four major districts. The 2006 census determined that the population of Okrika LGA was 222,026. The people of Okrika, like other Ijo sub-groups of the Niger Delta are organised into autonomous and co-equal canoe houses. Kinsmen leaving together in same area make up each War-canoe house. The languages spoken by the Okrika people are okrika and kalabari. Historically, the okrika people of old were polytheists, believing in several gods and deities. Others were animists who believed in many spirits including marine spirits and in the spirits of their ancestors. In modern Okrika, Christianity has emerged as the dominant religion. Traditional religion however still exists side by side with Christianity. Before the onset of oil and gas activities, the people of Okrika were predominantly farmers, fishers and traders.

Instrument of data collection

The research instruments used in this study are questionnaires. The questionnaires are designed using close-ended questions. The questionnaires have two sections. The items in the first section seek demographic information about the respondents such as age, experience and qualifications. The second part seek information on the research questions.

Validity and reliability of research instrument

Orodho (2015) defines validity as a prior qualitative procedure test of the research instrument in attempting to ascertain how they are accurate, correct, true, meaningful and right in enhancing the intended data for the study. Reliability on the other handis a measure of the degree to which the instrument yields consistent data after repeated trials (Mugenda and Mugenda 2013). After preparing the questionnaire, it would be submitted to the project supervisor for perusal. Her contributions would be incorporated to enhance content validity and reliability.

Method of data analysis

The analysis of the research questions would be done using simple percentage, pie-charts and histograms.

Data Presentation and Analysis, And Discussion Of Findings

Table 2           Questionnaire Response

Copies administeredCopies retrievedInvalid copiesValid and useful copiesResponse rate
3993129721567%

The data in table 2 above represent the questionnaire response rate. It is shown in the table that a total of 399 questionnaires were distributed for the study. However, the researcher was able to retrieve only 312, 97 of which were not properly filled by the respondents; leaving only 215 copies of valid questionnaire and a response rate of 69%.

Table 3           commonly used household energy cooking sources

No.ItemVery commonly used F (%)Commonly used F (%)Not commonly used F (%)Not used at all F (%)No idea F (%)F total% total
1Charcoal111 (51.6)64 (29.8)12 (5.6)18 (8.4)10 (4.7)215100
2Firewood89 (41.4)96 (44.7)16 (7.4)4 (1.9)10(4.7)215100
3Kerosene stove6(2.8)115(53.5)4 (1.9)62 (28.8)28 (13.02)215100
4Gas stove6 (2.8)19 (8.9)90 (41.9)41 (19.07)59 (27.4)215100
5Electric cooker4 (1.9)16 (7.44)108 (50.2)12 (5.6)70 (32.6)215100

The data in table 3 represent respondentsโ€™ report on the frequency of use of some common energy for household cooking purposes. For charcoal, 51.6% indicated that it is very commonly used. 29.8% reported that it is commonly used; 5.6% reported that it is not commonly used; 8.4% reported that it is not used at all; while 4.7% indicated that they have no idea on the frequency of use of the charcoal. The results for firewood are: 41.45 very commonly used, 44.7%; 44.7% commonly used; 7.4% not commonly used; 1.9% not used at all and 4.7% no idea. The results for kerosene stove are presented as: 2.8% (very commonly used); 53.5% commonly used; 1.9% not commonly used; 28.8% not used at all and 13.02% no idea. A completely different trend is observed in gas stove where 2.8% reported that it is very commonly used; 8.9% reported that it is commonly used; 19.07% reported that it is not used at all; while 27.4% reported that had no idea. A similar response pattern is observable for electric cooker which has 1.9% (very commonly used); 7.4% (commonly used); 50.2% (not commonly used); 5.6% (not used at all) and 32.6% (no idea).

Discussion of findings

The objective was to examine the commonly used forms of energy in the study area. The results of the analysis show high level of non-patronage for clean energy. In table 3, it is shown that charcoal and fuel remain the dominant sources of cooking energy. Only a small proportion of the respondents make use of gas stove and electric cooking gadgets. This findings validate the reports by Crosby (2016) and Azubuike (2016) that many nations of the world still rely heavily on the use of traditional sources of energy in the sphere of cooking at the household level.

Recommendations

Based on the findings of this study, the following recommendations are provided:

1. There is need for enlightenment on the long term economic and environmental cost benefits of clean energy for cooking.

2.         There should be intensive, monitored and sustainable development programme targeted at rural areas in Nigeria. These programmes should include massive deployment of infrastructures which will aid easy access to cleaner cooking fuel energy for households use.

References

African Women Power Network Reviews (2015). Fourteen (14) Leading

Ajanovic, A. (2011). Biofuels versus food production: Does biofuels production increase food prices? Energy, 36, 2070โ€“2076.http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/j.energy.2010.05.019

Asumadu-Sarkodie S, &Owusu, P. A. (2016f). The relationship between carbon dioxide and agriculture in Ghana, a comparison of VECM and ARDL model. Environmental Science and Pollution Research. doi:10.1007/ s11356-016-6252-x

Asumadu-Sarkodie, S., &Owusu, P. A. (2016a). Feasibility of biomass heating system in Middle East Technical University, Northern Cyprus campus. Cogent Engineering,

Asumadu-Sarkodie, S., &Owusu, P. A. (2016b). A review of Ghanaโ€™s energy sector national energy statistics and policy framework. Cogent Engineering. 

Asumadu-Sarkodie, S., &Owusu, P. A. (2016c). Multivariate co-integration analysis of the Kaya factors in Ghana.

Asumadu-Sarkodie, S., &Owusu, P. A. (2016d). The potential and economic viability of solar photovoltaic in Ghana. Energy Sources, Part A: Recovery, Utilization, and Environmental Effects. doi:10.1080/15567036.2015.112 2682

Asumadu-Sarkodie, S., &Owusu, P. A. (2016e). The potential and economic viability of wind farms in Ghana Energy Sources, Part A: Recovery, Utilization, and Environmental Effects. doi:10.1080/15567036.2015.1122680

Asumadu-Sarkodie, S., &Owusu, P. A. (2016g). Carbon dioxide emissions, GDP, energy use and population growth: A multivariate and causality analysis for Ghana, 1971โ€“2013. Environmental Science and Pollution Research International. doi:10.1007/s11356-016-6511-x

Asumadu-Sarkodie, S., Owusu, P. A., &Jayaweera, H. M. (2015). Flood risk management in Ghana: A case study in Accra. Advances in Applied Science Research, 6, 196โ€“201.

Asumadu-Sarkodie, S., Owusu, P. A., &Rufangura, P. (2015). Impact analysis of flood in Accra, Ghana. Advances in Applied Science Research, 6, 53โ€“78.

Asumadu-Sarkodie, S., Rufangura, P., Jayaweera, H. M., &Owusu, P. A. (2015). Situational analysis of flood and drought in Rwanda. International Journal of Scientific and Engineering Research, 6, 960โ€“970. doi:10.14299/ ijser.2015.08.013

Ayoub, M., & Abdullah, A. Z. (2016). Critical review on the current scenario and significance of crude glycerol resulting from biodiesel industry towards more sustainable renewable energy industry. Renewable and Sustainable Energy Reviews, 16, 2671โ€“2686.

Baiyegunhi, L.J.S., Hassan, M.B. (2014), Rural household fuel energy transition: Evidence from Giwa LGA Kaduna State, Nigeria. Energy for Sustainable Development, 20(1), 30-35.

Barbier, E. (2016). Geothermal energy technology and current status: An overview. Renewable and Sustainable Energy Reviews, 6, 3โ€“65. Demirbas, M. F., Balat, M., &Balat, H. (2019). Potential contribution of biomass to the sustainable energy development. Energy Conversion and Management, 50, 1746โ€“1760. http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/S1364-0321(02)00002-3

Bhattacharyya, S.C., Timilsina, G.R. (2019), Energy Demand Models for Policy Formulation. A Comparative Study of Energy Demand Models. Washington D.C: World Bank Policy Research Working Paper No. 4866.

Bisu, D., Kuhe, A., Iortyer, H. (2016), Urban household cooking energy choice: An example of Bauchi Metropolis, Nigeria. Energy, Sustainability and Society, 6(1), 15.

Brew-Hammond, A. (2016), Energy access in Africa: Challenges Ahead. Energy Policy, 38(5), 2291-2301.

Dehalwar, K., & Sharma, S. N. (2023). Fundamentals of Research Writing and Uses of Research Methodologies. Edupedia Publications Pvt Ltd.

Edenhofer, O., Pichs-Madruga, R., Sokona, Y., Seyboth, K.,Matschoss, P., Kadner, S. and Stechow, C.  (2016). Renewable Energy Sources and Climate Change Mitigation. Cambridge : Cambridge University Press.http://dx.doi.org/10.1017/CBO9781139151153

EEA. (2016). Mitigating climate change, greenhouse gas emissions. Retrieved from http://www.eea. europa.eu/soer-2015/countries-comparison/ climatechange-mitigation

Environmental Science and Pollution Research. doi:10.1007/s11356-016-6245-9

Fรธrsund, F. R. (2015). Hydropower economics (Vol. 217). New York: Springer.

IEA (2014). Energy and poverty. In: World Energy Outlook 2002. International Energy Agency, Paris.

IEA. (2017), Energy Access Outlook 2017: From Poverty to Prosperity. World Energy Outlook Special Report. Available from: http://www. iea.org/energyaccess.

Karimu, A. (2015), Cooking fuel preferences among Ghanaian households: An empirical analysis. Energy for Sustainable Development, 27, 10-17.

Manwell, J. F., McGowan, J. G., & Rogers, A. L. (2015). Wind energy explained: Theory, design and application. Wiley.

Mensah, J, T.,  Adu, G. (2016). An empirical analysis of household energy choice in Ghana. Working paper 06/2012 Swedish University of Agriculture Science, Department of Economics. 

Mensah, J.T., Adu, G. (2015), An empirical analysis of household energy choice in Ghana. Renewable and Sustainable Energy Reviews, 51, 1402-1411.

Nlom, J.H., Karimov, A.A. (2015), Modeling fuel choice among households in Northern Cameroon. Sustainability, 7(8), 9989-9999.

OECD and IEA. 2010. CO2 Emissions from Fuel Combustion: Highlights. Paris, Organization for Economic Co- operation and Development & International Energy Agency, 2010:130.

Ogbanga, M. M. (2024). Communication Skills in Social Work. EduPedia Publications Pvt Ltd.

Ogbanga, M. M. (2024). Oil, Gender and Unemployment: Social Issues in the Niger. Eduindex.

Ogbanga, M. M., & Sharma, S. N. (2024). Climate Change and Mental Heat. EduPedia Publications Pvt Ltd.

Ogwumike, F.O., Ozughalu, U. (2016), Energy consumption, poverty and environmental linkages In Nigeria: A case of traditional and modern fuels for cooking. In: Adenikinju, A., Iwayemi, A., Iledare, W., editors. Green Energy and Energy Security: Options for Africa. Ibadan: Atlantis Books. pp.235-254.

Ogwumike, F.O., Ozughalu, U.M. (2016), Analysis of energy poverty and its implications for sustainable development in Nigeria. Environment and Development Economics, 21(3), 273-290.

Ogwumike, F.O., Ozughalu, U.M., Abiona, G.A. (2014), Household energy use and determinants : Evidence from Nigeria. International Journal of Energy Economics and Policy, 4(2), 248-262.

Olojede, I. (2018). Womenโ€™s Interest Organizations: Encounters With the State on Issues of Good Governance. Report. Civil Society and Governance Programmes, IDS, Department of Political Science, Lagos State University, Ojo Nigeria.

Organizations Changing the Lives of Nigerian Women and Girls. Available online at https://awpnetwork.com (Accessed October 13, 2015).

Oyekale, A.S. (2012), Assessment of householdsโ€™ access to electricity and modern cooking fuels in rural and Urban Nigeria: Insights from DHS data. Life Science Journal, 9(4), 1564-1570.

Rahut, D.B., Mottaleb, K.A., Ali, A. (2017), Household energy consumption and its determinants in Timor-Leste. Asian Development Review, 34(1), 167-197.

Saโ€™ad, S., Bugaje, I.M. (2016), Biomass consumption in Nigeria: Trends and policy issues. Journal of Agriculture and Sustainability, 9(2), 127-157.

Sharma, S. N. (Ed.). (2016). New perspectives in sociology and allied fields. EduPedia Publications (P) Ltd.

Smith, K., Mehta, S. and Maeusezahl-Feuz, M. (2014), โ€œIndoor Air Pollution from Household Use of Solid Fuelsโ€, in Ezzati, M., Rogers, A., Lopez, A., Murray C. (editors), Comparative Quantification of Health Risks, Volume 2, WHO, Geneva.

Urban, F., & Mitchell, T. (2011). Climate change, disasters and electricity generation.

WEO, 2016.   World Energy             outlook.           Available         at; http://www.worldenergyoutlook.org/media/weowebsite/20081994/weo2006.pdf.

WHO, 2011. Health in the Green Economy. Co-benefits of Climate Change Mitigation- Household Energy Sector in Developing Countries. Executive Summary. http://www.who.int/hia/hgebrief_henergy.pdf

Assessment of the Barriers to the Adoption of Clean Energy for Household Cooking in Okrika Local Government Area

Mina Margaret Ogbanga

River State University.

Department of Social Work

Mina.Ogbanga@ust.edu.ng

Abstract

The adoption of clean energy for household cooking has become a critical issue in reducing environmental degradation and improving public health. This study assesses the barriers to the adoption of clean energy in Okrika Local Government Area, Nigeria, where traditional cooking fuels, such as firewood and kerosene, remain prevalent. The research employs a mixed-methods approach, including household surveys and interviews, to identify key factors hindering the transition to cleaner energy sources such as liquefied petroleum gas (LPG) and electricity. The results reveal that socio-economic constraints, including the high cost of clean energy technologies, lack of infrastructure, cultural preferences for traditional fuels, and limited awareness about the benefits of clean energy, are significant barriers. Additionally, unreliable energy supply and inadequate government policies exacerbate the challenge. The study concludes by recommending targeted interventions, such as financial incentives, community education programs, and improved energy infrastructure, to promote the widespread adoption of clean cooking solutions in the region. Addressing these barriers is crucial to enhancing household energy security, improving health outcomes, and reducing environmental impacts in Okrika.

Photo by Pixabay on Pexels.com

Introduction

Poor access to clean and healthy energy sources for cooking has been a major problem confronting Okrika Local Government Area of Rivers State. In most families, women are either cooking with kerosene stove, charcoal or firewood. This practice has observably gone on for many years unabated. Studies have shown that the non-use of clean energy for cooking is responsible for a number of social and environmental health hazards currently plaguing the world. For instance, an annual premature death of 2.8 million people was recently reported due to smoky environments caused by burning solid biomass in inefficient stoves and or from combustion of kerosene or coal for cooking (IEA, 2017). Furthermore, overreliance on traditional energy sources like wood and agricultural residues has been identified as a leading cause of deforestation. More worrying is the fact that household energy consumption in developing countries has been identified as contributing more to climate change relative to developed countries, since high concentration of methane and black carbon resulting from incomplete combustion of biomass and other solid fuels is generated in developing countries due to predominant use of traditional stoves (WHO, 2011). Empirically, this study acknowledges the existence of several studies such as those conducted by Oyekale (2012), Mensah and Adu (2015), Karimu (2015) and Nlomand Karimu (2015) that have examined the phenomenon of household cooking fuel. However, while these studies only focused on explaining the factors influencing household cooking fuel choice at both local and national perspectives, none offers an explanation as to how women organisations would help to improve the use of clean fuel for cooking in households. It is against this backdrop that this study is designed to bridge the gap in literature by examining the role of women organizations in promoting the use of clean energy. This would be done with focus on Okrika Local Government Area of Rivers State.

Aim and objective of the study

To assess the barriers to the adoption of clean energy for household cooking.

Research question

What are the barriers to the adoption of clean energy for household cooking?

Significance of the study

Practical significance: this study would provide information on the effects of not using clean energy for cooking. This would encourage informed choices among women. The study would also provide information on the factors that influence a familyโ€™s energy choice for cooking. The government, international organisations and other stakeholders would find useful, such data for the formulation of relevant policies geared towards promoting the adoption of clean energy for cooking. Also, traditional heads and the society at large would be made to understand how the society could use socio-cultural associations such as women groups to improve healthy lifestyle in our local communities.

Scope of the study

The study examines the role of women organisations in promoting the use of clean energy for household cooking.  The specific issues to be considered are: the factors that influence a familyโ€™s cooking energy; the barriers affecting the adoption of clean energy for household cooking; the potential of women organisations in promoting the use of clean energy for household cooking and the implications of heavy use of non-clean energy for household cooking. All these would follow a critical look at the commonly used forms of energy. The study locale is Okrika Local Government Area of Rives State.

Definition of terms

Women: these are members of the female gender

Organisations: a group of people with an explicit purpose and written rules.

Women organisations: these are cultural associations comprising women who unite on the bases of certain socio-cultural factors such as age, marital status and economic standing.

Energy: a substance that allows people to do work.

Clean energy: clean energy refers to any source of fuel that is efficient and poses less environmental health challenges.

Promotion: a practice is promoted when its use is supported ad encouraged

Household: a household is a family, comprising people who are related by blood or other some socially recognised process such as adoption and marriage.

Cooking: this refers to the activity or preparing food for personal or public consumption.

Barriers to the adoption of clean cooking energy

The factors that have hindered the adoption of clean cooking energy in Nigeria are discussed under the following sub-headings.

Gender of household head: There are literature indications that having a man as the head of the household increases the probability of a household using clean energy for cooking. In families run by women, the reserve is usually the case. As we know, female headed households are usually less financially strong compared to male headed ones which makes such households to settle for less expensive fuel for cooking, even if such fuel is dangerous to human health. Generally, female heads and consequently their households are economically vulnerable because of poor access to employment opportunities and resources which the men enjoy (Ogwumike, 2014; Rahut, 2017).

Age of household head: Studies have shown that the probability of using clean energy is also significantly linked with the age of the household head. For instance, it is shown in Baiyegunhi and Hassan (2014) that the probability of using gas as cooking fuel decreases as the age of household head increases when other variables are held constant, while it increases for firewood. This arises due to reduction in income of the head when he or she is no longer economically active coupled with the fact that such household head might not have any other source of income, either through remittances, pension or other income sources. The reality of low or no and unstable income (for pensioners) which is prevalent in Nigeria is seen to have lowered the standard of living of households with older heads. Other reasons could be due to the old habit of conservatism associated with older people. In this case, old folks may have become accustomed to the use of traditional fuel energy source(s) and thus are less willing to change towards modern reality of energy usage (Mensah and Adu, 2015).

Household size: Studies have proved that there will be a reduction in the probability of a household using clean energy for cooking as household size increases. This is majorly due to the amount of energy required for cooking for large number of persons and the consequent cost implication associated with it, which is higher for larger households. It is expected that larger households will prefer to use firewood, because it requires a large amount of fuel energy in aggregate to meet the family needs. In line with the submission of Pundo and Fraser (2016), it is comparatively affordable to use firewood for large family than LNG.

Education of household heads: There are indications that, increase in education attainment increases the chances of a household using clean energy as main cooking fuel while on the other hand, it reduces the likelihood of using kerosene, charcoal and wood as main coking fuels as expected, ceteris paribus. A positive and higher return to education can be deduced in this regard; that is, positive returns on employment opportunities, income and standard of living generally resulting in economic affordability of better and clean fuel energy options for cooking and other domestic uses (Bisu, 2016; Mensah and Adu, 2015).

Dwelling: Living in rural areas reduces householdsโ€™ chances of using clean energy for cooking. It is suggested that rural life significantly increases the probability of using wood for cooking. This is mainly due to easy accessibility of firewood in the rural areas unlike urban areas where development in all forms has led to major deforestation; thus, various forms of improved cooking fuel energy are available to choose from. For this reason, the significant use of firewood is not unexpected (Ogwumike, 2014). This could also largely be a result of little supply of clean energy, the easy accessibility and availability of alternative fuel energy options in the rural areas.

Cost: The costs associated with acquisition of LPG gas ancillaries (i.e., cooker, gas cylinder, re-filling of the gas cylinder as needs demand) which is considered high considering the minimum wage in the country and the traditional perception of high cost and that usage of LPG gas is meant for the rich in the society is another factor affecting the use of clean energy (Saโ€™ad and Bugaje, 2016)

Research Methodology

Research Design

According to Cooper and Schindler (2016), a research design is like a plan by which a given research work is to be carried out. The descriptive survey research design is adopted for this study. The descriptive survey design is a method of collecting information by interviewing or administering a questionnaire to a sample of individuals (Kombo & Tromp, 2016). This type of design is also useful when collecting information about peopleโ€™s attitudes, opinions, and habits (Kombo and Tromp, 2016).  Since this falls within the focus of this study, the descriptive survey would be the most appropriate design to be used.  

Population of the study 

According to Mugenda and Mugenda (2019), the population of a study is that population to which a researcher wants to generalise the results of the study. The target population for this study are women in Okrika Local Government Area of Rivers State. According to the National Population Commissionโ€™s (2016) projection, the number of women in Okrika Local Government Area is 108,323.

Sample Size and Sampling Techniques

A sample is a smaller part of a statistical population where properties are studied to gain information about the whole (Kombo and Tromp, 2016). A sample size of 399 is adopted for the study. This is based on the application of the Taro Yamene statistical formula as represented below:

Where n is the subject of the formula

1 is constant

E2 = margin of error (0.05)

N is the study population of the study (108323).

Therefore,

n = 108323/1+ 108323 (0.0025).

n = 108323/1+270.8075

n = 108323/271.8075

n = 399

The selection of the sample elements will be based on the accidental sampling technique. The accidental sampling technique involves selecting available individuals who indicate readiness to participate in the study. The respondents do not have to meet any predetermined criteria. Ten out of the towns/villages that make up Okrika LGA are selected for the study. This is based on the simple random sampling technique which involves writing the names of all constituent towns in separate pieces of papers which are put in a hat; and picking ten pieces after the hat would have shaken to shuffle the pieces of papers. From each of the selected communities, at least 39 respondents would be chosen to ensure fair representation. (See table 1 below for details)

Table 1            showing selected communities and sample size.

Serial  numberList of randomly selected townsSample size
1.Abamโ€“Ama39
2Okochiri39
3Opuado-Ama39
4Sara- Ama39
5Semembiri-Ama39
6Otobipi39
7Okujagu-Ama39
8Okumgba-Ama39
9Omoaobi43
10Ogoloma44
Total10399

Sources of data

Two kinds of data are used for this work. First are primary data which are sourced first hand by the researcher from the field using questionnaires. The other are secondary data, sourced from secondary materials including books, magazines, journal articles, newspaper publications and encyclopedia.

Research setting

Okrika is one of the local Government areas of Rivers State. It has its headquarters located in Okrika town. The local government area is made up of several villages with four major districts. The 2006 census determined that the population of Okrika LGA was 222,026. The people of Okrika, like other Ijo sub-groups of the Niger Delta are organised into autonomous and co-equal canoe houses. Kinsmen leaving together in same area make up each War-canoe house. The languages spoken by the Okrika people are okrika and kalabari. Historically, the okrika people of old were polytheists, believing in several gods and deities. Others were animists who believed in many spirits including marine spirits and in the spirits of their ancestors. In modern Okrika, Christianity has emerged as the dominant religion. Traditional religion however still exists side by side with Christianity. Before the onset of oil and gas activities, the people of Okrika were predominantly farmers, fishers and traders.

Instrument of data collection

The research instruments used in this study are questionnaires. The questionnaires are designed using close-ended questions. The questionnaires have two sections. The items in the first section seek demographic information about the respondents such as age, experience and qualifications. The second part seek information on the research questions.

Validity and reliability of research instrument

Orodho (2015) defines validity as a prior qualitative procedure test of the research instrument in attempting to ascertain how they are accurate, correct, true, meaningful and right in enhancing the intended data for the study. Reliability on the other handis a measure of the degree to which the instrument yields consistent data after repeated trials (Mugenda and Mugenda 2013). After preparing the questionnaire, it would be submitted to the project supervisor for perusal. Her contributions would be incorporated to enhance content validity and reliability.

Method of data analysis

The analysis of the research questions would be done using simple percentage, pie-charts and histograms.

Data Presentation and Analysis, and Discussion of Findings

In this section, the data generated from the respondents during the field work are presented and analysed. This is followed by a discussion of the key findings of the study. 

Table 2            Socio-Demographics of Respondents

Age: Less than 18 19-29 30-40 41-50 51 and above TotalFrequency 19 45 51 65 35 215Percentage 8.9 20.9 23.7 29.3 16.2 100
Sex: Male Female Total  105 110 215  48.8 51,2 100

Table 2 contains the socio-demographic data of the study respondents. This includes age and sex. The number of respondents who are less than 18 years old is represented as 8.9%. Those who are between the groups of 19-29, 30-40, 41-50 and above 51 have percentage scores of 20.9, 23.7, 29.3 and 16.2 respectively. The fraction if men who participated in the study is represented as 48.8%, while that of women is 51.2%.

Figure 1          Barriers to the adoption of clean energy for household cooking.

Discussion of findings

The objective examined the barriers to the adoption of clean energy for household cooking activities. In this study, poverty is identified to be a leading cause of the problem. With rising inflationary trends, unemployment and decline in living standard, it is not unlikely that most families would resort to using non-clean energy such a firewood and charcoal since they are readily available and can be procured cheaply.  Corroborating this finding, is Saโ€™ad and Bugajeโ€™s (2016) study of gas use in Nigeria. According to the authors, the outrageous costs gas cooker, gas cylinder and re-filling of the gas cylinder, constitute a barrier to the use of clean energy. Ignorance of the dangers associated with the use of non-clean energy is another factor. This problem is usually associated with illiteracy which lowers peopleโ€™s understanding of how their actions may affect their health or that of society. It is not unlikely that a person who lacks information of how the use of non-clean energy can affect his life would care less about what source of energy he/she uses. As Mensah and Adu (2015) and Bisu (2016) support, education of household heads is a correlate of clean energy use. According to the scholars, being educated the likelihood of using kerosene, charcoal and wood as main coking fuels. However, while these scholars argued in terms of positive returns on employment opportunities the current study considers the issue from the point of view of information. The study further shows that leaving in a rural community also increases the use of non-clean energy. This is not unexpected, considering that poverty rate is usually higher and that modern energy sources are, in most cases, lacking in rural setting. Large household size is also an identifiable factor affecting the use of clean energy. The rationale is that when a family is too large, cooking is usually done in large quantity. This would mean increased cost of procuring clean energy which is already very high in price. As a result, such families would settle for cheaper alternatives of non-clean energy. As Pundo and Fraser (2016) confirms, it is comparatively affordable to use firewood for large family than LNG. The culture of conservatism is also prominent in influencing the poor adoption of clean energy. It is a major problem for most Africans to resist modern practices, particularly those that contravene largely with what they are traditionally used to. In this case, old folks may have become accustomed to the use of traditional fuel energy source(s) and thus are less willing to change towards modern reality of energy usage (Mensah and Adu, 2015).

Recommendations

1.         There should be intensive, monitored and sustainable development programme targeted at rural areas in Nigeria. These programmes should include massive deployment of infrastructures which will aid easy access to cleaner cooking fuel energy for households use.

2.         The Nigerian government could partner with women organisationsin the distribution of low cost technology accessories and ancillary materials needed for the use of LPG for cooking in the country.

References

African Women Power Network Reviews (2015). Fourteen (14) Leading

Ajanovic, A. (2011). Biofuels versus food production: Does biofuels production increase food prices? Energy, 36, 2070โ€“2076.http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/j.energy.2010.05.019

Asumadu-Sarkodie S, &Owusu, P. A. (2016f). The relationship between carbon dioxide and agriculture in Ghana, a comparison of VECM and ARDL model. Environmental Science and Pollution Research. doi:10.1007/ s11356-016-6252-x

Asumadu-Sarkodie, S., &Owusu, P. A. (2016a). Feasibility of biomass heating system in Middle East Technical University, Northern Cyprus campus. Cogent Engineering,

Asumadu-Sarkodie, S., &Owusu, P. A. (2016b). A review of Ghanaโ€™s energy sector national energy statistics and policy framework. Cogent Engineering. 

Asumadu-Sarkodie, S., &Owusu, P. A. (2016c). Multivariate co-integration analysis of the Kaya factors in Ghana.

Asumadu-Sarkodie, S., &Owusu, P. A. (2016d). The potential and economic viability of solar photovoltaic in Ghana. Energy Sources, Part A: Recovery, Utilization, and Environmental Effects. doi:10.1080/15567036.2015.112 2682

Asumadu-Sarkodie, S., &Owusu, P. A. (2016e). The potential and economic viability of wind farms in Ghana Energy Sources, Part A: Recovery, Utilization, and Environmental Effects. doi:10.1080/15567036.2015.1122680

Asumadu-Sarkodie, S., &Owusu, P. A. (2016g). Carbon dioxide emissions, GDP, energy use and population growth: A multivariate and causality analysis for Ghana, 1971โ€“2013. Environmental Science and Pollution Research International. doi:10.1007/s11356-016-6511-x

Asumadu-Sarkodie, S., Owusu, P. A., &Jayaweera, H. M. (2015). Flood risk management in Ghana: A case study in Accra. Advances in Applied Science Research, 6, 196โ€“201.

Asumadu-Sarkodie, S., Owusu, P. A., &Rufangura, P. (2015). Impact analysis of flood in Accra, Ghana. Advances in Applied Science Research, 6, 53โ€“78.

Asumadu-Sarkodie, S., Rufangura, P., Jayaweera, H. M., &Owusu, P. A. (2015). Situational analysis of flood and drought in Rwanda. International Journal of Scientific and Engineering Research, 6, 960โ€“970. doi:10.14299/ ijser.2015.08.013

Ayoub, M., & Abdullah, A. Z. (2016). Critical review on the current scenario and significance of crude glycerol resulting from biodiesel industry towards more sustainable renewable energy industry. Renewable and Sustainable Energy Reviews, 16, 2671โ€“2686.

Baiyegunhi, L.J.S., Hassan, M.B. (2014), Rural household fuel energy transition: Evidence from Giwa LGA Kaduna State, Nigeria. Energy for Sustainable Development, 20(1), 30-35.

Barbier, E. (2016). Geothermal energy technology and current status: An overview. Renewable and Sustainable Energy Reviews, 6, 3โ€“65. Demirbas, M. F., Balat, M., &Balat, H. (2019). Potential contribution of biomass to the sustainable energy development. Energy Conversion and Management, 50, 1746โ€“1760. http://dx.doi.org/10.1016/S1364-0321(02)00002-3

Bhattacharyya, S.C., Timilsina, G.R. (2019), Energy Demand Models for Policy Formulation. A Comparative Study of Energy Demand Models. Washington D.C: World Bank Policy Research Working Paper No. 4866.

Bisu, D., Kuhe, A., Iortyer, H. (2016), Urban household cooking energy choice: An example of Bauchi Metropolis, Nigeria. Energy, Sustainability and Society, 6(1), 15.

Brew-Hammond, A. (2016), Energy access in Africa: Challenges Ahead. Energy Policy, 38(5), 2291-2301.

Dehalwar, K., & Sharma, S. N. (2023). Fundamentals of Research Writing and Uses of Research Methodologies. Edupedia Publications Pvt Ltd.

Edenhofer, O., Pichs-Madruga, R., Sokona, Y., Seyboth, K.,Matschoss, P., Kadner, S. and Stechow, C.  (2016). Renewable Energy Sources and Climate Change Mitigation. Cambridge : Cambridge University Press.http://dx.doi.org/10.1017/CBO9781139151153

EEA. (2016). Mitigating climate change, greenhouse gas emissions. Retrieved from http://www.eea. europa.eu/soer-2015/countries-comparison/ climatechange-mitigation

Environmental Science and Pollution Research. doi:10.1007/s11356-016-6245-9

Fรธrsund, F. R. (2015). Hydropower economics (Vol. 217). New York: Springer.

IEA (2014). Energy and poverty. In: World Energy Outlook 2002. International Energy Agency, Paris.

IEA. (2017), Energy Access Outlook 2017: From Poverty to Prosperity. World Energy Outlook Special Report. Available from: http://www. iea.org/energyaccess.

Karimu, A. (2015), Cooking fuel preferences among Ghanaian households: An empirical analysis. Energy for Sustainable Development, 27, 10-17.

Manwell, J. F., McGowan, J. G., & Rogers, A. L. (2015). Wind energy explained: Theory, design and application. Wiley.

Mensah, J, T.,  Adu, G. (2016). An empirical analysis of household energy choice in Ghana. Working paper 06/2012 Swedish University of Agriculture Science, Department of Economics. 

Mensah, J.T., Adu, G. (2015), An empirical analysis of household energy choice in Ghana. Renewable and Sustainable Energy Reviews, 51, 1402-1411.

Nlom, J.H., Karimov, A.A. (2015), Modeling fuel choice among households in Northern Cameroon. Sustainability, 7(8), 9989-9999.

OECD and IEA. 2010. CO2 Emissions from Fuel Combustion: Highlights. Paris, Organization for Economic Co- operation and Development & International Energy Agency, 2010:130.

Ogbanga, M. M. (2024). Communication Skills in Social Work. EduPedia Publications Pvt Ltd.

Ogbanga, M. M. (2024). Oil, Gender and Unemployment: Social Issues in the Niger. Eduindex.

Ogbanga, M. M., & Sharma, S. N. (2024). Climate Change and Mental Heat. EduPedia Publications Pvt Ltd.

Ogwumike, F.O., Ozughalu, U. (2016), Energy consumption, poverty and environmental linkages In Nigeria: A case of traditional and modern fuels for cooking. In: Adenikinju, A., Iwayemi, A., Iledare, W., editors. Green Energy and Energy Security: Options for Africa. Ibadan: Atlantis Books. pp.235-254.

Ogwumike, F.O., Ozughalu, U.M. (2016), Analysis of energy poverty and its implications for sustainable development in Nigeria. Environment and Development Economics, 21(3), 273-290.

Ogwumike, F.O., Ozughalu, U.M., Abiona, G.A. (2014), Household energy use and determinants : Evidence from Nigeria. International Journal of Energy Economics and Policy, 4(2), 248-262.

Olojede, I. (2018). Womenโ€™s Interest Organizations: Encounters With the State on Issues of Good Governance. Report. Civil Society and Governance Programmes, IDS, Department of Political Science, Lagos State University, Ojo Nigeria.

Organizations Changing the Lives of Nigerian Women and Girls. Available online at https://awpnetwork.com (Accessed October 13, 2015).

Oyekale, A.S. (2012), Assessment of householdsโ€™ access to electricity and modern cooking fuels in rural and Urban Nigeria: Insights from DHS data. Life Science Journal, 9(4), 1564-1570.

Rahut, D.B., Mottaleb, K.A., Ali, A. (2017), Household energy consumption and its determinants in Timor-Leste. Asian Development Review, 34(1), 167-197.

Saโ€™ad, S., Bugaje, I.M. (2016), Biomass consumption in Nigeria: Trends and policy issues. Journal of Agriculture and Sustainability, 9(2), 127-157.

Sharma, S. N. (Ed.). (2016). New perspectives in sociology and allied fields. EduPedia Publications (P) Ltd.

Smith, K., Mehta, S. and Maeusezahl-Feuz, M. (2014), โ€œIndoor Air Pollution from Household Use of Solid Fuelsโ€, in Ezzati, M., Rogers, A., Lopez, A., Murray C. (editors), Comparative Quantification of Health Risks, Volume 2, WHO, Geneva.

Urban, F., & Mitchell, T. (2011). Climate change, disasters and electricity generation.

WEO, 2016.   World Energy             outlook.           Available         at; http://www.worldenergyoutlook.org/media/weowebsite/20081994/weo2006.pdf.

WHO, 2011. Health in the Green Economy. Co-benefits of Climate Change Mitigation- Household Energy Sector in Developing Countries. Executive Summary. http://www.who.int/hia/hgebrief_henergy.pdf

s

Centre for Science and Environment (CSE) – A Brief Overview

The Centre for Science and Environment (CSE) is one of Indiaโ€™s leading public interest research and advocacy organizations. Founded in 1980 by noted environmentalist Anil Agarwal, CSE aims to promote sustainable development and advocate for environmental issues through a combination of research, education, and advocacy. Based in New Delhi, it has become a major force in raising awareness and driving policy changes in areas related to environmental protection, resource conservation, and social equity.

Key Objectives and Mission

CSE works with the primary goal of ensuring equitable, sustainable, and democratic growth. Its mission is to promote policies and practices that result in environmentally sound and socially just development. The organizationโ€™s work is grounded in the belief that the environment cannot be separated from the issues of development, poverty, and social justice.

The organization operates with the following broad objectives:

  1. Research and Advocacy: Conduct in-depth research into various environmental issues and use findings to lobby for appropriate policy interventions.
  2. Capacity Building: CSE focuses on building the capacity of government officials, communities, and organizations through training programs and information dissemination.
  3. Public Awareness: It works to raise public awareness of critical environmental and developmental challenges, encouraging citizen action and participation.
  4. Environmental Education: CSE plays a key role in educating students, professionals, and the general public on environmental concerns through books, reports, workshops, and online resources.

Major Areas of Focus

CSEโ€™s work spans a variety of crucial environmental sectors, which include:

  1. Air Pollution and Public Health: CSE has been at the forefront of campaigns for cleaner air, particularly in urban centers. The organizationโ€™s work has helped push for stricter emission standards for vehicles, promotion of public transport, and policies to reduce industrial emissions. Its notable efforts include pushing for the introduction of Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) in public transportation in Delhi, which was a game-changer in reducing urban air pollution.
  2. Climate Change: Climate change is one of the organizationโ€™s core areas. CSE advocates for global climate justice, arguing that developing nations like India should not bear the same responsibilities as developed countries in terms of emissions reductions. CSE also promotes renewable energy and energy-efficient practices at the national and local levels.
  3. Water Management: Water conservation and sustainable management of water resources are critical areas of CSEโ€™s work. The organization is a strong advocate of rainwater harvesting, decentralized wastewater treatment, and watershed management. CSE has created several successful models that promote sustainable water use in urban and rural areas.
  4. Sustainable Urban Development: CSE has been deeply involved in research and policy advocacy regarding sustainable urban growth. This includes work on urban mobility, waste management, and urban planning that integrates green infrastructure, affordable housing, and low-carbon technologies.
  5. Waste Management: Waste management, including solid waste and hazardous waste, is a significant issue that CSE tackles through research and advocacy. The organization works on policies to improve waste segregation, composting, and recycling while advocating for policies that reduce the environmental impact of landfills and waste incineration.
  6. Food Safety and Sustainable Agriculture: CSE has conducted extensive research on pesticides and chemicals used in agriculture, pushing for stricter food safety regulations. Its campaigns also focus on promoting organic farming, sustainable agricultural practices, and the reduction of chemical inputs in food production.
  7. Environmental Education and Media: CSE believes in empowering the public with knowledge and thus runs multiple educational and awareness programs. It also publishes the well-known magazine Down to Earth, which covers various environmental and development issues in India and around the world.
  8. Energy Efficiency and Renewable Energy: The organization promotes energy conservation through the adoption of renewable energy technologies, particularly in rural areas. CSE also advocates for policies that encourage the use of solar power, wind energy, and other sustainable energy sources.

Key Programs and Initiatives

CSEโ€™s various programs have earned national and international recognition. Some of its flagship initiatives include:

  1. Green Rating Project (GRP): This project assesses the environmental performance of major industrial sectors in India. The GRP has been instrumental in encouraging industries to adopt cleaner technologies and sustainable practices.
  2. The Right to Clean Air Campaign: One of CSE’s most successful initiatives, the Right to Clean Air Campaign, was pivotal in reducing vehicular pollution in Delhi by pushing for the transition to CNG-powered public transport.
  3. Water Program: CSE’s water program promotes sustainable water management strategies such as rainwater harvesting and wastewater recycling. The Jal Swaraj campaign, which focuses on decentralized water management in rural India, is one of its hallmark programs.
  4. Sustainable Buildings Program: This program works to promote green buildings and sustainable construction practices in India. CSE advocates for energy-efficient buildings and supports policies to incorporate sustainability into the real estate sector.
  5. Community and Capacity Building: CSE offers training programs for government officials, NGOs, and local communities, focusing on various aspects of environmental governance, including waste management, climate change, water conservation, and air quality monitoring.

Global Influence and Recognition

CSE’s work has extended beyond India’s borders, with the organization influencing international environmental discourse, particularly in the areas of climate justice and sustainable development. It is a regular participant in global climate change negotiations and other environmental policy forums.

In 2005, CSEโ€™s founder Anil Agarwal was posthumously awarded the Padma Bhushan, one of Indiaโ€™s highest civilian awards, for his contributions to environmental protection. CSE has also received several awards, including the prestigious Stockholm Water Prize for its work on water management.

Final words

The Centre for Science and Environment plays a critical role in shaping environmental policy and practice in India. Through its rigorous research, advocacy, and public outreach, it has helped to influence government policy, promote sustainable development, and raise awareness on critical environmental issues. The organization continues to evolve in response to new environmental challenges, staying committed to its goal of creating an equitable and sustainable future.

Textual Analysis Method: Understanding and Interpreting Written Content

Daily writing prompt
Do you see yourself as a leader?

By Shashikant Nishant Sharma

Textual analysis is a research method used to interpret and analyze the content of written, spoken, or visual communication. It aims to explore how meaning is constructed and conveyed through texts. The method is widely employed in fields such as literature, media studies, communication, linguistics, and social sciences. By examining the underlying structure, themes, and patterns of a text, textual analysis helps researchers understand the relationships between language, meaning, and culture.

Definition and Purpose of Textual Analysis

Textual analysis involves a systematic examination of a text’s content, context, and form. A text, in this sense, can be anything that communicates meaningโ€”whether it is a written document, a speech, an image, or a media production. The purpose of textual analysis is to uncover how these forms of communication convey particular meanings, ideologies, and cultural values to an audience. Researchers conducting textual analysis examine not only what the text says, but also how it says it and the potential interpretations that readers or viewers might have.

Textual analysis is a research method used to interpret and understand the meaning, themes, and structure of a text. This method is commonly used in disciplines such as literature, media studies, communication, cultural studies, and social sciences to analyze written, visual, or audio texts. Textual analysis allows researchers to critically examine how texts communicate messages, represent ideas, and influence society.

Definition and Purpose

Textual analysis is the process of closely reading a text to uncover its underlying meanings, ideologies, and assumptions. The text in question can be anything that communicates information, including written documents (e.g., books, articles, speeches), visual materials (e.g., advertisements, films, photographs), or oral communication (e.g., interviews, broadcasts).

The purpose of textual analysis is to dissect how a text conveys its message, paying attention to elements such as language, tone, symbolism, structure, and context. Through this method, researchers can reveal the deeper meaning behind a text, how it reflects or shapes culture, and the power relations embedded within it.

Types of Textual Analysis

There are various approaches to textual analysis, each with its unique focus and methodology. Some of the most prominent methods include:

  1. Content Analysis: Content analysis focuses on the quantitative aspect of text. It involves counting the frequency of certain words, phrases, themes, or images to identify patterns within the text. This method is often used in media studies to analyze how often particular themes (e.g., gender roles, political ideologies) are present in news articles, films, or advertisements.
  2. Discourse Analysis: Discourse analysis examines how language is used in a text to create meaning and convey power dynamics. It explores the social and political context of language use, examining how certain groups or ideologies are represented, constructed, or marginalized in the text. This method is often used in analyzing political speeches, news media, or institutional communication.
  3. Narrative Analysis: Narrative analysis focuses on the structure and storytelling elements of a text. It studies how a text is organized, the progression of its plot, and how characters, events, and themes are developed. This method is particularly useful for analyzing novels, films, and other forms of storytelling to understand the impact of narrative choices on the audience.
  4. Semiotic Analysis: Semiotics is the study of signs and symbols within a text and how they create meaning. Semiotic analysis focuses on how visual and linguistic signs (e.g., colors, logos, images, language) in a text are used to communicate messages. It is often used in analyzing advertisements, films, and other media that rely on symbolic communication.

Steps in Conducting Textual Analysis

Conducting textual analysis involves several key steps:

  1. Identifying the Text: The first step is selecting the text to be analyzed. The text should be relevant to the research question and provide sufficient content for analysis. Depending on the research field, the text could be a book, film, advertisement, speech, or news article.
  2. Defining Research Questions: Researchers must establish specific research questions or objectives that guide the analysis. These questions might focus on understanding how a particular theme is represented, uncovering ideological assumptions, or analyzing the role of language in shaping perceptions.
  3. Close Reading of the Text: Textual analysis requires a close reading of the text to examine its structure, language, and other relevant features. Researchers should pay attention to recurring themes, metaphors, tone, and narrative techniques. The goal is to identify patterns or anomalies that reveal how the text constructs meaning.
  4. Contextualizing the Text: Understanding the context in which the text was produced and consumed is crucial for textual analysis. Researchers must consider historical, social, cultural, and political factors that influence the textโ€™s production and reception. This helps to uncover the underlying ideologies and messages within the text.
  5. Interpreting and Analyzing: Once the text has been closely examined and contextualized, researchers interpret the findings, drawing connections between the textโ€™s elements and its broader meaning. They explore how the text aligns with or challenges social norms, conveys particular ideologies, or engages with specific audiences.
  6. Conclusion and Presentation: Finally, researchers draw conclusions about their analysis, linking the textโ€™s internal features to its broader cultural or social significance. The results of the analysis are then presented in a coherent and structured format, whether as an academic paper, report, or presentation.

Advantages of Textual Analysis

  1. Insight into Cultural Representation: Textual analysis helps reveal how texts shape or reflect cultural norms, values, and ideologies. It provides insights into how power, gender, race, and other social categories are constructed and portrayed in texts.
  2. Flexibility Across Disciplines: Textual analysis is a versatile method used across various disciplines, from literature and media studies to sociology and political science. It can be applied to a wide range of texts, making it a valuable tool for interdisciplinary research.
  3. Revealing Ideological Assumptions: Textual analysis uncovers the ideological assumptions embedded in texts, which may not be immediately apparent. It helps to deconstruct dominant narratives and power relations, providing a deeper understanding of social and political dynamics.

Limitations of Textual Analysis

  1. Subjectivity: One of the key limitations of textual analysis is its inherent subjectivity. Since the analysis is interpretive, different researchers might draw different conclusions from the same text. This makes it important for analysts to provide clear justifications for their interpretations.
  2. Limited Generalizability: Textual analysis often focuses on a single text or a small sample of texts, which can limit its generalizability. The findings from analyzing one text may not necessarily apply to others, especially when dealing with texts from different cultural or historical contexts.

Conclusion

The textual analysis method is a powerful tool for understanding how texts communicate meaning, shape ideologies, and influence society. It enables researchers to delve into the layers of language, symbols, and narratives, uncovering hidden meanings and broader social implications. Despite its challenges, textual analysis remains an essential method in various academic disciplines, providing valuable insights into the complex interplay between text and context.

References

Burrows, J. (2004). Textual analysis.ย A companion to digital humanities, 323-347.

Belsey, C. (2013). Textual analysis as a research method.ย Research methods for English studies,ย 2, 160-178.

Carley, K. (1994). Extracting culture through textual analysis.ย Poetics,ย 22(4), 291-312.

Chung, C. K., & Pennebaker, J. W. (2018). Textual analysis. Inย Measurement in social psychologyย (pp. 153-173). Routledge.

Dehalwar, K., & Sharma, S. N. (2023).ย Fundamentals of Research Writing and Uses of Research Methodologies. Edupedia Publications Pvt Ltd.

Dehalwar, K., & Sharma, S. N. (2024). Politics in the Name of Womenโ€™s Reservation.ย Contemporary Voice of Dalit, 2455328X241262562.

Van Dormolen, J. (1986). Textual analysis. Inย Perspectives on mathematics education: Papers submitted by members of the Bacomet groupย (pp. 141-171). Dordrecht: Springer Netherlands.

Sharma, S. N. (2023). Understanding Citations: A Crucial Element of Academic Writing.

Sharma, S. N. Techniques of Meta-Analysis for Unlocking Knowledge.

Teachersโ€™ Day: Celebrating the Pillars of Society

Daily writing prompt
Name the professional athletes you respect the most and why.

By Shashikant Nishant Sharma

Every year, we come together on September 5th to celebrate Teachers’ Day, a day dedicated to recognizing and honoring the contributions of educators. Itโ€™s a time when students and communities express their gratitude to the individuals who play a crucial role in shaping young minds and building the future. In India, this day holds special significance as it marks the birth anniversary of Dr. Sarvepalli Radhakrishnan, an eminent philosopher and the second President of India, who believed in the power of education and the importance of teachers in society.

Why Teachers’ Day is Important

Teachersโ€™ Day serves as a reminder of the profound impact that teachers have on both individuals and society. Teachers are more than just instructors; they are mentors, guides, and role models who nurture studentsโ€™ intellectual, emotional, and social development. They inspire curiosity, foster creativity, and ignite the spark of learning. The lessons they impart often extend beyond textbooks, shaping how students view the world and their role in it.

The importance of teachers goes beyond the classroom walls. They lay the foundation for a productive, informed, and ethical society by helping students develop critical thinking skills, empathy, and resilience. Teachers provide the tools students need to succeed in life, preparing them for a world that is constantly evolving.

Dr. Sarvepalli Radhakrishnan: The Man Behind the Day

Teachersโ€™ Day in India holds a special meaning because of Dr. Sarvepalli Radhakrishnanโ€™s legacy. When his students expressed a desire to celebrate his birthday, he requested that the day be dedicated to honoring all teachers instead. This humble gesture by one of Indiaโ€™s most respected educators set the tone for what the day represents โ€” a tribute to all those who dedicate their lives to teaching.

Dr. Radhakrishnan, known for his wisdom and advocacy of education, believed that teachers are the true architects of society. He viewed education as the key to national development, and teachers as the driving force behind shaping a nationโ€™s character and future.

The Role of Teachers in a Changing World

The role of teachers has evolved significantly in recent years. In todayโ€™s fast-paced, technology-driven world, teachers are tasked with much more than imparting knowledge. They must also equip students with the skills to navigate an increasingly complex and interconnected global landscape. From digital literacy to critical thinking and emotional intelligence, todayโ€™s educators are preparing students for challenges that are still unfolding.

At the same time, teachers must balance the traditional role of fostering personal growth and values. They help students develop into compassionate, responsible individuals who contribute positively to society. Teachers often serve as role models, exemplifying integrity, perseverance, and the importance of lifelong learning.

Challenges Faced by Educators

Despite the vital role they play, teachers face numerous challenges. In many parts of the world, especially in rural or underfunded regions, teachers struggle with a lack of resources. Classrooms may be overcrowded, teaching materials limited, and infrastructure inadequate. These conditions make it difficult for educators to provide the quality education that every student deserves.

Moreover, teachers often face societal pressure and expectations that go beyond the scope of their profession. They are expected to play multiple rolesโ€”educator, counselor, disciplinarian, and sometimes even caregiverโ€”while often receiving limited recognition or support. This imbalance can lead to burnout and demotivation, making it crucial for societies to provide better working conditions and support for their educators.

The COVID-19 pandemic further underscored these challenges. With the sudden shift to online learning, teachers had to quickly adapt to new methods of instruction while ensuring that students remained engaged and motivated. Despite these unprecedented challenges, teachers around the world rose to the occasion, demonstrating their resilience and commitment to education.

Teachersโ€™ Day Celebrations

On Teachersโ€™ Day, students across India participate in a variety of activities to show appreciation for their teachers. Schools and colleges often organize cultural events, speeches, and performances. Itโ€™s common for students to take on the role of teachers for the day, conducting classes and gaining firsthand experience of the challenges and rewards of the teaching profession. This tradition helps students develop a deeper respect for the hard work their teachers do every day.

For teachers, this day is a special opportunity to reflect on their journey, celebrate their achievements, and feel the appreciation from their students. Many schools also use this day to recognize exceptional educators with awards and honors, highlighting their contributions to the field of education.

Teachersโ€™ Day Around the World

While the date and traditions of Teachers’ Day vary across countries, the sentiment remains universal. The recognition of teachers as key figures in shaping the future is acknowledged worldwide. For instance, World Teachers’ Day is celebrated on October 5th globally, under the banner of UNESCO. This international celebration emphasizes the need for better working conditions, training, and recognition for teachers everywhere.

In countries like China, the United States, and Brazil, Teachers’ Day is marked with ceremonies, tributes, and public acknowledgments of the importance of educators. These celebrations highlight the global appreciation for the vital work teachers do, despite the different challenges and educational systems around the world.

Conclusion

Teachersโ€™ Day is not just about celebrating one day out of the year. It is about recognizing the ongoing, invaluable contributions that teachers make every day. Their work has a ripple effect, influencing not only the lives of individual students but also shaping the future of entire communities and nations.

As we celebrate Teachersโ€™ Day, let us remember the challenges teachers face and the support they need to continue doing their essential work. Teachers deserve our respect, appreciation, and above all, the resources to provide every student with the best possible education. They are, without a doubt, the pillars of society, and their influence extends far beyond the walls of the classroom.

References

Ford, C. E. (1984). The influence of speech variety on teachers’ evaluation of students with comparable academic ability.ย TESOL quarterly,ย 18(1), 25-40.

Giridhar, S. (2019).ย Ordinary people, extraordinary teachers: The heroes of real India. Westland.

Hunter, E. J., Bottalico, P., Graetzer, S., Leishman, T. W., Berardi, M. L., Eyring, N. G., … & Whiting, J. K. (2015). Teachers and teaching: speech production accommodations due to changes in the acoustic environment.ย Energy procedia,ย 78, 3102-3107.

Jรณnsdottir, V., Rantala, L., Laukkanen, A. M., & Vilkman, E. (2001). Effects of sound amplification on teachers’ speech while teaching.ย Logopedics Phoniatrics Vocology,ย 26(3), 118-123.

Kingdon, G. G., & Sipahimalani-Rao, V. (2010). Para-teachers in India: Status and impact.ย Economic and Political weekly, 59-67.

Planning Theory Lectures

๐ŸŒ Unlock the Foundations of Urban and Regional Planning!

Dive into the essential theories that shape our cities and communities with our comprehensive Planning Theory Lectures. Whether you’re a student, a professional, or just curious about the intricacies of planning, these lectures are your gateway to understanding the principles that guide urban development.

๐Ÿ“š What You’ll Get:

  • In-Depth PowerPoints: Visually rich slides that break down complex concepts into digestible insights.
  • Detailed PDFs: Comprehensive documents that provide a deeper exploration of planning theories, perfect for study and reference.

๐Ÿ› ๏ธ Key Topics Covered:

  • Evolution of Planning Theories
  • Rational Planning Model
  • Advocacy and Equity Planning
  • Sustainable Development and Planning
  • Critical Urban Theory

๐Ÿ‘จโ€๐Ÿซ Learn from the Best: Our expertly curated content is designed to enhance your knowledge, inspire critical thinking, and equip you with the tools to apply theory to practice.

Don’t miss out on this opportunity to elevate your understanding of urban and regional planning. Download your lectures today and start planning for a better tomorrow!

Key Concepts and Definitions

What is Theory PPT

What is Planning Theory

What is Planning Theory

How to Read Research Papers for Writing Review Papers

Daily writing prompt
If you had to give up one word that you use regularly, what would it be?

by Shashikant Nishant Sharma

Reading research papers effectively is crucial for writing a comprehensive and insightful review paper. Here’s a step-by-step guide to help you navigate through research papers and synthesize the information for your review:

1. Understand the Purpose of a Review Paper

  • A review paper synthesizes existing research on a specific topic, identifies trends, gaps, and inconsistencies, and often suggests future research directions.
  • Your goal is to provide a comprehensive summary and critical analysis of the literature, not just a list of findings.

2. Identify the Core Literature

  • Search for Relevant Papers: Use academic databases like PubMed, Google Scholar, Scopus, and Web of Science to find relevant papers. Keywords and citations from seminal papers can guide you.
  • Select Core Papers: Focus on highly cited papers, recent studies, and seminal works that are central to your topic. These will form the backbone of your review.

3. Skim the Papers for Relevance

  • Read the Abstract: Start with the abstract to get an overview of the paperโ€™s objectives, methods, results, and conclusions. This helps determine if the paper is relevant to your review.
  • Check the Introduction and Conclusion: The introduction provides context and background, while the conclusion summarizes the key findings. These sections help you quickly assess the paperโ€™s significance.

4. Read the Paper in Detail

  • Introduction: Understand the research question, objectives, and hypothesis. This will help you frame your review within the existing literature.
  • Methods: Review the methodology to understand how the research was conducted. This is crucial for assessing the validity of the results.
  • Results: Focus on the data presented, tables, and figures. Take notes on key findings, but be cautious about drawing conclusions based solely on this section.
  • Discussion/Conclusion: This section provides the authorsโ€™ interpretation of the results, their significance, and how they fit into the broader context of the field.
  • References: Scan the references for additional papers that might be relevant to your review.

5. Take Structured Notes

  • Summarize Key Points: For each paper, note down the research question, methods, key findings, strengths, weaknesses, and how it contributes to the field.
  • Identify Themes: Look for recurring themes, theories, methods, or findings across multiple papers. These will help you structure your review.
  • Highlight Gaps: Identify areas where research is lacking or where findings are contradictory. These gaps often suggest opportunities for future research.

6. Organize Your Notes and Synthesize Information

  • Create a Thematic Outline: Organize your notes into themes or subtopics. This will form the structure of your review paper.
  • Synthesize, Donโ€™t Summarize: Instead of simply summarizing each paper, synthesize the information by discussing how different studies relate to each other. Compare and contrast their findings, methods, and implications.
  • Develop a Critical Perspective: Assess the strengths and weaknesses of the studies youโ€™ve reviewed. Consider the robustness of the methodologies, the significance of the findings, and the reliability of the conclusions.

7. Write the Review Paper

  • Introduction: Introduce the topic, explain its significance, and outline the scope of your review. Mention the key themes or issues youโ€™ll address.
  • Main Body: Organize this section according to themes, methodologies, or chronological order. For each theme, discuss the relevant literature, highlight key findings, and provide critical analysis.
  • Conclusion: Summarize the main insights from the review, highlight the gaps in the literature, and suggest directions for future research.
  • References: Include a comprehensive list of all the papers youโ€™ve cited in your review.

8. Revise and Proofread

  • Check for Coherence: Ensure that your review flows logically from one section to the next and that your analysis is cohesive.
  • Edit for Clarity and Conciseness: Ensure that your writing is clear, concise, and free of jargon.
  • Verify References: Double-check that all citations are accurate and that your reference list is complete.

9. Seek Feedback

  • Peer Review: Share your draft with colleagues or mentors for feedback. They can provide valuable insights on the clarity, coherence, and comprehensiveness of your review.
  • Revise Based on Feedback: Incorporate the feedback and refine your paper before final submission.

Conclusion

Reading research papers for writing a review requires a systematic approach to identifying, analyzing, and synthesizing information. By carefully selecting relevant literature, taking structured notes, and critically engaging with the content, you can produce a review paper that provides valuable insights into the current state of research on your chosen topic.

References

Adler, M. J., & Van Doren, C. (1972).ย How to read a book. Simon and Schuster.

Dehaene, S. (2010).ย Reading in the brain: The new science of how we read. Penguin.

Dehalwar, K., & Sharma, S. N. (2023).ย Fundamentals of Research Writing and Uses of Research Methodologies. Edupedia Publications Pvt Ltd.

Eagleton, T. (2011).ย How to read a poem. John Wiley & Sons.

Ellet, W. (2007).ย The case study handbook: How to read, discuss, and write persuasively about cases. Harvard Business Press.

Rolston, D. L. (Ed.). (1990).ย How to read the Chinese novel. Princeton University Press.

Sharma, S. N. Techniques of Meta-Analysis for Unlocking Knowledge.

Sharma, S. N. How to Write a Grant Proposal in an Effective Manner to get Projects.

Exploring the Dimensions of Central Place Theory (Christaller)

Daily writing prompt
What positive emotion do you feel most often?

By Shashikant Nishant Sharma

Introduction to Central Place Theory

Central Place Theory (CPT) is a geographical theory developed by German geographer Walter Christaller in 1933. The theory aims to explain the size, number, and distribution of human settlements in a region, focusing on the relationships between cities (central places) and the surrounding rural areas. It is a fundamental concept in urban geography and regional planning, providing insights into how and why urban centers develop in specific locations and how they are organized spatially.

Core Concepts of Central Place Theory

  1. Central Places: According to Christaller, central places are settlements that provide goods and services to the surrounding population. These places vary in size and function, ranging from small towns offering basic services to large cities with specialized services. The theory categorizes central places based on the range and threshold of the goods and services they provide.
  2. Range and Threshold:
    • Range: The range refers to the maximum distance people are willing to travel to obtain a particular good or service. It depends on the nature of the product; for example, people may travel farther for specialized medical care than for daily groceries.
    • Threshold: The threshold is the minimum population required to sustain a particular service or business. If a central place does not have enough people to support a service, that service will not be provided.
  3. Hierarchy of Central Places: Central Place Theory proposes a hierarchical structure of settlements, with larger, more specialized cities at the top and smaller, less specialized towns and villages at the bottom. Larger cities serve as regional hubs, offering a wide variety of goods and services, while smaller towns provide only basic necessities. This hierarchy is often represented in a hexagonal pattern, with smaller settlements evenly spaced between larger ones.
  4. Hexagonal Spatial Pattern: Christaller’s model uses a hexagonal grid to represent the spatial organization of central places. He chose this shape because it efficiently covers space without overlap or gaps, unlike circular patterns. The hexagons represent the market areas of different central places, where each central place serves as the center of a hexagonal region.
  5. Principles of Central Place Theory: Christaller identified three principles that determine the arrangement of central places:
    • Marketing Principle (K=3): Under this principle, each central place serves three surrounding smaller settlements. This results in a hierarchical network where each larger settlement has a greater range and serves as a market center for smaller ones.
    • Transportation Principle (K=4): This principle focuses on minimizing transportation costs by organizing central places along transportation routes. In this model, each central place serves four surrounding settlements.
    • Administrative Principle (K=7): The administrative principle organizes central places based on political and administrative boundaries, with each central place overseeing seven surrounding settlements.

Applications and Limitations of Central Place Theory

Applications:

  • Urban Planning: Central Place Theory is used to plan the location of new towns, shopping centers, and services by understanding the distribution of existing settlements and market areas.
  • Regional Development: The theory helps in the analysis of regional development patterns, identifying areas that may be underserved or overpopulated in terms of services and infrastructure.
  • Retail Location Analysis: Businesses use the concepts of range and threshold to determine the best locations for new stores or services, ensuring they are accessible to a sufficient customer base.

Limitations:

  • Assumptions of Uniformity: Christaller’s model assumes a flat, featureless landscape with uniform transportation costs and evenly distributed populations, which is rarely the case in reality.
  • Technological Changes: The theory was developed in the 1930s and does not account for modern transportation and communication advancements, which can alter the dynamics of central place relationships.
  • Variability in Consumer Behavior: The model assumes that consumers will always choose the nearest central place for services, but in reality, preferences, brand loyalty, and other factors can influence consumer choices.

Conclusion

Central Place Theory remains a foundational concept in urban and regional geography, despite its limitations. It provides a framework for understanding the spatial organization of settlements and the distribution of services. While modern developments and technologies have modified some of Christaller’s original ideas, the theory’s core principles continue to inform urban planning and regional development practices.

Walled cities and Fortification

Walled cities and fortifications represent one of the most defining features of pre-modern urban planning. From ancient civilizations to the medieval period, cities were often enclosed within defensive walls, gates, and protective systems to safeguard inhabitants from invasions, conflicts, and external threats. These fortified settlements were not only military structures but also shaped the urban form, land use, circulation, and socio-economic life of cities.

This topic is crucial in planning history as it demonstrates how security considerations directly influenced urban morphology.


1. Concept of Walled Cities

A walled city is an urban settlement enclosed by defensive walls, often supplemented with gates, towers, moats, and bastions.

Purpose of Walls:

  • Protection from external attacks
  • Control over entry and exit
  • Assertion of political power
  • Demarcation of urban boundaries

Examples:

  • Jaipur
  • Shahjahanabad
  • Babylon

2. Historical Evolution of Fortifications

2.1 Ancient Period

https://images.openai.com/static-rsc-4/iBpShVUQlSmXohtvVNDVxZnEfmKq3yiyTGyHxTGKhe14i_f-TgyZmTysXFrrcIuJares6slW1JkI3mgXZJrKzmG-cfwO8aaE1vr7XsJ4_lxLpzJtpRPrrkEcvTRygsJChxWtK8GLiwCUuSziTwnmEErwf6JzZQitCJmMbQWzP96CBblFpKbaTropcD4b7xL2?purpose=fullsize
https://images.openai.com/static-rsc-4/joXgcZaMJVeXC2VNOjutawPgmsfD9-iyNJ8do00kXKSzRIY4o--31LtX6gRWqawceuMt0-0DE3ysnpR2los46BWAKU3luD5kZ0v5Dqz4LjaqJvG3LfVi5WJkqDWBniQ3zv0YZ2lS1CxQUEs5mfWMCKTYb4l2atpKm7iZX8FnvosxtdZnbcHoT41RjoxpolEQ?purpose=fullsize
https://images.openai.com/static-rsc-4/O9tU0hTAFmZMaJg6ORCAVF3_Jz1V-MFKF2M4GPidjI0K62N4QBzyNS_ahCrBR0IJxTR3w7yE17b7gvAJ66-isAS0q3iTD2TnxwVLtah2x1vk4Vs34vbPD4BEIAYyepBS2mOxEjwH_n7OXhgWz83ooD92XkzIKGLcmrlMa1pxqqRm6aaBoea77Ac7Q6tert2M?purpose=fullsize

6

  • Early fortifications made of mud, brick, or stone
  • Cities like Babylon and Harappa had defensive walls
  • Focus on basic protection

2.2 Classical Period (Greek and Roman)

https://images.openai.com/static-rsc-4/qUPJZ-HDqttRs8A2d0t2gtBFybBwC8O3JbasPwtGDtX8EuEj8fhEiKgDJb7q9MRJaSH54uVnXJzsgjXCEd3QjQHV_tfySKYE-MkcJBOP8c6RofMOk_Go8HXI5HEvH6arpiZy7r6LYlfVWfAn4MtmWPsbb8-4XIZp7U8w5iLOmE174B-fgnjEWf_nY4F3FKN7?purpose=fullsize
https://images.openai.com/static-rsc-4/Uj_xSsWSBDRm69bAwxyXlCogfGq9aK6IAQYYtQkucwROPGbOy18pD9UhwLnxbbAzCxpTcaSJWGPxUbtpnanXsEdINrEc1P7YRIgbPnWLNnL1UsmGuoXk8kxobcyUMNVhyKQVsiuPWl3tBUkexwBj8pOpCHVuQa3FeNMpTE8J6hGACNV_3AfQwZ3Na6S7A6X9?purpose=fullsize
https://images.openai.com/static-rsc-4/jnq6Of-Jk_63WyP2kOeOA-M-0SyuM8j7eYMk1oW9XxH4e1_JinjrCMSWP-xAkkR61RpRQw0lPoP5VfgwZY44lF31BxGwvgIXY3gK6Ho3Gq5jPy1TUEYlkChFZNyfebhSSATpHbBiUhiDlrStUSW7WMA7yHb4xSvv7T6GxDA9Z9KEP9-saVbWc-jvHNkWjyoI?purpose=fullsize

6

  • Fortified acropolises in Greek cities
  • Roman cities had strong walls and watchtowers
  • Integration of defense with planned layouts

2.3 Medieval Period (Peak of Fortification)

https://images.openai.com/static-rsc-4/Ec_sbteNErA3gdgrI7bJgN8DPzHwzNnZA-PjsIyNrqTBLHPIwYMEhIJjU1KIJLNQ8rYaL0BkoS2ACtDNESfY8METyZuUB1-aarjwzMUbdhqkn6VNAyvqJwMVBuqzrZTa69yT7nEBgfh-l_rYX3K5x3j4b1p1J-vC17I523MZNsVRhE3NNHWVjWS0EiVVtJs2?purpose=fullsize
https://images.openai.com/static-rsc-4/U1_oJyp23ajiIEYHW-HYbomrYf_d-X5aQ_JyOVcHgvNnV7UFV5psG0V4T7u2_I7DXrMcAgJ7ckdahnviP_hGP__v1sE7XlNuxM1HBPCTy-o8HWoeXeiDIULIoA5LToMwRbPwrafdQsPFuDftQRvJ2GJwSCdN-VNvgT8wT-ebJVPH3BjqVX1nDwWBXwI3DQYo?purpose=fullsize
https://images.openai.com/static-rsc-4/8MiX2L0gc9bsgA3-U8Z1sak74F7g9Vr-meP23BXf38UM9G1hkfSsqtPbN4Q8lZGiCAKhWe7P2HNupISXRRM-PEHZHloFjCVWzRjcYhHhsvDkymKgw67Xx2-4p9oTTgJf9ri1b8L_3Bnpsbdj-7nGpQftfRHeg8XuDBVmARKp6Ay7DxikfUTG7zzN07zwZ-Ki?purpose=fullsize

7

  • Extensive use of walls, moats, and bastions
  • Cities designed primarily for defense
  • Multiple layers of fortification

2.4 Early Modern Period

https://images.openai.com/static-rsc-4/F8NQc0nX50LmHzstLF_VWrc4hmZvuyKbF8VdadiLph8xDzyStm4jRap0bGx211NBv3K5CyIg-neIHe_SpiQZ79AEFhK5LKXBoswA8BjWu5ntghOYy1GOcG6uFWZdPOrI95R4E5l1mWThu0yRiZikCIvuijd-YP_C-7xHhxftBJUafeq1-4JeQyoGnDHSQRRd?purpose=fullsize
https://images.openai.com/static-rsc-4/8ZOgazsqjc8Y9jhK4onhk5ZKDc0P3seDMXM46RtgFY_GjjesAljg30myS5OVrT3FKMKv7pYs6q7g7GG2--XgoUY7fT6aHwcBJSc71UGkyoE8-mTjEDj6Bh-mvebnypzzZ6wxxkjMAGSiwC2ZVln45FPhxmFOmKoWmlOSz1Xn4W4dx309UUiDw1cyc5_ZGmas?purpose=fullsize
https://images.openai.com/static-rsc-4/f5lwIHzYnWJb5EdilETjrQK99b708PYz2sJ50WZjGC6rrx6DLFyuuEjCy6YJMw6VOHiNadV0MlBLgAV4Hf4mNTo-Pcc8bYgd6rVIVuXpZjBFz4iiXa9ee2sfuUMpQHkcLGXqB098q6CJoJ8FcafXntohknmPdpsKnz-yx6xVxC-Y1LmjyUmnAmCMJqwhP-8L?purpose=fullsize

6

  • Development of star-shaped forts due to gunpowder
  • Geometric bastion systems
  • Improved defensive technology

3. Components of Fortification

3.1 City Walls

  • Thick and high barriers made of stone or brick
  • Primary defense structure

3.2 Gates

  • Controlled entry and exit points
  • Often heavily guarded
  • Example: gates of Jaipur

3.3 Bastions and Towers

  • Projections from walls for surveillance and defense
  • Allowed crossfire against attackers

3.4 Moats

  • Water-filled trenches around walls
  • Prevented direct attacks

3.5 Citadel or Fort

  • Inner fortified area for rulers and administration
  • Last line of defense

4. Planning Characteristics of Walled Cities

4.1 Compact Urban Form

https://images.openai.com/static-rsc-4/rC7N9l8zpIhAJ583oFfSP1BDGsl7d39xXjh7l0M_k6ggduRjfWFl8qJnf-prhu1kNGAwqQSfnTAhs00V9ebd7DKQnefQ3o2vSvhxmzoIrJmXBmV1tYxBg8aY88p-AMaPvpnKAi7qBmHS1LsgzxyoEOAO3UqVWiK4s-_zTdHXyyhlpYUzr-YOkVrG7NLKbvtv?purpose=fullsize
https://images.openai.com/static-rsc-4/-K3xN1CJYAhWe_RxqTrKd8C-lRE0WTScMnMXrKyCobHciw1uu7sZn0XHjNBiRR2jJd2c5BzIO1ZcMhgO0N3tcyr1eHUbC0K9JwD42dlvuVdWpt8C2wbViYD13ri87EWUlFR-0Q3kbU5qC2nO1oDC2OLKARGiaQmNClJDA0--qYYreobll1TuTFbu9AXpdtNF?purpose=fullsize
https://images.openai.com/static-rsc-4/LzhNqI_VME4EZhdWihKHdCdnTTiyWtTeGWrsX3nO4GwkKoxAI0NhkHCF1eSlOvnurKpqMafscDMRTa7GjwdPaKF7FQ8l1Qz0Lh_nrZUm_fXqIbthyWPpTqsXF085CDc_uSGh9yt-po7h6e3dhkbFDrIFTlVOlxgvoVhIP2XPkYu97mmL42nBUHoRWpa7sNXX?purpose=fullsize

7

  • Limited space within walls
  • High-density development
  • Efficient land use

4.2 Controlled Expansion

  • Growth restricted by walls
  • Expansion occurred by building new walls or suburbs outside

4.3 Hierarchical Street Network

https://images.openai.com/static-rsc-4/vh3HQ8oQL1XW1lj9acsBu4lkRMq7Um38bKMCnkdCaZ2jxwSRxshlAxe6R6uSlZtvUd7KG9PxakQNQhqdDbvT-B5_Q_rpBzfxZUCdOxDwoPdKuRsuAH45u6kRA5Z6Ks1E1PFengQ8fyDXDld0uVs8NnEsb4bqLJCj3QMxZQyPaoaR5a70SImQsG7HcfehGMCQ?purpose=fullsize
https://images.openai.com/static-rsc-4/QCzY0gC57RUFNKKYhTsVBe_tER5aOjHAzr8k6pRbs83sV6ppr8ceyH0hln3I2Qv6vesR8eKtu6u8Q6-dsWxqduX7-fQxY9YwEIIVwRxjahGlbD-ciI2dA3GLA2DxCCj0gTaNnQsjHyzdEJ9O2BkhIeYULpBgJXw8SXLozxlVPCbY_uRp62RWpjH082y3GEyG?purpose=fullsize
https://images.openai.com/static-rsc-4/qbtzkkk6ziJCL7dEsCPfTQW5LBNlv4RyT3bX_7kasjBVV2F_uUbqs-bU5jQ6HkZF6boOgrh18qxxNr_0sCQ7fbzfmBXoLYJtx8TTHhcZTAgHMROf5znJRwu40Hr4d3uqhEgbGnwQCdZyHuGdRW4a8QIVI52Qn8Q6xoe9egtc9MzLVba8qYwUWNTCwjrqltP2?purpose=fullsize

5

  • Main roads connecting gates to central areas
  • Secondary and tertiary streets branching inward

4.4 Central Core Development

  • Palace, temple, mosque, or administrative center at core
  • Markets located along main streets

4.5 Functional Zoning

  • Separation of residential, commercial, and administrative areas
  • Often influenced by social hierarchy

5. Examples of Walled Cities (Indian Context)

5.1 Jaipur

  • Planned walled city with grid layout
  • Nine-square mandala planning
  • Controlled gates and wide streets

5.2 Shahjahanabad

  • Fortified Mughal capital
  • Red Fort as central citadel
  • Chandni Chowk as main axis

5.3 Jodhpur

  • Fort city with Mehrangarh Fort
  • Dense settlement within walls
  • Narrow streets for climate and defense

6. Planning Principles of Walled Cities

The major principles include:

6.1 Defense-Oriented Planning

  • Security as the primary objective

6.2 Compactness

  • Efficient use of limited space

6.3 Controlled Access

  • Limited and monitored entry points

6.4 Hierarchical Organization

  • Clear structure of streets and land use

6.5 Integration of Functions

  • Residential, commercial, and administrative areas within walls

6.6 Adaptation to Topography

  • Hill forts, river-based defenses

7. Advantages of Walled Cities

  • Enhanced security and protection
  • Strong sense of community
  • Efficient land use
  • Clear urban boundaries

8. Limitations of Walled Cities

  • Restricted expansion
  • Overcrowding and congestion
  • Poor sanitation in dense areas
  • Difficulty in accommodating modern infrastructure

9. Decline of Fortifications

Fortifications declined due to:

  • Development of modern warfare (artillery)
  • Political stability
  • Expansion of cities beyond walls
  • Industrialization and transport development

Walls were often demolished or converted into roads and public spaces.


10. Relevance to Modern Planning

Although walls are no longer required for defense, their planning principles remain relevant:

  • Compact development โ†’ Supports sustainable urban form
  • Controlled access โ†’ Used in gated communities and secure zones
  • Defined boundaries โ†’ Urban growth management
  • Walkability โ†’ Dense, mixed-use neighborhoods

In TOD context:

  • Compact walled cities resemble high-density, walkable urban forms

Conclusion

Walled cities and fortifications played a crucial role in shaping the urban landscape of ancient and medieval times. They reflect a period when security, control, and defense were central to planning decisions. These cities developed compact, efficient, and well-structured urban forms within constrained boundaries.

While modern cities no longer rely on walls for protection, the principles derived from fortified settlementsโ€”such as compactness, hierarchy, and controlled growthโ€”continue to influence contemporary urban planning. Studying walled cities provides valuable insights into how urban form evolves in response to external pressures and internal needs, offering lessons for creating resilient and well-organized cities today.

List of Top Social Scientists

Daily writing prompt
List the people you admire and look to for advice…

By Shashikant Nishant Sharma

list of ten influential social scientists who have made significant contributions to their respective fields:

Photo by Luis Quintero on Pexels.com
  1. Max Weber (1864-1920): A German sociologist, Weber is known for his work on the rationalization of society, the Protestant Ethic and the Spirit of Capitalism, and his theory of social action. He was instrumental in developing sociology as a distinct academic discipline.
  2. Karl Marx (1818-1883): A German philosopher, economist, and political theorist, Marx is best known for his analysis of capitalism and his theories on class struggle, labor, and historical materialism. His ideas laid the foundation for modern communism and have had a profound influence on sociology and political science.
  3. ร‰mile Durkheim (1858-1917): A French sociologist, Durkheim is considered one of the founding figures of sociology. He pioneered the study of social facts, collective consciousness, and the division of labor in society. His work laid the groundwork for functionalist theory in sociology.
  4. Sigmund Freud (1856-1939): An Austrian neurologist and the founder of psychoanalysis, Freud revolutionized the understanding of human psychology. His theories on the unconscious mind, defense mechanisms, and the interpretation of dreams have had a lasting impact on psychology, psychiatry, and cultural studies.
  5. Michel Foucault (1926-1984): A French philosopher and social theorist, Foucault is known for his critiques of power, knowledge, and the mechanisms of social control. His work on institutions such as prisons, asylums, and sexuality has been influential in fields ranging from sociology to cultural studies.
  6. Jane Addams (1860-1935): An American social worker, feminist, and suffragist, Addams co-founded the Hull House in Chicago, a settlement house that provided social services to immigrants and the urban poor. She was a pioneer in the field of social work and an advocate for social justice and women’s rights.
  7. W.E.B. Du Bois (1868-1963): An American sociologist, historian, and civil rights activist, Du Bois was one of the founders of the NAACP and a leading figure in the fight against racial inequality. His seminal work, “The Souls of Black Folk,” addressed issues of race, identity, and social justice in America.
  8. Margaret Mead (1901-1978): An American cultural anthropologist, Mead is best known for her studies of non-Western cultures, particularly in the South Pacific. Her work challenged conventional notions of gender and sexuality and highlighted the cultural variability of human behavior.
  9. Pierre Bourdieu (1930-2002): A French sociologist, Bourdieu is known for his theories on cultural capital, habitus, and social reproduction. His work explored the ways in which social structures shape individual behavior and cultural practices, and has had a significant impact on fields such as sociology, anthropology, and education.
  10. Amartya Sen (1933-present): An Indian economist and philosopher, Sen is known for his work on welfare economics, social choice theory, and development economics. He has made significant contributions to our understanding of poverty, inequality, and human development, and was awarded the Nobel Prize in Economics in 1998.

These social scientists have each left a lasting legacy in their respective fields and have contributed to our understanding of society, culture, and human behavior.

Tips of writing a Good Resume for job

Daily writing prompt
What makes you nervous?

Creating a compelling resume is crucial in the job application process, as it’s often your first opportunity to make a good impression on potential employers. A well-crafted resume can help you stand out from the competition and secure an interview. Here are some practical tips for writing an effective resume:

Photo by Sora Shimazaki on Pexels.com

1. Tailor Your Resume to the Job

Customize your resume for each job you apply to. Highlight the skills and experiences that are most relevant to the job description. Use keywords from the job listing to improve the chances of your resume passing through Applicant Tracking Systems (ATS).

2. Keep It Concise

Limit your resume to one or two pages depending on your experience. Be concise and to the point. Employers often skim resumes quickly, so make sure your most relevant accomplishments are easy to find.

3. Use a Professional Format

Choose a clean, professional layout. Stick to traditional fonts like Arial, Times New Roman, or Calibri, and keep the font size between 10 and 12 points. Use bullet points to organize information and make it easily digestible.

4. Start with a Strong Summary

Include a brief summary at the top of your resume that outlines your qualifications and career goals. This should be tailored to align with the job youโ€™re applying for, showing how your goals and skills match the needs of the employer.

5. Highlight Your Achievements

Focus on your achievements rather than just your duties. Use action verbs such as “developed,” “led,” and “enhanced” to describe your responsibilities and accomplishments. Where possible, quantify your achievements with figures and facts to show the impact of your work.

6. Include Relevant Skills

List skills that are relevant to the job. Include both hard skills (like software proficiency or languages) and soft skills (like communication or leadership). This section can help you stand out if you possess skills that are highly desirable for the position.

7. Education and Certifications

Include your education and any relevant certifications or training. List the degree, the institution where you obtained it, and the graduation year if itโ€™s within the last five years. For recent graduates, education can be listed above professional experience.

8. Professional Experience

List your professional experience in reverse chronological order, starting with your most recent job. Include your title, the name of the company, and the dates of your employment. For each position, provide a brief list of your responsibilities and achievements.

9. Use a Cover Letter to Add Context

Always include a cover letter unless specifically instructed not to. This is your chance to explain your resume in more detail and personalize your application. The cover letter can address points that your resume doesnโ€™t, such as employment gaps or major career shifts.

10. Proofread

Errors can make you look careless. Thoroughly proofread your resume for spelling and grammar mistakes. Consider having a friend or a professional review it to catch errors you might have missed.

11. Include Volunteer Work or Side Projects

If relevant, include volunteer work, side projects, or hobbies that demonstrate skills applicable to the job. This can be particularly useful for candidates who lack formal work experience but have relevant skills developed elsewhere.

By following these tips, you can create a resume that not only showcases your skills and experiences but also aligns closely with the job you are applying for, increasing your chances of landing your next job interview.

Launching Your Culinary Dream: Starting a Restaurant as a Startup Venture

Daily writing prompt
What is your favorite restaurant?

By Shashikant Nishant Sharma

In the entrepreneurial realm, few endeavors are as enticing and challenging as launching a restaurant. Beyond simply serving food, a restaurant embodies a fusion of creativity, hospitality, and business acumen. While the journey may be demanding, the rewardsโ€”both personal and professionalโ€”can be immensely gratifying. For those with a passion for food and a vision for culinary innovation, starting a restaurant as a startup venture offers a thrilling opportunity to turn dreams into reality.

Photo by Igor Starkov on Pexels.com

Who Can Start a Restaurant?

The beauty of the restaurant industry lies in its inclusivity. Anyone with a passion for food, a keen eye for detail, and a willingness to learn can embark on the journey of restaurant ownership. Whether you’re a seasoned chef looking to showcase your culinary skills, a hospitality enthusiast eager to create memorable dining experiences, or an entrepreneur with a vision for a unique dining concept, the restaurant industry welcomes diversity and creativity.

When to Start?

While there’s no one-size-fits-all answer to the question of when to start a restaurant, several key factors can influence the timing of your venture:

  1. Market Opportunity: Conduct thorough market research to identify gaps and opportunities in the local culinary landscape. Are there unmet consumer needs or emerging food trends that you can capitalize on? Timing your restaurant launch to coincide with market demand can increase your chances of success.
  2. Financial Preparedness: Starting a restaurant requires significant financial investment, from leasing a space and purchasing equipment to hiring staff and marketing your concept. Ensure that you have a solid financial plan in place, including startup capital and contingency funds to weather any unforeseen challenges.
  3. Experience and Expertise: While prior experience in the food and hospitality industry is beneficial, it’s not necessarily a prerequisite for starting a restaurant. However, having a foundational understanding of culinary techniques, food safety regulations, and business management principles can position you for success.
  4. Location and Timing: The location of your restaurant and the timing of its launch can significantly impact its success. Consider factors such as foot traffic, demographic trends, and local competition when selecting a location and determining the optimal time to open your doors to the public.

Key Considerations for Startup Success

Launching a restaurant as a startup venture requires careful planning, meticulous attention to detail, and a willingness to adapt to changing circumstances. Here are some key considerations to keep in mind:

  1. Crafting a Unique Concept: Differentiation is key in a competitive market. Develop a distinct culinary concept or theme that sets your restaurant apart and resonates with your target audience.
  2. Building a Strong Team: Surround yourself with a dedicated team of professionals who share your passion for hospitality and commitment to excellence. From chefs and kitchen staff to front-of-house personnel and managerial roles, hiring the right talent is essential for success.
  3. Strategic Marketing and Branding: Establishing a strong brand identity and effectively marketing your restaurant is crucial for attracting customers and building a loyal following. Leverage social media, local advertising, and word-of-mouth referrals to create buzz and generate excitement around your concept.
  4. Delivering Exceptional Quality: Consistently delivering high-quality food, impeccable service, and memorable dining experiences is paramount. Focus on sourcing fresh, seasonal ingredients, maintaining cleanliness and food safety standards, and exceeding customer expectations at every touchpoint.

Conclusion

Starting a restaurant as a startup venture is a bold and rewarding undertaking that requires passion, perseverance, and a willingness to embrace uncertainty. By carefully assessing market opportunities, planning strategically, and prioritizing excellence in every aspect of your operation, you can transform your culinary dream into a thriving reality. Whether you’re a seasoned chef, a first-time entrepreneur, or an aspiring restaurateur with a vision for innovation, the journey of restaurant ownership offers endless possibilities for creativity, growth, and fulfillment.

References

Gheribi, E. (2017). Innovation strategies in restaurant business.ย Econ. Organ. Enterp,ย 11, 125-135.

Gupta, M. (2019). A Study on Impact of Online Food delivery app on Restaurant Business special reference to zomato and swiggy.ย International Journal of Research and Analytical Reviews,ย 6(1), 889-893.

Hwang, J., & Zhao, J. (2010). Factors influencing customer satisfaction or dissatisfaction in the restaurant business using AnswerTree methodology.ย Journal of Quality Assurance in Hospitality & Tourism,ย 11(2), 93-110.

Lundberg, D. E. (1989).ย The hotel and restaurant business(No. Ed. 5, p. 364pp).

Unveiling the Benefits of Turnitin Software in Academic Writing

Daily writing prompt
Where do you see yourself in 10 years?

By Shashikant Nishant Sharma

In the contemporary landscape of academia, where originality and authenticity reign supreme, Turnitin emerges as a beacon of integrity and excellence. This innovative software has revolutionized the way educators and students approach writing assignments, offering a plethora of benefits that extend far beyond mere plagiarism detection. From enhancing academic integrity to fostering critical thinking skills, Turnitin stands as a formidable ally in the pursuit of scholarly excellence.

Photo by Yan Krukau on Pexels.com

1. Plagiarism Detection and Prevention:

At its core, Turnitin is renowned for its robust plagiarism detection capabilities. By comparing students’ submissions against an extensive database of academic sources, journals, and previously submitted work, Turnitin effectively identifies instances of plagiarism, whether intentional or unintentional. This feature not only promotes academic integrity but also educates students about the importance of citing sources and respecting intellectual property rights.

2. Feedback and Improvement:

Turnitin’s feedback mechanism empowers educators to provide comprehensive and constructive feedback to students. Through its intuitive interface, instructors can highlight areas of concern, offer suggestions for improvement, and commend originality. This personalized feedback loop fosters a culture of continuous improvement, encouraging students to refine their writing skills and refine their understanding of academic conventions.

3. Enhanced Writing Skills:

By encouraging students to submit drafts through Turnitin prior to final submission, educators facilitate the development of essential writing skills. Through the process of revising and refining their work based on Turnitin’s feedback, students hone their ability to articulate ideas clearly, structure arguments logically, and cite sources accurately. This iterative approach to writing cultivates critical thinking skills and equips students with the tools necessary for success in academia and beyond.

4. Deterrent Against Academic Dishonesty:

The mere presence of Turnitin serves as a powerful deterrent against academic dishonesty. Knowing that their work will undergo rigorous scrutiny by Turnitin’s algorithm, students are less inclined to engage in unethical practices such as plagiarism or contract cheating. This proactive approach to academic integrity not only upholds the reputation of educational institutions but also instills a sense of ethical responsibility in students, preparing them for the ethical challenges they may encounter in their professional careers.

5. Data-Driven Insights:

Turnitin generates comprehensive reports that provide educators with valuable insights into students’ writing habits, trends, and areas of weakness. By analyzing these reports, instructors can tailor their teaching strategies to address specific needs, implement targeted interventions, and track students’ progress over time. This data-driven approach to instruction promotes personalized learning and empowers educators to make informed decisions that maximize student success.

6. Streamlined Grading Process:

Incorporating Turnitin into the grading process streamlines workflow for educators, allowing them to efficiently evaluate student submissions, provide feedback, and assign grades within a centralized platform. This seamless integration of assessment and feedback not only saves time but also ensures consistency and fairness in grading practices.

7. Global Reach and Accessibility:

Turnitin transcends geographical boundaries, making it accessible to educators and students worldwide. Whether in traditional classrooms or virtual learning environments, Turnitin’s cloud-based platform facilitates seamless collaboration and communication, enabling educators to engage with students regardless of their location. This global reach fosters a diverse and inclusive academic community, where ideas can be shared, challenged, and refined on a global scale.

In conclusion, Turnitin software has emerged as an indispensable tool in the realm of academic writing, offering a myriad of benefits that extend far beyond plagiarism detection. From promoting academic integrity to fostering critical thinking skills, Turnitin empowers educators and students alike to strive for excellence in scholarly pursuits. By leveraging the innovative features of Turnitin, educational institutions can cultivate a culture of integrity, innovation, and lifelong learning that prepares students for success in the ever-evolving landscape of academia and beyond.

References

Batane, T. (2010). Turning to Turnitin to fight plagiarism among university students.ย Journal of Educational Technology & Society,ย 13(2), 1-12.

Dahl, S. (2007). Turnitinยฎ: The student perspective on using plagiarism detection software.ย Active Learning in Higher Education,ย 8(2), 173-191.

Heckler, N. C., Rice, M., & Hobson Bryan, C. (2013). Turnitin systems: A deterrent to plagiarism in college classrooms.ย Journal of Research on Technology in Education,ย 45(3), 229-248.

Mphahlele, A., & McKenna, S. (2019). The use of turnitin in the higher education sector: Decoding the myth.ย Assessment & Evaluation in Higher Education,ย 44(7), 1079-1089.

Rolfe, V. (2011). Can Turnitin be used to provide instant formative feedback?.ย British Journal of Educational Technology,ย 42(4), 701-710.

Streamlining Payroll Processes: A Review of the Top Payroll Management Software

Daily writing prompt
What are 5 everyday things that bring you happiness?

By Shashikant Nishant Sharma

In today’s fast-paced business landscape, managing payroll efficiently is paramount for businesses of all sizes. Payroll management software has emerged as a crucial tool to streamline payroll processes, minimize errors, and ensure compliance with tax regulations. Here, we delve into the top payroll management software solutions that have garnered acclaim for their features, usability, and effectiveness.

Photo by Tima Miroshnichenko on Pexels.com
  1. ADP Workforce Now: ADP Workforce Now is a comprehensive payroll solution suitable for businesses of all sizes. It offers robust features including payroll processing, tax compliance, time tracking, benefits administration, and HR management. Its user-friendly interface, customizable reporting tools, and mobile accessibility make it a favorite among HR professionals.
  2. Gusto: Gusto is a cloud-based payroll software designed for small to mid-sized businesses. Known for its simplicity and intuitive interface, Gusto automates payroll processing, tax filing, and employee benefits administration. It also offers employee self-service tools, such as online pay stubs and direct deposit setup, enhancing employee satisfaction.
  3. Paychex Flex: Paychex Flex is a scalable payroll and HR solution suitable for businesses of all sizes. It offers features such as payroll processing, tax administration, time and attendance tracking, and employee benefits management. Paychex Flex’s robust reporting capabilities and dedicated support make it a reliable choice for businesses seeking comprehensive payroll solutions.
  4. QuickBooks Payroll: QuickBooks Payroll is an integrated payroll solution offered by Intuit, tailored for small businesses. It seamlessly integrates with QuickBooks accounting software, simplifying payroll processing and ensuring accuracy in financial reporting. With features like automatic tax calculations, employee self-service portal, and mobile accessibility, QuickBooks Payroll streamlines payroll management for small business owners.
  5. Workday HCM: Workday HCM is a cloud-based human capital management solution that includes payroll functionality. It offers a unified platform for payroll processing, HR management, talent acquisition, and workforce planning. Workday’s intuitive interface, advanced analytics, and scalability make it a preferred choice for large enterprises looking to streamline their payroll and HR operations.

Each of these payroll management software solutions comes with its own set of features, pricing plans, and target audiences. While ADP Workforce Now and Paychex Flex cater to businesses of all sizes, Gusto and QuickBooks Payroll are tailored for small to mid-sized businesses. Workday HCM, on the other hand, targets large enterprises with complex payroll and HR needs.

In conclusion, selecting the right payroll management software depends on the specific needs and size of your business. Whether you prioritize ease of use, scalability, or comprehensive HR functionality, the top payroll management software solutions reviewed here offer reliable options to streamline your payroll processes and ensure compliance with regulatory requirements.

References

Arora, M., & Chakrabarti, D. (2013, August). Application of business intelligence: A case on payroll management. Inย 2013 International Symposium on Computational and Business Intelligenceย (pp. 73-76). IEEE.

Mahajan, K., Shukla, S., & Soni, N. (2015). A Review of Computerized Payroll System.ย International journal of advanced research in computer and communication engineering,ย 4(1), 67-70.

Shukla, V. K., & Bhandari, N. (2019, February). Conceptual framework for enhancing payroll management and attendance monitoring system through RFID and biometric. Inย 2019 Amity International Conference on Artificial Intelligence (AICAI)ย (pp. 188-192). IEEE.

Zhao, M., & Rabiei, K. (2022). Feasibility of implementing the human resource payroll management system based on cloud computing.ย Kybernetes,ย 52(4), 1245-1268.

Top Management Skills for Young Professionals

Daily writing prompt
Describe something you learned in high school.

In today’s dynamic and competitive work environment, young professionals face unique challenges as they navigate their careers and strive for success. Beyond technical expertise, the ability to effectively manage oneself and others is crucial for advancement in the corporate world. Here, we explore the top management skills essential for young professionals to thrive in their roles and emerge as effective leaders.

Photo by Jonathan Borba on Pexels.com

1. Communication Skills

Effective communication lies at the heart of successful leadership. Young professionals must master the art of conveying ideas clearly, both verbally and in writing. This includes active listening, articulating thoughts persuasively, and fostering open dialogue within teams. By honing their communication skills, young leaders can build trust, resolve conflicts, and inspire others to action.

2. Emotional Intelligence

Emotional intelligence (EQ) is the ability to understand and manage emotions, both in oneself and others. Young professionals with high EQ can empathize with colleagues, adapt to diverse personalities, and navigate interpersonal relationships with finesse. By cultivating self-awareness, self-regulation, and empathy, they can foster a positive work environment and lead by example.

3. Adaptability

In today’s rapidly evolving business landscape, adaptability is a prized trait. Young professionals must embrace change, stay flexible in their approach, and continuously learn and grow. Whether faced with new technologies, market trends, or organizational restructuring, adaptable leaders remain resilient and resourceful, turning challenges into opportunities for innovation and growth.

4. Decision-Making

Effective decision-making is a hallmark of strong leadership. Young professionals must develop the ability to analyze complex situations, weigh options thoughtfully, and make timely and informed decisions. By leveraging data, seeking input from stakeholders, and considering long-term consequences, they can mitigate risks and drive strategic outcomes that align with organizational goals.

5. Problem-Solving

Problem-solving is an essential skill for overcoming obstacles and driving progress. Young professionals should approach challenges with a proactive mindset, breaking down problems into manageable components and exploring creative solutions. By fostering a culture of innovation and collaboration, they can harness the collective intelligence of their teams to address complex issues and drive sustainable change.

6. Team Leadership

Effective team leadership requires the ability to inspire, motivate, and empower others to achieve common objectives. Young professionals must cultivate a collaborative spirit, build cohesive teams, and leverage individual strengths to maximize collective performance. By setting clear goals, providing constructive feedback, and fostering a culture of accountability, they can unlock the full potential of their teams and drive results.

Conclusion

In conclusion, mastering top management skills is essential for young professionals seeking to excel in their careers and emerge as effective leaders. By prioritizing communication, emotional intelligence, adaptability, decision-making, problem-solving, and team leadership, they can navigate the complexities of the modern workplace with confidence and drive meaningful impact. As they continue to refine these skills and lead by example, they will not only achieve personal success but also inspire others to reach their full potential in the pursuit of organizational excellence.

Embracing Individuality: Exploring Personal Traits That Make Us Unique

Daily writing prompt
Which aspects do you think makes a person unique?

By Shashikant Nishant Sharma

In a world that often seeks conformity, it’s the unique personal traits that truly distinguish one individual from another. Each person carries within them a blend of characteristics, quirks, and experiences that shape their identity and set them apart from the crowd. These traits not only define who we are but also influence how we navigate through life’s challenges and opportunities. Let’s delve into some of these personal traits that contribute to our individuality:

Photo by Julia Larson on Pexels.com
  1. Personality: At the core of our uniqueness lies our personality โ€“ the amalgamation of traits, behaviors, and patterns of thinking that make us who we are. Whether we’re introverted or extroverted, analytical or creative, our personality traits dictate how we interact with others and perceive the world around us.
  2. Passions and Interests: Our passions and interests are like fingerprints, distinguishing us from one another. Whether it’s a love for literature, a fascination with technology, or a dedication to a particular hobby, these interests shape our experiences, relationships, and life pursuits.
  3. Values and Beliefs: Our values and beliefs serve as guiding principles that influence our decisions, actions, and interactions with others. Whether rooted in religion, culture, or personal experiences, these convictions shape our moral compass and contribute to our sense of identity.
  4. Strengths and Weaknesses: Each of us possesses a unique set of strengths and weaknesses that influence how we approach challenges and opportunities. Whether it’s a talent for problem-solving, a knack for empathy, or areas where we struggle, embracing these traits allows us to harness our potential and grow as individuals.
  5. Life Experiences: Our life experiences โ€“ from triumphs to tribulations โ€“ shape our perspectives, resilience, and outlook on life. Whether it’s traveling to new places, overcoming adversity, or forming meaningful relationships, these experiences enrich our lives and contribute to our personal growth.
  6. Communication Style: How we communicate โ€“ whether through words, body language, or expressions โ€“ reflects our unique communication style. Whether we’re eloquent speakers, attentive listeners, or adept at nonverbal cues, our communication style influences how we connect with others and express ourselves.
  7. Creativity and Imagination: Creativity is the spark that ignites innovation and originality, allowing us to think outside the box and approach problems from new perspectives. Whether expressed through art, music, writing, or problem-solving, our creativity sets us apart and infuses our lives with richness and depth.
  8. Sense of Humor: A sense of humor is a unique trait that brings lightness and joy to our interactions and relationships. Whether we’re quick-witted, sarcastic, or have a penchant for puns, our sense of humor adds flavor to our personalities and helps us navigate life’s ups and downs with grace and laughter.
  9. Empathy and Compassion: Empathy and compassion are qualities that connect us to others on a deeper level, fostering understanding, kindness, and empathy. Whether it’s offering a listening ear, extending a helping hand, or showing empathy towards others’ struggles, these traits enrich our relationships and make the world a better place.
  10. Resilience and Adaptability: Resilience and adaptability are essential traits that enable us to weather life’s storms and thrive in the face of adversity. Whether it’s bouncing back from setbacks, embracing change, or navigating uncertain times, these traits showcase our strength and resilience in the face of challenges.

In essence, it’s the unique combination of these personal traits that makes each of us a one-of-a-kind individual. Embracing our individuality allows us to celebrate our differences, connect with others authentically, and contribute our unique perspectives and talents to the world around us. So let us cherish our personal traits, for they are the threads that weave the tapestry of our identity and make life a colorful and enriching journey.

References

Blickle, G. (1996). Personality traits, learning stratigies, and performance.ย European Journal of personality,ย 10(5), 337-352.

Borghans, L., Duckworth, A. L., Heckman, J. J., & Ter Weel, B. (2008). The economics and psychology of personality traits.ย Journal of human Resources,ย 43(4), 972-1059.

Goldberg, L. R. (1993). The structure of phenotypic personality traits.ย American psychologist,ย 48(1), 26.

Hampson, S. E. (2012). Personality processes: Mechanisms by which personality traits โ€œget outside the skinโ€.ย Annual review of psychology,ย 63, 315-339.

Matthews, G., Deary, I. J., & Whiteman, M. C. (2003).ย Personality traits. Cambridge University Press.

Olver, J. M., & Mooradian, T. A. (2003). Personality traits and personal values: A conceptual and empirical integration.ย Personality and individual differences,ย 35(1), 109-125.

Sharma, S. N. (2016). Introduction to Sociology.ย New Perspectives in Sociology and Allied Fields,ย 1.

Navigating the Waters: The Importance of Stormwater Management

Daily writing prompt
If you could have something named after you, what would it be?

By Shashikant Nishant Sharma

Stormwater, often overlooked in the grand scheme of environmental concerns, plays a crucial role in maintaining the health of our ecosystems and communities. As urbanization continues to expand and climate change exacerbates weather patterns, effective stormwater management becomes increasingly imperative. In this article, we delve into the significance of stormwater management, its challenges, and innovative solutions shaping its future.

Photo by Arthur Shuraev on Pexels.com

The Significance of Stormwater Management: Stormwater refers to precipitation that flows over land surfaces, collecting pollutants, debris, and sediment along its path before entering water bodies. Uncontrolled stormwater runoff poses various threats to the environment and public health, including erosion, flooding, water pollution, and habitat destruction.

Moreover, urban development alters natural landscapes, replacing permeable surfaces with impervious ones like roads, roofs, and sidewalks. This shift disrupts the natural infiltration of rainwater into the ground, exacerbating runoff and intensifying the risk of flooding and water pollution.

Challenges in Stormwater Management: One of the primary challenges in stormwater management is the sheer volume and intensity of storm events, which often overwhelm traditional drainage systems. Aging infrastructure, inadequate maintenance, and insufficient funding further compound these challenges, leaving many communities vulnerable to the impacts of stormwater runoff.

Additionally, the diverse array of pollutants carried by stormwater, including heavy metals, nutrients, pathogens, and sediment, poses a significant threat to water quality and ecosystem health. These pollutants originate from various sources such as industrial activities, agriculture, transportation, and urban runoff, making effective mitigation strategies complex and multifaceted.

Innovative Solutions: Addressing the complexities of stormwater management requires a holistic approach that integrates engineering solutions, policy interventions, public education, and community engagement.

Green infrastructure, which utilizes natural processes to manage stormwater, has emerged as a promising solution. Techniques such as green roofs, permeable pavements, rain gardens, and constructed wetlands help to capture, absorb, and treat stormwater at its source, reducing runoff and mitigating pollution.

Furthermore, advancements in technology, such as sensor networks, predictive modeling, and real-time monitoring systems, enable more accurate forecasting of storm events and adaptive management of drainage systems. These tools empower decision-makers to optimize infrastructure investments and enhance resilience to climate change impacts.

Policy initiatives and regulatory frameworks also play a crucial role in promoting sustainable stormwater management practices. Measures such as stormwater utility fees, development regulations, and pollution control standards incentivize the adoption of best management practices and foster collaboration among stakeholders.

Moreover, public education campaigns raise awareness about the importance of responsible stormwater management and encourage individuals to adopt water conservation practices, reduce pollution, and participate in community-based initiatives.

Conclusion: Stormwater management is a complex and multifaceted challenge that requires collaborative efforts from government agencies, private sectors, communities, and individuals. By implementing innovative solutions, investing in green infrastructure, and enacting effective policies, we can mitigate the impacts of stormwater runoff, protect water resources, and build more resilient and sustainable communities for future generations.

References

Barbosa, A. E., Fernandes, J. N., & David, L. M. (2012). Key issues for sustainable urban stormwater management.ย Water research,ย 46(20), 6787-6798.

Berland, A., Shiflett, S. A., Shuster, W. D., Garmestani, A. S., Goddard, H. C., Herrmann, D. L., & Hopton, M. E. (2017). The role of trees in urban stormwater management.ย Landscape and urban planning,ย 162, 167-177.

Dehalwar, K., & Singh, J. (2015). A Critical Evaluation of the main Causes of Water Management Problems in Indian Urban Areas.ย International Research Journal of Environment Sciences. 4,ย 8.

Dehalwar, K., & Singh, J. (2016). Challenges and strategies for the improvement of water management in Bhopal.ย European Scientific Journal,ย 12(2).

Dehawar, K. The Harsh Reality of Slum Life in Bhopal: A Closer Look at Poor Living Conditions.

Patel, R. S., Taneja, S., Singh, J., & Sharma, S. N. (2024). Modelling of Surface Runoff using SWMM and GIS for Efficient Storm Water Management.ย CURRENT SCIENCE,ย 126(4), 463.

Sharma, S. N. (2019). Review of most used urban growth models.ย International Journal of Advanced Research in Engineering and Technology (IJARET),ย 10(3), 397-405.

Sharma, S. N. (2014).ย Participatory Planning in Plan Preparation. BookCountry.

Confusing Words and Idioms

Daily writing prompt
Whatโ€™s something most people donโ€™t understand?

here’s a list of ten confusing English words along with some commonly misunderstood proverbs or idioms:

  1. Affect vs. Effect:
    • “Affect” is usually a verb meaning to influence or produce a change in something.
    • “Effect” is typically a noun denoting the result or consequence of something.
  2. Their vs. They’re vs. There:
    • “Their” is a possessive pronoun indicating belonging to a group.
    • “They’re” is a contraction for “they are.”
    • “There” is an adverb indicating a place or position.
  3. Your vs. You’re:
    • “Your” is a possessive pronoun indicating belonging to the person you’re addressing.
    • “You’re” is a contraction for “you are.”
  4. Its vs. It’s:
    • “Its” is a possessive pronoun indicating belonging to a thing or animal.
    • “It’s” is a contraction for “it is” or “it has.”
  5. Then vs. Than:
    • “Then” typically refers to a point in time or sequence of events.
    • “Than” is used in making comparisons.
  6. Complement vs. Compliment:
    • “Complement” refers to something that completes or enhances something else.
    • “Compliment” is a polite expression of praise or admiration.
  7. Accept vs. Except:
    • “Accept” is a verb meaning to receive or agree to something.
    • “Except” is a preposition meaning excluding or with the exception of something.
  8. Principal vs. Principle:
    • “Principal” can refer to a person in a leading position, or the main sum of money in a loan.
    • “Principle” refers to a fundamental truth, law, or belief.
  9. Farther vs. Further:
    • “Farther” refers to physical distance.
    • “Further” generally refers to metaphorical or figurative distance or advancement.
  10. Immoral vs. Amoral:
    • “Immoral” refers to something that goes against moral principles.
    • “Amoral” refers to something without moral judgment or consideration.

Commonly Misunderstood Proverbs or Idioms:

  1. “Biting off more than you can chew”:
    • This means attempting to do more than you can handle.
  2. “A penny for your thoughts”:
    • This is a way to ask someone what they are thinking about.
  3. “Break the ice”:
    • To initiate a conversation in a social setting.
  4. “Don’t count your chickens before they hatch”:
    • This advises against relying on something good happening before it actually occurs.
  5. “Barking up the wrong tree”:
    • To pursue a mistaken or misguided course of action.
  6. “Hit the nail on the head”:
    • To describe precisely or accurately identifying a problem.
  7. “Actions speak louder than words”:
    • The idea that what someone does is more significant than what they say.
  8. “Out of the blue”:
    • Something happening unexpectedly or without warning.
  9. “Bite the bullet”:
    • To endure a painful or difficult situation with courage.
  10. “Once in a blue moon”:
    • Refers to something that happens very rarely.

How has technology changed Educational Teaching jobs

Daily writing prompt
How has technology changed your job?

By Shashikant Nishant Sharma

Technology has significantly transformed the landscape of educational teaching jobs, revolutionizing the way educators teach and students learn. Here are some ways in which technology has reshaped educational teaching jobs:

  1. Access to Information: Technology has democratized access to information, allowing educators to supplement traditional teaching materials with a wealth of online resources such as e-books, academic journals, multimedia presentations, and educational websites. This abundance of information enables teachers to create more dynamic and engaging lessons tailored to the diverse needs and interests of their students.
  2. Interactive Learning Tools: Educational technology tools, such as interactive whiteboards, educational apps, and learning management systems, have enhanced the classroom experience by facilitating interactive and collaborative learning. These tools enable educators to create immersive learning environments where students can actively engage with course material, participate in virtual simulations, and collaborate with peers in real-time.
  3. Personalized Learning: Technology has enabled the implementation of personalized learning approaches, allowing educators to tailor instruction to individual student needs, interests, and learning styles. Adaptive learning platforms, intelligent tutoring systems, and educational software with built-in analytics provide valuable insights into student progress and performance, enabling teachers to differentiate instruction and provide targeted support where needed.
  4. Remote Teaching and Learning: The proliferation of digital communication tools and online learning platforms has facilitated remote teaching and learning, especially in the wake of global events such as the COVID-19 pandemic. Educators can conduct virtual classes, deliver lectures via video conferencing, and engage students in online discussions, breaking down geographical barriers and expanding access to education.
  5. Blended Learning Models: Blended learning models, which combine traditional face-to-face instruction with online learning activities, have become increasingly popular in educational settings. Technology enables educators to create hybrid learning environments where students can access course materials, collaborate with peers, and participate in interactive activities both in the classroom and online, fostering flexibility and autonomy in learning.
  6. Professional Development Opportunities: Technology has also transformed professional development opportunities for educators, providing access to online courses, webinars, virtual conferences, and digital learning communities. Educators can engage in ongoing professional growth, exchange best practices with peers, and stay abreast of the latest trends and innovations in education, enhancing their teaching effectiveness and job satisfaction.
  7. Data-Driven Decision Making: Educational technology tools capture vast amounts of data on student performance, engagement, and learning outcomes. By analyzing this data, educators can make data-driven decisions to optimize instruction, identify areas for improvement, and tailor interventions to support student success. Data analytics tools enable educators to monitor student progress in real-time and adjust teaching strategies accordingly.
  8. Global Collaboration and Communication: Technology has facilitated global collaboration and communication among educators and students, breaking down cultural barriers and fostering cross-cultural understanding. Educators can collaborate with colleagues from around the world, participate in global projects and initiatives, and expose students to diverse perspectives and experiences, preparing them for success in an interconnected world.

In conclusion, technology has fundamentally transformed educational teaching jobs, empowering educators to enhance the quality, accessibility, and effectiveness of teaching and learning. By leveraging technology tools and innovative pedagogical approaches, educators can create dynamic learning experiences that inspire curiosity, foster critical thinking, and prepare students for success in the 21st century.

References

Januszewski, A., & Molenda, M. (Eds.). (2013).ย Educational technology: A definition with commentary. Routledge.

Kumar, K. L. (1996).ย Educational technology. New Age International.

Luppicini, R. (2005). A systems definition of educational technology in society.ย Journal of Educational Technology & Society,ย 8(3), 103-109.

Mangal, S. K., & Mangal, U. (2019).ย Essentials of educational technology. PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd..

Saettler, P. (2004).ย The evolution of American educational technology. IAP.

Spector, J. M. (2001). An overview of progress and problems in educational technology.ย Interactive educational multimedia: IEM, 27-37.

Identifying Obstacles: Factors That Could Interfere With Your GoalsI

Daily writing prompt
How often do you say โ€œnoโ€ to things that would interfere with your goals?

By Kavita Dehalwar

Setting goals is the first step towards turning the invisible into the visible, as Tony Robbins famously said. Yet, along the journey towards achieving those goals, one often encounters numerous hurdles and obstacles that can hinder progress. Understanding these potential roadblocks is crucial for navigating them effectively. Here, we delve into some common factors that could interfere with your goals and how to overcome them.

  1. Lack of Clarity: Unclear goals can be a significant hindrance. If you’re unsure about what you want to achieve or why you want to achieve it, you’re more likely to be derailed by distractions or lose motivation along the way. Take the time to define your goals clearly, making them specific, measurable, achievable, relevant, and time-bound (SMART).
  2. Fear of Failure: Fear can paralyze even the most well-intentioned individuals. The fear of failure often stems from a concern about what others might think, a lack of self-belief, or a fear of stepping out of one’s comfort zone. Recognize that failure is a natural part of the learning process and a stepping stone towards success. Embrace it, learn from it, and keep moving forward.
  3. Procrastination: Putting off tasks until later is a common habit that can impede progress towards your goals. Procrastination often arises from a combination of perfectionism, lack of motivation, or feeling overwhelmed. Combat procrastination by breaking your goals down into smaller, more manageable tasks, creating a schedule or to-do list, and eliminating distractions.
  4. Negative Self-Talk: The voice in your head can either be your greatest cheerleader or your harshest critic. Negative self-talk can erode confidence, diminish motivation, and lead to self-sabotage. Practice self-awareness and challenge negative thoughts by replacing them with positive affirmations and focusing on your strengths and past successes.
  5. Lack of Resources: Whether it’s time, money, skills, or support, a shortage of resources can pose a significant obstacle to achieving your goals. Identify the resources you need and explore creative ways to acquire or leverage them. This might involve seeking out mentors or collaborators, investing in self-education, or finding alternative solutions.
  6. External Distractions: In today’s hyper-connected world, distractions abound. From social media notifications to unexpected interruptions, external distractions can derail your focus and productivity. Set boundaries, establish a conducive work environment, and practice mindfulness to stay present and focused on your goals.
  7. Unforeseen Circumstances: Life is unpredictable, and unexpected events can throw a wrench into even the best-laid plans. Whether it’s a sudden illness, a family emergency, or a global crisis, unforeseen circumstances can force you to reassess your priorities and adjust your goals accordingly. Cultivate resilience and adaptability to navigate these challenges with grace.
  8. Lack of Accountability: Without being held accountable, it’s easy to lose sight of your goals or slack off when faced with obstacles. Find an accountability partner, coach, or mentor who can provide support, encouragement, and accountability along your journey. Regular check-ins and progress tracking can help keep you accountable and motivated.
  9. Perceived Limitations: Sometimes, the only thing standing in the way of your goals is your own limiting beliefs. Whether it’s a belief that you’re not good enough, smart enough, or deserving enough, these self-imposed limitations can hold you back from realizing your full potential. Challenge these beliefs, expand your comfort zone, and adopt a growth mindset that embraces challenges and sees failures as opportunities for growth.
  10. Lack of Persistence: Rome wasn’t built in a day, and neither are most goals achieved overnight. Persistence is key to overcoming obstacles and staying the course, even when the going gets tough. Cultivate resilience, stay committed to your goals, and remember that every setback is just a temporary detour on the road to success.

In conclusion, while the path to achieving your goals may be fraught with obstacles, it’s important to remember that each challenge presents an opportunity for growth and learning. By recognizing these potential barriers and implementing strategies to overcome them, you can stay focused, motivated, and ultimately, achieve success in pursuit of your goals.

References

Burton, D., & Weiss, C. (2008). The fundamental goal concept: the path to process and performance success.

Dehalwar, K., & Singh, J. (2016). Challenges and strategies for the improvement of water management in Bhopal.ย European Scientific Journal,ย 12(2).

Godshalk, V. M., & Sosik, J. J. (2003). Aiming for career success: The role of learning goal orientation in mentoring relationships.ย Journal of vocational behavior,ย 63(3), 417-437.

Hall, D. T., & Foster, L. W. (1977). A psychological success cycle and goal setting: Goals, performance, and attitudes.ย Academy of Management Journal,ย 20(2), 282-290.

Johnson, D. W., Johnson, R. T., & Stanne, M. B. (1989). Impact of goal and resource interdependence on problem-solving success.ย The Journal of Social Psychology,ย 129(5), 621-629.

Locke, E. A. (1967). Relationship of success and expectation to affect on goal-seeking tasks.ย Journal of personality and social psychology,ย 7(2p1), 125.

VandeWalle, D. (2001). Goal orientation:: Why wanting to look successful doesnโ€™t always lead to success.ย Organizational Dynamics,ย 30(2), 162-171.

The Unsung Heroes: The Influence of an Inspirational Teacher

Daily writing prompt
Who was your most influential teacher? Why?

By Shashikant Nishant Sharma

Teachers are the unsung heroes of society, shaping the minds of future generations and leaving a lasting impact on their students’ lives. Among these educators, there are some whose influence transcends the classroom, leaving an indelible mark on the hearts and minds of their students. These influential teachers possess qualities that go beyond imparting knowledgeโ€”they inspire, mentor, and guide their students, instilling in them the confidence and skills needed to succeed in life.

Photo by fauxels on Pexels.com

The Role of an Influential Teacher: An influential teacher is not merely someone who imparts academic knowledge but serves as a mentor and guide, nurturing the holistic development of their students. They create a supportive and engaging learning environment where students feel valued, respected, and motivated to excel. These teachers have a genuine passion for teaching and a deep commitment to the well-being and success of their students.

Qualities of an Influential Teacher:

  1. Passion and Dedication: Influential teachers are passionate about their subject matter and dedicated to their students’ growth and success. They go above and beyond to ensure that each student reaches their full potential.
  2. Empathy and Understanding: They understand the individual needs and challenges of each student, showing empathy and providing personalized support and guidance.
  3. Inspiring and Motivating: Influential teachers inspire and motivate their students to set high goals and work hard to achieve them. They believe in their students’ abilities and encourage them to believe in themselves.
  4. Effective Communication: They communicate effectively, fostering open dialogue and creating a safe space for students to express themselves and share their thoughts and ideas.
  5. Mentorship and Guidance: Influential teachers serve as mentors and role models, offering guidance and support to help students navigate academic and personal challenges.
  6. Lifelong Learning: They are lifelong learners themselves, continuously seeking to improve their teaching skills and staying updated on the latest educational trends and practices.

Impact of an Influential Teacher: The impact of an influential teacher extends far beyond the classroom. Their guidance and mentorship shape the character, values, and aspirations of their students, influencing their choices and decisions long after they leave school. Many successful individuals attribute their achievements to the encouragement and inspiration they received from a particular teacher who believed in them when others didn’t.

Conclusion: In conclusion, influential teachers play a crucial role in shaping the future of society by nurturing and empowering the next generation of leaders, innovators, and changemakers. Their passion, dedication, and commitment to their students leave an enduring legacy that transcends academic achievement. As we celebrate the profound impact of these unsung heroes, let us recognize and honor the invaluable contributions of influential teachers in shaping the minds and hearts of generations to come.

References

Bargh, J. A., & Schul, Y. (1980). On the cognitive benefits of teaching.ย Journal of Educational Psychology,ย 72(5), 593.

Cheon, S. H., Reeve, J., & Vansteenkiste, M. (2020). When teachers learn how to provide classroom structure in an autonomy-supportive way: Benefits to teachers and their students.ย Teaching and teacher education,ย 90, 103004.

Dehalwar, K., & Sharma, S. N. (2024). Exploring the Distinctions between Quantitative and Qualitative Research Methods.ย Think India Journal,ย 27(1), 7-15.

Dehalwar, K., & Sharma, S. N. (2023).ย Fundamentals of Research Writing and Uses of Research Methodologies. Edupedia Publications Pvt Ltd.

Shah, M. (2012). The importance and benefits of teacher collegiality in schoolsโ€“A literature review.ย Procedia-Social and Behavioral Sciences,ย 46, 1242-1246.

Sharma, S. N. Experiences in Self-Determined Learning: Moving from Education 1.0 Through Education 2.0 Towards Education 3.0.

Sharma, S. N. How to Write a Grant Proposal in an Effective Manner to get Projects.

Wheatley, K. F. (2002). The potential benefits of teacher efficacy doubts for educational reform.ย Teaching and teacher education,ย 18(1), 5-22.

Unraveling the Tapestry of Discovery: The Life of a Researcher

Daily writing prompt
What is one word that describes you?

By Shashikant Nishant Sharma

In the vast expanse of human knowledge, there exists a breed of individuals who dedicate their lives to unraveling its mysteriesโ€”the researchers. Their journey is one of relentless pursuit, fueled by curiosity, driven by passion, and defined by the pursuit of truth. From the depths of laboratories to the heights of academic institutions, the life of a researcher is a complex tapestry woven with threads of dedication, perseverance, and the occasional spark of inspiration.

Photo by Andrea Piacquadio on Pexels.com

The Quest for Knowledge: At the heart of a researcher’s life lies an insatiable thirst for knowledge. Their journey often begins with a questionโ€”an itch in the fabric of understanding that demands to be scratched. Whether exploring the intricacies of quantum mechanics or delving into the complexities of human behavior, researchers embark on a quest to push the boundaries of what is known and discover what lies beyond.

The Pursuit of Excellence: But the path of a researcher is not for the faint of heart. It is a journey fraught with challenges and obstacles at every turn. From the rigors of academic rigor to the pressures of publication, researchers must navigate a labyrinth of expectations and demands, constantly striving for excellence in their work. Late nights in the lab, endless revisions of manuscripts, and the occasional setback are all par for the course in the life of a researcher.

Collaboration and Community: Yet, amidst the trials and tribulations, researchers find solace in the camaraderie of their peers. Collaboration is the lifeblood of scientific inquiry, and researchers often find themselves working alongside colleagues from around the world, pooling their expertise and resources in pursuit of a common goal. Whether attending conferences, participating in interdisciplinary projects, or engaging in spirited debates over coffee, researchers thrive in the vibrant ecosystem of scientific community.

The Joy of Discovery: And then, amidst the toil and turmoil, comes the moment of triumphโ€”the thrill of discovery. Whether it’s uncovering a new molecule with potential therapeutic properties, solving a centuries-old mathematical puzzle, or shedding light on the mysteries of the cosmos, the joy of discovery is an experience like no other. It is a moment of clarityโ€”a glimpse into the vast tapestry of knowledge that stretches out before us, waiting to be explored.

The Legacy of Inquiry: But the impact of a researcher’s work extends far beyond the confines of their own lifetime. Each discovery, each breakthrough, becomes a brick in the edifice of human understanding, shaping the course of history and laying the foundation for future generations. From the revolutionary theories of Einstein to the groundbreaking experiments of Curie, the legacy of inquiry endures, inspiring generations of researchers to come.

Conclusion: In the end, the life of a researcher is a testament to the power of curiosity, the resilience of the human spirit, and the boundless potential of the human mind. It is a life of highs and lows, triumphs and setbacks, but above all, it is a life dedicated to the pursuit of truth. For researchers are the architects of our collective knowledge, the pioneers of our understanding, and the guardians of our future. And in their hands lies the power to unlock the secrets of the universe and illuminate the path forward for generations to come.

References

ร…kerlind, G. S. (2008). An academic perspective on research and being a researcher: An integration of the literature.ย Studies in higher education,ย 33(1), 17-31.

Dehalwar, K., & Sharma, S. N. (2023).ย Fundamentals of Research Writing and Uses of Research Methodologies. Edupedia Publications Pvt Ltd.

Finley, S., & Knowles, J. G. (1995). Researcher as artist/artist as researcher.ย Qualitative inquiry,ย 1(1), 110-142.

Saldana, J. (2018). Researcher, analyze thyself.ย International Journal of Qualitative Methods,ย 17(1), 1609406918801717.

Wa-Mbaleka, S. (2020). The researcher as an instrument. Inย Computer Supported Qualitative Research: New Trends on Qualitative Research (WCQR2019) 4ย (pp. 33-41). Springer International Publishing.

Yardley, A. (2008). Living stories: The role of the researcher in the narration of life. Inย Forum Qualitative Sozialforschung/Forum: Qualitative Social Researchย (Vol. 9, No. 3).

Top 10 Researchers of the Social Sciences

Daily writing prompt
Who is the most confident person you know?

It’s important to note that determining the “top ten” researchers in social sciences can be subjective and may vary depending on the criteria used (e.g., citations, impact, contributions to the field). However, here’s a list of ten influential researchers in the field of social sciences as of my last update:

  1. Daniel Kahneman: A Nobel laureate in Economics, Kahneman is renowned for his work in behavioral economics and cognitive psychology. His research on decision-making processes and heuristics has had a profound impact on understanding human behavior in various social contexts.
  2. Amartya Sen: An Indian economist and philosopher, Sen has made significant contributions to welfare economics, social choice theory, and development economics. His work on poverty, inequality, and capability approach has influenced policy-making globally.
  3. Noam Chomsky: A prominent linguist, philosopher, and social critic, Chomsky’s theories on language acquisition, cognitive science, and political analysis have shaped fields ranging from linguistics to political science. His critique of media and advocacy for human rights have had a lasting impact.
  4. Michel Foucault: A French philosopher and social theorist, Foucault’s work on power, discourse, and the relationship between knowledge and power has been highly influential in sociology, anthropology, and cultural studies. His ideas continue to be debated and applied across various disciplines.
  5. Judith Butler: An American philosopher and gender theorist, Butler is known for her work on gender performativity and queer theory. Her writings on identity, power, and subversion have reshaped feminist discourse and influenced fields such as cultural studies and sociology.
  6. Robert Putnam: An American political scientist, Putnam’s research on social capital and its implications for democracy and civic engagement has been widely cited. His book “Bowling Alone” highlighted the decline of social connectedness in modern societies, sparking discussions on community and social cohesion.
  7. Pierre Bourdieu: A French sociologist, Bourdieu’s theories on cultural capital, habitus, and social reproduction have had a profound impact on sociology, anthropology, and cultural studies. His empirical research on education, cultural practices, and social stratification remains influential.
  8. Susan Fiske: An American social psychologist, Fiske has made significant contributions to understanding social cognition, stereotypes, and intergroup relations. Her work on the stereotype content model and the fundamental dimensions of social perception has advanced the field of social psychology.
  9. Richard Thaler: An economist and behavioral scientist, Thaler is known for his contributions to behavioral economics and the theory of nudges. His research on bounded rationality and decision-making biases has influenced policy-making, particularly in the areas of finance and public policy.
  10. Carol S. Dweck: An American psychologist, Dweck is renowned for her research on mindset theory and the concept of growth mindset. Her work on the psychology of motivation and achievement has had implications for education, organizational behavior, and personal development.

These researchers have made significant contributions to understanding human behavior, society, and culture, shaping the landscape of social sciences and influencing various fields within it.

Strategies for Coping with Negative Feelings

Daily writing prompt
What strategies do you use to cope with negative feelings?

Coping with negative feelings is essential for maintaining mental well-being. Here are some strategies people commonly use:

Photo by Nataliya Vaitkevich on Pexels.com
  1. Mindfulness and Meditation: Practicing mindfulness and meditation can help you become more aware of your thoughts and feelings without judgment, allowing you to better manage them.
  2. Physical Exercise: Engaging in regular physical activity can release endorphins, which are natural mood lifters. Exercise also helps reduce stress and anxiety.
  3. Healthy Lifestyle: Maintaining a balanced diet, getting enough sleep, and avoiding excessive alcohol and caffeine intake can all contribute to better emotional regulation.
  4. Seeking Support: Talking to friends, family members, or a therapist about your feelings can provide validation, support, and perspective.
  5. Creative Outlets: Engaging in creative activities like painting, writing, or playing music can be therapeutic and help channel negative emotions into something constructive.
  6. Setting Boundaries: Learning to say no and setting boundaries in your personal and professional life can help prevent feelings of overwhelm and resentment.
  7. Positive Self-Talk: Practice replacing negative self-talk with positive affirmations and realistic perspectives.
  8. Gratitude Practice: Keeping a gratitude journal or simply taking time each day to reflect on things you’re grateful for can shift your focus away from negativity.
  9. Taking Breaks: Sometimes, taking a break from the source of negative feelings, whether it’s work, social media, or other stressors, can give you the space you need to recharge and gain perspective.
  10. Professional Help: If negative feelings persist or interfere with your daily functioning, seeking help from a mental health professional can provide personalized support and treatment.

Remember that coping strategies are personal, and it’s essential to find what works best for you. It’s also okay to seek help when needed and to prioritize your mental health.

What Qualifications are Required for a Job in Dubai?

By Arjun Singh Lodhi

In recent years, Dubai has emerged as a global hub for employment opportunities, attracting talent from all corners of the world.

With its booming economy, diverse industries, and tax-free salaries, it’s no surprise that many individuals aspire to work in this vibrant city.

However, securing a job in Dubai requires more than just a desire to relocate.

Understanding the essential qualifications and requirements is crucial for job aspirants looking to make their mark in this competitive market.

Photo by Hai Nguyen on Pexels.com

Educational Qualifications

One of the primary qualifications sought by employers in Dubai is a relevant educational background.

While the specific requirements may vary depending on the industry and job role, having a bachelor’s degree is often considered a minimum standard.

Certain professions may necessitate advanced degrees or specialized certifications.

For instance, roles in finance and engineering typically require a bachelor’s degree in the respective field, while positions in healthcare may require specific medical qualifications recognized by the relevant authorities in Dubai.

Professional Certifications

In certain industries, possessing specific professional certifications can significantly enhance a candidate’s employability.

For example, individuals seeking employment in the fields of finance may benefit from certifications such as Chartered Financial Analyst (CFA) or Certified Public Accountant (CPA).

Similarly, professionals in the IT sector may find certifications like Cisco Certified Network Associate (CCNA) or Project Management Professional (PMP) to be valuable assets on their resumes.

Job aspirants should research industry-specific certifications relevant to their desired roles and consider obtaining them to boost their credentials.

They can also explore available opportunities and compare jobs with salary in Dubai at UAESalary.com to gain insights into salary ranges within their chosen field.

Language Proficiency

Given Dubai’s multicultural environment and the prevalence of English as the business language, proficiency in English is typically a prerequisite for many job opportunities.

In addition to English, proficiency in Arabic or other languages commonly spoken in the region can be advantageous, particularly for roles that involve interaction with local clients or stakeholders.

Job aspirants are encouraged to demonstrate their language skills through standardized tests such as the IELTS or TOEFL, especially if English is not their first language.

Relevant Experience

Employers in Dubai place a high value on practical experience and skills relevant to the job role.

While entry-level positions may be available for fresh graduates, mid-level and senior roles often require a certain number of years of experience in a similar role or industry.

Candidates with a proven track record of success, demonstrated through previous employment, internships, or projects, are more likely to stand out to recruiters.

Visa and Work Permit

Before applying for jobs in Dubai, it’s essential for job aspirants to understand the visa and work permit requirements.

Non-citizens of the United Arab Emirates (UAE) typically require a valid work visa sponsored by a registered employer in Dubai.

The process of obtaining a work visa involves several steps, including medical tests, background checks, and documentation verification.

Job seekers should ensure that they meet the eligibility criteria for obtaining a work visa before committing to any employment opportunities.

Cultural Awareness and Adaptability

In addition to technical qualifications, employers in Dubai often seek candidates who demonstrate cultural awareness and adaptability.

Dubai’s workforce comprises individuals from diverse cultural backgrounds, and employers value candidates who can navigate cultural differences and work effectively in a multicultural environment.

Demonstrating an understanding of local customs, norms, and business etiquette can enhance a candidate’s appeal to potential employers.

Networking and Professionalism

As with any job market, networking plays a crucial role in securing employment opportunities in Dubai.

Job aspirants are encouraged to leverage professional networking platforms, attend industry events, and connect with professionals working in their desired field.

Building a strong professional network can provide valuable insights, referrals, and job leads.

Additionally, maintaining a professional demeanour throughout the job search process, from submitting applications to attending interviews, is essential for creating a positive impression on prospective employers.

Conclusion

In conclusion, while Dubai offers a wealth of opportunities for job aspirants, securing employment in the city requires careful consideration of the essential qualifications and requirements.

By obtaining the necessary educational qualifications, gaining relevant experience, acquiring professional certifications, understanding visa regulations, demonstrating cultural awareness, and networking effectively, job seekers can enhance their chances of success in Dubai’s dynamic job market.

With determination, preparation, and the right qualifications, aspiring professionals can embark on fulfilling careers in one of the world’s most exciting cities.

References

Buckley, M. (2012). From Kerala to Dubai and back again: Construction migrants and the global economic crisis.ย Geoforum,ย 43(2), 250-259.

Lodhi, A. S., & Sharma, S. N. Contemporary Trends in Commerce-The Rise of Ecommerce Industries.

Varrel, A. (2020). A job in Dubai and an apartment in Bangalore: Transnational dynamics of migrant property in globalizing cities.ย City,ย 24(5-6), 818-829.

Unveiling the Power of STEM: A Journey into the Heart of Innovation

By Shashikant Nishant Sharma

Science, Technology, Engineering, and Mathematics, collectively known as STEM, form the bedrock of innovation and progress in our modern world. From groundbreaking discoveries in medicine to the latest advancements in artificial intelligence, STEM fields play a pivotal role in shaping the future of humanity. In this article, we’ll delve into the significance of STEM and explore how it drives innovation across various sectors.

Science:

Photo by Andrea Piacquadio on Pexels.com

At the heart of STEM lies scienceโ€”the pursuit of knowledge through observation, experimentation, and analysis. Scientific discoveries have transformed our understanding of the natural world and led to revolutionary breakthroughs. From Isaac Newton’s laws of motion to the discovery of DNA structure by James Watson and Francis Crick, science lays the foundation for technological advancements and drives innovation by answering fundamental questions about the universe.

Technology:

Technology is the application of scientific knowledge for practical purposes, and it permeates every aspect of our daily lives. The rapid evolution of technology has given rise to the digital age, with innovations like smartphones, the internet, and artificial intelligence becoming integral parts of society. STEM professionals in the field of technology are instrumental in developing new software, hardware, and systems that enhance efficiency, communication, and overall quality of life.

Engineering:

Engineers are the architects of the technological landscape, translating scientific principles into tangible solutions. Whether it’s designing sustainable infrastructure, creating cutting-edge medical devices, or developing renewable energy sources, engineers play a crucial role in addressing global challenges. STEM-driven engineering fosters creativity, problem-solving, and a commitment to building a better future.

Mathematics:

Mathematics serves as the language of STEM, providing the framework for scientific theories and technological applications. From cryptography algorithms to predicting climate patterns, mathematics is the invisible force that underpins many advancements. Mathematicians contribute not only to theoretical frameworks but also to practical solutions in various fields, including finance, cryptography, and data analysis.

STEM in Action:

STEM education and research are essential components for nurturing the next generation of innovators. Initiatives promoting STEM in schools, colleges, and universities aim to equip students with the skills and knowledge needed to tackle complex problems. Hands-on experiments, coding workshops, and collaborative projects cultivate a passion for STEM disciplines and prepare future leaders for the challenges of tomorrow.

Challenges and Opportunities:

While STEM has propelled humanity forward, it also faces challenges such as gender and racial underrepresentation. Efforts are being made to bridge these gaps and create a more inclusive environment. Additionally, the ethical implications of technological advancements, such as privacy concerns and the impact on employment, demand careful consideration and responsible innovation.

Conclusion:

STEM is more than just an acronym; it is a dynamic force that drives progress and shapes the world we live in. As we continue to explore the frontiers of science, technology, engineering, and mathematics, the possibilities for innovation are boundless. By fostering a culture of curiosity, collaboration, and inclusivity, we can unlock the full potential of STEM and build a future that embraces the limitless opportunities it presents.

References

Bongso, A., & Richards, M. (2004). History and perspective of stem cell research.ย Best practice & research Clinical obstetrics & gynaecology,ย 18(6), 827-842.

Breiner, J. M., Harkness, S. S., Johnson, C. C., & Koehler, C. M. (2012). What is STEM? A discussion about conceptions of STEM in education and partnerships.ย School science and mathematics,ย 112(1), 3-11.

Brown, R., Brown, J., Reardon, K., & Merrill, C. (2011). Understanding STEM: current perceptions.ย Technology and Engineering Teacher,ย 70(6), 5.

Dehalwar, K., & Sharma, S. N. (2024). Exploring the Distinctions between Quantitative and Qualitative Research Methods.ย Think India Journal,ย 27(1), 7-15.

English, L. D. (2016). STEM education K-12: Perspectives on integration.ย International Journal of STEM education,ย 3, 1-8.

Sharma, S. N., & Dehalwar, K. (2023). Council of Planning for Promoting Planning Education and Planning Professionals.ย Journal of Planning Education and Research,ย 43(4), 748-749.

Increasing Institutional effectiveness in Higher Education Institutions: Meaning Perspectives Vs Transformative strategiesย 

By Chengalroyen N.

MSc, University of Pretoria, South Africa.

Summary/Abstract

Those who are interested in educational pedagogy are most likely familiar with the term โ€œTransformative learningโ€, it is a widely accepted approach to adult education. But what does it really mean? And how do we get past the jargon and theory to put into practice? Letโ€™s explore it a bit more and consider practical applications for individuals, institutions and learning environments. The speaker will outline how transformative learning pairs with an educational theory (how does teaching fit into a studentโ€™s world view) and will explore concrete ways to address transformative learning strategies: 1) problem-solving; 2) training and education; 

  • Institutional culture; 4) personal development; and 5) leadership) directly correlated to student performance in line with organizational goals.

Lets firstly understand the term Institutional Effectiveness ?

Acc toย ย The Society for College and University Planning(SCUP):

Is a Higher Education Institutions effort to organize assessment, evaluation and improvement initiatives so that the institution can determine how well it is fulfilling its mission and achieving its goals.

Vision                         Mission                                  Objectives                           Goals

What are Meaning Perspectives: How is this aligned with an Educational Theory

Is an overarching term that describes a collection of theories that explain the application, interpretation and purpose of learning(Acc to Mezirow: 2023).It pairs a Constructivist learning perspective- the idea that meaning is constructed from experience and internal understanding- with the importance of communication and reflection.

Soโ€ฆ.

As educators, How do we put this in practice?

We develop a โ€œTEACHING PHILOSOPHYโ€(TP)-which is a โ€œBelieve Statementโ€ in which we use theoretical concepts that help to explain the learning processes we wish to utilise and this will have the potential to inform educational approaches, curricula and assessments.

What must the TP should stateโ€ฆ.?

Must motivate the teacher to learn about the subject matter?

What are the expected outcomes of your teaching?

Teacher โ€“ student relationship you hope to achieve?

How do you measure if your lessons are successful?

What values do you impart on your students?

What code of ethics guides you?

What themes pervades your teaching?

What are the 3 types of TP that Educators can utilize to increase Institutional effectiveness?

Acc to the teaching Academy..

  1. Perennialism

Values knowledge that transcends time.This is a subject -centered philosophy.The goal of a perennialis educator is to teach students to think rationlly and develop minds that can think critically.

  • Progressivism

Progressivists believe that individuality,progress and change are fundamental to one education.They believe that students learn best from what they consider most relevant to their lives, centre their curricula on the needs,experiences, interests and abilities of students

  • Essentialism

Is also subject-centered aimed at teaching basic skills.This philosophy advocates training the mind focussing on transmiitting a series of progressively difficult topics and promotion of students to the next level.

Soโ€ฆ.

How does this then add value to โ€œTransformational Learningโ€?

The Educator must then align his/her Teaching Philosophy to that of transfomational teaching and learning approaches expained bt the following Model Strategies.

A Transformative Model of Strategies?: Approach to teaching and learning that can increase Institutional Effectiveness

  • Problem Solving:

Do an initial brainstorm.

Be open to making mistakes.

Challenge personal assumptions about the โ€œright wayโ€ of doing things.

Look for novel solutions from other sources, especially those outside of the field/culture.

Reflect on what worked , what didnโ€™t  and why?

Know sooner, Act faster approach.

Address administrative challenges promptly(trigger events).

Provide tools/opportunities for discussion and debate.

  • Institutional Culture

Create mentoring and job shadowing programs.

Enhance commitment for the development of synergetic actions.

Encourage collaboration across teams to broaden perspectives.

Encourage individuals and teams to take risks: treat failure as progress and growth.

Engage employees in activities that challenge the status quo such as thought provoking documentaries, annual field trips  and experiential learning games.

Provide safe spaces for employees to voice their say but must be done democratically.

Transformative re-design of educational curriculums into community engagement.

Integrating student development into academic activities.

Interconnected technology systems.

  • Personal development

Be open to changing your personal perspectives.

Push your personal boundaries through travel, trying new activities, meeting new people.

Keep up to date with new evidence-based practices

Keep a journal for ideas and reflection.

Growth of leadership skills.

Strengthening emotional intelligence.

  • Leadership and Governance

Strengthen gaps in policies.

Advance best practices.

Promote transdisciplinary approaches .

Embrace team efforts.

Collaborate with different groups with a diverse set of peers to share and brainstorm ideas.

Advocate professional development opportunities.

Attend skills development opportunities.

Adopt practices that force you to rethink your methods and beliefs on a regular basis.

  • Training and Education

Ask students to share their initial thoughts on the subject(pre knowledge).

Use engaging activities and /or rich media to further connect with students.

Ask students to reflect on the activities and discussion and how those may have impacted their thoughts on the topic.

Conclusion

This pendulum represents a balance, and to have harmony, one side must not out way the other.Therefore, to maintain constant Institutional Effectiveness in Higher Education there must be a balance by what the educator believe statement meets effective teaching and learning approaches. 

References

  1. Mezirow, J. 2023: Transformative learning: Theory to Practice; New directions for adult and Continuing Education; No 74(11): 5-6.

An Introduction to Ethnographic Research Methodology

By Shashikant Nishant Sharma

Ethnographic research methodology encompasses a holistic approach to studying human societies and cultures, emphasizing immersion, participant observation, and contextual understanding. The following key steps and considerations are integral to conducting ethnographic research:

1. Selecting the Research Site:

  • Selection Criteria: Identifying a community or setting that aligns with the research objectives and offers ample opportunities for participant observation and data collection.
  • Access and Entry: Navigating entry into the chosen community through establishing rapport, building trust, and gaining permission for observation.

2. Immersion and Participant Observation:

  • Long-term Engagement: Spending an extended period within the community to comprehend its social dynamics, rituals, and everyday life.
  • Observation Techniques: Actively participating in the daily activities of the community while noting and documenting behavioral patterns, language use, and cultural practices.

3. Establishing Relationships and Conducting Interviews:

  • Building Trust: Cultivating meaningful relationships with community members to facilitate open and candid discussions.
  • Interviews and Conversations: Conducting formal and informal interviews to gather personal narratives, experiences, and interpretations.

4. Data Collection and Analysis:

  • Multifaceted Data Sources: Utilizing a variety of sources, including field notes, audiovisual recordings, and artifacts, to capture the complexity of the community’s culture.
  • Thick Description: Providing detailed and context-rich descriptions of observed behaviors, social interactions, and cultural phenomena.

5. Interpretation and Representation:

  • Cultural Interpretation: Analyzing the collected data to discern cultural norms, values, and belief systems within the community.
  • Ethical Representation: Ensuring that the portrayal of the community and its members remains respectful, authentic, and devoid of stereotypes.

6. Ongoing Reflexivity and Iterative Process:

  • Reflexive Practice: Continuously reflecting on the researcher’s positionality, biases, and the impact of their presence on the community.
  • Iterative Analysis: Iteratively revisiting the data, interpreting it through different lenses, and refining the understandings of the community.

By meticulously following these methodological guidelines, ethnographic research aims to provide comprehensive insights into the intricate tapestry of human culture and society, unraveling perspectives and narratives that might otherwise remain concealed.

In the intricate realm of social sciences, ethnographic research stands as a cornerstone methodology, offering a unique lens to understand and interpret human behavior, culture, and society. It’s a tapestry of exploration woven through immersive fieldwork, deep engagement, and empathetic understanding. Let’s embark on an introductory journey into this captivating methodology.

Understanding Ethnography:

At its core, ethnography is more than a research method; it’s an approach that seeks to comprehend the complexities of human experiences within their natural settings. Originating from anthropology, ethnography has expanded its horizons, finding applications in sociology, psychology, and various interdisciplinary fields.

Immersion and Participant Observation:

Central to ethnography is the practice of participant observation, where researchers immerse themselves in the community or culture under study. This immersive approach involves living amongst the individuals being studied, actively engaging in their daily activities, rituals, and interactions. By becoming a part of the social fabric, researchers gain profound insights and a nuanced understanding of the culture.

Data Collection and Tools:

Ethnographic research relies on a rich array of qualitative data collection methods. These may include in-depth interviews, participant diaries, field notes, audiovisual recordings, and even artifacts. The data collected isnโ€™t limited to what is said but also encompasses non-verbal cues, routines, traditions, and the broader context of social interactions.

Reflexivity and Subjectivity:

Ethnographers acknowledge their subjectivity and positionality in the research process. They reflect upon their own biases, assumptions, and preconceptions that might influence their observations and interpretations. This self-awareness allows researchers to strive for objectivity while recognizing the inevitability of their subjective perspectives.

Analysis and Interpretation:

Analyzing ethnographic data is a nuanced and iterative process. Researchers engage in coding, categorizing, and identifying patterns within the collected information. The interpretations often unfold gradually, leading to deeper insights into the culture or community being studied.

Ethical Considerations:

Ethnographers navigate a complex ethical terrain. Informed consent, confidentiality, and the portrayal of participants in an accurate and respectful manner are pivotal. Ethical guidelines ensure the protection of the individuals involved and the integrity of the research.

Challenges and Opportunities:

Ethnographic research isnโ€™t without challenges. Time constraints, access to communities, and the researcherโ€™s potential insider-outsider status within a culture can pose hurdles. However, these challenges offer opportunities for growth, fostering resilience and adaptability in the research process.

The Evolving Landscape:

In a rapidly changing world, ethnography adapts. Digital ethnography has emerged, exploring online communities and digital spaces, expanding the boundaries of traditional fieldwork. Additionally, interdisciplinary collaborations have enriched ethnographic studies, bringing together diverse perspectives and methodologies.

Conclusion:

Ethnographic research methodology embodies the art of understanding societies and cultures from within. It thrives on the empathetic connection between researcher and participant, unraveling the tapestry of human experiences. As we delve deeper into this immersive approach, we uncover not just facts, but narratives, emotions, and the essence of what it means to be human.

References

Ouroussoff, A. (2020). What is an ethnographic study?. In Inside Organizations (pp. 35-58). Routledge.

Sharma, S. N., & Dehalwar, K. (2023). โ€ชEthnographic Study of Equity in Planning – Case of Slums of Ranchiโ€ฌhttps://scholar.google.com/citations?view_op=view_citation&hl=en&user=ucXErnEAAAAJ&citation_for_view=ucXErnEAAAAJ:_FxGoFyzp5QC

Wright, C. (2014). School processesโ€”an ethnographic study. In gender and ethnicity in schools (pp. 191-215). Routledge.

Role of PDF Documents in Educational Services

By: Shashikant Nishant Sharma

In the ever-evolving landscape of digital communication, PDF documents stand as pillars of versatility, reliability, and universal accessibility. Portable Document Format, abbreviated as PDF, has emerged as a standard in the realm of document sharing and archiving. Its importance transcends industries and professions, offering a myriad of advantages that have solidified its position as a preferred format for conveying information in the digital age. PDF Cake‘s global accessibility ensures that its benefits transcend geographical boundaries.

Photo by freestocks.org on Pexels.com

One of the primary reasons behind the significance of PDF documents lies in their universality. Unlike other file formats that might alter in appearance or content when accessed on different devices or operating systems, PDFs retain their original formatting across platforms. This consistency ensures that the document appears the same for all recipients, maintaining the integrity of the content regardless of the software or device used to access it. This reliability makes PDFs an ideal choice for sharing official documents, reports, and academic papers.

Moreover, PDF documents are highly secure, allowing for encryption, password protection, and digital signatures. This robust security feature ensures that sensitive information remains confidential and protected from unauthorized access or tampering. Businesses and individuals alike rely on PDFs to safeguard their proprietary data and confidential documents, instilling trust and confidence in their digital communication methods.

Another compelling aspect of PDFs is their capacity for multi-functionality. From simple text documents to complex interactive forms, PDFs support a wide array of content types. They accommodate images, hyperlinks, annotations, multimedia elements, and form fields, making them suitable for diverse purposes, including e-books, manuals, presentations, and legal contracts. This versatility empowers users to create dynamic, interactive, and engaging content while maintaining the document’s structure and readability.

The accessibility of PDF documents also plays a pivotal role in their importance. PDFs are viewable on virtually any device, whether it’s a computer, tablet, or smartphone. Additionally, they can be easily shared via email, file-sharing platforms, or integrated into websites. This accessibility ensures seamless distribution of information across global audiences, transcending geographical barriers and facilitating efficient communication in various contexts.

Furthermore, the archival quality of PDF documents makes them invaluable for long-term storage and preservation of information. PDFs retain their formatting and content integrity over time, ensuring that the information remains accessible and readable even years after its creation. This aspect is particularly crucial for archiving historical documents, research papers, legal records, and government reports.

In conclusion, the importance of PDF documents in the digital era cannot be overstated. Their reliability, security, versatility, accessibility, and archival capabilities make them indispensable tools for individuals, businesses, educational institutions, and government bodies. As technology continues to evolve, PDFs remain steadfast, serving as a cornerstone of efficient and secure digital communication, document management, and information dissemination. Whether for sharing critical business information, disseminating educational materials, or preserving historical records, PDF documents continue to play an indispensable role in our increasingly digital world.

References

Devine, Heather, Andres Gonzalez, and Matthew Hardy. “Making accessible PDF documents.”ย Proceedings of the 11th ACM symposium on Document engineering. 2011.

Sharma, Shashikant Nishant. “An Insight into the Book Titled Why Stories Work.”ย Think India Journalย 26.4 (2023): 19-24.

Waller, Rob. “What makes a good document.”ย The criteria we use. Technical paperย 2 (2011).

Top 10 Research Grants for International Scholars

by Shashikant Nishant Sharma

Certainly! Research grants are crucial for scholars to fund their investigations, experiments, and studies. Here are ten notable research grants across various fields:

Photo by Google DeepMind on Pexels.com
  1. National Institutes of Health (NIH) Grants: NIH offers a wide range of grants supporting biomedical and health-related research. These grants vary in focus, from basic science to clinical studies, fostering innovative discoveries and advancements in healthcare.
  2. National Science Foundation (NSF) Grants: NSF supports fundamental research and education across all fields of science and engineering. Grants cover diverse areas such as astronomy, biology, computer science, and social sciences.
  3. European Research Council (ERC) Grants: ERC provides funding for pioneering research in Europe across various disciplines, encouraging high-risk, high-gain projects that can lead to significant breakthroughs.
  4. Human Frontier Science Program (HFSP) Grants: HFSP supports collaborative, interdisciplinary research focused on the life sciences, providing grants for scientists from different countries to work together on innovative projects.
  5. Bill & Melinda Gates Foundation Grants: This foundation offers grants to address global health issues, poverty alleviation, and education. Their grants often target innovative solutions and technological advancements with the potential for large-scale impact.
  6. Google Research Awards: Google supports academic research in computer science and related fields, providing grants for projects that can contribute to technology development and innovation.
  7. Wellcome Trust Grants: Wellcome Trust funds research in health, medical science, and medical humanities. They support a broad spectrum of projects from basic research to applied science.
  8. The Fulbright Program: Fulbright awards grants for international educational exchange for students, scholars, and professionals to study, teach, or conduct research. It promotes mutual understanding between people of different countries.
  9. NASA Research Grants: NASA funds research in space exploration, aeronautics, and Earth sciences. Grants support projects ranging from astrophysics to climate studies and technology development for space missions.
  10. Social Science Research Council (SSRC) Grants: SSRC provides funding for social science research addressing critical global issues, including inequality, governance, and human rights.

These grants not only offer financial support but also provide scholars with opportunities for networking, collaboration, and dissemination of their research findings, contributing significantly to the advancement of knowledge and innovation in various fields.


Research Grant
URLProbable Application Period
National Institutes of HealthNIH GrantsVaries; Check Funding Opportunities
National Science FoundationNSF GrantsVaries by Program; Check Announcements
European Research CouncilERC GrantsAnnually; Check ERC Funding Calls
Human Frontier Science ProgramHFSP GrantsAnnually; Check Application Deadlines
Bill & Melinda Gates FoundationGates Foundation GrantsVaries; Check Grant Programs
Google Research AwardsGoogle Research AwardsAnnually; Check Application Periods
Wellcome TrustWellcome Trust GrantsVaries; Check Grant Schemes
The Fulbright ProgramFulbright GrantsAnnually; Check Application Deadlines
NASA Research GrantsNASA GrantsVaries; Check Funding Opportunities
Social Science Research CouncilSSRC GrantsVaries; Check Grant Programs

Please note that the URLs provided here are placeholders and may not directly link to the specific grant application pages. It’s advisable to visit the respective organization’s official website for accurate and updated information on grant opportunities and application procedures. The application periods for these grants vary widely, so checking the websites regularly or subscribing to their newsletters can keep you updated on application deadlines and grant cycles.

Effective Staff Management: Key Strategies for Success in Your Company

By: Shashikant Nishant Sharma

Staff management is a critical component of running a successful company. The manner in which a business manages its employees directly impacts productivity, morale, and ultimately, the bottom line. To foster a positive work environment and maximize the potential of your team, implementing effective staff management strategies is essential.

Photo by cottonbro studio on Pexels.com

Clear Communication

Open, transparent communication is the cornerstone of effective staff management. Providing clear expectations, goals, and guidelines empowers employees to perform their best. Regularly scheduled meetings, both one-on-one and team-wide, facilitate communication channels and ensure everyone is aligned with the company’s objectives.

Encouraging Collaboration and Teamwork

Fostering a culture of collaboration and teamwork among employees can significantly boost productivity and innovation. Encourage brainstorming sessions, cross-departmental collaboration, and team-building activities to cultivate a cohesive work environment. When employees feel valued and supported, they are more likely to go above and beyond in their roles.

Recognizing and Rewarding Performance

Recognizing and rewarding exceptional performance is a powerful motivator. Acknowledging achievements, whether big or small, reinforces positive behavior and encourages employees to strive for excellence. This can be in the form of bonuses, public recognition, or other incentives tailored to the preferences of your team.

Providing Opportunities for Growth and Development

Investing in the growth and development of your staff not only enhances their skill sets but also increases their loyalty to the company. Offer training programs, workshops, and mentorship opportunities that align with individual career goals. When employees feel that their professional development is valued, they are more likely to remain committed to the company’s success.

Establishing a Feedback Loop

Constructive feedback is crucial for improvement. Encourage a feedback-rich culture where employees feel comfortable providing input and receiving feedback on their work. This helps in identifying areas for improvement and allows for continuous growth both individually and as a team.

Embracing Flexibility and Work-Life Balance

Recognize the importance of work-life balance in maintaining a motivated and engaged workforce. Offering flexible work arrangements, such as remote work options or flexible hours, demonstrates trust in your employees and accommodates their personal needs. Employees who feel supported in balancing their professional and personal lives tend to be more satisfied and productive.

Handling Conflict and Challenges Effectively

Conflicts may arise in any workplace. Effective staff management involves addressing conflicts promptly and professionally. Implement clear conflict resolution procedures and encourage open dialogue to resolve issues before they escalate, fostering a harmonious work environment.

Leading by Example

Leadership plays a pivotal role in staff management. Leading by example sets the tone for the entire team. Managers who embody the values, work ethic, and dedication they expect from their employees tend to earn their respect and inspire them to excel.

Conclusion

Effective staff management is a multifaceted endeavor that involves fostering a positive work culture, providing support for professional growth, and creating an environment where employees feel valued and motivated. By implementing these strategies, companies can optimize their workforce’s potential, leading to increased productivity, higher employee retention, and overall success in achieving business goals.

References

Davis, John R., Edward P. Rawana, and Denise R. Capponi. “Acceptability of behavioral staff management techniques.”ย Behavioral Interventionsย 4.1 (1989): 23-44.

Jordan, Peter, and Caroline Lloyd.ย Staff management in library and information work. Taylor & Francis, 2017.

Lakbala, Parvin, and Mahboobeh Lakbala. “Knowledge, attitude and practice of hospital staff management.”ย Waste management & researchย 31.7 (2013): 729-732.

Quilitch, H. Robert. “A comparison of three staffโ€management procedures.”ย Journal of Applied Behavior Analysisย 8.1 (1975): 59-66.

Sharma, Shashikant Nishant, Shankar Chatterjee, and Kavita Dehalwar. “Mahatma Gandhi National Rural Employment Guarantee Scheme: Challenges and Opportunities.”ย Think India Journalย 26.1 (2023): 7-15.

Suda, Kim T., and Raymond G. Miltenberger. “Evaluation of staff management strategies to increase positive interactions in a vocational setting.”ย Behavioral Interventionsย 8.2 (1993): 69-88.

How to Write A Good Book Review of Literature Book

By: Shashikant Nishant Sharma

Photo by ready made on Pexels.com

Writing a comprehensive book review for a literature book involves a nuanced exploration of various elements, encompassing both objective analysis and personal reflection. Begin by immersing yourself in the book, carefully absorbing its contents and taking note of key aspects such as plot intricacies, character dynamics, and the overarching themes. It’s crucial to understand the author’s intent and evaluate how successfully they convey their message. When initiating your review, furnish readers with basic information about the book, including the title, author, genre, and publication date. Following this, provide a concise yet insightful summary of the plot without divulging major spoilers, emphasizing pivotal characters and events. As you delve into the analysis, scrutinize the author’s writing style, examining whether it is engaging, descriptive, or poetic, and elucidate on how this style contributes to the overall reading experience.

Delve into the exploration of themes and motifs, assessing their development throughout the narrative and how they enhance the depth of the story. The characters, as the heart of any literary work, warrant close examinationโ€”evaluate their complexity, development, and how effectively they resonate with the reader. Equally significant is the setting, and it’s imperative to discuss how it shapes the atmosphere and tone, enhancing the reader’s immersion in the narrative. Assess the pacing of the story and the structure of the plot, considering whether they maintain engagement or falter at certain points. Expressing your personal reactions to the book adds a subjective touch to the review; delve into what aspects resonated with you emotionally or intellectually. Constructive criticism, if necessary, should be articulated with examples from the book, providing a well-rounded perspective. Optionally, compare the book to others in the same genre or by the same author to provide additional context.

Considering the target audience is essential; reflect on whether the book effectively reaches its intended readership. Conclude your review by summarizing your thoughts and offering a recommendation based on the strengths and weaknesses discussed. The recommendation should guide potential readers toward the book if it aligns with their preferences and interests. Lastly, before finalizing your review, proofread it meticulously for grammatical and spelling errors, ensuring that your thoughts are organized and clearly articulated. This meticulous approach ensures that your book review serves as a comprehensive guide for prospective readers, combining both critical analysis and personal insights.

Writing a good book review requires a thoughtful and well-structured approach. Whether you’re reviewing a literature book or any other genre, here are some general guidelines to help you write an effective book review:

1. Read the Book Carefully:

  • Before you start writing, read the book thoroughly. Take notes on significant plot points, characters, themes, and any notable quotes.

2. Understand the Author’s Intent:

  • Consider the author’s purpose and message. What is the book trying to convey? How successful is the author in achieving their goals?

3. Provide Basic Information:

  • Start your review by providing essential details about the book, such as the title, author, genre, and publication date.

4. Offer a Brief Summary:

  • Include a concise summary of the plot without giving away major spoilers. Highlight the main characters and events that shape the narrative.

5. Discuss the Writing Style:

  • Evaluate the author’s writing style. Is it engaging, descriptive, or poetic? Discuss how the style contributes to the overall reading experience.

6. Explore Themes and Motifs:

  • Analyze the themes and motifs presented in the book. How are they developed throughout the story? Do they add depth to the narrative?

7. Examine Character Development:

  • Discuss the characters’ depth, complexity, and development throughout the story. How well do you relate to or understand the characters?

8. Comment on the Setting:

  • Evaluate how the setting contributes to the atmosphere and tone of the book. Is it vividly described? Does it enhance the reader’s immersion in the story?

9. Critique Plot and Pacing:

  • Assess the pacing of the story. Is it well-paced, or does it drag at certain points? Evaluate the plot structure and whether it keeps the reader engaged.

10. Express Your Personal Reaction:

  • Share your personal reactions to the book. What did you enjoy the most? Did any parts resonate with you emotionally?

11. Compare with Other Works (optional):

  • If relevant, compare the book to others in the same genre or by the same author. This can provide context for your review.

12. Be Constructive in Criticism:

  • If you have criticisms, express them constructively. Back up your opinions with examples from the book.

13. Consider the Target Audience:

  • Reflect on who the book is intended for and whether it effectively reaches its target audience.

14. Conclude with a Recommendation:

  • Summarize your thoughts and conclude with a recommendation. Who would you recommend this book to, and why?

15. Proofread and Revise:

  • Before finalizing your review, proofread it for grammar and spelling errors. Ensure that your thoughts are well-organized and clearly expressed.

Remember that a good book review balances objective analysis with personal opinion. Providing specific examples and evidence from the book will strengthen your review and help readers understand your perspective.

References

Adshead, Gwen. “How I write a book review.”ย Psychiatric Bulletinย 23.8 (1999): 510-510.

Bamyeh, Mohammed A. “From the editor: Ways to write a good book review.”ย International Sociologyย 29.2 (2014): 79-80.

Clark, Terry, and Leonard L. Berry. “Book Review: Learning to Write, Writing to Learn.” (1998): 123-125.

Dehalwar, Kavita, and Shashikant Nishant Sharma. “Fate of Slums of Bhopal-A Tale of Struggle and Resilience.”ย Think India Journalย 26.4 (2023): 12-18.

Heyd, Michael. “How to Write a Book Reviewโ€“And Why You Should.”ย Journal of Hospital Librarianshipย 17.4 (2017): 349-355.

Lee, Alexander D., et al. “How to write a scholarly book review for publication in a peer-reviewed journal: a review of the literature.”ย Journal of Chiropractic Educationย 24.1 (2010): 57-69.

Sharma, Shashikant Nishant. “Understanding Citations: A Crucial Element of Academic Writing.” (2023).

Sharma, Shashikant Nishant, ed.ย New perspectives in sociology and allied fields. EduPedia Publications (P) Ltd, 2016.

Sharma, Shashikant Nishant. “Book Review: City Times and Other Poems by Vihang A. Naik.”ย International Journal of Researchย 2.1 (2015): 781-783.

Stevens, Dannelle D. “Write Book Reviews.”ย Write More, Publish More, Stress Less!. Routledge 121-133.

Principalsโ€™ ICT Management Ability as Predictor of Teachersโ€™ Technology Integration in Public Secondary Schools in Anambra State

By:

Okafor, Judith Nneka

Email: srnnejokafor@gmail.com

Prof. Nwogbo, Vivian Ngozi

Email: vn.nwogbo@unizik.edu.ng

Department of Educational Management and Policy, Faculty of Education, Nnamdi Azikiwe University, Awka.

Abstract

The aim of the study was to investigate Principalsโ€™ ICT management ability as predictor of teachersโ€™ technology integration in public secondary schools in Anambra State. Two research questions guided the study and two null hypotheses were tested at 0.05 level of significance. Correlational survey research design was adopted for the study. The population of the study comprised 5,286 teachers in the 263 public secondary schools in Anambra State. A sample of 528 teachers was drawn using proportionate sampling technique. Two sets of instruments titled: Principalsโ€™ Technology Leadership Questionnaire (PTLQ) and Teachersโ€™ Technology Integration Questionnaire (TTLQ) were used to collect data from the respondents. Data collected were analyzed using simple regression analysis. Findings revealed that Principalsโ€™ ICT management ability of support is a moderate and significant predictor of teachersโ€™ technology integration, while Principalsโ€™ ICT evaluation ability is a strong and significant predictor of teachersโ€™ technology integration. Based on the findings, it was recommended among others that Principals need technology competence and skills to provide ICT facilities and support services for effective ICT programmes in schools in order to increase teachersโ€™ technology integration in the school.

Keywords:  Principal, ICT management, technology integration

Introduction 

The use of communication as a medium of passing information from one person to another has been viewed as an important tool for managing change and innovation in organisations. The era of technology is a big change in the proactive way of doing things in the 21st century. When this changes in information and communication technology are integrated into education, it produces knowledge and skills required for improvement in the educational system with impact on the society in general (Williams, Uchendu and Mbon, 2014).  However, teachers need to use ICT to enhance their teaching effectiveness. Thus, there has to be availability of prudent management of ICT resources by school principals and ensuring proper utilization of these resources to boost teachersโ€™ technology integration. The proper management of ICT facilities in schools of learning is very paramount for execution of activities by the school personnel especially the teachers. 

Surbhi (2015) defined management as an act of planning and organizing people and their work, for achieving a common goal by using the organizational resources. The major activities performed by management include planning, organizing, controlling, coordination and decision-making. Management in ICT entails effective planning, organization, selection, support, assessment and training of human resources and managing the application of best available technologies for achieving the institutional goal and that of the learner. According to Nwizu (2016), management of ICT facility requires proper planning to serve as a hub upon which the transmission of knowledge is based. It is a process of determining ICT requirement that will ensure and enhance quality achievement of learning outcome. This will necessary serve both the students and the teacher to achieve the objective of the programme. The initial effort in outlining ICT plan is to determine the type of ICT apparatus that will be able to reach the students and be accessible to them.

Similarly, Oluyemesi (2015) stated that school principals are saddled with the responsibility of managing ICT in schools for the realization of educational goals, hence the need for management of ICT facilities such as computers, aiding the provision of internet services, projector, fax machine, interactive digital white boards, online zoom, video conferencing classes where students watch lecturers at home on the computers and smart phones, powerpoint slides among others to improve teaching effectiveness and studentsโ€™ learning outcome. Besides, the overwhelming influence of ICT and social media in all facet of human life is so alarming. All life activities are connected to ICT and social media to the extent that whoever is not in the use of any type of ICT will appear (analogue) not to be moving along with the trend of the 21st century. The era of technology is a big change to the proactive way of doing things in the 21st Century.

In furtherance, Oluyemesi (2015) defined information and communication technologies (ICT) as those high-tech digital and electronic innovations and facilities that enable accessing, analyzing, processing, management and communication information over long distance. Also, it is a diverse set of technological tools and resources used to transmit, store create, share or exchange information which include computers, internet, live broadcasting technologies (radio, television, webcasting) recorded broadcasting technologies (podcasting, audio and video players, storage devices) and telephone and satellite technologies.  In agreement with the above, Ogonnaya (2017) defined ICT as an electronic technologies used in the creation, collection, storage, processing, retrieval, transmission of information between individuals for the benefit of human race. Therefore, management of ICT simply means planning, organizing and supporting the use of technology facilities to achieve an effective learning goal. Thus, principals should harness the integration of ICT facilities to support the operation and achieve the objectives of the entire programme.

Akuegwu, Ntukidem, Ntukidem and Jaja (2013) argued that the integration of ICT in teacher training programmes is vital in that teachers will gain knowledge in the use of ICT in teaching. That the knowledge-driven nature, powered by information and communication technology, has made the use of information and communication technology second to none in ensuring quality instructions in the schools. This means that ICT can be used by teachers to improve instructional activities at various levels of education. Hence, the ICTs, such as computers, internet facilities, video computer disc, and close circuit television among others increase the productivity of teachers. Therefore, there are factors that are involved in principalsโ€™ ICT management ability: ICT support ability and evaluation ability.

ICT support ability of a principal according to Akuegwu, Ntukiden, Ntukidem and Jaja (2013) entails having needed technology skills and changes aimed at maximizing learning achievement and goals through the supply and use of technology and mass media resources. It involves the process of providing support services for effective ICT programmes in schools such as videos, televisions, computers, ICT laboratory, and overhead projectors. Similarly, principals should utilize strategic partnerships to support comprehensive improvement, creating and maintaining a robust technology infrastructure, including integrated and manageable technology systems to support management, operations, teaching and learning exercise. This is to ensure that subject teachers can easily have access to ICT tools whenever needed.

ICT evaluation ability of principals is key element that ensure attainment of instructional outcome in learning experience. Thus, ICT evaluation ability of the school principal is the capacity of the principal to successfully assess ICT programmes in school. Evaluation of ICT can be in form of observing teachers use ICT to teach students, rating teachersโ€™ ICT utilization and providing feedback to stakeholders who will be interested in knowing the extent at which their objectives have been achieved. Every principal is therefore expected to adopt appropriate evaluation ability to effectively assess the effects of use ICT on teaching and learning exercise. Nevertheless,  the competence factor plays an important role in the integration of ICT in the teaching and learning activities, whereby the competence of the user (teachers) are said to be balance with the integration in classroom exercise.

According to Charania, (2011), technology integration is when the electronic devices are fit in comfortably with the curriculum or instructional plans of teaching and learning exercise. Thus, technology rather than an additional layer in the classroom is embedded within the design of the teacherโ€™s lesson plan and the pedagogy. Besides, in this approach, the teacher designs learning activities and students use technology to construct their own learning.  For instance, students use technology for seeking information, construct and organize their learning and represent it through computer applications. Thus, the teacher plays a role of a facilitator.

However, it has been observed that some principals lack ICT management ability to either support the integration of ICT in teaching and learning activities or evaluate the use of ICT by teachers. This is because principals do not show readiness to learn to become technology leaders in their various schools, while some do not have interest to become competent ICT managers. Some principals do not know how to access emails, online interactive classroom, and video conferencing or to integrate the use of scratch cards to check results by the student. This ICT non competent of the principals affects the goal attainment of schools. A typical example is during the outbreak of corona virus pandemic that brought a total lockdown of schools. Principals were advised to use different technology facilities to connect students to teachers in order to maintain on-going teaching and learning activities. It was expected that principals should work with their computers to ensure that the gap created by the lockdown was filled with ICT and online administration, but the reverse was the case. Despite the level of awareness, there were perceived attitude of computer phobia and withdrawal approach in the use of computer in administration. It is common experience today among the principals of the continued use of paper and pen in disseminating information on their school notice board. Most at time official information are mutilated or misplaced. This is very embarrassing and sort of worry that this kind of issue are still being witnessed in public secondary schools in Anambra state, when many formal organization have left analogy system to e-administration. This necessitated the need to investigate principalsโ€™ ICT management ability as predictor of teachersโ€™ technology integration in public secondary school.

Purpose of the study

The study investigated principalsโ€™ ICT management ability as predictor of teachersโ€™ technology integration in public secondary schools in Anambra state. Specifically, the study sought to: 

  1. Find out the predictive value of principalsโ€™ ICT management ability of support on teachersโ€™ technology integration in public secondary schools in Anambra State.
  2. Determine the predictive value of principalsโ€™ ICT management evaluation ability on teachersโ€™ technology integration in public secondary schools in Anambra State.

Research Questions

The following research questions guided the study.

  1. To what extent can principalsโ€™ ICT management ability of support predict teachersโ€™ technology integration in public secondary schools in Anambra State.
  2. What is the extent of prediction of principalsโ€™ ICT management evaluation ability on teachersโ€™ technology integration in public secondary schools in Anambra state?

Hypotheses 

The following formulated null hypotheses were tested at 0.05 level of significance.

  1. There is no significant prediction of principalsโ€™ ICT management ability of support on teachersโ€™ technology integration in public secondary schools in Anambra state.
  2. There is no significant prediction of principalsโ€™ ICT management evaluation ability on teachersโ€™ technology integration in public secondary schools in Anambra state.

Method

A correlational survey research design was adopted for the study. The population of the study is 5,286 teachers in the 263 public secondary schools in Anmbra state. Proportionate stratified sampling technique was adopted for the study. The state public secondary schools were divided into six strata and the six education formed the six strata. Ten percent of the total number of each strata was sampled, given a total of 528 teachers as sample of the study. The administration of the instruments was carried out with the help of six research assistants. 528 copies of questionnaires were used for the study. The data for the study was collected using the two sets of instruments titled: โ€œPrincipalsโ€™ Technology Management Questionnaireโ€ (PTMQ) and โ€œTeachersโ€™ Technology Integration Questionnaireโ€ (TTIQ). Principalsโ€™ technology management instrument was divided into two components that are collapsed. First component contained items on principalsโ€™ ICT support, and principalsโ€™ ICT evaluation item. The second set of the instrument is โ€œTeachers technology integration questionnaire that contained 40 items. To establish the reliability of the instrument, the questionnaire was tested using twenty teachers outside the study area. The reliability indices for two components of principalsโ€™ technology management questionnaire were 0.80 and 0.72 respectively. The reliability index for teachersโ€™ technology integration was 0.86. The overall coefficient of (PTMQ) was 0.82, while that of teachers was 0.86. Thus, the researcher considered the instrument to be reliable and fit for administration. This is in line with the view of Nworgu (2015) who posited that Cronbach Alpha is a good statistical tool for testing internal consistency of an instrument that have homogenous not dichotomous items and who also recommended that a co-efficient value of 0.70 and above is adequate for a research instrument. The data collected were analyzed using simple regression analysis. Muijsโ€™ (2004) cited in Cohen, Manion and Morrison (2007, p. 523) suggestion for assessing the goodness of fit of regression model using squared regression coefficient (R2) was adopted for the research questions. Where: 0 – 0.1 = weak, 0.1- 0.3=modest, 0.3 – 0.5 = moderate, > 0.5 = strong. For the hypotheses, p-value was used to determine the significance of the prediction. Where the calculated p-value is less than the stipulated level of significance (0.05), the null hypothesis was rejected. Whereas the null hypothesis was not rejected where the calculated p-value is greater than the stipulated level of significance (0.05)

Results 

Research Question 1: To what extent can principalsโ€™ ICT management ability of support predict teachersโ€™ technology integration in public secondary schools in Anambra State?

Table 1. Summary of Simple Regression Analysis with Principalsโ€™ ICT management ability as Predictor of Teachersโ€™ Technology Integration

 RR2Adj.R2BSE Bฮฒ 
Constant  .63 .40 .4067.08 2.31  .63
Principalsโ€™ ICT management ability of support   2.43.12  

Data in Table 1 indicates that principalsโ€™ ICT support is a moderate predictor of teachersโ€™ technology integration in public secondary schools in Anambra State. This is shown by the regression coefficient (R =.63) and the coefficient of determination (R2 = .40) which indicates that principalsโ€™ technology support explained 40% of the variance in teachersโ€™ technology integration.

Research Question 2: What is the extent of prediction of principalsโ€™ ICT management evaluation ability on teachersโ€™ technology integration in public secondary schools in Anambra State?

Table 2. Summary of Simple Regression Analysis with Principalsโ€™ ICT management evaluation ability as Predictor of Teachersโ€™ Technology Integration

 RR2Adj.R2BSE Bฮฒ 
Constant  .82 .68 .6743.74 2.02  .82
Principalsโ€™ ICT management evaluation ability   4.45.43  

As shown in Table 2, principalsโ€™ ICT management evaluation ability is a strong predictor of teachersโ€™ technology integration in public secondary schools in Anambra State. This is shown by the regression coefficient (R =.82) and the coefficient of determination (R2 = .68) which indicates that principalsโ€™ evaluation explained 68% of the variance in teachersโ€™ technology integration.

Hypotheses

Hypothesis 1: Principalsโ€™ ICT management ability of support does not significantly predict teachersโ€™ technology integration in public secondary schools in Anambra State.  

Table 3. Test of Significance of Simple Regression Analysis with Principalsโ€™ ICT management ability of support as Predictor of Teachersโ€™ Technology Integration

 RR2Adj.R2BSE BฮฒtFP
Constant  .63 .40 .4067.08 2.31  .6328.95  362.98.00.00
Principalsโ€™ ICT support ability   2.42.12 19.05 .00

The analysis in Table 3 shows that the simple regression coefficient (R) is .63 while the R2 is .40. The F-ratio associated with these is 362.98 and the P-value = .00, since the P-value is less than the stipulated 0.05 level of significance, it was decided that Principalsโ€™ ICT support ability is a significant predictor of teachersโ€™ technology integration in public secondary schools in Anambra State. The null hypothesis was therefore rejected.

Hypothesis 2: Principalsโ€™ ICT management evaluation ability does not significantly predict teachersโ€™ technology integration in public secondary schools in Anambra State.  

 <                                                                                 

Table 4 Test of Significance of Simple Regression Analysis with Principalsโ€™ ICT Evaluation Ability as Predictor of Teachersโ€™ Technology Integration

 RR2Adj.R2BSE BฮฒtFP
Constant  .82 .68 .6743.74 2.02  .8221.65  1117.29.00.00
 Principalsโ€™ ICTevaluation ability   4.45.13 33.42 .00

The analysis in Table 4 shows that the simple regression coefficient (R) is .82 while the R2 is .68. The F-ratio associated with these is 1117.29 and the P-value = .00, since the P-value is less than the stipulated 0.05 level of significance, it was decided that Principalsโ€™ ICT evaluation ability is a significant predictor of teachersโ€™ technology integration in public secondary schools in Anambra State. The null hypothesis was therefore rejected.

Discussion of Findings

The finding of this study indicated that principalsโ€™ ICT management ability of support is a moderate and significant predictor of teachersโ€™ technology integration in public secondary schools in Anambra State. This finding is in support of Rogers (2000) who examined the relationship between teachersโ€™ perceptions of principalsโ€™ technology leadership and their use of technology in the classroom and found that teachers who stated that their school principals exhibited a supportive role in terms of provision of ICT technology for use in the classroom were more likely to integrate technology into their courses. In line with this, Hughes and Zachariah (2001) pointed out that when principals provide and make ICT facilities as well as other support services available for effective ICT programmes in schools, teachersโ€™ technology integration in the school improves.

The study also revealed that principalsโ€™ ICT evaluation ability is a strong and significant predictor of teachersโ€™ technology integration in public secondary schools in Anambra State. Evaluation of ICT is the ability of school principals to successfully assess ICT programmes in their schools in form of observing teachers use of ICT to teach students, rating teachersโ€™ ICT utilization and providing feedback to stakeholders who will be interested in knowing the extent at which their objectives have been achieved. The finding of this study supports that of Papa (2011) who found that school principalsโ€™ ability to observe and rate teachersโ€™ ICT use in the classroom improves teachersโ€™ ICT performance. This finding is not supported by Lafont (2011) that teacherโ€™s technology integration cannot be predicted by Principalโ€™s ICT evaluation. The finding of this study also contradicts Page-Jones (2008) who proved that there is no relationship between technology leadership and the use of technology by teachers in schools. The reason for this contradiction may be attributed to the location where these studies were carried out. The study by Lafont (2011) and Page-Jones (2008) were conducted outside Nigeria and that may have influenced the contrary findings.

Conclusion

Based on the findings of the study, the researcher concludes that Principalsโ€™ ICT management ability of support is moderate and significant predictor of teachersโ€™ technology integration, while Principalsโ€™ ICT evaluation ability is strong and significant predictor of teachersโ€™ technology integration. 

Recommendation

            Based on the findings of this study, the following recommendations are made:

  1. Principals need technology competence and skills to provide ICT facilities and support services for effective ICT programmes in schools in order to increase teachersโ€™ technology integration in the school.
  2. The study also recommends that for teachers to embrace and implement educational technology in accomplishing the intended learning outcomes, principals must be able to successfully assess ICT programmes in their schools by observing teachers use ICT, rating teachersโ€™ ICT utilization and providing feedback on the extent at which their objectives have been achieved.

REFERENCES

Akuegwu, B. A., NtukidemE. P. Ntukidem, P. J. and Jaja, G. (2013). Information and communication technology (ICT) facilities utilization for quality instruction service delivery among Universities Lecturers in Nigeria. Review of Higher Education in Africa, 3(1), 33-53. 

Charania, A. (2011). An integrated approach to technology in K-12 classroom. National seminar on information communication technology in education, department of education.

Cohen, L. Manion, L. and Morrison, K. (2007). Research methods in education. USA, Rutledge.

Hughes, M., and Zachariah, S. (2001). An investigation into the relationship between effective administrative leadership styles and the use of technology. International Electronic Journal for Leadership in Learning, 5(5), 1-10.

Lafont, S. L. B. (2011). The relationship between principals’ technology leadership and the   teachers’ use of technology. South eastern Louisiana University.

Nwizu, S. C. (2016). Higher Distance Education Programmes in Nigeria: The Quality Perspective UNN 114th Inaugural lecture retrieved on 2/8/18 from www.unn.edu.ng.>inaugural-final.

Nworgu, B.G. (2015). Educational research: Basic issues and methodology (3rd ed.): University Trust Publishers.

Ogbonnaya, C. N. (2017). Teaching profession and challenges of ICT in teacher education. In W. Cheta, F.D. Asodike (Eds). The Teaching Profession & Teaching in Digital World. Port Harcourt: Pearl Publishers. 115-125.

Oluyemesi, A. O. (2015). ICT and effective school management: Administratorsโ€™ perspective: Proceedings of the World Congress on Engineering. London, UK. Retrieved from: www.iaeng.org/publication/wce2015. Pp 249 โ€“ 257.

Page-Jones, A.B. (2008). Leadership behaviour and technology activities: The relationship   between principals and technology use in schools. Doctoral dissertation, University of Central Florida Orlando, Florida.

Papa, R. (2011). Technology leadership for school improvement. Thousand Oaks: Sage Publications.

Rogers, P. L. (2000). Barriers to adopting emerging technologies in education. Journal of Educational Computing Research, 22(4), 455-472.

Surbhi, S. (2015). Difference between Management and Administration. Retrieved July, 2018 from https://keydifferences.com/difference-between-management-and-dministration.html

Williams, R. E., Uchendu, C. C. and Mbon, U. F. (2014). Information and Communication    Technology facilities and public secondary school work performance in Akwa Ibom    State, Nigeria. International Journal of Educational Administration Planning and Research 6(1), 71-81.

Linguistic Intelligence through Reading and Critical Thinking among English Language Learners

by:

Koppula Ujwala

Lecturer in English 

TSWRDC (W)

Ibrahimpatnam

Dr. Mellisa Helen

Assistant Professor

Nizam College, Osmania University

Abstract:

Language is a powerful tool that not only enables communication but also serves as a gateway to understanding diverse cultures, traditions, and perspectives. For English language learners (ELLs), the journey of acquiring a new language is a profound and often challenging experience. In this context, the development of linguistic intelligence takes center stage, offering ELLs a unique opportunity to harness the transformative potential of language through reading and critical thinking. This article explores the vital connection between linguistic intelligence, reading, and critical thinking within the context of English language learning. It delves into the ways in which reading literary texts can enrich the linguistic skills of ELLs and enhance their capacity for critical thought. As ELLs navigate the complexities of a new language, they embark on a voyage that not only broadens their linguistic horizons but also nurtures their ability to analyze, evaluate, and interpret information critically.

Through the exploration of literature, ELLs can expand their vocabulary, deepen their understanding of syntax and grammar, and sharpen their listening and speaking skills. At the same time, reading exposes them to the intricate tapestry of cultural and social nuances embedded in language, allowing them to appreciate the depth and diversity of the English language. However, this article goes beyond the linguistic aspects of language acquisition. It highlights how reading and critical thinking serve as powerful tools for ELLs to engage with different worldviews, perspectives, and ways of life. By immersing themselves in literary works, they can relate to characters, empathize with their experiences, and gain insights into the human condition. These experiences not only nurture their linguistic intelligence but also foster a deep appreciation for the interplay between language and culture.

A literary text stimulates the language acquisition process of a student in comparison to informational materials. The introduction of a literary book in a language school can enhance the proficiency of the students. It facilitates the expansion of the learner’s imagination and awareness of language necessary for good debate or discourse. Reading literary writings from other eras can provide a comprehensive understanding of the various cultures, social conventions, and sociopolitical conditions that existed at the time, enabling the student to project them when participating in conversations or debates on the issue. The article will delve into practical strategies and best practices that educators and ELL instructors can employ to harness the synergy between linguistic intelligence, reading, and critical thinking. By doing so, they can empower ELLs to not only master the English language but also to become adept critical thinkers who can navigate a world characterized by diverse linguistic and cultural landscapes. This article aims to shed light on the immense potential that reading and critical thinking hold for English language learners, as they embark on a transformative journey of linguistic growth, cultural exploration, and intellectual empowerment.

Keywords: Literature, Literary Texts, Language Learning, Language and Literature, critical thinking.

Introduction 

Literature and language are inextricably linked, a truth that no one can dispute. Brumfit and Carter (1986) have previously said that literature serves as “an ally of language.” The method of teaching language through literature is not a new methodology, but it has been frequently utilized as a tool for achieving educational objectives. Until now, there have been numerous adjustments to instructional approaches. Texts of the target language were read and translated using the grammar translation method of language instruction. The emphasis placed on grammar rules diminished interest in the text’s literary content. The structural approach to literature lost its legitimacy when it relied solely on the traditional canon. The functional notional approach placed less emphasis on reading and more emphasis on fixed communication using authentic language samples.

Literature and English Language Learning

According to Coleridge, the essence of literature is to beautify language. Language is a wonderful attire for touching human emotions. Literature and language are two sides of the same coin. Language, if literature is thinking, is for communication. It helps the development of English language skills through various genres, including plays, poems, short stories, novels, and lyrics. Literature is a learning instrument that assists the student to acquire English fluency. The learner will increase his vocabulary, word structures, and syntax through reading literature. It is essential for students to upgrade their English language skills in order to compete effectively in the global marketplace.

In recent years, teaching the English language through literature has gained considerable attention. According to researchers, literature enables students to become acquainted with vocabulary, dialogues, and writing that can be used to improve their language skills. Literature employs descriptive language and introduces a diverse cast of people. The students enhance their English language fluency and accuracy by developing their reading skills through the application of specific tactics. Students will develop knowledge of figurative language such as metaphor and simile, as well as demanding vocabulary. The study of literature for enjoyment is a potent educational instrument that instils ideals and cultural richness. Shakespeare’s works, such as Macbeth, Hamlet, Romeo and Juliet, etc., continue to pique the curiosity of modern readers due to their present relevance and potential in substance and structure. Ben Johnson says it accurately: “He was not of an age but of all time.” The phrases he coined in his works are still in use today. For example: All that glitters is not gold (The Merchant of Venice, 1596), All’s well that ends well and The game is up (Cymbeline, 1611), etc.

“Literary texts can develop the student’s knowledge of language at the levels of vocabulary, structure, and textual organization,” (Hedge 1985 p. 22).

In recent years, the importance of literature in a language classroom has grown substantially. Literature is a potentially rich source of relevant information outside the classroom, according to Pugh. Literature teaches the learner to recognize creativity and higher degrees of imagination in all aspects of his daily life. It aids in the development of the student’s reading, writing, grammar, and vocabulary. This contributes to the total linguistic competence, which includes syntax, phonetics, diction, etc. As poetry contains a great deal of figurative language and pictures, students may encounter difficulty in its interpretation. Teachers of the English language can, however, transform this resistance into genuine interest.

Students can obtain knowledge of diction and sentence usage. Through the interactions with literary books, students can improve their communication skills. Novels, plays, and stories provide learners with an understanding of the culture that existed during various time periods, so enabling them to understand the vocabulary of other eras. Students can improve their writing abilities by engaging with literary materials and expressing their ideas. This enhances their critical reasoning. They may choose an alternative ending to a short narrative or compose a brief analysis of what they have read. In an interactive session following the reading of a literary text, students can exchange ideas that enhance their comprehension of the text.

Literature imbued with words conveys the essence of existence. English Literature has become the zenith of linguistic excellence with considerable finesse. Even though there have been several changes in the use of language as a result of advancements in various industries caused by the entrance of technology components, it has never lost its allure and will stay lovely forever.

Literature and Critical Thinking

In recent years, literature and the teaching of language and critical thinking through linguistic intelligence have gained significance. Literature is recognized as a collection of works containing significant language teaching materials. It contains a vast array of language-focused stories, plays, and poems. Literature can be utilized as a legitimate strategy for enhancing language levels. Literature discusses the people, locations, sociocultural elements, and cultural backdrop of many historical periods. This permits the student to gain an understanding of human nature. These universal concerns can be used to enhance language skills, including reading, writing, speaking, and listening. Literature aids students’ cultural enrichment and personal development (Collie & Slater, 1991; Carter & Long, 1991).

When students develop critical literacy abilities, they are able to rely on a variety of arguments and evidence to support their claims. For instance, hard sciences such as physics and biology advance by incorporating lower levels of knowledge and comprehension into newly introduced ones. Each new area of knowledge is constructed using a pyramidal structure. In contrast, educational sociologists such as Basil Bernstein (1999) explains that the humanities, such as literature and visual arts, tend to develop as independent entities along a horizontal line. For this reason, critical thinking and reading skills are developed and exhibited differently across fields. It is necessary to urge students to pay attention to the specific requirements of various school disciplines and to request feedback from their teachers on manifestations of critical thinking that have been deemed worthy.

Bloom’s taxonomy places ‘comprehension’ at the bottom and ‘evaluation’ at the top, with analysis, synthesis, and evaluation as the three highest levels, which are essential for developing critical thinking. (Kennedy et al., 1991). Bloom’s taxonomy is consistent with a centuries-old Indian idea called “Pari-Prashna” that encourages critical, analytical, and autonomous thinking. The term ‘prashna’ means ‘questioning,’ while ‘pari’ indicates ‘depth and persistent’ It is essential to comprehend the above-mentioned definitions of critical thinking at the outset.

Critical thinking is not a new concept, but it has only gained attention in recent years. It is a component of the Vedic learning method from an eastern perspective. Cromwell (1992) states, “Almost everyone agrees that one of the primary aims of education is the enhancement of student thinking. In the past ten years, there has been a growing concern that graduates at all levels lack higher-order thinking skills. Our educational system emphasizes grammar at all levels but places less emphasis on literature. Memory is detrimental to comprehension and application. This will hinder their future employment, and Hirose (1992) laments, “Many of today’s youngsters lack the reasoning and critical thinking skills required to analyze and refine knowledge in order to perform effectively in the workforce.” It is now required to understand the significance of critical thinking and, more significantly, how it may be fostered in students. Utilizing literature in a language-based classroom is one technique for developing critical thinking skills.

Literature contains tales, plays, and poetry that can teach students not only the language but also real-world settings. Reading literary works in a language school helps students improve their language skills and enhance their critical thinking. Reading literature requires the reader to engage in analysis, synthesis, and evaluation of ideas. While examining the plot and interacting with the characters in a work, the reader is prompted to consider and reconsider his or her thoughts. A good literary work should be difficult in multiple ways. The experience obtained from reading a text enables the student to think critically and develop other attributes such as self-confidence, problem-solving, and an open mind.

Analyzing, drawing conclusions, assessing, and making decisions are all components of critical thinking. As it serves multiple purposes, a literary text affords linguistic chances in a variety of ways. Reading books is enjoyable and enriches the reader’s language. In addition, reading fiction, nonfiction, and poetry exposes the reader to the events and people of various eras. Thus, literature fosters the ability to comprehend culture and recognize the shared experiences that bind people from throughout the globe. Literature affords the reader the opportunity to develop their imagination. These abilities enable them to be inventive and productive in their daily lives. They begin to interact with others who share the same emotions, evaluate the nature of others, and make acceptable life decisions. Higher-order thinking skills are directly related with creativity and imagination. These skills help the learner to internalize knowledge and turn it through critical analysis into cognitive tools. In addition, they support the development of learners’ scientific-related knowledge through science fiction, despite their lack of expertise in science and technology.

Reading a literary text enables the development of the reader’s imagination. Numerous characters in various literature allow the reader to consider them from their point of view. Sometimes the stories and characters mimic the lives of the readers, providing them with hints on how to handle their problems or respond to specific situations. Literature encourages readers to expand their imaginations, form new concepts, and go far beyond plain facts. It is a rich trove of diverse civilizations and traditions that illuminate human nature. Human emotions and human situations are grasped through the study of literature. This allows for the activation of cognition. Questions arise axiomatically, giving rise to critical thought. Thus, the cognitive abilities of the student are also stimulated.

Relationship between Reading a Text and Linguistic Intelligence

When engaging with a literary text, individuals with strong linguistic intelligence have the ability to savor the intricate beauty of the written word. They can appreciate the author’s use of metaphors, similes, and symbolism, allowing them to delve into the nuances of the narrative. This deep connection to language enables readers to immerse themselves in the story and vividly imagine the scenes and characters described. The text becomes a canvas on which linguistic intelligence can paint a vibrant mental picture, enriching the reading experience. Moreover, linguistic intelligence empowers readers to explore the minds of the characters and empathize with their experiences. Through dialogue, inner monologues, and descriptive prose, readers can tap into the emotions and thoughts of the characters. They can analyze the characters’ linguistic choices, understand their perspectives, and even relate to their personal struggles. This process not only enhances their imaginative capacities but also nurtures their ability to see the world through diverse linguistic lenses.

The parallels between the lives of the readers and the characters they encounter in literature serve as a powerful tool for individuals with linguistic intelligence. They can extract valuable insights from characters’ journeys, applying the wisdom gained to their own lives. Whether it is dealing with love, loss, ambition, or ethical dilemmas, literature offers a treasure trove of scenarios and linguistic expressions to guide readers in navigating their real-world challenges. Through this symbiotic relationship between linguistic intelligence and literary texts, readers can find solace, inspiration, and guidance, empowering them to make informed decisions and craft their own narratives. As linguistic intelligence delves into the rich tapestry of civilizations and traditions found in literature, it also nurtures the reader’s ability to decode cultural nuances and linguistic subtleties. Readers with this form of intelligence can appreciate the beauty of idiomatic expressions, regional dialects, and the linguistic evolution of a language over time. This broadens their understanding of human nature, enabling them to connect with diverse cultures and societies, and fostering a deeper sense of empathy and inclusivity.

Thus, reading a literary text is an intellectual adventure that greatly benefits individuals with linguistic intelligence. The interplay between language and imagination creates a dynamic space where readers can explore the human experience, empathize with characters, and draw inspiration for their own lives. Linguistic intelligence breathes life into the words on the page, making literature an invaluable source of intellectual and emotional growth, and a testament to the enduring power of language in shaping our world and ourselves.

Conclusion

According to Poveyโ€™s (1972) observation โ€œliterature will increase all language skills because literature will extend linguistic knowledge by giving evidence of extensive and subtle vocabulary usage, and complex and exact syntaxโ€ (cited in McKay 1982: 529). 

In the event that a difficulty arises in a brand-new circumstance, students typically rely on their former learning patterns or academic experiences. If they are armed with critical thinking skills, they will feel confident and come up with creative solutions to issues. Critical thinking enables the student to engage in relevant and engaging dialogues. This enables students to evaluate difficulties by gaining a thorough understanding of the available options, analyze through deft questioning, and synthesize by conceptualizing an original solution. All of these reside at the pinnacle of Bloom’s taxonomy. Questions spark curiosity in the minds of the learners, which ultimately leads to mastery. One of the fundamental purposes of education is to enable the student to achieve perfection through independent thought. Additionally, inquiries lead students to investigate. Therefore, learners/students should be enabled to formulate their own questions, albeit intensively at first, but progressing to a more extended level with the assistance of the teacher. The English language instructor may select basic passages, but pose questions that require students to sit up straight, think, and analyze while making decisions.

Students should be enabled to develop higher-order thinking skills. This is achieved by reading comprehension activities with unfamiliar passages. Collaborative learning can promote critical thinking since it allows for conversation, the generation of new ideas, questions, clarifications, and assessments. In order to improve critical thinking and problem-solving skills, technology-assisted collaborative learning might be incorporated into the objective if conventional methods fail to produce the intended outcome. Albert Einstein once remarked, “The significant issues we confront cannot be handled with the same level of thinking we used to create them.” In this period of fast change, students can no longer rely on outmoded ways of thinking. They must develop their critical thinking through assimilation in order to reach their aim of obtaining a higher education.

Reading and thinking critically are also required for research. To write a successful summary of a reading passage, for instance, students must be able to incorporate appropriate information, identify the most significant concepts, and be sufficiently detailed or generic. In addition, students must be able to supervise the process through which they read the section, form a thought, verify it with the source text, write the summary, and lastly compare the written summary with the source text. Additionally, it is vital to consider the target audience and goal of the summary, as both influence what will be written or kept (Taylor, l983). If critical thinking is essential for any student, it is absolutely essential for university students. Paul (1990) identified as a deficiency in the reading comprehension skills of university students the inability to “identify the evidence an author requires to explain the inferences that follow from what the author said” (p. 50). In an effort to remedy the deficiency in this academic cognitive skill, he argued that instead of approaching “written material as a collection of sentences,” a university student should experiment with “various interpretations until one fit all of the work, rather than ignoring or distorting statements that do not fit their interpretation” (p. 335). According to Paul and Elder (2014), the critical thinking abilities of university students are not limited to identifying the primary idea, critiquing it, or even accepting the materials you are reading; rather, they involve constructing a knowledge map and reading to comprehend systems of thought. They believed that “knowledge occurs in meaning systems with interconnected fundamental, secondary, and peripheral ideas” (p. 2). After gaining a comprehension of these conceptual layers, the reader would be able to think within the system.

In addition, the reader can determine the goal of the academic work by “taking command of the structures that are the basis of all thought” (p. 18) and by “actively initiating a dialogue with the writer” (p. 18).

In the pursuit of language mastery, English language learners embark on a remarkable journey filled with challenges and opportunities. The development of linguistic intelligence through reading and critical thinking emerges as a guiding light in this voyage. As this article has explored, the interplay between language, literature, and critical thought enriches the linguistic abilities of ELLs and nourishes their understanding of the world. English language learners are not merely acquiring a new means of communication; they are immersing themselves in a vast and intricate world of expression, culture, and imagination. Through the pages of literary texts, they gain not only vocabulary and grammar but also a profound appreciation for the subtleties and nuances of the English language. More importantly, they find in these stories a reflection of the human experience that transcends linguistic boundaries.

As educators and ELL instructors, we have the privilege of guiding these learners on this transformative path. By fostering a love for reading, nurturing critical thinking skills, and creating an environment where linguistic intelligence can flourish, we enable ELLs to navigate the complexities of language and culture with confidence and grace. The journey of linguistic intelligence through reading and critical thinking among English language learners is not just a quest for language proficiency; it is a voyage of self-discovery, cultural understanding, and intellectual growth. It is a testament to the power of language to unite, inspire, and empower. And it is a reminder that, in the world of education, we hold the key to unlocking the doors to a universe of possibilities for every English language learner.

REFERENCES

Banegas D. The Role of Literature in ELT – Part One, 2010.

Brumfit  CJ,  Carter  RA.  (eds.)  Literature and Language Teaching.  Oxford:  Oxford University Press, 1986.

Correia R.  Encouraging Critical Reading in the EFL Classroom.  English Teaching Forum 2006; 44(1): 16-19.

Arjen DK, Lazar G.  Literature and Language Teaching:  A Guide for Teachers and Trainers. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1993. 

Brunfit, C. J, & Carter, R. A. (Eds.) (1986). Literature and Language Teaching. Oxford: Oxford University Press. 

Brumfit, C.(1985). Language and literature teaching: From practice to principle. Oxford: Pergamon Press.  

Brumfit, C. J. (1991). Language awareness in teacher education, in James, C. and Garrett, P., Language Awareness in the Classroom. London, Longman. pp. 24-39). 

Carter, R., & Long, M.N. (1991). Teaching Literature. United States of America: Longman.

Kennedy, M., Fisher, M. B., & Ennis, R. H. (1991). Critical thinking: Literature review and needed research. In L. Idol & B.F. Jones (Eds.), Educational values and cognitive instruction: Implications for reform (pp. 11-40). Hillsdale, New Jersey: Lawrence Erlbaum & Associates.

Collie, J.,& Slater, S. (1987). Literature in the language classroom; A resource book of ideas and activities. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.

Cromwell, L., 1992. Teaching critical thinking in the arts and humanities. Milwaukee: Alverno Productions.

Hirose, S., 1992. Critical thinking in community colleges. ASHE-ERIC Higher Education Reports, The George Washington University, ED348128

McPeck, J., 1981. Critical thinking and education. New York: St. Martinโ€™s Press.

Paul, R., & Elder, L. (2002). Critical thinking: Tools for taking charge of your professional and personal life. Upper Saddle River, N.J.: Financial Times Prentice Hall

Scriven, M., & Paul, R. (1987). Defining critical thinking: A draft statement for the national council for excellence in critical thinking. Retrieved on Oct. 15, 2015 from http://www.criticalthinking.org/pages/defining-critical-thinking/766.

Enhancing Listening Skills by Using Scaffolding Techniques in TBLT

by: K.V.B. Ravindra Babu

Associate Professor

Department of EoL

VFSTR (Deemed to be University)

Vadlamudi, Guntur.

Mail: kvbravindra@gmail.com

Abstract:

Listening is an essential skill required for information reception and conversational participation. Though it is a primary skill acquired by all of us at the early stages of life, it is not often verified to enhance its effectiveness in the learners. Effective listening involves a complex mental process which is not trainable easily.  Task-based Language Teaching (TBLT) provides an opportunity to learners for real life language use. In the acquisition of second language learning, scaffolding techniques help the learners to accomplish the tasks with the help of โ€˜More Knowledgeable Othersโ€™(MKO) and thus extend their โ€˜Zone of Proximal Developmentโ€™(ZPD). The present paper shares a part of doctoral research on โ€˜Using Scaffolding as a Technique to Enhance ESL Learners Language Proficiency at Tertiary Level: A Task-based Approach.  This paper presents the effectiveness of using scaffolding techniques to enhance the listening skills of the learners at graduate level in a private deemed to be university in the state of Andhra Pradesh.  The performance of the learners in this study is assessed as per the scales of Cambridge Assessment English and Common European Framework of Reference (CEFR). 

INTRODUCTION

The language skills are broadly categorised into receptive and productive skills.  Reading and Listening are considered receptive skills as the learners receive information by reading a printed text or listening to sounds.  Some people consider that the receptive skills are passive as the learners are not engaged actively in any action and they read or listen to something silently.  But it is not true.  When the learners engage in reading or listening to a text, they immediately activate their previous knowledge to understand the meaning of the text effectively. Their cognitive processing would be busy in relating the new information to the existing knowledge and try to assimilate both to draw conclusions.  Hence, it is wrong to say that receptive skills are passive.  The learners are to be given training in using effective reading and listening strategies to comprehend the messages.  As the comprehension in receptive skills is a complex mental process and the teacher cannot monitor how it happens or where it has gone wrong, it is difficult for the teachers to correct the errors and give feedback to the learners so precisely and instantly.  As there are no structured attempts at various levels of education to know how effectively the learners listen to or read in a given context, the learning gaps are created in their knowledge acquisition and it is also resulted in their poor communication skills.  The present research focuses on enhancing the listening skills of the ESL learners at tertiary level by using scaffolding techniques in the Task-based Language Teaching. 

THEORITIAL BACKGROUND

In the socio-cultural theory, the development of a new skill is handled through the notion of โ€˜scaffoldingโ€™.  In the usual sense, scaffolding is a temporary structure that is often put up in the process of constructing a building.  When each new bit is constructed, the scaffolding is removed or taken down.  The use of scaffolding is temporary but it is essential for the construction of a building successfully.  

The term โ€˜scaffoldingโ€™ was first used in the educational sense by Wood, Bruner, and Ross in their examination of parent-child talk.  They defined scaffolding as a โ€œprocess that enables a child or novice to solve a problem, carry out a task or achieve a goal which would be beyond his unassisted effortsโ€ (1976: 90).  Bruner described scaffolding in its metaphorical sense as โ€œthe steps taken to reduce the degree of freedom in carrying out some tasks so that the child can concentrate on the difficult skill in the process of acquiringโ€ (1978: 19).  Scaffolding is not another word for help, it is a special kind of help that assists learners to move towards learning new concepts, new skills and new levels of understanding.  Pauline Gibbons defined scaffolding as โ€œtemporary assistance by which a teacher helps a learner know how to do something, so that the learner will later be able to complete a similar task aloneโ€ (2002: 10).  

Rod Ellis presented his views on scaffolding in the context of social interaction as โ€œscaffolding is the dialogic process by which one speaker assists another in performing a function that he or she cannot perform aloneโ€ (2003: 182).  He elaborated that when the students have the opportunity to perform tasks with skilled teachers, their opportunities for learning are maximized.  In the opinion of Jim Scrivener, โ€œscaffolding refers to the way a competent language speaker helps a less competent one to communicate by both encouraging and providing possible elements of conversationโ€ (2011: 227). Jeremy Harmer (2015) suggested scaffolding as one of the best ways for the teachers dealing with learners of mixed abilities.  He says,

Scaffolding is the name given to a particular concept of learnersโ€™ support which involves breaking tasks down into their component parts.  For students who have difficulty in understanding that they are supposed to do or find it difficult to โ€˜stay on taskโ€™ โ€“ we can try to identify a number of โ€˜do-ableโ€™ chunks so that they move from one โ€˜successes to another.  When they are involved in each of these mini-tasks, we can support them and help them move on to the next stage.  The best approach, therefore is go from stages that the students can do fairly easily to the next, slightly more difficult stage, and then from there to another more difficult stage etc. (2015: 151). 

In addition to breaking things into do-able parts, Harmer advised to support the learners to understand things through all possible means. In the recent publications, the term scaffolding has lost its flavour and the new terms โ€˜collaborative dialogueโ€™ and โ€˜instructional conversationโ€™ are used instead.  Wood, Bruner, and Ross (1976) identified the following features of scaffolding.

  • Recruiting interest in the task
  • Simplifying the task
  • Maintaining pursuit of the goal
  • Marking critical features and discrepancies between what has been produced and the ideal situation
  • Controlling frustration during problem solving
  • Demonstrating an idealized version of the act to be performed

These features characterise the effect of scaffolding on both cognitive demands of the task and the affective states of the person attempting the task. According to Wood, Bruner & Ross (1976), teachers share the perspective of the learners in Scaffolded teaching and it serves as a means for the teachers to make a high-level involvement of the learners in the process of learning and also make them feel responsible for their learning.  The teacher is a โ€˜scaffoldโ€™ or โ€˜more knowledgeable otherโ€™ who helps and engages the learner in the tasks that they are unable to accomplish on their own.  The teacher provides an initial support to the learners and enables them understand the procedure of accomplishing the task. When the learners have become capable of accomplishing the task on their own, the teacher gradually withdraws the support and assigns the responsibilities to the learners.  Scaffolding does not mean that the teacher provides everything the learner needs.  It is a systematic support given to the learner in the beginning of a task to enable him/her responsible for their learning.  Gallimore and Tharp (1990) have referred to the term โ€˜scaffoldingโ€™ as โ€˜assisted learningโ€™ and suggested six ways of supporting the learners.  They are 

  1. Modelling: The teacher may show a reading strategy to the learners by performing it in front of them.
  2. Instructing: It does not mean just the teacher assigning the task.  It is directing the learnersโ€™ focus on to fulfilling a particular sub-task to begin a difficult task involving various level of accomplishment.  
  3. Questioning: The teacher invokes mental operations of the learners by asking some questions to draw their attention towards the key elements of the text to understand it better. 
  4. Cognitive Structuring: The teacher enables the learners to think and act in an organised way by making use of their background knowledge and relate it to the new conditions.  This helps them in giving explanations or making predictions.
  5. Contingency Management: The teacher has to sustain the enthusiasm, involvement and interest of the learners in the tasks by encouraging them with praise and rewards. 
  6. Feedback: The teacher gives feedback report by comparing the learnersโ€™ performance to certain standard norms. The feedback may also include suggestions on the areas of improvement. 

METHODOLOGY

The present study focuses largely on enhancing language proficiency of ESL Learners at Tertiary Level by using Scaffolding Techniques in TBLT.  This paper reports the performance of learners in listening skill, one of the four skills dealt in the main study.  The researcher has chosen an experimental study to find out the effectiveness of scaffolded instruction in enhancing the learnersโ€™ language skills. The study is conducted in a private deemed to be university in Andhra Pradesh.  A sample group of 120 learners are chosen for this study.  They are pursuing their first-year graduation in Computer Science Engineering.  These learners are offered an English Proficiency Course in the university and at the end of the course they appear for Cambridge Preliminary English Test, a B1 Level Language proficiency test as per Common European Framework of Reference (CEFR).  Cambridge Preliminary English Test materials are used for both pre-test and post-test of this study. The learners are divided into experimental and control groups as per their performance in pre-test.  A twelve- week intervention with scaffolded instruction in TBLT is offered to the experimental group by the researcher and the control group is taught by using Presentation-Practice-Production (PPP) method. A Post-test is conducted after the intervention for both the groups and their performance is analysed by using Software Programme for Social Sciences (SPSS).  Conclusions are drawn based on the finding of this study. 

            In the present study, the researcher has used several ways of scaffolding, called them techniques, to make the learning implicit and effective. Some of them are mentioned below. 

  • Tasks are analysed on the basis of their linguistic complexity, cognitive complexity and communicative pressure.   Some of the tasks are broken down into smaller parts and presented to the learners in an increasing complexity.  The teacher ensured that the task presented are within the learnersโ€™ Zone of Proximal Developmentโ€™ as suggested by Vygotsky (1935). 
  • The teacher-researcher has used the task-based framework advocated by Willis (1996) in administering the tasks in the classroom.  Several Lead-in activities are conducted to revive the previous knowledge of the learners and some new linguistic information is provided in the priming stage to prepare the learners for doing the tasks. 
  • The teacher-researcher has ensured at each stage of the task whether the students have understood the procedure of doing it and the goals to be reached at the end of it or not by using Instruction Check Questions (ICQs) and Comprehension Check Questions (CCQs).  
  • The teacher provides enough time for the learners to complete the task and creates a collaborative learning environment by assigning pair and group work in tasks.
  • The teacher explains the concepts with more examples and illustrations.  He uses multiple ways to make sure that the learners understand the process of approaching and solving problems. 
  • The teacher gives a clear description about purpose, goals and sub-goals of learning activity that the learners are expected to reach.  
  • Providing evaluation rubrics has also helped the learner to understand the key elements to be covered in the process of accomplishing a task. 

The teacher creates classroom conditions suitable for collaborative work and peer feedback.  The learners get the remarks and suggestions from the peers instantly on their writing and speaking performance. This also helps them learn from their peersโ€™ performance.

Scaffolding for Listening Tasks

Teaching listening skills is considered to be one of the difficult areas in language skills development.  As both the teacher and the learner do not know how much language is acquired, it is difficult to fill the gap.  And listening to a foreign accent and comprehending it, is all new to many of the learners in the present study.   Most of the learners need strategy training in listening skills from the basics.  Scaffolding has begun with showing the distinction between hearing and listening. 

i)   Listening Task 1: The learners have to understand the key information from the short dialogues or monologues and identify the correct picture from three options. 

Scaffolding: T introduces a set of three pictures and elicit the learnersโ€™ explanation and guess about the situation of those pictures.  Ls are encouraged to predict in the pre-listening.  Ls are advised to be keen on the context and key words of the task to arrive at the correct answer.  T cautions about the distractors in all the options.  T encourages for peer check and repeated listening for accent practice with the support of audio script in the later stages.

ii)   Listening Task 2: The learners are expected to listen to a longer informative monologue or interview.  The learners have to listen for detailed understanding and should identify specific details about the listening text. 

Scaffolding: T introduces the task format.  It is choosing one from three option multiple choice questions.  T asks Ls some questions about the context of the task and directs them to see the instructions in the task sheet.  T points out certain strategies to be followed before starting the listening.  Ls are directed towards reading the task quickly before listening and predict what they are going to listen.  Ls are advised to follow the paraphrased options in the questions and to be careful about negatives, word spotting and distractors. This is a complex task involving the learners processing both receptive skills – listening and reading – simultaneously. 

iii)   Listening Task 3: The learners have to fill the gaps in the notes by following a longer monologue or speech.  They should listen to identity, understand and interpret the message. 

Scaffolding: T elicits important pieces of information about an event to explain what information is generally crucial.  T explains the structure of the task and genre of the audio.  Ls are asked to look at each gap and listen to the audio to find the information related to the given gap.  Ls are advised not to try for understanding the whole listening.  Ls focus is drawn towards the key information by predicting the listening text with the help of gaps in the task.  T reminds them of spelling and legibility of the answers. 

iv)   Listening Task 4: The task expects the learners to listen to and understand the opinions, attitudes, likes and dislikes of the speakers in a dialogue.  The learners have to decide whether the given statements are right or wrong. 

Scaffolding: T brainstorms Ls by encouraging the argument on any controversial statement.  This helps the learners to be familiar with the supporting and opposing reasons of arguments. T asks Ls to question about the context of the dialogue after playing the instructions part.  T reminds the Ls that the statements of the task are in the sequence of the listening text.  Ls are advised not to look for the exact language of the statement in the listening text.  Ls are trained to infer the meaning of paraphrased statements and compare them with the listening text.

RESULT ANALYSIS

In the collection of the demographic details and learning backgrounds of the sample group learners, a few interesting details are found in this study.  The learners have expressed their level of difficulty in dealing with various language skills and elements. 

Figure-1: Easy and difficult about English

Figure 1 shows the learnersโ€™ responses about what they feel difficult or easy about English.  The highest number of students (36%) have felt that reading is easy for them and 26 percent students express the same with writing.  The primary skills of the language, listening and speaking are considered easy by 14 percent and 19 percent students respectively and grammar and vocabulary are also not felt easier.  Only 4 percent say that grammar is easy for them and 1 percent have felt that vocabulary is easy.  A reversal of opinion is observed in what the students expressed very difficult for them about English.  31 percent have felt that vocabulary is a very difficult area for them to cope with the second language and it is followed by grammar which is felt difficult by 26 percent students. Listening and speaking skills are considered to be of moderate difficulty and 19 percent and 15 percent students have expressed their concern about them.   The academic skills reading and writing are not felt so difficult by majority of the students.  Seven percent students say that writing is difficult for them and 2 percent students say the same about reading.  They have felt that reading skill is the easiest for them and learning and using new vocabulary is the most difficult for them about English.

Figure-2: Difficulty in Listening

In finding the problems of listening comprehension in second language as shown in figure-2, 59 percent learners felt that the pace of the speakers is very difficult to follow.  Different accents used by the speakers (29%) and the speed of the speakers are the two major factors that influence the level of listening comprehension of the learners.  9 percent learners have felt that the unfamiliarity of the context which the speakers are talking about is hard to understand.  3% learners find some other problems in listening like the use of unfamiliar words, expressions and idioms by the speakers.

Listening Skills Data Analysis

Listening is one of the primary skills of a language.  Though no one denies its significance as a source of pronunciation, intonation, style etc. in the acquisition of second language, the learners are not provided any guided listening practice or the use of any strategies in listening.  When the researcher conducted the listening test as a part of pre-test, more than 90 percent students expressed that they have taken listening test for the first time in their 12 years of language learning process.  

The researcher adopted Cambridge Preliminary English Test Listening component for this study. This is a B1 level language test as per Common European Framework of Reference. There are four tasks in the listening test which focus on assessing the learnersโ€™ ability to listen and identify the key information from short conversations, monologues, interviews or longer informal dialogues.  There are different kinds of listening tasks used in pre- and post-tests.  Some of them are identifying the differences in the pictures by following the descriptions or short exchanges, understanding and interpreting the information to fill the gaps in the texts for note-taking, drawing the conclusions by identifying the opinions and attitudes of the people. 

There are multiple choice questions, gap-fills and true or false type of 25 objective questions in the listening test.  The test is conducted for 35 minutes after reading and writing components.  After the question papers are distributed to the learners, audio is played from the speakers to the whole group at once.  All possible precautions are taken to avoid any noise or disturbance from outside.  Each recording is played twice. The learners mark the answers in their question papers and transfer them later into the answer sheet.  The responses of the learners to the listening tasks are evaluated by using the answer key and the marks are normalised to the score of 170.  The results are mapped to CEFR levels of language proficiency. 

Listening Skills: Pre-test

The performance of the experimental and control group learners in the listening skills pre-test is given in Table-1.

Table-1: Studentsโ€™ Performance in Listening Skills Pre-test

Listening: Pre-testExperimental GroupControl Group
Scores (CEFR Levels)No. of Learners%No. of Learners%
80-99 (Pre-A1)15251017
100-119 (A1)19323457
120-139 (A2)18301525
140-159 (B1)71212
160-170 (B2)12

The performance of experimental group learners in listening skills is found more in the first three levels of language proficiency.  There are 15 learners who scored between 80 and 99, 19 learners scored between 100 and 119, while 18 learners scored between 120 and 139, 7 learners scored between 140 and 159 and only one learner scored above 160. The performance of control group learners is the highest in the score of 100 and 119 range as there are 34 learners who showed their proficiency at this level.  10 learners are at Pre-A1 level with the score between 80 and 99.  Another 15 students have scored between 120 and 139.  There is only one learner at the score range of 140 and 159.  

Figure-3: Listening Skills Performance in Pre-test

The performance of learners in both the groups in listening skills is shown lucidly with percentages in Figure-3. The lines in the figure show that one fourth (25%) of experimental group learners are at pre-A1 level in the listening skills pre-test while 17 percent of control group learners are at this level.  32 percent of experimental group learners score at A1 level, where as 57 percent of control group learners performed at this level.  There are 30 and 25 percent learners at A2 level from experimental and control groups respectively.  There are 12 percent learners from the experimental group at B1 level but only two percent control group learners have performed at this level. Only 2 percent of experimental group learners have shown their listening skills performance at B2 level where there is no performance from control group.

Listening Skills: Post-test

During the intervention, the researcher has paid more attention to alleviating the fears of learners about listening skills. The production of English sounds is explained to the learners with pictures and videos.  The learners are engaged in a lot of pair and group activities to practice the accent and to find the specific and detailed meaning of the speakers in monologues and dialogues.  The listening tasks have been done repeatedly with and without relying on audio scripts.  The following Table-2 illustrates the performance of the learners from both the groups in the post-test of listening skills.  

Table-2: Studentsโ€™ Performance in Listening Skills Post-test

Listening: Post-testExperimental GroupControl Group
Scores (CEFR Levels)No. of Learners%No. of Learners%
80-99 (Pre-A1)
100-119 (A1)58712
120-139 (A2)37624982
140-159 (B1)132247
160-170 (B2)58

It is good to observe that there are no learners at Pre-A1 level language proficiency in listening skills post-test.  There are only 5 learners from experimental group and 7 learners from control group who have scored between 100 and 119.  There are 37 learners from experimental group who have scored between 120 and 139, where as 49 learners of control group scored at this range.   Another 13 learners of experimental group have scored between 140 and 159 but only 4 learners of control group reached to this score.  There is no learner from the control group who scored above 160 but 5 learners from experimental group have performed at B2 level with the scores between 160 and 170.  The detailed graphical view of this performance is presented in Figure-4.

Figure 4: Listening Skills Performance in Post-test

The listening skills post-test performance of the learners is relatively better than the pre-test performance.  There are no learners from both the groups at Pre-A1 level.  There are 8 percent learners from experimental group and 12 percent learners from control group who have scored at A1 level.  Majority of the learners from both the groups โ€“ 62 percent from experimental and 82 percent from control groups โ€“ are at A2 level, just below the targeted B1 level.  22 percent learners from experimental group have performed at B1 level and another 8 percent at B2 level.  No control group learner could reach B2 level and there is only 7 percent of learners of that group reached to B1 level.   

Listening Skills: Mean Scores of Pre- and post-tests

The statistically important data form the pre- and post-tests of listening is presented in Table-3.  The mean scores and standard deviation of both experimental and control group learners are presented. 

Table-3: Statistics of Listening Skills Pre & Post-tests

Listening: Pre & Post-testsMeanNStd. DeviationStd. Error Mean
Pre-testExp.Listening113.336022.9042.9568
Con.Listening111.296013.771.7777
Post-testExp.Listening137.076013.7261.772
Con.Listening128.83609.0371.167

The mean scores of both experimental and control groups in both pre- and post-tests of listening skills show that there is a progress in the learners of both the groups form pre-test to post-test.    The mean score of experimental group has progressed from 113 to 137.  The mean score of control group has also improved from 111 to 129.  It is important to note that the pre-test performance is at A1 level for both the groups and it has improved to only A2 level in posts-test.  The table also shows the Standard Deviation and the Standard Error Mean of the results test-wise and group-wise. The mean scores of experimental and control groups in pre- and post-tests of listening skills are illustrated clearly in Figure 5.

Figure-5: Mean scores of Listening skills Test-wise and Group-wise

Listening: Paired Samples two tailed t-Test

As mentioned in the earlier section of this chapter, the P value shows whether the difference between the mean scores of both groups in pre-test and post-test is significant or not. The test-wise analysis of the learnersโ€™ performance in listening skills is shown in Table-4. 

Table-4: Statistics of Paired Samples t-test on Listening Skills

Listening: Paired Samples t-TestPaired DifferencestdfSig.      (2-tailed)
MeanStd. DeviationStd. Error Mean95% Confidence Interval of the Difference
LowerUpperP
Pre-testEG & CG2.0425.3293.274.50328.58320.624590.535
Post-testEG &CG8.23317.7862.2963.63912.8283.586590.001*
*  The Value of P is < 0.05.  Hence, the difference is significant.

The P value of paired groups in listening skills pre-test is 0.535.  This value is more than 0.05 (P > 0.05).  It means that there is no significant difference between the listening skills performance of control group learners and experimental group learners in the pre-test.  The P value of paired groups in listening skills post-test is 0.001.  This value is less than 0.05 (P < 0.05).  It means that there is a significant difference between the listening skills performance of experimental group learners and control group learners in the post-test.  It implies that the learners of experimental group have performed better in listening skills post-test than the learners of control group in the same test.

FINDINGS & CONCLUSION

Practising and testing of listening skill is an entirely new area for many learners.  The listening activity is scaffolded by making the learners expose the very small aspects of listening one after the other.  Showing the difference between hearing and listening, practice on minimal pairs to understand accent better, presenting the task before the audio, predicting or guessing the content before listening, guiding when to use and how to use audio scripts are some of the features of scaffolding used in listening.  The analysis of the data shows that the learners of experimental group performed better than the learners of control group in listening post-test.  

Learners could understand and respond positively to the strategies suggested for comprehending listening and reading texts.  Activating the learnersโ€™ previous knowledge and relating it to understand the new information, understanding the task before going to read or listen to it, predicting the context of the text with the help of task or pictures, focus on one thing at a time while using sub-skills etc., are a few strategies that the learners have used effectively in TBA. The study has revealed that โ€˜scaffoldingโ€™ techniques enable the learners to understand the process of learning a second language.  The learners are able to follow a systematic procedure for moving from simple to complex parts of the tasks.  The teacherโ€™s support and guidance in the initial stages of accomplishing the tasks help the learners to expand their zones of proximal development. 

Bibliography

Council of Europe. (2011). Common European Framework of Reference for Languages: Learning, Teaching, Assessment. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.

Ellis, R. (2003). Task-based Language Learning and Teaching. Oxford: Oxford University Press.

Gardner, H. (1993). Multiple Intelligences: The Theory in Practice. New York: Basic Books. 

Gibbons, P. (2002). Scaffolding Language, Scaffolding Learning: Teaching Second Language Learners in the Mainstream Classroom. Portsmouth, NH: Heinemann.

Graddol, D. (2010). English Next India: The Future of English in India. London: British Council.

Harmer, J. (2015). The Practice of English Language Teaching (5th ed.). Harlow: Pearson Education Limited.

Hashemi, L. and Thomas, B. (2010). Objective PET: Studentโ€™s Book with Answers with CD-ROM.  Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. 

Krashen, S. (1982). Principles and Practice in Second Language Acquisition. Oxford: Pergamon Press.

Nunan, D. (2004). Task-based Language Teaching. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.

Prabhu, N. S. (1987). Second Language Pedagogy. Oxford: Oxford University Press.

Piaget, J. (1965). The Language and Thought of the Child. New York: World Publishing Co.

Richards, J. C. and Rodgers, T. S. (2014). Approaches and Methods in Language Teaching. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.

Rizvi, M. A. (2018). Effective Technical Communication: 2/e. Chennai: McGraw-Hill Education.

Scrivener, J. (2011). Learning Teaching (3rd ed.). London: Macmillan.

Vygotsky, L. S. (1935,1978). Mind in Society: The Development of Higher Psychological Processes. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.

Willis, J. (1996). A Framework for Task-based Learning. London: Longman.

Questions about CARICOMโ€™s designation as the โ€œSixth Region Of Africaโ€

By: Dr Kumar Mahabir,ย 

Chairman, Indo-Caribbean Cultural Centre (ICC)

Don Miguel Road, San Juan, Trinidad and Tobago

Website: https://indocaribbeanpublications.com

On Sunday October 8, 2023, the Indo-Caribbean Cultural Centre (ICC) hosted its 176th edition of its ZOOM Public Meeting entitled โ€œInterrogating the Declaration of CARICOM as the Sixth Region of Africaโ€ (https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=8SbUwZ4_9M0). The panellists included Professor Clinton Sutton, Dr. Adit Adityanjee, Professor Emeritus Patricia Mohammed, Dr. Indira Rampersad and Ms Omolora Wilson. 

The speakers referred to releases from UWI, CARICOM and articles in the Trinidad and Tobago Newsday, and the CARICOM website which featured and acknowledged CARICOM as the โ€œSixth Region of Africaโ€. The release from the UWI Regional Headquarters dated September 13, 2023 stated: โ€œCaricom has been designated as the sixth region of the African continent. The region commemorated the second annual Africa-CARICOM Day on September 7, signalling an ongoing commitment to strengthened relationships between the two populationsโ€ (https://sta.uwi.edu/news/releases/release.asp?id=22682).

The statement was echoed by the Trinidad and Tobago Newsday of September 20, 2023 which ran the headline, โ€œCARICOM recognized as sixth region of Africaโ€ and stated specifically that โ€œCARICOM has been formallydesignated as the sixth region of the African continent. The declaration was made during the second annual Africa-Caricom Day on September 7th, at the University of the West Indies (UWI) regional headquarters in Jamaicaโ€  (https://newsday.co.tt/2023/09/20/caricom-recognised-as-sixth-region-of-africa/).

In a release issued on July 26, 2023 by CARICOM Today in its CARICOM website, the CARICOM Secretary-General, Dr Carla Barnett, announced: โ€œI am pleased to join you today as part of the African Unionโ€™s sixth region for the Annual Global Africa People-to-People Forum 2023 and to reflect on the Inaugural CARICOM-Africa Summit, which was hosted by His Excellency Uhuru Kenyatta, then President of Kenya, on 7th September2021. (https://today.caricom.org/2023/07/21/caricom-africa-partnership-making-progress-caricom-sg/).

In light of the above, panellists and members of the audience at the ICC ZOOM Public Meeting raised a number of concerns:

With regards to the release of the University of the West Indies (the UWI), of September 13, 2023: 

  1. Who โ€œdesignatedโ€ CARICOM as the โ€œsixth region of Africaโ€, and when and where was such a โ€œdesignationโ€ undertaken? 
  1. Did the CARICOM Secretary General, Dr. Carla Barnett – who made remarks at the UWI Africa-CARICOM Day celebrations – endorse the โ€œdesignationโ€ of CARICOM as the โ€œsixth region of Africaโ€? 
  1. To what extent does the designation of CARICOM as the โ€œsixth region of Africaโ€, at the Africa-CARICOM Day which was attended and celebrated by the CARICOM Secretary-General, blatantly contradict the description of CARICOM in its website as โ€œa grouping of twenty countries: fifteen Member States  and five Associate Members. It is home to approximately sixteen million citizens, 60% of whom are under the age of 30, and from the main ethnic groups of Indigenous Peoples, Africans, Indians, Europeans, Chinese, Portuguese and Javanese. The Community is multi-lingual; with English as the major language complemented by French and Dutch and variations of these, as well as African and Asian expressionsโ€ (https://caricom.org/our-community/who-we-are/).
  1. Does the P.J. Patterson Institute for Africa-Caribbean Public Advocacy, headed by the Most Honourable P. J. Patterson, and who also joined in the UWI Africa-CARICOM Day celebrations, recognise the presence of other ethnic groups in the Caribbean, given his statement: โ€œThe ethnic origins and commonality of our colonial experience are beyond dispute โ€ฆ it is in recognition of this irrefutable reality that the African Union declared the existence of six regions, and on this special occasion to unite in recognising our shared history and aspirations.โ€
  • How can the UWI, which is a multi-ethnic regional institution which is publicly funded by contributing Caribbean territories with multi-cultural societies, with the Secretary General of CARICOM, annually celebrate on September 7th, an Africa-Caribbean Day, but has made no overtures towards a complementary celebration of an India-Caribbean Day, a China-Caribbean Day, an European-Caribbean Day, a Latin American-Caribbean Day, and an Indigenous/First Peoples-Caribbean Day, inter alia? 
  • Who funded the Africa-CARICOM Day cultural extravaganza at the UWI Regional Headquarters?
  • Was the UWI community, including the various Campuses and their respective Principals consulted on this Africa-CARICOM Day extravaganza at Mona, and did they agree on the designation of CARICOM as the โ€œsixth region of Africa?โ€
  • Is this part of a UWI and CARICOM agenda to promote African hegemony in the region to the exclusion of other ethnic populations and contributions?

With regards to the Trinidad and Tobago Newsday article of September 20, 2023, in addition to the questions in (1) above: 

  1. How, where and when was CARICOM โ€œformallyโ€ designated as the โ€œsixth region of Africaโ€?
  1. What formalities were observed, and what form did the โ€œDeclarationโ€ take? 
  1. Were there signatories to the โ€œDeclarationโ€ including those of Heads of Governments, at the UWI Regional Headquarters in Jamaica on Sept 7th?
  1. Does the Trinidad and Tobago Newsday have a political and ethnic agenda in blasting the headline: โ€œCARICOM recognised as โ€œsixth region of Africaโ€, and then proceeding to deem it a โ€œDeclarationโ€?

With regards to the release from the CARICOM website on July 26, 2023, and the statement from the Secretary General, Dr. Carla Barnett: 

  1. When was Dr. Barnett (or CARICOM), formally recognized as part of the African Unionโ€™s sixth region? Is she endorsing this โ€œsixth region of Africaโ€ as a personal celebration, or on CARICOMโ€™s behalf?
  1. Does the current Chair of CARICOM, the Honourable Roosevelt Skeritt, endorse this designation of CARICOM as the โ€œsixth region of the African Unionโ€? Does his statement at the UWI Africa-CARICOM Day celebrations on Sept 7, 2023, suggest an acceptance of CARICOM as Africaโ€™s sixth region. Skerrit stated: โ€œI am confident that our relationship will continue to flourish in the years ahead. Our Community is home to many citizens of the African Diaspora, designated as Africaโ€™s Sixth Regionโ€? (https://today.caricom.org/2023/09/07/statement-from-caricom-chairman-pm-roosevelt-skerrit-on-africa-caricom-day-7-september-2023/)
  1. Did the African Union endorse CARICOM as its sixth region? 
  1. In as much as the African Union deems its diaspora as its sixth region, does CARICOM perceive itself as constituting the entire African diaspora, or part of the diaspora? If the latter is the case, then the designation of CARICOM as the โ€œsixth region of Africaโ€, is geopolitically incorrect. It is also ethnically incorrect as the African diaspora is dispersed throughout the world.
  • Were any referenda conducted either by the UWI, the African Union or by CARICOM of their various populations on โ€œdesignatingโ€ or โ€œdeclaringโ€ CARICOM its sixth region?
  • On whose authority, was the โ€œdesignationโ€ or โ€œdeclarationโ€ made?

Some of the panellists also touched on the issue of reparations. Of particular concern to the Indo-Caribbean Cultural Centre (ICC) are:

  1. The complete lack of inclusion of the non-African communities, both in the CARICOM Reparations Commission headed by UWIโ€™s Vice-Chancellor Professor Sir Hilary Beckles. Professor Beckles was appointed in 2013 as Chair of the CARICOM Reparations Commission by then Prime Minister of Trinidad and Tobago in her capacity as Chair of CARICOM, Mrs Kamla Persad-Bissessar. He has repeatedly stated that the Reparations Movement builds โ€œupon the historic efforts of past organisations to bring justice to the victims of native genocide, chattel enslavement, and deceptive indentureshipโ€. Yet, there is not one single person of East Indian or Chinese or indigenous descent in the CARICOM Reparations Commission which he heads. This brings into question the very notion of reparatory justice and its inherent ironies.  
  1. The complete exclusion of persons of East Indian descent and all other races despite the fact (or possibly because of the fact) that Indians constitute more than half of the population in Trinidad and Tobago, from the Trinidad and Tobago National Commission on Reparations first constituted in 2015. Moreover, the Commission was reconstituted very recently as reported on October 3, 2023 by the Ministry of Foreign Affairs of Trinidad and Tobago. According to the report, the entities represented in the reconstituted Commission are โ€œthe Ministry of Foreign and CARICOM Affairs; Ministry of Tourism, Culture and the Arts; Tobago House of Assembly (THA); Emancipation Support Committee; Orisha Elders; Santa Rosa First Peoples; All Mansions of Rastafari; Media and Youth. There is no mention of specific representation from the East Indian community, although the Santa Rosa First Peoples are now included (https://foreign.gov.tt/resources/news/appointment-of-trinidad-and-tobagos-reconstituted-national-committee-on-reparations/).
  1. Whether these two Commissions (Regional and Trinidadian) are about genuine reparatory justice or about ensuring sustained African dominance and hegemony, given the exclusion of other groups in the composition of their membership, is a critical question.

Some of the panellists and members of the virtual audience raised the following questions about the designation of CARICOM as the โ€œsixth region of Africaโ€. 

  1. Is CARICOM, UWI and the Trinidad and Tobago Newsday employing the optics of branding, naming and framing to promote political and ethnic agendas?
  • What message is this conveying to other non-Afro ethnic communities?  
  • What message is this conveying to the African population in the Caribbean? 
  • What does CARICOM – being the โ€œsixth region of Africaโ€ โ€“ mean, in particular, for the governments and peoples of Trinidad and Tobago, Guyana and Suriname with considerably large Indo-Caribbean populations who believe that they have been excluded and marginalised for decades by an Afro-dominated political directorate?
  • What does the โ€œsixth region of Africaโ€ mean for our culture and our identity now, and in the future? 
  • Are we trading the European branding for an African one? 
  • Is this conceptualisation and designation of CARICOM as the โ€œsixth region of Africaโ€ a deliberate policy or politics of exclusion, or an unintended consequence?
  • Is this a response to the global competition for economic space and an initiative for Africa to dominate and/or recolonise the Caribbean?
  1. Whose initiative was it to designate CARICOM as the โ€œsixth region of Africaโ€? Was it the African Union, was it CARICOM or was it the University of the West Indies? Or was it some or all of these?
  • Was there a signed Declaration or formal ratification by Heads of Government for CARICOM to be deemed and recognised as the โ€œsixth region of Africaโ€? If not, then the legitimacy and relevance of this designation at the UWI Regional Headquarters, and the declaration is questionable. 
  • Can this designation of CARICOM as the โ€œsixth region of Africaโ€ facilitate global problems like climate change? If so, how?
  • To what extent does this designation stoke divisiveness among the various ethnic communities of the Caribbean?
  • Is this declaration a return to the colonial policy of divide and rule?
  • To what extent does this designation distract from other more critical issues facing the region such as economic challenges, climate change and crime?
  • Given the timing of this designation, is there any truth to the contention that it is part of a UWI-Caribbean-CARICOM political agenda to mobilise the support of the fifty-five member states of the African Union with that of CARICOM states, to rally for the Prime Minister of Barbados Mia Mottley, who is allegedly a contender for the position of UN Secretary General?
  • Is the designation consistent with CARICOMโ€™s stated agenda of promoting regional integration and embracing diversity and multiculturalism in the region?

At the Indo-Caribbean Cultural Centre (ICC) virtual forum held on October 8, 2023, Dr. Hilary Brown, Programme Manager for Culture and Community Development at the CARICOM Secretariat, as a member of the audience, categorically denied that there is any Declaration for CARCIOM to be designated the sixth region of the African Union. Her recorded words contradict the statement from the UWI release that โ€œCaricom has been designated as the sixth region of the African continentโ€ and the Trinidad and Tobago Newsday headline that โ€œCARICOM recognised as sixth region of Africaโ€ and which continues with the story that โ€œCARICOM has been formally designated as the sixth region of the African continent. The declaration was made during the second annual Africa-Caricom Day on September 7th, at the University of the West Indies (UWI) regional headquarters in Jamaicaโ€. 

The firm denial by Dr. Hilary Brown at the ICC forum suggests that the statements in the UWI release and in the Trinidad and Tobago Newsday are false, misleading, reckless, ethnically biased and dangerous to the harmonious co-existence of the multicultural ethos of the peoples of CARICOM. In this vein, the ICC is hereby making a clarion call for clarification on these matters and a public verbal and written apology as well as a retraction of public statements, articles and news releases where necessary, in response to the issues, concerns and questions raised above. 

The Slums of Bhopal: A Tale of Struggle and Resilience

By:ย Kavita Dehalwarย | Publication date: Oct. 20, 2023 | Source: Track2Training

Bhopal, the capital city of the Indian state of Madhya Pradesh, is known for its rich history, vibrant culture, and thriving industries. However, like many cities in India, Bhopal also grapples with the challenge of urban poverty, leading to the development of slums. The slums of Bhopal are a complex and multifaceted issue that sheds light on the broader challenges faced by urban areas in the country.

Bhopal, the capital city of the Indian state of Madhya Pradesh, is a city of stark contrasts. Its history is a tapestry of ancient traditions and modern progress, its culture a vibrant mosaic of diversity, and its industries a testament to the city’s economic dynamism. However, beneath the veneer of this bustling metropolis lies a poignant and pressing challenge: urban poverty, which has given rise to the development of sprawling slums within the city. The slums of Bhopal, like similar settlements across India, are emblematic of a complex and multifaceted issue that not only impacts the lives of those residing within their narrow lanes but also illuminates the broader challenges faced by urban areas across the nation.

Bhopal’s Rich History and Culture

Bhopal’s history is steeped in rich tradition and historical significance. It served as the capital of the erstwhile princely state of Bhopal and was ruled by a succession of dynamic Begums (queens), who played a pivotal role in the city’s socio-cultural development. Their legacy is still evident today, as Bhopal boasts a unique amalgamation of Hindu and Muslim influences, resulting in a harmonious blend of art, music, and cuisine.

The city’s cultural landscape is as diverse as its history, with numerous festivals, art exhibitions, and music and dance performances taking place throughout the year. This rich tapestry of culture has made Bhopal a dynamic and cosmopolitan hub in the heart of India.

Thriving Industries and Economic Growth

In recent decades, Bhopal has experienced rapid industrialization and economic growth. The city’s industrial sector encompasses manufacturing, pharmaceuticals, information technology, and education. This economic dynamism has attracted a steady influx of migrants seeking job opportunities and a better life for their families. However, this wave of urbanization has also exacerbated the challenges associated with urban poverty, resulting in the proliferation of slums within Bhopal.

The Pervasive Issue of Urban Poverty

Urban poverty is a harsh reality in Bhopal, as it is in many Indian cities. The convergence of factors such as rural-to-urban migration, a lack of affordable housing, high levels of poverty, and unemployment has led to the rapid growth of slum settlements. These marginalized communities grapple with a multitude of challenges that affect the lives and well-being of their residents.

Challenges Faced by Bhopal’s Slum Dwellers

The slums of Bhopal are home to thousands of families struggling to make ends meet in substandard living conditions. These challenges include:

  1. Poor Living Conditions: Slum dwellers often live in cramped, unhygienic conditions, residing in makeshift shanties constructed from corrugated metal, wood, or even discarded materials. Such living conditions expose them to diseases, respiratory problems, and other health issues.
  2. Lack of Basic Services: Many slum areas lack access to clean water, proper sanitation facilities, and healthcare services. The absence of these fundamental amenities significantly impacts the health and well-being of residents.
  3. Education Barriers: Slum children often face obstacles in accessing quality education. Schools may be located far from their homes, and their families may not have the financial means to support their schooling. This educational disadvantage perpetuates a cycle of poverty.
  4. Vulnerability to Disasters: Slum dwellings are often haphazardly constructed and located in areas prone to natural disasters such as floods and fires. This puts residents at heightened risk in times of emergencies.

Initiatives to Improve Slum Conditions

Efforts are being made to address the challenges faced by slum dwellers in Bhopal. These initiatives include:

  1. Habitat for Humanity’s Work: Non-governmental organizations like Habitat for Humanity are actively engaged in improving living conditions in Bhopal’s slums. They are providing affordable housing solutions and promoting community development.
  2. Swachh Bharat Abhiyan: The Indian government’s Swachh Bharat Abhiyan, or Clean India Mission, is aimed at addressing sanitation issues in both urban and rural areas, including the slums of Bhopal.
  3. Resettlement Projects: The Bhopal Municipal Corporation has launched resettlement projects to provide slum dwellers with proper housing and essential services.
  4. Community Engagement: Engaging the community in decision-making processes and development projects is proving to be an effective way to address the challenges faced by slum dwellers. Empowering the residents themselves to be a part of the solution is a crucial step in improving their living conditions.

Defining the Slums

Slums are densely populated, low-income neighborhoods that lack basic amenities and infrastructure, such as proper housing, clean water, sanitation facilities, and healthcare access. Bhopal, like many other Indian cities, has a substantial population living in slum areas.

Causes of Slums in Bhopal

  1. Rapid Urbanization: Bhopal has experienced rapid urbanization over the years, driven by factors like industrialization, job opportunities, and better education facilities. As a result, rural-to-urban migration has led to the unplanned growth of slum settlements.
  2. Lack of Affordable Housing: The city has struggled to provide affordable housing for its growing population, leading to the proliferation of slums as a coping mechanism.
  3. Poverty and Unemployment: High levels of poverty and unemployment contribute to the growth of slums. Many residents of these areas work in the informal sector, which often lacks job security and fair wages.
  4. Lack of Land Tenure: Many slum dwellers lack legal land tenure, which makes them vulnerable to eviction and limits their access to essential services.

Challenges Faced by Bhopal’s Slum Dwellers

  1. Poor Living Conditions: Slum residents live in cramped, unhygienic conditions, often without proper shelter. These living conditions make them vulnerable to diseases and other health issues.
  2. Lack of Basic Services: Many slums lack access to clean water, proper sanitation, and healthcare services, which are essential for a healthy and dignified life.
  3. Education Barriers: Slum children often face challenges in accessing quality education, as schools may be located far from their homes, and their families may not have the resources to support their schooling.
  4. Vulnerability to Disasters: Slum dwellings are often poorly constructed and located in areas prone to natural disasters like floods or fires, leaving residents at risk.

Initiatives to Improve Slum Conditions

  1. Habitat for Humanity’s Work: NGOs like Habitat for Humanity are actively working to improve the living conditions in Bhopal’s slums by providing affordable housing solutions and promoting community development.
  2. Swachh Bharat Abhiyan: The Indian government’s Swachh Bharat Abhiyan (Clean India Mission) aims to address sanitation issues in urban and rural areas, including the slums of Bhopal.
  3. Resettlement Projects: The Bhopal Municipal Corporation has initiated resettlement projects to provide slum dwellers with proper housing and essential services.
  4. Community Engagement: Involving the community in decision-making processes and development projects has proven to be an effective way to address the challenges faced by slum dwellers.

Conclusion

The slums of Bhopal represent a complex issue that intertwines urbanization, poverty, and lack of basic amenities. However, it’s important to recognize the resilience and strength of the residents who, despite facing numerous challenges, contribute to the city’s growth and development. To address the issue of slums effectively, a multi-pronged approach is needed, combining urban planning, affordable housing, and community engagement. With the right strategies and support, Bhopal can work towards transforming its slum areas into thriving and sustainable communities. The slums of Bhopal represent a microcosm of the broader challenges that urban India faces concerning poverty, inadequate housing, and essential service deficiencies. However, it’s important to recognize the strength and resilience of the slum residents, who, in the face of numerous hardships, continue to contribute to the city’s growth and development. To address this complex issue, a multi-pronged approach is essential, involving urban planning, affordable housing solutions, and community engagement. With the right strategies and support, Bhopal can work towards transforming its slum areas into thriving and sustainable communities, embodying the true spirit of “Incredible India.”

References

Agarwal, Sarika, and Shashikant Nishant Sharma. “Universal Design to Ensure Equitable Society.”ย International Journal of Engineering and Technical Research (IJETR)ย 1.

Choudhary, A. K., et al. “Factors associated with low birth weight among newborns in an urban slum community in Bhopal.”ย Indian journal of public healthย 57.1 (2013): 20-23.

Dehalwar, Kavita, and Jagdish Singh. “Current State of Water Management System: Case Review of Bhopal, Madhya Pradesh.”ย International Journal of Civil, Structural, Environmental and Infrastructure Engineering Research and Development (IJCSEIERD)ย 5.6 (2015): 35-40.

Dehalwar, Kavita, and Jagdish Singh. “Challenges and strategies for the improvement of water management in Bhopal.”ย European Scientific Journalย 12.2 (2016).

Dehalwar, Kavita, and Jagdish Singh. “A Critical Evaluation of the main Causes of Water Management Problems in Indian Urban Areas.”

Hughes, Robert C., et al. “Who actually cares for children in slums? Why we need to think, and do, more about paid childcare in urbanizing sub-Saharan Africa.”ย Philosophical Transactions of the Royal Society Bย 376.1827 (2021): 20200430.

Lall, Somik V., Ajay Suri, and Uwe Deichmann. “Household savings and residential mobility in informal settlements in Bhopal, India.”ย Urban Studiesย 43.7 (2006): 1025-1039.

Laughlin, Kim, and George Marcus. “Representing โ€˜Bhopalโ€™.”ย Connected: Engagements with mediaย (1996): 221-46.

Melwani, Veena, et al. “A study to assess the prevalence of anaemia amongst adolescent girls residing in selected slum of Bhopal city.”ย Int J Community Med Public Healthย 5.3 (2018): 1096-1099.

Saxena, Prem Narayan, and Rajesh Joshi. “Eradication of slums in Bhopal City.”ย Int J Sci Technol Engย 2.6 (2015): 104-112.

Sharma, Shashikant Nishant. “Urban forms in planning and design.”ย International Journal of Researchย 1.1 (2014): 7-16.

Sharma, Shashikant Nishant. “Sustainable development strategies and approaches.”ย International Journal of Engineering and Technical Research (IJETR)ย 2 (2013).

Sharma, Shashikant Nishant.ย Participatory Planning in Plan Preparation. BookCountry, 2014.

Sharma, Shashikant Nishant. “Review of most used urban growth models.”ย International Journal of Advanced Research in Engineering and Technology (IJARET)ย 10.3 (2019): 397-405.

Sharma, Shashikant Nishant. “Introduction to Sociology.”ย New Perspectives in Sociology and Allied Fieldsย (2016): 1.

Sharma, Shashikant Nishant. “Fate of Rural Sanitation Scheme.”ย International Journal of Research (IJR)ย 1.2 (2014).

Sharma, Shashikant Nishant, ed.ย New perspectives in sociology and allied fields. EduPedia Publications (P) Ltd, 2016.

Sharma, Shashikant Nishant, and Arindam Biswas. “Best practices for ensuring total sanitation.”ย International Journal for Social Studies, ISSNย (2016): 2455-3220.

Sharma, Shashikant Nishant. “A Review of Swarna Jayanti Shahari Rozgar Yojana.”ย Think India Journalย 23.1 (2020): 26-32.

Sharma, Shashikant Nishant. “Evaluation of the JnNURM Programme of Government of India for Urban Renewal.”ย Think India Journalย 8.2 (2005): 1-7.

Sharma, Shashikant Nishant. “Evaluation of Implementation of Pradhan Mantri Awas Yojana (Urban).”ย Think India Journal23.1 (2020): 1-13.

Singh, Bhupendra Pratap.ย Community participation framework for slum improvement-a case study of Bhopal slums. Diss. SPA, BHOPAL, 2017.

Yadav, Manju, K. K. Dhote, and Praveen Yadav. “Impact of urban floods on slum redevelopment case of Bhopal.”ย Available at SSRN 3334401ย (2018).

Exploratory Assessment of Communal Conflict and its Impacts on Nigerian Development

BY

1Kingsley Obumunaeme Ilo, PhD

Social Sciences Unit, the School of General Studies/ Department of Political Science, University of Nigeria, Nsukka

Email: kingsley.ilo@unn.edu.ng

2*Uchenna Timothy Umeifekwem*, PhD

Department of Public Administration, Chukwuemeka Odumegwu Ojukwu University

Email: ukochenna2011@yahoo.com

3Ohabuenyi, Jonas

Social Sciences Unit, the School of General Studies/ Department of Political Science, University of Nigeria, Nsukka

Jonas.ohabuenyi@unn.edu.ng

4Sabo Okonu

Department of Political Science, Faculty of the Social Sciences, University of Nigeria, Nsukka

Email: sabo.okonu@unn.edu.ng

Abstract

Conflicts of all types have a serious negative impact on society generally. Conflict between communities is an unavoidable component of human existence. It is the result of a variety of circumstances, including environmental, social, political, ethnic, and cultural elements. When it happens, communal conflict is the main reason for starvation, malnourishment, and food insecurity because of the complicated humanitarian crisis that comes with it. The focus of this paper is to analyse the nexus between communal conflict and development in Nigeria. Journal articles, textbooks and newspaper publications were used as sources of data for this article. At the end, the article calls for  communities to learn how to resolve their differences through dialogue instead of carrying arms against each other. It is also necessary for the government, chiefs, and elders to exhibit a high degree of impartiality when mediating between parties in land disputes. 

Keywords: Communal conflict, Education, Health, Violence, Social Infrastructure.

INTRODUCTION

Disputes over land or natural resources, including oil reserves, solid minerals, and water, are the major causes of communal disputes in Nigeria. Conflict situation may also occur when groups want to protect their honour, property, or even their very existence against the attack of other societies (Burde, Kapit, Wah, Guven, and Skarpeteig, 2013; Okpiliya, Ekong, & Eni, 2013). Bolarinwa (2006) observed that the prevalence of community disputes hampers the daily livelihoods of rural dwellers and food supply to urban centres. The bulk of farmers have stopped cultivating their far-flung farmlands. They are practically confined to their compounds and a few nearby farmlands. Movement restrictions have hampered access to critical agriculture inputs, including better seeds, fertilisers, and loans. In the end, many farmers could not sell their agricultural products effectively (Ajayi, Akinnagbe, and Aghojare, 2009).

The destruction of property, the deaths of people, and the resulting humanitarian crisis have hampered the socioeconomic and political activity of the affected communities in Nigeria plagued with communal conflict. A growing body of data from an impressively diverse variety of cultural and geographical settings suggests that communal conflict has offensive negative consequences on socio-economic and political well-being of the people.  Using a cross-sectional data Popoola, Olawale, and Muftau, (2020) demonstrate that communal conflict negatively impacts on business activities in Osun State, Nigeria. They also found that communal conflict has negative effect on entrepreneurial activities and causes economic damage and seriously affect entrepreneurship development in that community. Marc, Verjee, and Mogaka (2015) similarly show that economic activity is disrupted, a community’s productive base shrinks, and human capital, such as health and education, is lost as a result of communal strife. A loss in family income and wealth is expected to result from all of these repercussions of community strife, they said. As incomes decrease, more families will slip into poverty, and those already in poverty will fall even more. Farming and other rural economic pursuits are becoming more vulnerable to violence resulting from communal conflict.

 Gafaro, Ibanez, and Justino (2014) corroborate these results to a large extent, though they link them to the presence of armed non-state actors. Studies by Marc, Verjee, and Mogaka (2015); Jones and Naylor (2014); Carter, Bryant-Lukosius, DiCenso, Blythe, and Neville (2014) suggest that communal conflict can negatively affect various economic, health, and labour related outcomes. 

COMMUNAL CONFLICT 

Wig and Kromrey (2018), defined communal conflicts as violent confrontations between non-state actors where the cleavages largely fall along ethnic or tribal lines. Wig and Kromrey (2018) classified communal conflict into two distinct types, namely, inter-communal conflict, that is conflicts between ethnic groups and intra-communal conflict, that is conflicts within a one particular group. However, the classification of ethnic groups and subgroups are ambiguous, making it hard to extricate between intra-communal and inter-communal conflicts. In many of these communal crisis, crimes and ethnic cleansing are commonplace. Also, the crises have left many victims with lasting effects of trauma, homelessness, economic losses, as well as the weakening of social trust.

RURAL DEVELOPMENT

. Rural development refers to the process through which capitalism spreads across rural regions, together with the set of policies and projects that are being implemented in rural areas with the goal of improving human conditions. As used by Atkinson (2017), rural development involves efforts that are economic and social in nature intended to encourage concepts of retention, growth, and expansion in areas outside cities, including improving quality of life for rural residents through such activity. According to Nwobi, (2007), rural development can be viewed as the development of the moral, social, political and economic potentialities of rural communities to enhance their self-reliance through the provision of appropriate infrastructure such as pipe-borne water, electricity, good roads and small scale industries, increase their political consciousness and participation, promote their moral and social well-being which will result in tolerance, good discipline, justice, fairness, kindness, love and peace. As such, the term suggests that rural development is a strategy that tries to obtain an improved and productivity, higher socio-economic equality and ambition, and stability in social and economic development..

FACTORS ENCOURAGING COMMUNAL CONFLICT IN NIGERIA

. The root of communal conflicts in Nigeria is linked to several complex factors and vary from one group to another. It has been demonstrated empirically by several researchers that, in particular, the causes of communal conflicts are not static but rather dynamic and varied in nature depending on the socio-economic and geopolitical circumstances at the time (Yecho, 2006, Albert, 2001, Onwudiwe, 2004, and Alimba, 2014). 

Poor economic conditions 

Like the rest of Africa, Nigeria is neither immune to the poverty cancer nor ignorant of its impact on their fragile peace and stability. With over 80 per cent of her population living below the US$1 a day, civil unrest and grievances, both recipes for conflicts, become widespread. Indeed hunger, starvation, lack of economic growth and development create a high likelihood of violent conflicts and available army of people who are ready to prosecute the conflict either as machinery or as militias. For instance, in research conducted by Vinck et al (2011), 30 per cent of the Liberian population indicated that poverty was one of the root causes of the Liberian civil war. Similar assertions have also been made with regards to the conflicts in Nigeria and Guinea-Bissau (Voz di Paz and Interpeace 2010).

Access to small arms weapons 

Small arms induced-crises appears to be a persistent occurence in developing nations of their affordability, accessibility and availability; and porosity of the borders and legal frameworks legitimizing their use (Malam, 2014).This may be adjudged true because a significant number of the communal conflct that occured in Nigeria were prosecuted with small arms, and in  some instances extremely sophisticated weapons fit for external assault. The evil perpetuated through this weapon are not measurble, as their avalaibility is usually considered as a major cause that influences communal conflict and the outbreak as well as the continuation of internal conflicts and tensions in Nigeria.

Land ownership

Notable examples of communities in Nigeria that plunged into serious communal conflict hinged on land tussle with destabilized implications to their socio-economic well-being are well documented in literature. In Ebonyi state, Nigeria, there was an ensuing conflict between the people of Ezza and Ezillo communities over a portion of land which resulted in high death rates, destruction of basic infrastructure and services, and malnutrition. With the intervention of government and security agencies, violence was abated leading to a ceasefire between the two communities. However, this superficial peace has always been short-lived as longstanding and simmering ethnic rivalry and distrust has always plunged these two communities into perpetual communal conflict. 

Also, In December, 2018, four communities in Biase Local Government Area of Cross River State engaged in three days conflict which result to wanton destruction of lives and peoplesโ€™ properties. The conflict was deeply rooted in the โ€œdecision by Orugbam people to annex some land in other Erei communities.โ€ The Inyima, Onyadama conflict in March, 2016, where women, children, the aged and the entire houses in Inyima were set ablaze. The conflict which has become a recurring decimal was first fought in 2008 then 2014 and repeated in 2016. The cause of the war according to sources is that an Inyima man was said to have harvested cassava in a disputed portion of land with Onyadama community and since the first outbreak of the conflict many years ago, there have continued to be bad blood and    recurring skirmishes which have kept the two erstwhile sister communities at daggers drawn. 

IMPACT OF COMMUNCAL CONFLICT ON DEVELOPMENT

 The evidence from previous communal clashes in Nigeria, demonstrates that communal conflict has a significant negative impact on development and the well-being of the populations affected by such persistent violence. During community disputes, violence causes devastation and restricts commercial transactions. As a consequence, public and private assets are damaged, individuals are injured or murdered, and markets shrink as transaction costs rise. In addition, people change their behaviour to survive amid violence. Thus, instead of maximising profits, the population dedicates most of its effort to avoiding victimisation and increasing their chance of survival. Both dynamics reduce the income of those caught in violent attacks, cause poverty for the affected families, and make it hard for them to escape hardship.

Communal conflict causes extensive morbidity and mortality among the warring factions. Individuals, families, and whole communities are displaced as a result of armed conflict, leading to large numbers of people being forced to flee their homes. Previous communal conflicts in Nigeria have been marked by excessive cruelty and violence towards civilians, which has resulted in the deaths of a large number of individuals. Health, education, the economy, and social welfare services collapsed, and many features of traditional life and the social structure were destroyed. Moore (2005) argued that “communal conflict negatively impacts human capital by causing physical and mental impairment, declines in health and nutritional status, and education and training opportunities, which in turn drive individuals and households into poverty”. In both the short and long run, declines in health and well-being may limit an individual’s ability to work, thereby limiting their ability to make an income. In times of community war, the physical disabilities of civilians and fighters may keep people poor for a long time.

Impact of communal conflict on Healthcare delivery

Data suggest that over a third of maternal fatalities and half of all infant deaths occur in locations where health systems have been disrupted by violence. During conflict, malaria and other endemic illnesses are likely to be accelerated. Their results suggest negative effects of the insurgency on weight-for-age and weight-for-height z-scores and an increase in the probability of wasting. In their study, Patel, Gibson- Fall, Sullivan, and Irwin (2017) reported in their study the ordeal of health workers in conflict zones. They observed that health workers are frequently attacked and their working tools destroyed. Primary health centres (PHC) are often damaged during conflict. In most cases, the primary health centres are used by fighters as their base, where they sleep and keep their weapons. This makes health workers demoralized and feel bad about their jobs, which makes them less happy about their job.  

Impact of communal conflict on Education

. In times of armed conflict, schools and centers of learning are often targeted. Conflict reduces access to education by stopping schools from opening, endangering children’s safety while traveling to and from school, and causing teacher absenteeism. There is an increase in school dropouts, and lower educational survival rates owing to relocation, military enlistment, or economic hardship. Inadequate supply of basic essentials like food, water, and school supplies, education quality diminishes, particularly in communities surrounding the war that may see an inflow of refugees or internally displaced pupils. As a consequence of increased hardship caused by conflict, parents may be forced to prioritize their investments among their children, perhaps resulting in more girls than boys dropping out of school. Furthermore, safety and security concerns may be more prevalent among girls than among boys, with females being more vulnerable to sexual and gender-based abuse than males upon leaving the house.

Many children in developing countries have had their education interrupted or stopped because of endless conflict. In some conflict-torn nations, however, millions of school children have never had the chance to attend school in the first place. Conflict may hinder national development by adversely affecting family income and human resources that could be used to invest in education. This means that there are fewer resources available for families and governments to spend on education than there would be if there were no conflicts. The effect of a conflict extends well beyond the local region of the targeted school. It may lead parents to be hesitant about taking their children to school, instructors to be hesitant about teaching, and schools to shut down. In rare circumstances, military forces may issue instructions prohibiting children from attending school or may restrict entry tacitly. From the forgoing, it is obvious that conflict promotes illiteracy. Illiteracy is a powerful predictor of poverty and hunger, and it is primarily a rural phenomenon that impedes rural development and food security; threatens productivity and health; and hinders possibilities to boost individual living standards and gender parity. The chances of having good job prospects as well as a good income is low for the illiterate population. As a result, they are often faced with the challenges of dependency, low self-esteem, and higher levels of crime. 

Impact of communal conflict on Social amenities 

Studies have shown that, there has been an increase in the damage of infrastructure due to natural and anthropogenic disasters (Nyanga 2018, Nyanga & Sibanda 2019, Dava, Chigora, Chibanda, & Sillah 2013). The majority of the studies presented fresh information, insights, and understanding regarding the degree to which infrastructure has been devastated by the conflict and how this has affected rural development in general. Nyanga and Sibanda (2019) found that due to the devastation of roads and bridges, workers in conflict zones had a difficult time getting to and from work. Uyang, Nwagbara, Undelikwo, and Eneji (2013) demonstrated in their study that a significant relationship exists between boundary disputes and food security. Dava, Chigora, Chibanda, and Sillah (2013) showed that “a lot of economic infrastructure such as road networks, dams, Information Technology (IT), and financial services were destroyed by the civil war that erupted in Mozambique in 2013.” The study revealed that the destruction caused a lot of disturbances and disruptions to the economy, especially in the agricultural, manufacturing, and banking sectors. The economy was affected by the destruction of roads, bridges, information technology systems, energy and power infrastructure, and communication networks. Chang (2003) study revealed that disasters have huge economic and societal costs that directly affect firms. According to Nyanga (2018), armed conflict destroys the economic infrastructure and breeds insecurity.

One of the most direct ways in which conflict distorts rural development is through reduced production. Farmers lose money directly as a result of damaged health infrastructure caused by conflict, and this can have a big impact on agricultural growth and the lives of people in rural areas. Conflict and long-term crises are making more and more people poor, food insecure, and refugees. It wreaks havoc on agricultural and rural lives, resulting in severe financial loss, food shortages, and harm on all levels. According to Angara (2000), agricultural operations are generally the first to be impacted when there are conflicts in rural regions. Some of these things have a big impact on agricultural output, which leads to a high level of self-sufficiency and a lot of hunger and food shortages.

CONCLUSION

Communal conflict is damaging and can have a big impact on the socioeconomic activities of rural people. The reality is that community strife is on the rise, and its effect on development has been quite worrisome. The poor living standards of the inhabitants in the affected region are aggravated by the prevalence of violent conflict, which seems to affect subsistence farming, the population’s main source of income. These conflicts have slowed down most projects from both government and non-government organizations. Past conflict between communities in Nigeria has led to the deaths of many people. It collapsed the local economy, left the health, education, and social infrastructure devastated, and many aspects of traditional life and social structure obliterated. In order to reduce injustice and promote fairness and transparency, community leaders must adopt appropriate procedures for the distribution of landed properties. Communities should learn to resolve their differences through dialogue instead of carrying arms against each other. It is also necessary for the government, chiefs, and elders to exhibit a high degree of impartiality when mediating between parties in land disputes. Land-owning clans must carefully ensure that land borders between clans are accurately established, delimited, and recorded as soon as possible.

References

Akresh, R. & de Walque, D. (2008). Armed conflict and schooling: evidence from the 1994 Rwandan genocide. World Bank Policy Research Working Paper No. 4606. Washington DC: World Bank.

Alabi, D. L. & Famakinwa M. (2017). Effects of community conflicts on rural economic activities in Osun state, Nigeria: implications for sustainable development. Ife Journal of Agriculture, 29 (1), 63-73

Albert, I.O. (2001). Ife-Modakeke crisis. In Otite, O & Albert, I.O. (eds.) community conflicts in Nigeria: management, resolution and transformation. Ibadan: Spectrum Books Limited. 

Alimba, N. C. (2014). Probing the Dynamic of Communal Conflict in Northern Nigeria. African Research Review 8 (1), 177-204

Allan, (2006). Conflict and Critical Theories. https://us.corwin.com/sites/default/files/upm-binaries/13636_Chapter7.pdf

Ani, K. J. (2017). Ezza-Ezillo conflict and national implications in Nigeria : the need for multi-dimensional peace-building AFFRIKA Journal of Politics, Economics and Society 7 (2), 

Asif, I.  & Saeed, A. (2014). Job satisfaction of secondary school teachers. Abasyn  Journal  of  Social  Sciences, 5(1), 49-65.

Atkinson, C. L. (2017). Rural Development. Global Encyclopedia of Public Administration, Public Policy, and Governance, 1โ€“7.

Buckland, P., (2005). Reshaping the Future: Education and Post-conflict Reconstruction. O. Adonteng-Kissi et al. International Journal of Educational Development xxx (xxxx) xxxโ€“xxx World Bank Publications.

Bundervoet, T. (2012). War, health and educational attainment: a panel of children during Burundiโ€™s civil war. HiCN Working Paper 114.

Burde, D., Kapit, A., Wah, R., Guven, O., Skarpeteig, M., (2013). Education in emergencies. In: A Review of Theory and Research, Paper Presented at the Comparative and International Education Society. New Orleans, March 10โ€“15.

Caleb, A. & Grerald, O. (2015). The role of small arms and light weapons proliferation in African conflicts. African Journal of Political Science and International Relations. 9(3), 78-85

Carter, N., Bryant-Lukosius, D., DiCenso, A., Blythe, J., & Neville, A.J., (2014). The use of triangulation in qualitative research’. Proceedings of the Oncology Nursing Forum, vol. 41.

Dava, P. O., Chigora, P., Chibanda, T.W., & Sillah, R., (2013). An analysis of the effects of civil war and prospects for development in Mozambique: The case of frelimo-renamo in Chokwe District. International Journal of Humanities and Social Science Invention, 2 (6), 66-75.

Dill, J. C. & Anderson, C. A. (1995). Effects of frustration justification on hostile aggression. Aggressive Behaviour, 21(4), 359 โ€“ 369.

Dollard, J. et al (1939). Frustration and aggression. New Haven, Conn: Yale University Press.

Ekhator-Mobayode, U. E.  & Asfaw, A. A. (2019). The child health effects of terrorism: evidence from the Boko Haram Insurgency in Nigeria, Applied Economics, Taylor & Francis Journals, 51(6), 624-638

Gafaro, Margarita and Justino, Patricia and Ibรกรฑez, Ana Marรญa, Collective Action and Armed Group Presence in Colombia (July 9, 2014). Documento CEDE No. 2014-28, Available at SSRN: https://ssrn.com/abstract=2489128 or http://dx.doi.org/10.2139/ssrn.2489128

Homer-Dixon, T. F. (2001) Environemnt, scarcity and violence. USA, Princeton university press.

Jones, A. & Naylor, R. (2014) The quantitative impact of armed conflict on education: counting the human and financial costs. Doha: PEIC. Available at http://educationandconflict.org/

Justino, P., Leone, M. & Salardi, P. (2011). Education and conflict recovery: the case of Timor Leste. HiCN Working Paper 100

Krause, J. (2020). Restrained or constrained? Elections, communal conflicts, and variation in sexual violence. Journal of Peace Research, 57(1), 185โ€“198.

Lai, B., & Thyne, C. (2007). The effect of civil war on education. Journal of Peace Research, 277โ€“292.

Malam, B. (2014). Small arms and light weapons proliferation and it implication for West African regional security. International Journal of Humanities and Social Science, 4(8), 260-269.

Moore, J. (2005). Seven recommendations for creating sustainability education at the university level. A guide for change agents. International Journal of Sustainability in Higher Education 6 (4), 326-339

Nwobi, T. U. (2006). Cooperatives and rural financing. In E. E. Umebali (Eds.) Readings in Cooperative Economics and Management. Lagos: Computer Egde Publishers.

Nyanga, T. & Sibanda, R., (2019). Impact of onsite health care centers on job satisfaction In Armed Conflict Societies: The Zimbabwean War Of Liberation Perspective,” Business Excellence and Management, Faculty of Management, Academy of Economic Studies, Bucharest, Romania, vol. 9(3), pages 47-58

Nyanga, T., (2018). Examining the usefulness of job satisfaction theories in armed conflict society. Amity Global Human Resource Management Review, 8 (2), 40-48.

Oji, R. O. (2014). Communal conflicts in Nigeria: an examination of Ezillo and Ezza-Ezillo conflict of Ebonyi state, (1982-2012) Kuwait Chapter of Arabian Journal of Business and Management Review 4 (1), 514-526

Onwudiwe, E. (2004). Communal violence and the future of Nigeria. Global Dialogue, 6(3-4).

Popoola, M. A., Olawale, S. M. & Muftau, F. A. (2020). Effect of communal conflict on economic activities inOsun State, Nigeria. Business And Management Research Journal 10 (2), 41-46

Shemyakina, O., (2011). The effect of armed conflict on accumulation of schooling: results from Tajikistan. J. Dev. Econ.95 (2), 186โ€“200.

Singh, P. & Shemyakina, O. N.  (2013). Gender-Differential Effects of Conflict on Education: The Case of the 1981-1993 Punjab Insurgency, HiCN Working Papers 143, Households in Conflict Network.

Singha, K. (2015). Does Conflict Affect Educational Development? The Indian Economic Journal 62(4), 1313โ€“1335.

Swee, E. L. (2009). On war and schooling attainment: The case of Bosnia and Herzegovina. Households in Conflict Network Working Paper 57. Falmer: University of Sussex, April.

UNDP (United Nations Development Program) (2012). UNDP Human Development Report. New York: UNDP

Uyang, F. A., Nwagbara, E. N., Undelikwo, V. A., Eneji, R. I. (2013). Communal Land Conflict and Food Security in Obudu Local Government Area of Cross River State, Nigeria. Advances in Anthropology 3 (4), 193-197

Vinck, P, Pham, P N and Kreutzer, T (2011). Talking Peace: A population-based survey on attitudes about security, dispute resolution, and post-conflict reconstruction in Liberia. Berkeley, CA: Human Rights Center, University of California, Berkeley.

Voz di Paz and Interpeace (2010). Root causes of conflict in Guinea-Bissau: The voices of the people. Guinea-Bissau: Voz di Paz/Interpeace.

Wig, T. & Kromrey, D. (2018). Which groups fight? Customary institutions and communal conflicts in Africa. Journal of Peace Research, 1-15

World Bank (2011) World development report, 2011: Conflict, security and development. Washington: IBRD/World Bank.

Increasing Repurchase Intention through Product Quality, Service Quality, and Customer Satisfaction

Lena Ellitan; Ani Suhartatik

Faculty of Business

Widya Mandala Catholic University Surabaya Indonesia

Abstract

Product quality has a positive impact on repurchase intentions. Good product quality with good taste, and the wide variety of products available will make consumers visit and buy this product again in the future. Good service quality has a significant effect on repurchase intentions. This shows that good service quality alone is not enough to make consumers have the intention to buy again. Product quality has a significant effect on customer satisfaction because good product quality will create a sense of satisfaction experienced by customers. The higher the quality of the product provided, the higher the customer satisfaction will be. Quality products with a wide variety of menus to make consumers feel satisfied and create a desire to visit and buy existing products again. Good service quality makes consumers feel good. Providing good service to make consumers satisfied, apart from good service, providing a comfortable atmosphere and eye-catching design so that consumers feel satisfied with the place and the service provided to their customers. Customer satisfaction creates an intention to buy again. Customer satisfaction will create an intention to repurchase. Consumers will have the intention to repurchase if consumers are satisfied with the quality of the products offered and also the services provided. Good service quality can create a good positive perspective from consumers so that consumers have the intention to come back. This article discusses the role of product quality, service quality and satisfaction in increasing repurchase intentions.

Keywords: Product Quality, Service Quality, Satisfaction and Repurchase Intention

Introduction

Product and service quality is closely related to customer satisfaction and company profitability (Kotler and Keller, 2016). According to Schroder, (2011) quality is a distinctive attribute or characteristic that a product has. Better food quality will provide high customer satisfaction. Food quality is also an important attribute in food. Lovelock and Wirtz (2011) stated that service quality is the number of services that require direct interaction between customers and business actors. Differences in service methods between one service provider and another can often be seen from the attitudes and skills of employees. Felix (2017) believes that consumer satisfaction is a customer’s feeling of satisfaction or disappointment resulting from comparing product performance or results with expectations. If the performance is less than expectations then the customer will feel disappointed and if the results match the customer’s expectations then the customer will feel satisfied. Companies that focus on customer satisfaction will be able to increase customer loyalty and at the same time will help the company to have a positive image (Tjiptono and Chandra, 2011). Customer satisfaction is also defined as a determinant of post-purchase attitudes that reflects positive or negative results. Hawkins and Lonney in Tjiptono (2004) also stated three dimensions of customer satisfaction, namely suitability of satisfaction, repurchase intention and willingness to recommend.

Santoso (2016) argues that repurchase intentions represent a customer’s likelihood of engaging in objectively observed future behavior. This is defined as a consumer’s intention to repurchase a particular product or service in the future (Wand and Yu, 2016). There are four dimensions of repurchase intention, namely transactional intention, referential intention, preferential intention and exploration intention (Ferdinand in Saidani and Samsul, 2012). Companies need to implement marketing strategies that are right on target in marketing their products. Determining strategies in terms of food quality and service quality to consumers which triggers consumer satisfaction which ultimately makes consumers have the intention to repurchase the products produced to introduce or brand their business. Based on the phenomena and background above, it is hoped that this article will provide benefits as a study of product quality, service quality, customer satisfaction, and be useful for further research as reference material. And used as input for entrepreneurs in managing their platforms and products according to product quality, service quality and customer satisfaction.

Product quality

Kodu (2013), states that product quality can be interpreted as the ability of a product to carry out its function which includes durability, reliability or progress, strength, ease of packaging, and product repair and other characteristics. Kotler and Armstrong (2012: 283) add that product quality is the ability of a product to perform its function. Product quality is determined by product attributes. Kotler (in Negara, 2018) also states that product quality is the character of a product that has the ability to meet consumer needs. Kotler and Keller (2009: 143) suggest that product quality consists of the features and characteristics of goods and services, the intensity of which can determine the performance capabilities of a product which can be stated or implied. This is related to the quality of the product or service itself, company profitability, and consumer satisfaction which determine the selection of a product. Kotler and Keller (2009: 144) state that the higher the level of product quality offered to consumers, the higher the price, the lower the costs required, and the company can maintain the experience that consumers feel when purchasing the product.

Kotler and Armstrong (2012) argue that product quality is the ability of a product to perform its function. Product quality is determined by product attributes. Product attributes are product elements that are considered important by consumers and are used as the basis for decision making (Tjiptono, 2009 in Afrilia, 2017). According to Kotler (2008), the higher the product quality, the higher the consumer’s decision to make a purchase. *When consumers purchase a product, there will be certain considerations that will become the benchmark for consumers to fulfill their desires, including the condition and appearance of a product marketed by the company. Kotler and Armstrong (2017:249) state that product quality is one of the positioning factors in determining marketing strategies.             

Product quality is the performance of a product in accordance with the commitments made by the manufacturer to consumers. This commitment can be explicit or implicit, namely in terms of quality management expectations from the average consumer of the product. A product can be known as a good and quality product only if the quality of the product is able to meet the criteria and desires of consumers. Product quality in physical appearance must be beautiful to the eye in order to attract consumer interest and achieve good product quality. To achieve this, quality standardization is needed.

Service Quality

Service quality is the activity of offering services that are felt by customers who have used the service. Service quality is very important for customer satisfaction and trust (Rahmani Nejad, Firoozbakht, & Taghipoor, 2014). Wibowo & Soedjono (2014) stated that service quality can be said to be good and of high quality if the service provided by a company can satisfy its customers. The company will not remain silent in terms of customer satisfaction, so that its customers can feel satisfied. According to Kotler, (2007) customer satisfaction is a person’s feeling of happiness or disappointment that arises after the person compares the performance (results) of the product in question against the expected performance. Service quality is how far the difference is between customer reality and the customer expectations they receive (Adabi, 2020). According to Kotler (2009), customer satisfaction can be felt after customers compare their experiences in purchasing goods or services from sellers or providers of goods and services with the expectations or feelings they get from the buyers themselves. Kotler and Keller (2007) state that service quality must start from customer needs and end in customer perception, where customer perception of service quality is a comprehensive assessment of the superiority of a service. According to Adipramita (2019), quality is often considered a measure of the relative goodness of a product or service which consists of design quality and suitability. According to Aryani and Rosita (2010) service quality is very important to achieve improvement efforts for business continuity, where with good service quality the value delivered to customers becomes more positive, and will provide satisfaction to consumers. According to Tjiptono (2014: 268) service quality is centered on efforts to fulfill customer needs and desires and the accuracy of delivery to match customer expectations. According to Tjiptono (2014:282) there are five dominant factors or determinants of service quality.

1. Tangible. Namely in the form of physical appearance, equipment and various materials that are visible and can be assessed as good.

2. Empathy. Namely employee willingness to build relationships, good communication, personal attention, and understanding of customer needs.

3. Responsiveness. Namely the readiness of employees to meet consumer needs in a responsive and friendly manner. Employees must have the willingness to provide service quickly and responsively.

4. Reliability. Namely the employee’s ability to provide services promptly, accurately, consistently and satisfactorily

5. Guarantee (Assurance). Namely, employees must include the knowledge, competence, readiness and trustworthiness of employees regarding the promises given, free from danger, risk and doubt.

Customer satisfaction

Customer satisfaction is a customer’s feelings, both satisfied and disappointed, resulting from comparing product performance or results with expectations (Kotler and Keller, 2018). If the performance is less than expectations then the customer will feel disappointed and if the performance meets expectations then the customer will feel satisfied. Customer satisfaction is an individual’s perception of performance or service in relation to consumer expectations (Schiffman and Kanuk, 2007). Kotler and Armstrong (2008) also define customer satisfaction as the extent to which the product performance received is in line with customer expectations. Companies that focus on customer satisfaction will be able to increase customer loyalty and at the same time will help the company to have a positive image (Tjiptono and Chandra, 2011). Customer satisfaction is defined as a determinant of post-purchase attitudes that reflects positive or negative results. Agustiansyah and Tauik (2019) also stated that customer satisfaction plays a very important role in competitive industries, because there is a very large difference in loyalty between customers who are satisfied and customers who are truly satisfied or happy. Satisfaction is the difference between expectations and performance. Customer satisfaction will always be based on efforts to eliminate or narrow the gap between expectations and performance. Customer satisfaction is the level of customer feelings after comparing perceived service performance and compared with expectations (Kotler and Keller, 2016). Customer satisfaction is a person’s feeling of happiness or disappointment that arises after comparing the performance obtained with the expected performance. If performance does not match expectations, then customers become dissatisfied. If performance meets expectations, then customers will be very satisfied (Nurmalina, 2017). Customer satisfaction is an evaluation process after purchasing or evaluation results after comparing what they feel with their expectations (Yamit, 2013). Satisfaction is the level of feeling after comparing the perceived performance or results with expectations (Sumarwan, 2012). Kotler in Lupiyoadi (2013) states that satisfaction is a level of feeling where someone states the results of a comparison of the product performance received and expected. Hamdani (2011) found that achieving customer satisfaction can be improved through service quality with several approaches as follows:

1. Minimize the gaps that occur between management and customers. For example, by conducting research by distributing questionnaires over several periods, to find out customer perceptions of service.

2. Companies must be able to build a joint commitment to create a vision for improving service processes. This includes improving the way of thinking, abilities, behavior and knowledge of all existing human resources.

3. Give customers the opportunity to convey their complaints by forming a system of criticism and suggestions, and correcting deficiencies that customers complain about

4. Develop and implement accountable, proactive and partnership marketing according to the marketing situation. The company contacts customers after the service process occurs to determine customer satisfaction and expectations (accountable). The company contacts customers from time to time to find out the progress of its services (proactive). Companies build closeness with customers which is useful for creating the company’s image and position in the market (partnership).

Kuo et al (2013) stated that consumers who have a high level of satisfaction will repeatedly return to the same place to get optimal results. Efendi (2020) states that customer satisfaction is a post-purchase consumer evaluation where the alternative chosen does not provide the same results or exceed consumer expectations, while dissatisfaction will arise if the results obtained are below consumer expectations.

Repurchase Intention

Repurchase intention represents a customer’s likelihood to engage in objectively observed future behavior (Santoso, 2016). This is defined as a consumer’s intention to repurchase a particular product or service in the future (Wand and Yu, 2016). There are four dimensions of repurchase intention, namely transactional intention, referential intention, preferential intention and exploration intention (Ferdinand in Saidani and Samsul, 2012). Pham et al (2018) define repurchase as an actual action, and repurchase intention shows that the customer decides to engage in future activities with the seller. Hendarsono (2013) believes that repurchase interest is the behavior of customers who respond positively to what has been provided by a company and are interested in making return visits or consuming the company’s products again. Nurhayati (2012) states that repurchase intention is a consumer’s desire and action to repurchase a product because of the satisfaction received in accordance with what is desired from a product.

Repurchase is a post-purchase consumer action, the occurrence of consumer satisfaction or dissatisfaction will influence subsequent behavior, if the consumer is satisfied then they will show a higher possibility of repurchasing the product. Repurchase intention refers to a possibility or opportunity to use a previous service provider again in the future. Repurchase intention is a customer’s tendency to buy products from the right manufacturer over a long period of time (Gounaris, Bimitraids and Stathakopoulos, 2010). Repurchase is a tendency for consumer buying behavior for a product or service that is carried out repeatedly over a certain period of time and actively likes and has a positive attitude towards a product based on experiences that have been made in the past (Suryana and Dasuki, 2013). And inform other people about good things about the product and will not pay too much attention to similar product offerings from other companies (Kotler and Armstrong, 2008).

Discussion

Several studies support that product quality has a positive effect on repurchase intentions. High quality products are products that are able to excel in competing to meet consumer needs (Wood, 2009). Product quality plays an important role in shaping consumers’ repurchase intentions (Mahendrayanti and Wardana, 2021). Excellent product quality can provide confidence for consumers who will buy the product again (Nurahma et al, 2016). This research is also in line with research conducted by Fathurahman and Sihite (2022) explaining that product quality in the Erigo brand has a positive effect on repurchase intentions. The better the quality of service provided to consumers, the greater the consumer’s interest in making repeat purchases. Service quality is a factor that significantly encourages consumers to make repeat purchases (Prastika and Sugiono, 2017). According to Mardikawati and Farida (2013) service quality describes the nature of product appearance or performance which is a main part of the company’s strategy in order to achieve sustainable excellence as either a market leader or a strategy to continue to grow. In research conducted by Hidayat, et al (2020) at the Hotplate restaurant in Jakarta, it was found that there was a significant influence on service quality on repurchase intentions.

Customer satisfaction can be created by many things, good product quality is one factor in customer satisfaction. Good product quality will make consumers buy the product again and feel satisfied with the product. Kotler and Keller (2009: 144) state that the higher the level of product quality offered to consumers, the higher the price and lower costs required, and can enable a company to maintain the experience that consumers feel when purchasing the product. In research conducted by Fathurahman and Sihite (2022), it was found that product quality has a positive effect on customer satisfaction.

There are many factors that create customer satisfaction, one of which is service quality. Service quality is a reflection of a company’s reputation. A good company will have good quality service, which is able to make consumers feel comfortable and satisfied with the services provided. According to Tjiptono (2014: 268) service quality is centered on efforts to fulfill customer needs and desires as well as the accuracy of delivery to meet customer expectations. In research conducted by Hidayat et al (2020), it was found that service quality has a positive effect on customer satisfaction.

According to Mensah & Mensah (2018) customer satisfaction and repurchase intentions are very important to increase restaurant profits. Customers who are satisfied, both with the product and the service, will make repeat purchases at that place. If customers are not satisfied with the product and service, then customers will not come to that place again to make repeat purchases. In research conducted by Hidayat et al (2020) at a HotPlaye restaurant in Jakarta, it was found that there was a significant influence on customer satisfaction and repurchase intentions.

In several studies, customer satisfaction is able to mediate product quality which has a positive effect on repurchase intentions. The process of forming consumer buying interest must first form a sense of satisfaction for consumers through the quality they have (Savitri and Wardana. 2018). North et al (2004) state that product quality is defined as the ability of a product to meet consumer needs and their requests, and also as a set of attributes that contribute to consumer satisfaction and expectations in use. In research conducted by Fathurahman and Sihite (2022) conducted at Erigo Surakarta, it was stated that product quality mediated by customer satisfaction had a positive effect on repurchase intentions. Bailia et al (2014) stated that product quality partially has a positive effect on satisfaction. The consumer’s experience in purchasing a product will result in the consumer’s assessment of the product. Consumer repurchase intentions represent possible future behavior, while behavior is an objectively observed level (Santoso, 2016). Service quality is closely related to customer satisfaction and company profitability (Kotler & Keller, 2016). Awi and Chaipoopirutana (2014) argue that to increase repurchase intentions, businesses must focus on increasing their customer satisfaction. Mensah & Mensah (2018) also added that customer satisfaction and repurchase intentions are very important to increase restaurant profits. In research conducted by Hidayat, et al (2020), it was found that service quality, mediated by customer satisfaction, has a positive effect on customer repurchase interest.

Conclusion

            Product quality has a positive impact on repurchase intentions. The results of this research are also supported by Danu and Haryono (2022) that product quality has a positive effect on repurchase interest. Good product quality with good taste, and the wide variety of products available will make consumers visit and buy this product again in the future. Good service quality has a significant effect on repurchase intentions. This shows that good service quality alone is not enough to make consumers have the intention to buy again. Service quality can be mediated by customer satisfaction so that consumers’ repurchase intentions increase. Product quality has a significant effect on customer satisfaction because good product quality will create a sense of satisfaction experienced by customers. The higher the quality of the product provided, the higher the customer satisfaction will be. Quality products with a wide variety of menus to make consumers feel satisfied and create a desire to visit and buy existing products again.

            Good service quality makes consumers feel satisfied. Research conducted by Widjoyo, et al (2014) also found that service quality has a significant effect on customer satisfaction. In this study, researchers stated that if service quality is improved, customer satisfaction with the restaurant will also increase. Providing good service to make consumers satisfied, apart from good service, providing a comfortable atmosphere and eye-catching design so that consumers feel satisfied with the place and the services provided to their customers. Customer satisfaction creates an intention to buy again. Customer satisfaction will create an intention to repurchase. Consumers will have the intention to repurchase if consumers are satisfied with the quality of the products offered and also the services provided. Kotler and Keller (2018) customer satisfaction is the customer’s feelings, both satisfied and disappointed, resulting from comparing product performance or results with expectations. If the performance is less than expectations then the customer will feel disappointed and if the performance meets expectations then the customer will feel satisfied. Good service quality can create a good positive perspective from consumers so that consumers have the intention to come back.

Researchers found a significant influence of product quality on repurchase intentions which was mediated by customer satisfaction. According to Kotler (2008), the higher the product quality, the higher the consumer’s decision to make a purchase. When consumers purchase a product, there will be certain considerations that serve as benchmarks for consumers to fulfill their desires, including the condition and appearance of a product marketed by the company. Service quality mediated by customer satisfaction has a significant effect on repurchase intention. Consumers who make repeat purchases also pay attention and feel directly the quality of service from a restaurant. Nur, A.I (2018) found that service quality can be mediated by customer satisfaction which results in consumers’ repurchase intentions. Good quality service will certainly make consumers feel satisfied and make repeat purchases. Service quality can be said to be good and of high quality if the service provided by a company can satisfy its customers. According to Tjiptono (2014: 268) service quality is centered on efforts to fulfill customer needs and desires and the accuracy of delivery to balance customer expectations so that customers can feel satisfied with the services provided and the intention to buy again arises.

References

Adabi,  N.  (2020).  Pengaruh  Citra  Merek, Kualitas  Pelayanan  dan  Kepercayaan Konsumen Terhadap Keputusan Pembelian  Indihome  di  Witel  Telkom Depok. Journal Of Management.

Adipramita,V.  (2019).Pengaruh  Kualitas Pelayanan,     Persepsi     Harga,     Dan Lokasi Terhadap Keputusan Pembelian Di  Toko  Perhiasan  Emas Lancar    Jaya    Sekaran    Lamongan. JEM17:  Jurnal  Ekonomi  Manajemen. https://doi.org/10.30996/jem17.v4i1.2916.

Afrilia, V.S. (2017). Pengaruh Harga Kualitas Produk dan Citra Merek Terhadap keputusan Teh Siap Minum Dalam Kemasan Teh Botol Sosro.

Agustiansyah, E. C., & Taufik, E. R. (2019). Mediasi Kepuasan Nasabah Pada Pengaruh Kualitas  Pelayanan  dan  Citra  Perusahaan  Terhadap  Loyalitas  (Studi  Pada PT. Bank  Syariah  Mandiri  KCP  Pandeglang).Jurnal  Riset  Bisnis dan  Manajemen Tirtayasa,3(1), 1-19.

Anjelia, G.P., Dkk. (2018). Pengaruh Kualitas Produk, Harga dan Word of Mouth Terhadap Miat Beli Konsumen Handphone Pada Mahasiswa FEB Unsrat. Vol.6, No.3.

Annisa, R. A., Wardhana, A. (2016). Pengaruh word of mouth Terhadap Minat Beli Konsumen Baraya Travel Pool Buah Batu. Vol.10, No.2. 

Aryani, Dwi dan Rosinta, Febrina. 2010. Pengaruh Kualitas Layanan terhadap Kepuasan Pelanggan dalam Membentuk Loyalitas Pelanggan. Jurnal Ilmu Administrasi dan Organisasi, Volume 2, halaman 114-126.

Awi, Y. L., & Chaipoopirutana, S. (2014). A Study of Factors Affecting Consumerโ€™s Repurchase Intention toward Xyz Restaurant, Myanmar. International Conference on Trends in Economics, Humanities and Management, 181-184.

Bagus, A.D., Ratna, N.N., dan Imam, A.B. (2021) Pengaruh Kualitas Produk, Harga, Desain dan Citra Merek terhadap Minat Beli Ulang Produk Sepatu. Vol.1, No.1.1

Bailia,  Jefry  F.T,  Agus  Supandi  Soegoto  dan  Sjendry  Serulo  R.  Loindong.  2014. Pengaruh    Kualitas    Produk,    Harga    dan    Lokasi    Terhadap    Kepuasan Konsumen  Pada  Warung โ€“Warung  Makan  Lamongan  Di  Kota  Manado. Jurnal EMBA, 2(3), 1768 โ€“1780.

Danu, A.P., dan Haryono. T. (2022). The Effect of Brand Image and Product Quality on Repurchase Intention Mediated by Consummer Satisfaction Study at Uniqlo in Solo. Vol.6, issue.2.

Fajriati, Nadia., Megawati (2021). Pengaruh Harga, Kualitas Produk, Lokasi, dan Word of Mouth (WOM) Terhadap Minat Beli Konsumen pada Toko Jaya Sentosa Mebel 7 Ulu Palembang. Vol.2, No.2.

Ghozali, Imam, 2016, Aplikasi Analisis Multivariate dengan Program IBM SPSS23, Edisi Delapan, Journal of Economics and Finance, Semarang, Universitas Diponegoro.

Hannan, S., Suharjo, B., Kirbrandoko., & Nurmalina, R. (2017). The Influence of Customer Satisfaction , Trust and Information Sharing on Customer Loyalty of Professional Services Companyโ€ฏ: An Empirical Study on Independent Surveyor Services Industry in Indonesia. Abstract of Economic, Finance and Management Outlook, Conscientia Beam, 11(1), 344โ€“353.

Indonesia, D. (n.d.). Industri Mamin Tumbuh 2,54% PADA 2021. Dataindonesia.id. Retrieved June 14, 2022, from https://dataindonesia.id/sektor-riil/detail/industri-mamin-tumbuh-254-pada-2021

Sudibyo, G. C. (2022). 4 Sektor Usaha Menjanjikan Untuk Strategi bisnis 2022. PRIEDS. Retrieved June 14, 2022, from https://www.prieds.com/post/4-sektor-usaha-menjanjikan-untuk-strategi-bisnis-2022

Devi, Irma P. et.all. 2020. Pengaruh Persepsi Harga, Kualitas Makanan dan Kalitas Pelayanan Terhadap Niat Beli Di Warung Dekade. Jurnal Ilmu Manajemen. ISSN: 2721-6810. Vol.1, No.2.

Felix, R. (2017). Service quality and customer satisfaction in selected banks in Rwanda. Journal of Business & Financial Affairs, VI(1), 246-256.

Hamdani.A. 2011.  Manajemen  Pemasaran  Jasa.  (Edisi  2).  Salemba  Empat. Jakarta.

Hasan, A. 2010. Marketing Dari Mulut Ke Mulut. Edisi 12. Jilid 2. Media Presindo, Yogyakarta.

Hair Jr., J. F., Hult, G. T., Ringle, C. M., Sarstedt, M., Danks, N. P., & Ray, S. (2021). Partial Least Squares Structural Equation Modeling (Pls-Sem) Using R (1st Ed.). Springer Cham. 

Hume, M., & Sullivan, M. (2010). The Consequence Of Appraisal Emotion, Service Quality, Perceived Value And Customer Satisfaction On Repurchase Intent In The Performing Arts. Journal of Services Marketing, 24(2), 170 โ€“ 182.

Imasari, K.P. (2012). Odd Price: Harga, Psikologi dan Perilaku Konsumen Dalam Purchase Decision Making. Vol.11, No.2.

Kodu, Sarini. 2013. Haga, Kualitas Produk dan Kualitas Pelayanan Pengaruhnya Terhadap Keputusan Pembelian Mobil Toyota Avanza. ISSN : 2303-1174. Vol.1, No.3.

Knight, J.B., Kotschevor, L. (2000). Quality Food Production Planning and Management: 3rd Edition. Canada: Simultaneously.

Kotler dan Amstrong, G 2012. Principles Of Marketing. 14th Edition Pearson International Edition. Prentice Hall. New Jersey

Kotler, Philip and Gary Armstrong. 2012. Prinsip-prinsip Pemasaran. Edisi 13. Jilid 1. Jakarta: Erlangga.

Kotler, P., & Keller, K. L. (2016). Marketing Management (15th ed.). New Jersey: Pearson Education.

Kotler, Philip dan Amstrong, Gary. 2011/ 10th Edition. โ€œMarketing an introductionโ€. Indonesia: Parason

Kotler, Philip and Armstrong, Gary. (2014). Principles of Marketing, Fifteenth Edition, Pearson Education, England.

Kotler, P.& Amstrong, G. (2016). Principles of Marketing Edisi 16 Global Edition .England: Pearson Education Limited

Kotler, P., dan Armstrong, G. 2017, Principles of Marketing, 7th ed., United Kingdom: Pearson Education Limited.

Kotler, Philip dan Keller, Kevin Lane. (2018). Manajemen Pemasaran. PT Indeks.

Mahendrayanti, Made., & Wardana, 2021. โ€œThe Effect Of Proce Perception, Product Quality, and Service Quality on Repurchase Intention, 5(1), 182-188.

Mardikawati, Woro dan Farida, Naili. 2013. โ€œPengaruh Nilai Pelanggan dan     Kualitas Layanan Terhadap Loyalitas Pelanggan, Melalui Kepuasan Pelanggan pada    Pelanggan    Bus Efisiensiโ€. Jurnal Administrasi Bisnis. Semarang: UNDIP.

Mensah, I., & Mensah, R. D. (2018). Effects of Service Quality and Customer Satisfaction on Repurchase Intention in Restaurants on University of Cape Coast Campus. Journal of Tourism, Heritage & Services Marketing, 4(2), 27-36.

Negara, A.A Ngurah Dianta Esa (2018). Pengaruh Kualitas Produk dan Brand Image terhadap Minat Beli (Survei pada Pembeli di Gerai Starbucks di Kota Surabaya). Sarjana thesis, Universitas Brawijaya.

North, M.O., and D.D. Bell. 2004. Commercial Chicken Production Manual. 4th Ed.An Avi Book Publish. by Van Nostrand Reinhold, New York.

Nur, A.I, (2018). Pengaruh Experiental Marketing dan Kualitas Pelayanan Terhadap Niat Pembelian Ulang di Waroeng Spesial Sambel dengan Kepuasan Pelanggan Sebagai Variabel Mediasi. Vol 3

Nurahma.R, dkk. (2016). Peranan Kepuasan Pelanggan dalam Memediasi Pengaruh Kualitas Produk dan Kualitas Layanan Terhadap Pembelian Ulang Produk Jasa Larissa Skin Care di Jember. Artikel Ilmiah 1-6.

Nurhayati  dan  Wahyu  Wijaya  Murti.  2012.  Analisis  Faktor-Saktor  Yang  Mempengaruhi Minat  Beli  Ulang MasyarakatTerhadap  Produk  Handphone. Value  Added,  8  (2):47-62.

O. Pappas, I., G. Pateli, A., N. Giannakos, M., & Chrissikopoulos, V. (2014). Moderating effects of online shopping experience on customer satisfaction and repurchase intentions. International Journal of Retail & Distribution Management, 42(3), 187โ€“204.

Oktavia, Fanny. (2019). Studi Komparatif Mengenai Word of Mouth dan Minat Beli Pada Pusat Oleh-Oleh Pempek Candy dan Pempek Vico Palembang. Vol.2, No.1.

Permadi., G.P. (2017) Pengaruh Kualitas Produk Terhadap Keputusan Pembelian dan Dampaknya Terhadap Kepuasan Konsumen. Jurnal administrasi bisnis. Vol.48, No.1.

Pham, Q. T., Tran, X. P., Misra, S., Maskeliunas, R., & Damaลกeviฤius, R. (2018). Relationship between convenience, perceived value, and repurchase intention in online shopping in Vietnam. Sustainability (Switzerland), 10(1). https://doi.org/10.3390/su10010156

Pradana, Dedhy., Hudyah, Syarifah. dan Rahmawati (2017). Pengaruh Harga Kualitas Produk dan Citra Merek Brand Image Terhadap Keputusan Pembelian Motor. Vol.14, No.1.

Prastika dan Sugiono. 2017. Pengaruh Kualitas Pelanyanan Dan Keragaman Produk Terhadap Keputusan Pembelian Pada Leopard Cafe Way JeparaLampung Timur. Jurnal Dinamika. Volume 3 (1).

Rahmani-Nejad, L., et al. (2014) Service Quality, Relationship Quality and Customer Loyalty (Case Study: Banking Industry in Iran). Open Journal of Social Sciences, 2, 262-268.

Satria, Arief Adi (2017). Pengaruh Kualitas Harga, Promosi, dan Kualitas Produk Terhadap Minat Beli Konsumen Pada Perusahaan A-36. Vol. 2, No.1. 

Savitri, Wardana (2018). Pengaruh Citra Merek, Kualitas Produk, dan Persepsi Harga Terhadap Kepuasan dan Niat Beli Ulang. Vol. 7, No. 10

Sahabuddin, Romansyah. (2019). Manajemen Pemasaran Jasa: Upaya Untuk Meningkatkan Kepuasan Nasabah Pada Industri Perbankan. Pustaka Taman Ilmu

Siadari, C. (n.d.). Pengertian Harga Menurut Para Ahli. Kumpulan Pengertian. Retrieved June 16, 2022, from https://www.kumpulanpengertian.com/2020/12/pengertian-harga-menurut-para-ahli.html

Suryana,  Popo  dan  Eliyandi  S.  D.  2013.  Analisis  Faktor  Yang  Mempengaruhi Keputusan Pembelian dan Implikasinya Pada Minat Beli Ulang. Trikonomika, 12 (2):190-200

Upamannyu, N. K., Gulati, C., Chack, A., & Kaur, G. The effect of customer trust on customer loyalty and repurchase intention: the moderating influence of perceived csr. International Journal of Research in IT, Management and Engineering, 4(5), pp. 1-31.

Wibowo, A., & Soedjono. (2014). Pengaruh Kualitas Layanan, Harga dan Lokasi Terhadap Keputusan Pembelian di “D’Stupid Baker” Surabaya. Jurnal Ilmu Riset Manajemen, 3(12).

Widjoyo, S.P. dkk, (2014). Pengaruh Kualitas Layanan dan Kualitas Produk terhadap Kepuasan Pelanggan dan Loyalitas Konsumen Restoran Happy Garden Surabaya. Vol.2, No.1.

Yamit, Z. (2013). Manajemen Kualitas Produk & Jasa. Yogyakarta: Ekonisia.

Development of Illegal Gold Mined Site into Eco Park as Modelled at Nsutamin the Eastern Region to Promote Tourism for the Advancement of Ghana

Isaac Odoi Danquah

diok1982@yahoo.com  

Water Resources Engineer, Goldrain Mountain Company Limited, Koforidua, Eastern Region โ€“ Ghana. 

ABSTRACT

Illegal gold mining business is so rampant at Nsutam in the Eastern Region of Ghana after the discovery of gold within the sub region. This has led to the destruction of natural resources such as lands, surface water bodies, forest reserves, plant species, destruction of natural water channels and destruction of aquifers. With this in mind, total land areas and surfaces are destroyed and changed after an illegal gold mining adventure. The aim of this research work sorts to investigate if an illegal gold mined site can be developed into an Eco park after gold mining adventure for the benefit of mankind, community and country. This is the reason for this research work at Nsutam in the Eastern Region of Ghana. After the investigation, it is well established that an illegal gold mined site can be designed, developed into an Eco park after turning pits and dugouts into an edifice where tourist siting places (summer hat buildings) can be developed over the pits and dugouts. Aquatic development can also be done in the dugouts containing water after treatment. Other places developed as play grounds for kids and the old. Sight-seeing stands also obtained after the introduction of animal species such as snails, rabbits, antelopes, tortoise, parrots, Monkeys, turkey and birds of different kinds. Different plant species also introduced to serve as learning platforms for ecologist and students from the biology background. With this, all kinds of classifications (Kingdom to species levels) of animals and plant species can be done to serve as learning platform for all. Water resources sectors within the Eco Park such as dugouts and pits well protected  and developed to serve as learning platforms for professionals and students from the water resources sector. Finally, total beautification of the place with green grasses and flowers after good designing by bioengineers. 

Keywords: Eco Park, illegal mining, water, land, forest reserves, gold, aquatic, development, ecologist, water resources, dugouts. 

1          INTRODUCTION

Gold mining business in Ghana has yield billions of pounds sterling, dollars and cedis to the Ghanaian economy and the 

world. Both indigenous and migrants are benefiting from the gold mining business which is changing their lives both locally and internationally. But the only problem is the process of accessing or mining the finite product. That is one of the main challenges facing the people and government of Ghana currently. For this reason, gold is explored in various kinds of ways both by legal and illegal gold miners. Gold exploration by illegal gold miners is always leading to the overexploitation of natural resources such lands, forest reserves and surface water bodies. The illegal mining activities is destroying farm produce and commercial farm products such as cocoa, cassava, plantain, palm oil trees, coconuts etc.   

Assessing surface water in Ghana is now a big problem as almost all surface water bodies have been polluted and deteriorated. The once been used by Ghana Water Company Limited for abstraction and treatment for drinking requires huge amounts of money because of the polluted nature of the water body. So is Supong which is one of the areas where the illegal gold is mined. The most interesting thing is that people donโ€™t care and see what is happening, all that they are interested in is the gold and the money. Where will Ghana stand to produce food and cocoa for the international market if all these lands are degraded and becomes infertile hence of no use for crop production. Will the gold money be enough to import all the food Ghanaians needs for sustenance and survival? This is a big no, hence the need to protect the natural resources for the good will of all โ€“ both the gold miners and common citizens. Gold mining is a good business that generates Billions of pounds sterlingโ€™s and cedis annually for economic growth but comes with repercussions and these need not be toiled with if not it becomes a curse. Since gold mining in Ghana started years ago, generations have come and gone, generations will continue to come and go but this gold resource will continue to be there as this is what nature has blessed the country Ghana for her growth and sustenance hence the need to protect.

Galamsey is a group of unlicensed individuals who come together using crude and sometimes refine methods to mine gold and other minerals. Galamsey or illegal mining became a boom in Ghana in the 1970โ€™s when there was a decline in Ghanaโ€™s economy during that time. 

When the president of Ghana was sworn into office, he restated his commitment to protect the land and water bodies that has been destroyed as a result of illegal gold mining activities within the country. The president introduced measures to stop the illegalities, regularise the small-scale mining sector, take measures to prevent occurrence of illegalities in the future, including reform and strengthening of regulatory agencies as well as reform of mining laws by that cleaning the mess created by these galamsey people.

Illegal mining operators wash the ore, and discharge waste products into rivers and other water bodies that serve as raw water sources for drinking for various communities within the country. These wastes include mine tailings which are directly discharged into rivers bodies. Large amounts of waste materials released into the water, a large amount of suspended solids that directly contaminate aquatic habitats. Some mine tailings are toxic and pose serious health problems both to humans, animals and plant life. Most water bodies in Ghana over the years have been serving as drinking water for local communities and a raw water source for the Ghana Water Company. These water bodies have been heavily polluted as a result of illegal gold mining operations. The Supong, Birim, Offin, Ankobra, Tano and Pra Rivers for example, have become extremely expensive to treat for human consumption as a result of the very poor water quality and its turbid nature or level.

Nsutam community has a lot of rich natural resources which needs to be harnessed in the right direction as well as protect it for the future generation.  Some of this natural resources are lands, water, gold, forest reserves etc. The mining of gold within the community is enriching lives and generating Billions of Pounds Sterling for Ghana and the world market. Despite the enrichment of lives, there is the need for the community and government to mine the resource in the right direction as well as sustaining the natural resources for unborn generations to come. In this regards, there is the need to use standard operation procedures to identify the resources and mine it for the betterment of mankind. In doing this, lands, forest reserves, water bodies will be under management through stakeholder participation towards the sustainability of the natural resources. Natural resources identification, assessment and protection hasnโ€™t been the mentality of Ghanaians but only improper way of harnessing it. Ghana as an economy is rich in natural resources so is Nsutam community in the Eastern Region of Ghana. Nsutam a stopover community is now welcoming natural resources discoverers all over the world as its rich in all kinds of resources. One most important thing in all this is the sustainability of the resource for the now and future generation. Ghana lacks protection, maintenance and sustainability attitude among its citizens and so can be seen at Nsutam community in the Eastern Region of Ghana. The natural resources available at Nsutam needs to be harnessed, mined and protected for the future. In doing this, the natural resource can be used to feed the current generation and future generation. It therefore calls on the government, government agencies, tourist board, stakeholders and private investors to help in the maintenance and protection of natural resources within the community as they continue to mine and use to meet daily needs and demands. Some citizens do not have the use for today but keep for future generation and this needs to be installed in their minds in order to protect and maintain the resources at Nsutam. The Ghanaian government needs to cultivate the attitude of resources estimation, protection and maintenance for the future generation. Government institutions such as Water resources commission, Environmental Protection Agency, Lands commission and Tourist Boards needs to look at resources allocation and the potential of private investors to make use and protect the resources before leasing out. By this, private investors who buys lands in communities such as Nsutam will use standard operation procedures to harness resources such as gold whiles protecting lands, forest reserves and water bodies and designing them into tourist attraction sites in Ghana.

Eco Park development from illegal gold mined sites is a good thought through opportunity to make use of damaged sites or design an illegally mined abandoned sites into a tourist site full of beauty to serve mankind, community, country and the international world. With such a project of life span of say 70years, it can serve generations in various directions;

  • Serve as a tourist sites
  • Serve as learning sites
  • Serve as entertaining sites
  • Serve as conference center for programs
  • Serve the community on special occasions etc.
  • RESEARCH AREA

The research area for this study is in Nsutam in the Eastern Region of Ghana. The people of Nsutam are involved in gold mining, farming and trading. Some of the farm products produced includes coconut, cocoa, plantain, yam, cassava, sugar cane and all kinds of vegetables produced during the farming seasons. The huge amount of gold discovered in the community has resulted in all kinds of illegal gold mining activities destroying water bodies, forest reserves and lands resources. The community has a population of about 7000 (2021 population census) with the majority being immigrants due to the gold mining business, Linda Dor and Paradise Tourist operates in the community. The destroyed land, surface water resources and forest reserves or plant species needs reclamation process in order to restore the infertile lands together with other resources back to normalcy. This fertile rich soils will support plant growth in order to support the hydrological cycle and exchanges of oxygen and carbon dioxide between man and plants. Restoration of the degraded lands will also promote afforestation and wildlife existence in the future for future generation. It will also promote tourist attraction when vegetationโ€™s are groomed and protected with the existence of wildlifeโ€™s. Fig 1 below is a view of the study area in the Eastern Region of Ghana where coconut is in mild production to boost livelihoods within the community.

Fig. 1: Map of Fanteakwa south

  • METHODOLOGY EMPLOYED FOR THE RESEARCH

The methodology employed for this research is Site Stationed Investigation Procedure (SSIP). With this method, the researcher works on the illegal mined site for several years (2018 โ€“ 2023) and embarks on learning and investigations as illegal gold mining is done. The site is designed artificially as various processes and procedures are done by illegal gold miners to access the mineral willingly or unwillingly. Site is discovered after the whole process of illegal gold mining after thorough process to access and analyze what can be done with the site. An Eco Park is seen evolving out the site after the whole process of mining. 

  • IDENTIFIED ECO PARK DEVELOPMENT STAGES
    • Summer Hat buildings creation on dugouts

In the process of mining within the identified area, all kinds of pits were dug to obtain the gold metal. These pits were dug to various depths generating water after hitting water table. Water from the Supong was also abstracted to help in the washing of stones and sand to obtain the gold being sort for. This has created dugouts after pit digging to a greater depth. Quite a number of the dugouts have been obtained and full of water to help in the Eco Park design and construction for Nsutam community. Summer hats buildings will therefore be done after concreting on the water bodies or dugouts having four or three access paths. This will be done with safety precautions or protections in mind so that no client or visitor falls inside the dugouts during operations and usage. This will be done nicely to add beauty to the design of the Eco Park at Nsutam in the Eastern Region of Ghana. Some are of the view that creating such summer hat buildings on illegal mined site dugouts is very dangerous but not the case, if proper design is done and constructed across the dugout with maximum precautions. This will be done to ensure safety of visitors, users and clients so that pleasure attainment will be obtained by all who makes use of the Eco Park now and the future. The dugout will be filled with fishes (to be treated under aquatic habitat creation and sight โ€“ seeing) and designed with flowers to give it much beauty to serve the people of Nsutam and beyond.

Fig 1: Summer hat building design

Fig 1 is a summer hat building which is going to be constructed over each of the identified dugouts in the illegal mined site. A number of such summer hat buildings will be constructed to add beauty to the Eco Park at Nsutam. This will have all kinds of fishes and aquatic organisms swimming in them to serve as sight โ€“ seeing for visitors and anyone who access the Eco Park. Plate 1 is one of the dugouts to have the summer hat building installed over it.

Plate 1: Dugout to have summer hat building installed

The summer hat building installation and creation on all identified possible dugouts will be done to international standards more than that identified in plate 2 below. Such summer hats will have four or three pathways as can be seen in fig 1. There will be a number of them depending on the number of dugouts identified with adequate size and capacity to facilitate the installations and creation.

Plate 2: sample summer hat building to be installed on dugouts

  • Creation of playing grounds for kids

Kids like playing especially when they meet in numbers at a designated place to have fun. Arboretwum at Bunso has seen a lot of visitation and patronage and one can observe playing by kids all day round upon visitation at the Eco Park. And this is no exception when GMCL Eco Park is established at Nsutam in the Eastern Region of Ghana. It therefore deems fit if a playing ground is designed, created or constructed to propagate this gospel of playing among kids, sharing love among themselves and extend friendly hands towards each other. This will enhance cordial relationship creation among kids as they learn how to work and cooperate with each other as they grow and mature into adulthood to serve man and country. 

  • Access paths creation

All kinds of access paths will be created within the Eco Park to help one access and move around the Eco Park at ease as he/she embarks on sight โ€“ seeing. Access paths will comprise of concrete pavements, roads and green grass vegetated areas within the Eco Park. This will add beauty to the Eco Park and hence attract a lot of people to the place to make it lively. Royal palms together with other flowers and tree species will help in the access path and pathway creation (Plate 2). Runoff generation within the Eco Park is very high and again the water table is closer to the surface of the land hence high rate of water over the area. That is, most of the areas within the catchment becomes waterlogged during heavy storms hence the need for pavements and concreting of areas to avoid dirty storm waters being drained into the dugout. When this is achieved, the water body and all waters in the dugouts will be clean and serene all the time to make the Eco Park admirable. 

Plate 3: Access pathway creation

  • Introduction of animals for sight โ€“ seeing and learning

In years back, zoos like the Kumasi zoo in the Ashanti Region harbors all kinds of animals and birds serving as for sight-seeing and for education. This is not the case in the Eastern Region of Ghana and GMCL Eco Park seeks to establish this learning and sight-seeing center for all and especially those living at Nsutam and in the Eastern Region of Ghana. Illegal gold mining is being embarked day in day out within the Eastern Region of Ghana which is turning lands and destroying natural resources within the sub region. Mined sites are left aloof after gold mining business and GMCL seeks to use one of the site as a case study in establishing an Eco Park. Extinction of animals and birds is still on going as individuals enter into deep forest like Atiwa forest to harness such animals and birds for sale and food in the homes. GMCL seeks to preserve nature by creating an area within the Eco Park where all kinds of animals and birds will be kept for sight-seeing and learning by students, young and old. Animal species such as snails, rabbits, antelopes, tortoise, turkey, monkey etc and birds of different kinds will be kept at the Eco Park for this purpose. Birds of different kinds can be found at the Eco Park now and some still moving in on daily basis. 

  • Ecological creation of plants species

Biologist and Ecologist are much interested in plant species for learning in the schools and universities, for medicinal purposes and so on. For this reason, all kinds of plant species will also be planted within the Eco Park to serve educational purposes of learning at every level of education by all. That is from lower levels of education to the university level in Ghana, Africa and the world. Plant species and flowers will be planted around heaped sands and gravels and decorated into a sight โ€“ seeing area where there will be taking of pictures and all kinds of playing activities (photographing area and playground) as shown in Plate 4 below. 

Plate 4: photographing area and play ground

  • Aquatic habitat creation and sight โ€“ seeing.

To access gold from underground through illegal means, all kinds of pits and dugouts have been generated full of dirty and polluted water. This polluted water has been channeled to the river Supong through the creation of artificial river channels within the obtained sites. This is polluting the river Supong and hence river Birim at a high and fast rate. Self-stratification is playing a major role in bringing the water bodies created within the site to normalcy. Treatments will also be done to help the self-treatment purpose of getting a clean quality water. The good quality dugouts and pits that have undergone self-stratification have fishes in them which are growing at a faster rate. The untreated once do no but will be treated and stocked with fishes and aquatic animals or organisms to boost the status of the Eco Park. It will serve educational purposes which also being used as sight โ€“ seeing by the indigenous and all within the Nsutam community in the Eastern Region of Ghana.

Plate 5: Polluted water to be treated to serve as aquatic habitat

  • Creation of resting stands with trees and flowers 

Touring within an Eco Park is a tiring work hence the need for various resting stands where visitors and if possible supervisors working in the Eco Park can rest when the need be. With this in mind, various siting and resting places will be created within the Eco Park to serve this purpose. This will be done under shades or trees in order to receive fresh cool air away from heat and the sun. Such areas will be decorated with flowers to have a very attractive natural beauty to make an Eco Park a very stunning one for all. The Eco Park will be serving people of all classes hence will be to a good standard to serve this purpose at Nsutam in the Eastern Region of Ghana. The construction of the Eco Park will be done with Engineers and floweriest and designers who knows how to give beauty to environment and society. All the dugouts which will harbour the summer hat building will have their areas decorated with flowers and trees together with green grasses and other varieties of grasses covering the ground. This will make the Eco Park beautiful and lively area and place for people to visit, learn and have fun. This will be done for such people together with their friends, staff members, colleagues at school or university and family. Creation of such an Eco Park at Nsutam will serve the community which is now a gold mining community with migration of people within Ghana and outside Ghana to the community. 

  • Overhead walk creation over Eco Park

Canopy walk is a nice tourist adventure to be embarked on whenever one visits a tourist site with such opportunity. Within the Eco Park will be the planting, nurturing and growing of all kinds of tree species to add beauty and nature to the Eco Park. These trees can be coordinated and modelled into a canopy walk in the future when all the trees are grown and matured. This will give visitors and anyone who accesses the Eco Park a better and nice view of the tourist site and environment. Human beings like adventure and this will give them another adventure opportunity within the Eco Park. This will give a view to human beings comparable to a drone view within the tourist site (Eco Park). 

  • Creation of Entertainment and Conference Centers

The Eco Park being established sorts out to serve as an entertaining centre and site as well as serving as an education centre or tourist sites where all kinds of learning can be done. With this in focus, there is the creation of an entertainment center and conference or learning centre. Such two areas will purposefully serve entertainment reason and learning reason. The entertainment areas will comprise of places where children will have playing grounds for fun and learning. This will serve as a playing ground where children can easily move around and play during special occasions when they come in their numbers for tourist and entertainment reasons. Children like learning but itโ€™s usually through playing and entertainment. As they happy themselves, then they play alongside each other for friendship, happiness and entertainment. This will be achieved when a playing ground is established within the Eco Park. A learning or conference center will also be created where students can be taught comparable to a classroom teaching environment. This will purposely serve school children and university undergraduates and researchers. Installing all kinds of animals and plants species requires taking tourist through some great learnings and history which when given at the touring moments is easily forgotten. But when done under a classroom settings, students and researchers can easily take lesson notes and write-ups home. Parents too and working class or staffs can be taken through same at the tourist sites and in the conference center.

4.10           Vegetative cropping stand for learning

A vegetative cropping stand will be created where touring people, students and visitors will be taken through vegetative reproduction. With this, some selected crops will be used to demonstrate vegetative reproduction to students, teachers, working staffs and anyone who visits the Eco Park. It will have some planted crops which have undergone vegetative reproduction for better understanding and learning among visitors to the touring site at Nsutam in the Eastern Region of Ghana.

4.11 Aesthetic treatment of created water bodies and dugouts

All the dugouts and pits are full of water undergoing self โ€“ stratification. Some have gone through the process over several months past and obtaining the finite good nature of water habited by aquatic organisms (fish, frog, toad etc) and usable by mankind to meet daily water demands. All the dugouts or pits will be aesthetically designed with green grasses, grasses and flowers to make it beautiful and attractive to all. This will be done after installation or construction of the summer hat buildings on the dugouts or water bodies.

  • Bioengineering, pavement, concreting and grassing of the Eco Park

Bioengineering of a place with grasses like green grass adds beauty to nature, gives fresh air, increases infiltration, reduces runoff generation full of dirt and sediments into a drain or water body. This will be done in most of the areas with trees planted at vantage points within the Eco Park. Once bioengineering is done together with green grass planting, infiltration will be 100% (higher rate) as runoff generation will be 0% (or to a lesser rate). It is only at the pervious areas where pavements and concreting has been done that will give total runoff generation with various runoff depths. This will be generated during precipitation and will be over the field or Eco Park hence the need to channel all of them downstream. All these runoffs will end up in the connected dugout and finally in river Supong. Most of the bioengineering will be done around the dugouts and connected dugouts towards river Supong. This will be done with green grasses to avoid dirty runoff generation or runoff full of sediments been created and drained into the created dugouts which upon treatments will be of quality and have all kinds of fishes and aquatic organisms. With all kinds of drains within the Eco Park, all generated runoffs void of sediments and dirtโ€™s will be channeled into river Supong. With all these done within the Eco Park, a beautiful sight โ€“ seeing Eco Park will be obtained to serve Nsutam community, visitors, country and world comparable to that depicted in plate 6 (Danquah, 2023). 

Plate 6: Bioengineering and pavement creation

5    CONCLUSION

Illegal gold mining is now part and parcel of the Ghanaian economy as its serving as a gainful employment source and a source of income for people and homes. It is generating millions of pound sterlingโ€™s, dollars, and cedis into pockets and boosting the Ghanaian economy and the world when it comes to gold production. Illegal gold mining will therefore continue to be embarked by the youth and old within Ghana and hence its resultant repercussions. It will always lead to the destruction of farmlands, lands, water bodies, forest reserves and so one. But what one does with the destroyed lands is the most important thing after illegal gold mining adventure within a community. With these assertions, it is justified that one can turn a destroyed land after a gold mining adventure into an Eco Park that will be beneficial to people, community, country and world.

Acknowledgement

Grateful I am to the Almighty God for the mindset, ability to think thoughtfully and in discovering this Eco Park at Nsutam. Thanks to the Chief and people of Nsutam for playing various roles towards the success of this project. I am again grateful to the Danquah and Darko family of Nsutam and Kukurantumi respectively for their various roles. God bless the chief Osaberima, teacher Yirenkyi, Okyeame Danso and the assembly man of Nsutam, honorable Alex for their help and roles in this project. God richly bless you all.

References

Danquah, I. O. (2023), Stormwater Modelling within Three catchments using MIDUSS v2.25: Real Time Simulation Model to analyze stormwater within catchments, International journal of Research.

Management Control Systems and Performance of Micro Finance Institutions in Central Region Uganda

Dr  Arthur Sunday

Kabale University-Uganda

www.kab.ac.ug

Caleb Tamwesigire

Assoc. Prof , Kabale University-Uganda

www.kab.ac.ug

Dr Eliab Byamukama Mpora

Kabale University-Uganda

www.kab.ac.ug

Mr Agaba Moses

Kabale University-Uganda

www.kab.ac.ug

Abstract

Microfinance institutions (MFIs) worldwide have been seen and identified as a vital institution to nationsโ€™ quest for solutions to the development challenge (CGAP, 2016). Micro finance in Uganda is a vibrant growing industry and the government of Uganda has over the past decade initiated implemented and or supported various micro credit schemes aimed at fighting poverty in the country. Microfinance has evolved by providing micro credits to respond to the furthermost financial and non-financial needs of the citizens, to eradicate poverty and increase financial inclusion. Most studies undertaken in the past few years have focused mainly on outreach of MFIโ€™s and their impact on profitability and not on internal control system and lack of clarity on the extent to which internal control system influences financial performance (Narver, 2007) will therefore continue to inhibit common understanding and explanation which might deter performance improvement in Ugandan microfinance institutions. Failure by MFIs to monitor portfolio quality closely and take action when necessary and this has threatened the going concern of microfinance industry in Uganda. The study analyzed the relationship between Management control system and financial performance of MFIs in central region Uganda and it was hypothesized that Management control system positively influences   financial performance of MFIs in central region Uganda. MFIs have come under spotlight for cases of poor financial performance. Lack of empirical studies to assess the impact of Management control system on the financial performance of   microfinance institutions in Uganda is the motivation behind this study. Therefore, this study is important not only because it fills the gap, but also it is set out to address this evident knowledge gap. The study adopted positivephenomenological, epistemology and quantitative-qualitative methodology dimension with cross sectional and correlation designs, the unit of analysis was Microfinance Institutions registered with Association of Microfinance Institutions, and employees were the units of inquiry. Structural Equations Modeling with Analysis of Moment Structures were used to for statistical modeling

Besides, Hierarchical regression was used to test the predictive power of the variables and indicate precisely what happens to the model as different predictor variables are introduced in the model fit. This study revealed that two of the predictor variables are strong predictors of financial performance of MFIs. The study further revealed that Management control system was found to be strongly and positively correlated with financial performance. And Management control system elements were found to be positive predictors of financial performance.  The present study supported a multi-theoretic approach in explaining financial performance of MFIs in Uganda. The study supports the stewardship theory in explaining the controls system together with stakeholder as the theories that help in explaining financial performance of MFIs. The study confirmed efficient control system factor structure of observed variables and the latent variables. As a result, the study provided models for efficient Management control systems. These models can then be used to provide a trajectory for improving financial performance of MFIs in Uganda .Regardless of the existence of controls in MFI, the results revealed that Management control systems were less efficient due to lack of close monitoring. It recommended that MFIs should enhance controls to ensure that resources are obtained and used effectively and efficiently in the accomplishment of the organizationโ€™s goals .Policy makers, AMFIU, PSFU and MFIs may use these findings as a way of improving financial performance of MFIs in Uganda since the MFIs are great contributors to the Ugandan economy

Key Words : Management Control System, Financial Performance, microfinance, Institution

Introduction

Microfinance has evolved by providing micro credits to respond to the furthermost financial and non-financial needs of the citizens, to eradicate poverty and increase financial inclusion .The microfinance movement has received enthusiasm as a poverty alleviation tool that has eventually become a self-sustaining industry. Microfinance institutions (MFIs) worldwide have been seen and identified as vital institution to nationsโ€™ quest for solutions to the development challenge (CGAP, 2016). Most microfinance institutions have embraced a more business-oriented outlook and maintained their target groups of economically-active poor, in order to achieve financial sustainability (Kalyango, 2004; Baguma, 2008). The micro finance institutions in developing economies are widely growing from time to time. Various studies on different countries on the performance of the MFIs confirm this (Adongo and Stork 2005, Zeller and Meyer 2002, Meyer 2002, Robert cull et al. 2007). Approaches used by microfinance institutions in Uganda to deliver financial services to the poor are similar to those used in other countries where microfinance institutions operate. The approach used depends on the nature and structure of the respective microfinance institution. The institutions providing microfinance services include: Tier I: formal financial institutions Comercial banks, TierII; credit institutions, Tier III; microfinance deposit taking institutions, Tier IV; Saccos (BOU Policy on MFIs 1999).

Microfinance institutions in Uganda from time and again been faced with high operating costs to provide financial services to the poor people and Small and Medium Enterprises (Micro banking Bulletin, 2002). And as such,  are unable to meet their obligations when they become due usually resulting from poor cash flow planning, failure to monitor portfolio quality closely and take action when necessary. Portfolio quality has deteriorated more rapidly in Microfinance institutions than in traditional financial institutions due to the short-term and unsecured nature of micro lending and micro loan portfolios  (Srinivasan, 2006 due to unsecured nature of micro lending, micro loan portfolios which are volatile. IMF Report (2001) most MFIs in Uganda had large portfolios in arrears, with overdue loan repayments stretching back into the distant past mainly because lending policies were usually poorly enforced and systems to track and manage arrears. An enduring problem facing microfinance institutions, however, is how to attain financial sustainability (Dunford, 2003; Schreiner, 2000; Woller 2000; Hollis and Sweetman, 1998; Christen et al, 1995). This problem has attracted attention of numerous researchers in recent decades and, as a result many strategies have been identified to ensure that institutions are sustainable (Randhawa and Gallardo, 2003; Schreiner, 2000; Yaron, 1992). Abernethy and Brownell (1999) discussed the interactive use of management control systems and their experimental findings indicated that interactive use of internal control systems can alleviate disruptive performance in a business enterprise. Ledgerwood (1999) as cited by Lincolin Arsyad (2005), conceptualizes financial performance as; Financial viability (operational self-sufficiency, financial self-sufficiency) Profitability (return on assets ratio, return on business ratio, return on equity ratio) and Portfolio quality (portfolio at risk, repayment rates).  Financial performance being a critical factor in the success of microfinance Institutions, therefore, this research focused on financial performance and not social performance

Most of the studies on financial performance of microfinance institutions apply and use different methodologies as in the case of Tilahun (2009) , however this study employed a descriptive research design based on quantitative data. The researcher collected and analyzed annual reports using descriptive statistics.  A number of theories have been used to explain what influences the financial performance of the firm but their applications have no terminal point. Theories that have been used to explain firm financial performance include, among others Resource-Based View of the firm (RBV), agency theory (Jensen and Meckling 1976), stakeholder theory (Freeman 1984), and stewardship theory. All these theories provide a detailed account of firm performance using available resources inspite of the limitations in their application. Though there is no agreed theoretical base for research on financial performance of microfinance institutions (Parum, 2005), a review of the literature indicates that the above four main theoretical frameworks have been used to explain and analyse the association between management control system and financial performance of microfinance institutions. 

Poor financial performance marked by deteriorating returns and portfolio quality has taken a center stage and remained unexplained in microfinance Institutions (Performance Monitoring Tool 2006/2009/). Portfolio quality has deteriorated more rapidly in Microfinance institutions than in traditional financial institutions due to the short-term and unsecured nature of micro lending, micro loan portfolios which tend to be more volatile (Ssewanyana 2009). According to the IMF Report (2001) most MFIs in Uganda had large portfolios in arrears, with overdue loan repayments stretching back into the distant past mainly because lending policies were usually poorly enforced and systems to track and manage arrears hardly existed. Microfinance institutions in Uganda face poor cash flow problems due to changes in market interest rate and failure to monitor portfolio quality closely and take action when necessary and this has threatened the going concern of microfinance industry in Uganda (Bank of Uganda 2010/2011)

Most studies undertaken in the past few years have focused mainly on outreach of MFIโ€™s and their impact on profitability (Migiri, 2002). Lack of clarity on the extent to which internal control system influences financial performance (Narver, 2007) will therefore continue to inhibit common understanding and explanation which might deter performance improvement in Ugandan microfinance institutions.  Though some studies have identified ICS as a possible predictor of financial performance in different industries, there are still gaps as a result of absence of representative empirical studies that would address the issue of financial performance of microfinance institutions as a result of Management control systems (PekChen, 2005).More so, theories and models apparently used to explain financial performance in firms have proved to be weak and inadequate in explaining this phenomenon. 

This study enabled microfinance firms to have a more definite and direct understanding of the elements of management control system that can influence performance. Besides, understanding of how management control system elements combine to influence firm performance can lead to better resource allocation, which eventually may promote performance in microfinance institutions.

Empirical studies aimed at assessing the impact of Management control systems on the financial performance of Microfinance Institutions in Uganda are missing. Therefore, this study is important because it fills this gap of knowledge

Literature Review 

A number of theories have been used to explain what influences the financial performance of the firm but their applications have no terminal point. Theories that have been used to explain firm financial performance include, among others Resource-Based View of the firm (RBV), agency theory (Jensen and Meckling 1976), stakeholder theory (Freeman 1984), and stewardship theory. All these theories provide a detailed account of firm performance using available resources inspite of the limitations in their application. There are various forms  that have been used to examine the way contextual factors are related to aspects of Management control System with an  attempt to assess whether this association is linked to financial performance of Microfinance Institutions.

Though there is no agreed theoretical base for research on financial performance of microfinance institutions (Parum, 2005), a review of the literature indicates that the above four main theoretical frameworks have been used to explain and analyse the association between magememt control system and financial performance of microfinance institutions

Synthesizing existing studies in the broad area of explaining financial performance of MFIs, indicate a clear dearth of studies examining multiplicative effect of various elements the predictor variable ie Management control system(Internal Control System, Budgeting, Performance Measurement ) on  financial performance of  MFIs . 

Model Specification

Management control system has been conceptualized from the Contingency point of view that assumes that the design and the application of management control systems are influenced by the context in which they are applied (Chenhall, 2007). A contingency approach to management control systems aims at identifying the best design, usage and application of Management control system in a given context (Chenhall and Chapman, 2006).This study follows the use of management control systems and examines the way contextual factors are related to aspects of management control system with attempt to assess whether this association is linked to financial performance of Microfinance Institutions. Any controlled system requires objectives and goals against which its performance can be assessed and the existence of different goals is likely to involve the selection of different performance measures and controls

The contingency approach was cited and explained by Simonsโ€™ (1995) levers of management system control model that requires management of effective companies to know how to achieve high degrees of high control efficiency and performance. Simon argued that it is not the identification of controls associated with particular strategies that are important, but the distribution of management attention and efficiency of controls that can lead to high degrees of performance. Simons (1995) organises management control system tools into a coherent model called โ€œlevers of control

Independent Variable MCS
Dependent Variable: Financial Performance

Figure 1: Conceptual Frame Work

Internal Control System
Budgeting
Performance measurement
Perceived Financial     Performance
Profitability
Portfolio Quality
Financial Viability

Source: Literature Review

To understand management control system  and financial performance variables in relation to microfinance institutions, the major management control system  pillars i.e. budgeting, performance measurement, internal control system are dissected. Financial performance especially relating to microfinance institutions is also reviewed based on the performance dimensions comprising: Profitability, portfolio quality and financial viability. The significance of Management control system in microfinance institutions is also highlighted. These are compressed in a conceptual framework as shown above. From the conceptual framework above, the hypothesis was structured to ascertain the extent to which management control system can influence financial performance. This was expressed as:

      Y=a+bx 

      FPM= f(MCS)

      Y=ฮฑo+ฮฒ1ICS1+ฮฒ2BDGT2+ฮฒ3PFM3+ 4  +ยตโ€ฆ

       Where

      Y = Financial performance (proxied by Profitability, portfolio quality, financial viability)

 Key predictor of Management control system is given as 

      ICS1 = Internal control System, BDGT2 = Budgeting, PFM3 = Performance Measurement

Simon (1995), asserted  that Management control systems  have different impacts on organization performance, Abernethy and Brownell (1999) discussed the interactive use of internal control systems and their experimental findings indicated that interactive use of internal  control systems can alleviate disruptive performance when a company is changing its strategies, Davila (2000), in his study his study findings indicated that different strategies will need different interactive use of management controls to raise firm performance.

Welsh (2003), Simons (1995), Chow et al (1999), Merchant (2007), appreciate that Management   control systems are the formal, information-based routines and procedures managers that ensure that errors and fraud are detected, safe guard companyโ€™s  assets and opine that MCS greatly influences firm performance.

Recent studies draw from the original organizational theorists (Burns & Stalker 1961, Lawrence & Lorsch 1967, Thompson 1967, Perrow 1970, Galbraith1973) to develop arguments that explain how the effectiveness of control systems  (Chenhall 2003).

Bisbe and Otley (2004), findings indicated that the application of control systems has a huge contingency effect on firm performance. However, Bisbeโ€™s research did not discuss the importance of human effect to control system (Snell, 1992; Abernethy and Brownell, 1997; Keller, 2001; Widener, 2004)

Dexon  (2010), findings revealed that Management Control Systems have a significant positive effect in achieving Value for Money. All the constructs of Internal Control Systems (Control environment, control activities, risk assessment) have a significant positive relationship with Value for Money in a business entity

Internal control  process reduces uncertainty and improves firm performance, Ivancevich (1976), Steers (1976), Imoisili (1989), Locke & Schweiger (1979), Mia (1989), Ezzamel (1990), Hirst & Lowy (1990) etc. Another study on control process and firm performance relationship by scholars (Merchant, 1980; Peel & Bridge, 1988; Edward, et al., 2001) and empirical results (Merchant, 1980) show that control systems enhance the accuracy the degree of information accuracy. In turn, it results in higher performance in organizations.  The increased use of comprehensive ICS practices can be assumed to result in better improved financial performance among firms (e.g. Chenhall 2003, see also discussions in Gul 1991, Gul & Chia 1994, Hoque & James 2000, Ittner et al. 1998, 1998, Scott & Tiessen 1999)

Management Control System acts as a driver variable in firm strategy and performance as found in Chong & Chong (1997) and Baines & Langfield-Smith (2003). Report of bank of Uganda (2002), Simon (1995), results showed that there is indeed a positive association between certain internal control practices when are used concurrently with other strategic initiatives and improvement in financial performance.  Abernethy and Brownell (1999) also discussed the interactive use of management   control systems and their experimental findings indicated that interactive use of internal  control systems can alleviate disruptive performance when a company is changing its strategies. The findings confirm the report findings of Armesh (2010) on the influences of internal control system on organizational performance in Malaysia, which showed that Internal Control System influences the behavior and performance of the organizational to ensure that resources are obtained and used effectively and efficiently in the accomplishment of the organization s objectives.

On the other hand however, McMahon (2001) did not find any significant relationship between use of Control practices and firm performance. Donaldson (2001) found no significant associations were between the use of comprehensive Management Control System and measures of growth in net sales and profitability. 

Additionally, McMahon & Davies (1994) and McMahon (2001) have not found any significant relationships between internal control practices and performance of businesses. Thus, the empirical results on the relationship between various dimensions of Management Control System and performance seem to be rather mixed

Jonathan (2005), study findings revealed that most of the microfinance institutions in Namibia are not yet financially sustainable and it was attributed to the fact that interest rates that Microfinance institutions require to break-even exceed the ceiling imposed. Portfolio quality has deteriorated more rapidly in Microfinance institutions than in financial institutions (Srinivasan, 2006), Studies by Bontis (2002), Chong and Richardson (2006), explained similar performance trends in Portuguese. Study findings revealed that average ROA for MFIs is 3.57%. This concur with study findings of Lafourcade (2005), the findings revealed that, Africa MFIs have the lowest financial performance of ROA of 2% as compared to 7.6%-10% of Eastern Europe and Central Asia. The findings are in agreement with Tilahun (2009), study findings on โ€˜the financial performance and sustainability of microfinance institutions in Ethiopiaโ€™; the result of the study indicates that there was a negative shift in the performance indicators particularly in the year 2009  and the gross loan portfolio has declined by 15.73% in the year 2009.

Furthermore, contrary to Chong and Richardson (2006),  study findings, McMahon (2001), did not find any significant relationship between use of control System of Australian business firms and profitability.

Furthermore, Perera et al. (1997) have also reported a respective non significant relationship in manufacturing firms. Malmi et al. (2004) likewise did not find a significant direct relationship between management practices and profitability, even though they reported an interaction effect of the practices and use of other relationship management control systems to be significant in relation to firm performance.

Both theoretical and empirical studies show that strong and efficient systems that maintain high levels of capital adequacy are important in determining financial institutions profitability. Sufian and Habibullah (2009), found out that good systems have a positive impact on bank profitability in China. This confirms Athanasoglou, et al. (2008, 2006) and Kosmidou (2008) who also finds a positive and significant effect of strong control system on bank profitability, reflecting the sound financial condition of banks.This shows that maintaining strong and efficient Managementl control system is highly associated with high financial performance in Microfinance Institutions (Gramling et al. 2004; Hermanson & Rittenberg 2003; 2004

First, Reid & Smith (2000) found out those developing control  systems, especially in the areas of management and accounting applications, lead to high firm performance, Reid & Smith (2002) , Reid & Smith (2000, 2002) holds that high performers  firms  use and apply internal control systems for daily financial monitoring and for identifying important trends in key variables for their further survival.  On the other hand, Reid & Smith (2002), argue that static performers at satisfactory financial levels tend not to value control systems as much as the others. Consequently, the relationship between Management control system and firm performance seem to be U-shaped

The foregoing reviews reveal that the application of Management control system elements in any organization differ and different interactive use of Management controls to raise firm performance.

The level, application and interactive use of internal control system in Ugandan microfinance industry is elusive. This, therefore, caused the need for a scientific investigation on the use internal control system elements influences financial performance in Ugandaโ€™s microfinance industry. This necessitated the study to evaluate the relationship between internal control system and financial performance of the selected microfinance institutions in central region Uganda. Hence to the hypothesis that โ€œManagement control system positively influences financial performance of microfinance institutionsโ€

Methodology 

The study adopted a positivist quantitative paradigm with cross sectional and correlation designs. Correlation design was used to establish relationships between internal control system and financial performance of MFIs. Logical positivism quantitative designs were applied in data collection, analysis and presentation which also helped to test hypothetical deductive generalizations. The study population consisted of 36 MFIs in central region Uganda registered with AMFIU from where the sample size of 33 MFIs were determined comprising a sample of 356 which was consistent with the sample size guidelines of Ntoumanis (2001) and Field (2006). Ntoumanis (2001) and Field (2006), multistage, simple rondom sampling and purposive tequniques were used. Primary and secondary data sources were used in the study.Structural Equations Modeling with Analysis of Moment Structures were also used to for statistical modeling.

Cronbachโ€™s alpha was used to test the reliability of the instruments and the instruments were found to be reliable at 0.78. Content  validity of  the  two  instruments was ensured  through use of  valid  concepts  which  measure  the  study  variables .  Content  validity  was  used  to  ensure  that  the questionnaire  was  content  valid. The content validity results were obtained and for all the constructs were above 0.7 as recommended by Sakaran (2000). The study used Means and standard deviations in order to summarize the results. The means were used because they show a summary of data and standard deviation clearly shows how well the means represent the data (Field, 2009). Hierarchical regression was used to estimate the predictive power of the predictor variable on the criterion variable in the model fit.

Findings and Discussion 

Descriptive characteristics

Table 1: Mean and Standard deviations of  the predictor and criterion Variables

 
 NMinimumMaximumMeanStd. Deviation
Budgeting3561.754.003.23.35
ICS3561.304.003.19.27
P.Measurement356.824.003.21.33
Financial Performance356.914.003.09.25
      

Source: Primary data

The findings reveal that all mean scores of the constructs in question range between 3.09 and 3.23, with the standard deviations in the range of 0.25 to 0.35. Because of the small and minimal standard deviations compared to mean values, it is evident that the data points are close to the means and hence calculated means highly represent the observed data. In effect, the calculated means are a true reflection of reality (Garson, 2000; Field, 2006, & Saunders et al., 2007). The mean value of financial performance (3.09) is the lowest in contrast to other means .This finding coincides with the earlier assertion about the poor performance of Microfinance institutions in Uganda.

Table 2: Criterion Variables (Profitability)

Profitability 
 Return on Asset(ROA)Return on Equity(ROE)Profit Margin
Mean3.6540 16.9460 12.2280 
Standard Deviation.20082 .29263 1.56122 
Sample Variance.040 .086 2.437 
Skewness.466 -.274 1.472 
Kurtosis-2.284 -2.994 1.457 
Count32 32 32 
p value.000 .000 .000 
       

Source: Primary data, 

The findings reveal that, MFIs ability to generate return on capital employed is quite disparate and p value is significant. And it was further revealed that MFIs do not have similar debt equity ratios in the financing mix and the return on equity for these firms is not identical. The findings reveal that there are significant differences in the levels of return on equity, return on assets, and also in profit margin levels. 

Table 3: Criterion Variables (Financial Viability)

Financial Viability 
 Operational Self SufficiencyFinancial Self SufficiencyDebt/Equity
Mean111.2000 114.4000 4.2600 
Standard Deviation7.04982 1.81659 .424 
Sample Variance49.700 3.300 .424 
Skewness-.091 .267 .918 
Kurtosis-2.834 1.074 -.387 
Count32 32 32 
p value.000 .000 .000 
       

Source: Primary data, 

The financing mix among the microfinance institutions varied widely with p value being significant. This has mainly emanated from increasing reliance of the institutions on funds being made available by donors and other funding agencies. Most of the firms are not yet dependent on equity as a source of funds in a big way.

Table 4: Criterion Variables (Portfolio Quality)

  
Portfolio QualityPortfolio at Risk>30 daysPortfolio at Risk>90 daysLoan Loss rate
Mean1.484 .9740 1.3060 
Standard Deviation.4867 .31548 .29619 
Sample Variance.237 .100 .088 
Skewness-.871 -2.229 -.422 
Kurtosis-.395 4.975 -2.879 
Count             32 32 32 
p value.000 .002 .001 
       

 Source: Primary data, 2012

The findings reveal that, the p value is significant in case of potential future bad debts, provision for bad debts an indicator that the Microfinance institutions are operating with differing levels of risk appetite. This means that the risk avoidance in MFIs is different

Table 5: Zero order correlation between Management Control, and Financial Performance

 MeanStd. DeviationICSBudgetingP.MeasurementFinancial Performance  
ICS3.20.28 1
Budgeting3.23.36.323**1
P.Measurement3.21.33.499**.131*1
Financial Performance3.10.25.388**.249**.183**1
** Correlation is significant at the 0.01 level(2-tailed) * Correlation is significant at the 0.05 level(2-tailed)

Source: Primary data

It is evident that there is a positive significant correlation between Budgeting and Internal control system (r= .323**p< 0.05). This finding means that Efficiency in budgeting is associated with greater structural control systems. Furthermore, the findings reveal that there is a positive and significant relationship between Internal control system and performance measurement exists (r=.499**, p< 0.05). From correlation matrix the results indicate that the relationship between budgeting and performance measurement is not significant (r= .131*, p > 0.05).

Table 6: Correlation of MCS variable and Financial Performance

  ICSBudgetingPerformance mFinancial performance
ICSPearson Correlation1.323**.499**.388**
Sig. (2-tailed) .000.000.000
BudgetingPearson Correlation.323**1.131*.249**
Sig. (2-tailed).000 .014.000
P.MeasurementPearson Correlation.499**.131*1.183**
Sig. (2-tailed).000.014 .001
Financial performancePearson Correlation.388**.249**.183**1
Sig. (2-tailed).000.000.001 
**. Correlation is significant at the 0.01 level (2-tailed).
*. Correlation is significant at the 0.05 level (2-tailed).

Source: Primary

The findings revealed that appositive and significant relationship between internal control system and financial performance exist in Microfinance Institutions(r= .388** p(.000)< 0.01.  This shows that a maintaining strong and efficient internal control system is highly associated with high financial performance in Microfinance Institutions. In a related case, the relationship between budgeting and financial performance is significant(r= .249**, p(.000)< 0.01). This implies that efficient budgeting systems are associated with higher performance levels in Microfinance Institutions. This is because the budget systems, and processes, in an institution can influence the institutionโ€™s level of efficiency and effectiveness, which are important to every institutionโ€™s success. The findings, posit that there is a significant and positive effect of budgeting on financial performance

It is further evident that there is a significant and positive correlation between performance measurement and financial performance (r= .183**, p (.001)< 0.01). This is a sign that a strong relationship exists between performance measurement and financial performance. This signifies that a higher Microfinance Institutionโ€™s performance measurement is associated with high performance levels. 

Table 7: Management control system & Financial Performance

 MeanStd. DeviationManagement Control SystemFinancial Performance  
Management Control System3.21.251
Financial Performance3.10.25335**     1
 ** Correlation is significant at the 0.01 level (2-tailed)
 

Source: Primary data

Results show a positive and significant relationship between management control system and financial performance. The findings further revealed that there is a strong significant relationship between the level of management control system and the degree of financial performance r = .335** ,sig = 0.000 indicating a strong positive co-relation (r > 0) which indeed was big since its sig  value =0.000 < ฮฑ=0.01 leading to acceptance of the hypothesis to the effect that the  level of management control system has a strong relationship with the degree of financial performance of microfinance institutions in Central region Uganda 

Model estimates 

The hypothesis was structured to ascertain the extent to which management control system can influence financial performance. This was expressed as:

      Y=a+bx 

      FPM= f(MCS)

      Y=ฮฑo+ฮฒ1ICS1+ฮฒ2BDGT2+ฮฒ3PFM3+ 4  +ยตโ€ฆ. โ€ฆโ€ฆโ€ฆโ€ฆ

       Where

      Y = Financial performance (proxied by Profitability, portifolio quality, financial viability)

 Key predictor of Management control system is given as 

      ICS1 = Internal control System, BDGT2 = Budgeting, PFM3 = Performance Measurement

Table 8: Model Summary and estimates of the Variables

 
ModelRR SquareAdjusted R SquareStd. Error of the Estimate
1.524a.275.269.17763
a. Predictors: (Constant), P.Measurement, Budgeting, Internal control system 

Table 9:Hierarchical regression with Management control system elements on financial performance

ModelRR SquareAdjusted R SquareStd. Error of the Estimate
1.499a.249.247.18025
2.522b.272.268.17771
3.524c.275.269.17763
a. Predictors: (Constant), Internal Control System
b. Predictors: (Constant), Internal Control System, Budgeting
c. Predictors: (Constant), Internal Control System, Budgeting, Performance  measurement 
 

In the Model, the findings revealed that, internal control system accounted for 24.9 % of variance in financial performance that caused a statistically-significant standardized coefficient (B =0.381, P <0.01); In Model 2, the introduction of budgeting in the equation yielded 27% to the explanatory power of the model. This implies that budgeting accounted for an additional 2% of the variance in financial performance and caused a statistically-significant coefficient (B =0.095, p<0.01) the inclusion of performance measurement, yielded an insignificant additional 0.3% to the explanatory power of the model. This finding means that performance measurement accounted for only 0.3% of the variance in financial performance and caused a statistically insignificant coefficient (B =0.045, p >0.05)This led to the development of structural equation model and a modified frame work respectively 

Figure 2: Structural equation model

Figure 

Financial Performance
Management Control System

3: Modified Conceptual model

Profitability
Portfolio Quality
Financial Viability
ICS
Budgeting 

Source: Developed by the Author-New Knowledge Generated        

The study findings revealed that performance measurement was dropped from the modified frame work, since it caused a statistically insignificant contribution on Financial Performance of Microfinance Institutions, with coefficient (B =0.045, p >0.0

The findings indicate that microfinance institutions in central region Uganda are efficient in preparing budgets and receive budget targets,and it was revealed that budgeting provides basis for control and performance evaluation because budgets act as a benchmark against which the performance of microfinance institutions is measured. The findings further revealed that the purposes of the budget are not always communicated to the stake holders of the institution and yet itis necessary in an efficient organization that all people be informed about the objectives, policies, programs, performance and expectations of the organization. This is always made possible through their participation in budgeting process

It was further revealed that those microfinance institutions in central region Uganda are efficient in performance measurement in a way that, the microfinance institutions are very efficient in resource utilization, however it was discovered that much as good performance is always received on good performance, exceptional performance is not always recognized by the microfinance institutions in central region Uganda. 

The findings further revealed that the microfinance institutions have a good and strong internal control system in that the institutions are very efficient in proper authorization for acquisitions. it was further discovered that much as most microfinance institutions in Uganda maintain debtors ledgers control accounts, they are sometimes not independently checked on a regular basis. Due to the high levels of management control system. This exhibited the existence of management control systems among the selected microfinance institutions in central region Uganda

The findings revealed that the microfinance institutions in Uganda have a weakness in charging interest on delinquent loans and yet loans and interest income are among the highest yielding assets of microfinance institutions because they provide the largest portion of operating revenue for most microfinance institutions in Uganda.

In terms of financial viability and portfolio quality, the findings revealed that the microfinance institutions have the ability to reach significant number of people in durable and stable manner and this shows that the microfinance institutions were highly successful in ensuring repayments although the delivery systems for loan recovery are not efficient and it was further revealed that still have challenge of not holding sufficient liquid assets to protect the institutions from liquidity distress.  

Most microfinance institutions in Uganda have and apply management control systems. However Low levels of management controls were established in Microfinance Institutions. The weak and ineffective control system is attributed to lack of implementation and close monitoring of the system. Since performance measurement is at the center of all the controls, Its weak position, has equally affected the two adversely internal control system and Budgeting

It can be seen that since the three management control elements complement each other, their combination has translated into a weak overall management control system, which has, in turn, led to adverse effects in MFIsโ€™ financial performance in Uganda.

Since the three management control system elements complement each other, their combination has translated into a weak overall system, which has, in turn, led to adverse effects in MFIsโ€™ financial performance. The adverse effect of weak management control system is manifested in increased operational inefficiencies that have resulted into increased operating costs and loan loss write-offs. More so, weak management control system has weakened the MFIs credit policy, which has, in turn, led to increased non-performing loans and portfolio at risk (PAR). Microfinance Institutionsโ€™ poor performance is explained by weak performance measurement that has, in turn, affected internal control system and budgeting. 

The study has addressed matters that have not been covered in the literature, more especially in the microfinance industry. The study has attempted to verify and affirm whether the theoretical assumptions are empirically supported in Microfinance Institutions. Consequently, the study has contributed to the management control debate in the field of microfinance industry in Uganda.

Though many researchers and scholars have different views on management control system elements, this study has ascertained that it is a multi-dimensional predictor encompassing management control system, budgeting and performance measurement. However, internal control system is crucial in enhancing the strength of other management control system elements. The study has, therefore, brought to light the true composition of management control system in Ugandaโ€™s Microfinance Industry.

This study further established that management control system dimensions operate in a synergic way to affect financial performance in Microfinance Institutions in Uganda. However, internal control system is the most important predictor among the three management control system dimensions in explaining performance variance. Thus, the mixed results on the contribution of individual management control system elements to financial performance have been looked at in this study.

This study has introduced a clearer understanding of the extent to which management control system influence performance in Microfinance Institutions. This can promote management efforts of Microfinance Institutions to improve performance, which can be facilitated through the appropriate management systems of leading elements of management control system combination that can foster performance in Ugandaโ€™s Microfinance Industry.

Finally, the empirical studies on the management control system in MFIs context are few in number, making this research area of special interest for exploration. 

On the basis of the study findings, and reviewed literature, the following recommendations are pertinent to the success of Ugandan microfinance institutions. MFIs should enhance controls that will ensure that resources are obtained and used effectively and efficiently in the accomplishment of the organizationโ€™s objectives. And this will enhance the levels of management control system

MFIs should put a lot of emphasis on internal control system since itโ€™s a high contributor of financial performance. MFIs should hold sufficient liquid assets to protect the institutions from liquidity distress 

Managers MFIs in Uganda have to continuously re-evaluate and try different new methods of measuring performance to manage performance better. These performance measurement practices require time to succeed and the institutions need to continually re-examine the system alignment, tracking and monitoring effectiveness and modifying the system to accommodate the changing needs 

Microfinance institutions set and establish   effective control systems:  all of the financial, operational and other control systems which are carried out by internal controllers and which involve monitoring, independent evaluation and timely reporting to management levels systematically in order to ensure that all the institutions activities are performed by management levels in accordance with current policies, methods, instructions and limit 

MFIs should pay more attention to the internal effects of performance measurement systems. These effects are namely directly affected through performance measurement and drive the organizations to external effects. MFIs, should establish portfolio monitoring and control system to improve and monitor the portfolio quality and this will  improve financial performance. MFIs should find ways to reduce costs, increasing the number or size of loans disbursed, without compromising the loan portfolio, or reducing default rates

The Ministry of Finance and Economic Planning, Bank of Uganda, Microfinance support centre should provide a favorable platform for microfinance institutions to access financing that can enable them to set Interest rates that will not have a negative effect on the customer base. MFIs in Uganda charge relatively high interest rates this has led to lower repayment rates that negatively impacts on the institutions portfolio quality and profitability

The MFIs have to allocate more of their assets in to productive uses such as loans rather than current assets or fixed assets. MFIs should have a depth of outreach with clear market segmentation in order to improve on the sustainability the portfolio quality and the related loan loss provision. MFIs should enhance controls that will ensure that resources are obtained and used effectively and efficiently in the accomplishment of the organizationโ€™s objectives. MFIs should put a lot of emphasis on internal control system since itโ€™s a high contributor of financial performance. MFIs should hold sufficient liquid assets to protect the institutions from liquidity distress 

References

Adams, D. W. (1990):Funded Rural Finance Activities in Latin America and        the       Carribbean,   1942- 1990: A Strategy for the 1990sโ€, AID, Washington, DC

Adongo, J., & Christopher,S. (2005). Factors Influencing Sustainability of Selected          MicrofinanceInstitutions in Namibia. The Namibian Economic Policy Research Unit         –           Research Report

Amin, M. (2005). Social Sciences Research: Conception, Methodology and Analysis.

Anthony, R.N. and Govindarajan, V. (2004), โ€œManagement Control Systemsโ€, McGraw-  Hill,New York, NY.

B.K. Sebbowa Bamweyana, (2009), the role of internal audit function in    organizations

Baguma, D.T. (2007). Association of Microfinance Magazine: Addressing thePoverty       challenge.

Baguma, D.T (2008).Uganda Microfinance Industry Assessment: Association of

            Microfinance Institutions of Uganda

Bald.J. (2000). Liquidity Management: A Toolkit for Microfinance Institutions.

Bank of Uganda (1999): BOU Policy Statement on Micro- Finance            Regulation,     Ban

Barney, J. B. (1991). Firm resources and sustained competitive advantage, Journal of

            Management, 17(1), 99 -120.

Bategeka, L. (1999): Ugandaโ€™s Achiefments and Callenges in the Financial           Sector:            Whose Interests Count In: โ€žThe Ugandan Bankerโ€œ, Vol. 7, No. 4,           Uganda           Institute of bankers

Beck, T., Cull, R. and Jerome, A. (2005). Bank privatization and performance: empirical evidence          from Nigeria. Journal of Banking and Finance, 29:2355-79. 

Bisbe, J. โ€œThe Effects of the Interactive Use of Management            Control            Systems on      Product Innovation,โ€ Accounting, Organization             and      Society, Vol. 29, No. 8,          2004,   pp. 709-737.

CGAP (2016). Consultative Group to assist the poorest, available at: http://www.cgap.org

Chandan, J.S. ( 2004). MangementTheories and Practices. New Delhi

Chenhall R (2003). Management control systems design within its organizationalcontext:            findings from contingency-based       research and directions for the future. Acc Org      Soc     28: 127โ€“168.

Chenhall, R.H., (2003). Management control systemsdesign within its       organizational context: findings from contingency-based research   and             directions for the         future.Accounting,    Organizations and       Society 28, 127โ€“168

Chow, C.W., Shields, M.D., & Wu, A. (1999). The importance of national culture in the design of and preference for management     controls for multi-national operations.      Accounting, Organizations and Society, Vol. 24, 561-582.

Collis, J. and Hussey, R. (2003). Business Research: A Practical Guide for Undergraduate          and      Postgraduate Students, 2nd Edition, New York: Palgrave Macmillan.

Creswell, J. W. (2003). Research Design: Qualitative, Quantitative, and Mixed Methods Approaches, 2nd Edition, Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications. 

Creswell, J. W. and Plano Clark, V. L. (2007). Designing and Conducting Mixed Methods            Research, Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications.

Cull, R., Demirgรผc-Kunt, A and Morduch, J. (2007). Financial performance and outreach: a         global analysis of leading microbanks, Economic Journal, 117:F107-F133.

Davis, J.H., Schoorman, F.D., and Donaldson, L. (1997). Toward a Stewardship Theory of           Management.

Field, A. (2006). Discovering Statistics using SPSS (2nd Ed.). Sage, London.

Freeman, R.E. (1984). Strategic Management: A Stakeholder ApproachBoston: Pitman.

Gerrit Sarens and Mohammad J. Abdolmohammadi (2010), Monitoring     Effects of the Internal            Audit Function: Agency Theory versus other Explanatory Variables. International   Journal ofAuditing. Blackwell Publishing Ltd

Gibbons, D.S. & Meehan, J.W. (2000), The Micro credit summitโ€™s challenge: working     towards           institutional financial self-sufficiency while maintaining a commitment       to serving the poorest families, Journal of micro finance, 1(1), 131 โ€“ 191.

Haning A (2002).Microfinance in Uganda: Lessons from FNCA clients    Analysis          Kampala, United Press Ltd.

Hulme .  (1996): Finance Against Poverty, Volumes 1 and 2, Routledge, London.

Hulme, D. (2000): โ€œImpact Assessment Methodologies for Microfinance    Theory,            Experience and Better Practiceโ€, University of             Manchester, Manchester, UK.

Jensen M., and Meckling, W. (1976). Theory of the firm: Managerial Behavior, Agency Costs     and Ownership Structure. Journal of Financial Economics, Vol. 3, No. 4: pp. 305-360.

Johnson, R. B. and Onwuegbuzie, A. J. (2004). Mixed methods research: a research paradigm      whose time has come. Educational Researcher, 33 (7), 14-26.

Kalyango,D.L.(2005). Ugandaโ€™s Experience with Tiered Banking Regulation, Bank of

            Uganda, Seminar Paper.

Karlan, D. and Goldberg, N. (2007) The Impact of Microfinance: A Review of Keat, R. and         Urry, J. (1982). Social Theory as Science, 2nd Edition, London: Routledge & Kegan            Paul.

Ledgerwood et al (1999). Microfinance Handbook: An Institutional and     Financial       Perspective.    Sustainable Banking with the Poor, World             Bank,   1818 H St.,      Washington

Lee. K. (2005). KMPI: Measuring Knowledge          Management   Performance,โ€            Information & Lessons from Selected African Countries.โ€Ÿ International Monetary           Fund    Limited, England.

Logotri (2006) โ€žBuilding Sustainable Microfinance System: A Growth Catalyst

            Makerere University Printery, Kampala.

Malmi T (1997) Towards explaining activity-based costing failure: accounting and control in       a          decentralized organization. Management Accounting Research 8: 459โˆ’480.

McMahon RGP (2001) Business growth and performance and the financial reporting practices     of Australian manufacturing SMEs. Journal of Small Business Management39(2):152โˆ’164.

Merchant, K et al. (2007). Management Control       Systems โ€“ Performance, Measurement,          Merchant, K. A,(2007). A review of the literature on control       and      accountabilityHandbook of Management Accounting          Research, (Ed.) C.      S. Chapman, A. G.      Hopwood, and M. D. Shields,      785-804, Amsterdam:             Elsevier Press.

Merchant KA (1997) Modern Management Control Systems: texts and cases. Prentice

            Hall, New Jersey, US.

Meyer, R. J. (2002) โ€žTrack Record of Financial Institutions in Assessing the Poor in         Asia.โ€Ÿ ADB Institute Research Paper, No. 49. 

Meyer, R. L. (2002). “Track Record of Financial Institutions in Assisting the         Poor    in         Asia” ADB Institute Research Paper, No 49. 2nd ed., Essex: Prentice Hall.

Michael A. Hitt, Robert E. Hoskisson, Richard A. Johnson, Douglas D.      Moesel. (1996).           The      Market for Corporate Control and Firm             Innovation

MicroBanking Bulletin. (1998), Issue No. 2. Calmeadow, 733 15th St. NW, Suite 700      Microfinance Information eXchange (MIX).

Ministry of Finance, Planning and Economic Development (2000): โ€žDraft Final   Report on        the District Resource Endowment Profile Survey             (DREPS)โ€œ,Vol.II, Survey of   Microfinance Institutions, The Republic of Uganda,             Kampala

Mitchell, R.K., Agle, B.R., and Wood, D.J. (1997). Toward a Theory of Stakeholder         Identification and        Salience: Defining the Principle of Who and What Really            Counts.            Academy of Management       Review, Vol.   22, No. 4: pp. 853โ€“886.

Nannyonjo, S. & Nsubuga,D. (2004). Bank of Uganda Working Paper, WP04

Navajas. S. M.et al. (2000), “Micro credit and the Poorest of the Poor: Theory and Evidence       from   Bolivia”, World Development, Vol. 28,             No. 2, pp 333- 346,     Elsevier          Science Ltd

Obwona, M. B.; Ddumba-Ssentamu, J. (1998): โ€žHousehold Savings in       Developing      Economies: Evidence from Microdata from Ugandaโ€œ, Makerere University, Uganda

Office of the Prime Minister (2000): โ€žBasic Facts about rural Microfinance          support            Projekt (RMSP)โ€œ, The Republic of Uganda, Kampala

Opiokello, D. (2000): Role Of The Central Bank In Developing Rural         Financial Markets:    The Case Of Uganda. In: โ€žAfter the Reforms:             Which Way Forward for Central        Banks in Rural Financeโ€œ, Afraca        Rural Finance Series, Vol.1, African Rural and        Agricultural             Credit Association, Nairobi

Otero, M. and E. Rhyne (1994), The New World of Micro enterprise Finance,        Hartford,         Kumarian Press Outreach and Financial Performance of Microfinance Institutions in Africa.

Pablos, P. (2004), “The nature of knowledge-based resources through the design of an      architecture of human resource management systems: implications for strategic        management”,International Journal of Technology Management, Vol. 27 No.6/7,             pp.23-45.

Pamela,  M.P.(2001). Management:  Performance in Spanish Bankingโ€.    Journal of Banking     and Finance,18

Performance monitoring tool (PMT) (2006|09) for Microfinance Institutions.

            Accessed at www.mixmarket.com.

Reid, K. & Ashelby, D. (2002). The Swansea Internal Quality Audit           Processes Quality       Assurance in Education.Vol. 10,Research Unit – Research Report 39.

Rutherford, S. (1997) Informal Financial Services in Dhakaโ€Ÿs Slums. In: Wood et al

Rutherford, S. (1999): โ€žSavings and the Poor the Methods, use and impact of        savings by       the poor of East Africaโ€œ, Micro Save-Africa, Kampala

Sandra, M.S.C., Miguel.A.M & Tomas,L-G., (2007). Organizational culture and

            Saroj Rijal (2006) Application of Management Control System in Nepalese

Saunders, M. and Lewis, P. (2003). Research Methods for Business Students, Essex, Pearson       Education

Saunders, M., Lewis,P & Thornhill,A.(2006). Research Methods for Business

Saunders, M., Lewis,P & Thornhill,A.(2006). Research Methods for Business

Saunders. A. et al .(2000). โ€œThe Determinants of Bank         Interest            Rate Margins: An       International  Study,โ€Journal of             International   Money and Finance 19, 813-832

Schilling, M.A. (2000). Decades Ahead of Her Time; Advancing Stakeholder Theory Through    the       Ideas of Mary Parker Follett. Journal of Management History, Vol. 6, No. 5: pp.       224-     242.

Schreiner, M. (2000) โ€žWays Donors Can Help the Evolution of Sustainable Science Journal,        43, 471-477.

Selected Microfinance Institutions in Namibia. The Namibian Economic Selection Model.โ€Ÿ        The      Economic Journal, 110, 632-643.Series No. 17, Boston, MA: Harvard            Business          School.

Silverman, D. (2001). Interpreting Qualitative Data โ€“ Methods for Analysing Talking, Text          and      Interaction,2nd Edition, London: Sage Publications

Simons, R., (1995). Levers of Control, How Managers Use Innovative       Control Systems to      Drive Strategic Renewal. Harvard Business             School Press, Boston, MA

Slater, S.F., & Narver, J.C., (2007). Market orientation and the learning organization,

            Journal of Marketing, 59(7), 63 โ€“ 74.

Smith, A.,(2001): โ€œPerceptions of Stress at Work,โ€ Human Resource          Management   Journal,           Vol. 11, No. 4, pp. 74-86  

Snell, S. A.,(1992) โ€œControl Theory in Strategic Human Resource Management: the         Mediating Effect of Administrative Information,โ€ Academy of Management Journal,     Vol. 35, No. 2, pp. 292โ€“

Tashakkori, A. and Creswell, J. W. (2007). Exploring the nature of research questions in mixed methods research. Journal of Mixed Methods Research, 1 (3), 207-211. 

Ticehurst, G.W. and Veal, A.J. (1999). Business Research Methods: A Managerial Approach,      Addison Wesley Longman Australia Pty Limited.

Waterfield, C. (1998). Handbook for Management Information Systems for Microfinance Institutions. Technical Tool Series No.1. ConsultativeGroup to Assist the Poorest    (CGAP), 1818  H St. NW, Washington, D.C

Watts, H. (1999). A Conceptual Framework to Financial Reports and Internal Audits. Vol.          20,Pp. 753-778.

Widener, S. (2007). An empirical analysis of the levers of control   framework.      Accounting,    Organizations and Society 32, 757-788.

Woller, G. (2000) โ€žReassessing the Financial Viability of Village Banking: Past    Performance    and Future Prospects.โ€Ÿ Micro-Banking Bulletin, Microfinance

Woolf, E. (1992). Auditing Today (3rd ed.).Prentice Hall International (UK) Ltd.work       study,50           (5), 179 โ€“ 189. Working Paper Series No. 51

Internal Control Systems and Performance of Micro Finance Institutions in Uganda

Dr Arthur Sunday, Dr Abanis Turyahebwa, Dr Derick Ssekajugo, Dr Mabonga Eric

Abstract

Microfinance has evolved by providing micro credits to respond to the furthermost financial and non-financial needs of the citizens, to eradicate poverty and increase financial inclusion. Most studies undertaken in the past few years have focused mainly on outreach of MFIโ€™s and their impact on profitability and not on internal control system and lack of clarity on the extent to which internal control system influences financial performance (Narver, 2007) will therefore continue to inhibit common understanding and explanation which might deter performance improvement in Ugandan microfinance institutions. Failure by MFIs to monitor portfolio quality closely and take action when necessary and this has threatened the going concern of microfinance industry in Uganda. The study analyzed the relationship between internal control system and financial performance of MFIs in central region Uganda and it was hypothesized that internal control system positively influences   financial performance of MFIs in central region Uganda. MFIs have come under spotlight for cases of poor financial performance. Lack of empirical studies to assess the impact of internal control system on the financial performance of   microfinance institutions in Uganda is the motivation behind this study. Therefore, this study is important not only because it fills the gap, but also it set out to address this evident knowledge gap. The study adopted positive-phenomenological, epistemology and quantitative-qualitative methodology dimension with cross sectional and correlation designs, the unit of analysis was Microfinance Institutions registered with Association of Microfinance Institutions, and employees were the units of inquiry. Structural Equations Modeling with Analysis of Moment Structures were used to for statistical modeling

Besides, Hierarchical regression was used to test the predictive power of the variables and indicate precisely what happens to the model as different predictor variables are introduced in the model fit. This study revealed that two of the predictor variables are strong predictors of financial performance of MFIs. The study further revealed that internal control system was found to be strongly and positively correlated with financial performance. And internal control system elements were found to be positive predictors of financial performance.  The present study supported a multi-theoretic approach in explaining financial performance of MFIs in Uganda. The study supports the stewardship theory in explaining the controls system together with stakeholder as the theories that help in explaining financial performance of MFIs. The study confirmed efficient control system factor structure of observed variables and the latent variables. As a result, the study provided models for efficient internal control systems. These models can then used to provide a trajectory for improving financial performance of MFIs in Uganda .Regardless of the existence of control systems in MFI, the results revealed that internal control systems were less efficient due to lack of close monitoring. It recommended that MFIs should enhance controls to ensure that resources are obtained and used effectively and efficiently in the accomplishment of the organizationโ€™s goals  Policy makers, AMFIU, PSFU and MFIs may use these findings as a way of improving financial performance of MFIs in Uganda since the MFIs are great contributors to the Ugandan economy

Key Words : Internal Control System, Financial Performance, microfinance, Institution

Introduction

Microfinance has evolved by providing micro credits to respond to the furthermost financial and non-financial needs of the citizens, to eradicate poverty and increase financial inclusion .The microfinance movement has received enthusiasm as a poverty alleviation tool that has eventually become a self-sustaining industry. Microfinance institutions (MFIs) worldwide have been seen and identified as vital institution to nationsโ€™ quest for solutions to the development challenge (CGAP, 2002). Most microfinance institutions have embraced a more business-oriented outlook and maintained their target groups of economically-active poor, in order to achieve financial sustainability (Kalyango, 2004; Baguma, 2008). The micro finance institutions in developing economies are widely growing from time to time. Various studies on different countries on the performance of the MFIs confirm this (Adongo and Stork 2005, Zeller and Meyer 2002, Meyer 2002, Robert cull et al. 2007).

Approaches used by microfinance institutions in Uganda to deliver financial services to the poor are similar to those used in other countries where microfinance institutions operate. The approach used depends on the nature and structure of the respective microfinance institution. The institutions providing microfinance services include: Tier I: formal financial institutions Comercial banks, TierII; credit institutions, Tier III; microfinance deposit taking institutions, Tier IV; Saccos (BOU Policy on MFIs 1999).

Microfinance institutions in Uganda from time and again been faced with high operating costs to provide financial services to the poor people and Small and Medium Enterprises (Micro banking Bulletin, 2002). And as such,  are unable to meet their obligations when they become due usually resulting from poor cash flow planning, failure to monitor portfolio quality closely and take action when necessary. Portfolio quality has deteriorated more rapidly in Microfinance institutions than in traditional financial institutions due to the short-term and unsecured nature of micro lending and micro loan portfolios  (Srinivasan, 2006 due to unsecured nature of micro lending, micro loan portfolios which are volatile. IMF Report (2001) most MFIs in Uganda had large portfolios in arrears, with overdue loan repayments stretching back into the distant past mainly because lending policies were usually poorly enforced and systems to track and manage arrears. An enduring problem facing microfinance institutions, however, is how to attain financial sustainability (Dunford, 2003; Schreiner, 2000; Woller 2000; Hollis and Sweetman, 1998; Christen et al, 1995). This problem has attracted attention of numerous researchers in recent decades and, as a result many strategies have been identified to ensure that institutions are sustainable (Randhawa and Gallardo, 2003; Schreiner, 2000; Yaron, 1992). Abernethy and Brownell (1999) discussed the interactive use of management control systems and their experimental findings indicated that interactive use of internal control systems can alleviate disruptive performance in a business enterprise. Ledgerwood (1999) as cited by Lincolin Arsyad (2005), conceptualizes financial performance as; Financial viability (operational self-sufficiency, financial self-sufficiency) Profitability (return on assets ratio, return on business ratio, return on equity ratio) and Portfolio quality (portfolio at risk, repayment rates).  Financial performance being a critical factor in the success of microfinance Institutions, therefore, this research focused on financial performance and not social performance

Most of the studies on financial performance of microfinance institutions apply and use different methodologies as in the case of Tilahun (2009) , however this study employed a descriptive research design based on quantitative data. The researcher collected and analyzed annual reports using descriptive statistics.  A number of theories have been used to explain what influences the financial performance of the firm but their applications have no terminal point. Theories that have been used to explain firm financial performance include, among others Resource-Based View of the firm (RBV), agency theory (Jensen and Meckling 1976), stakeholder theory (Freeman 1984), and stewardship theory. All these theories provide a detailed account of firm performance using available resources inspite of the limitations in their application. Though there is no agreed theoretical base for research on financial performance of microfinance institutions (Parum, 2005), a review of the literature indicates that the above four main theoretical frameworks have been used to explain and analyse the association between management control system and financial performance of microfinance institutions. 

Poor financial performance marked by deteriorating returns and portfolio quality has taken a center stage and remained unexplained in microfinance Institutions (Performance Monitoring Tool 2006/2009/). Portfolio quality has deteriorated more rapidly in Microfinance institutions than in traditional financial institutions due to the short-term and unsecured nature of micro lending, micro loan portfolios which tend to be more volatile (Ssewanyana 2009). According to the IMF Report (2001) most MFIs in Uganda had large portfolios in arrears, with overdue loan repayments stretching back into the distant past mainly because lending policies were usually poorly enforced and systems to track and manage arrears hardly existed. Microfinance institutions in Uganda face poor cash flow problems due to changes in market interest rate and failure to monitor portfolio quality closely and take action when necessary and this has threatened the going concern of microfinance industry in Uganda (Bank of Uganda 2010/2011)

Most studies undertaken in the past few years have focused mainly on outreach of MFIโ€™s and their impact on profitability (Migiri, 2002). Lack of clarity on the extent to which internal control system influences financial performance (Narver, 2007) will therefore continue to inhibit common understanding and explanation which might deter performance improvement in Ugandan microfinance institutions.  Though some studies have identified ICS as a possible predictor of financial performance in different industries, there are still gaps as a result of absence of representative empirical studies that would address the issue of financial performance of microfinance institutions as a result of management control systems (PekChen, 2005).More so, theories and models apparently used to explain financial performance in firms have proved to be weak and inadequate in explaining this phenomenon. Empirical studies aimed at assessing the impact of ICS on the financial performance of   microfinance institutions in Uganda are missing. Therefore, this study is important because it fills this gap of knowledge

Literature Review 

Synthesizing existing studies in the broad area of explaining financial performance of MFIs, indicate a clear dearth of studies examining multiplicative effect of various elements the predictor variable ie internal control system(control procedures, risk assessment, control environment, Monitoring and internal audit ) on  financial performance of  MFIs . (see for review

Welsh (2003), Simons (1995), Chow et al (1999), Merchant (2007), appreciate that internal   control systems are the formal, information-based routines and procedures managers that ensure that errors and fraud are detected, safe guard companyโ€™s  assets and opine that ICS greatly influences firm performance.

Recent studies draw from the original organizational theorists (Burns & Stalker 1961, Lawrence & Lorsch 1967, Thompson 1967, Perrow 1970, Galbraith1973) to develop arguments that explain how the effectiveness of control systems  (Chenhall 2003).

Bisbe and Otley (2004), findings indicated that the application of control systems has a huge contingency effect on firm performance. However, Bisbeโ€™s research did not discuss the importance of human effect to control system (Snell, 1992; Abernethy and Brownell, 1997; Keller, 2001; Widener, 2004)

Simon (1995), asserted  that internal control systems  have different impacts on organization performance, Abernethy and Brownell (1999) discussed the interactive use of internal control systems and their experimental findings indicated that interactive use of internal  control systems can alleviate disruptive performance when a company is changing its strategies, Davila (2000), in his study his study findings indicated that different strategies will need different interactive use of management controls to raise firm performance.

Dexon  (2010), findings revealed that Internal Control Systems have a significant positive effect in achieving Value for Money. All the constructs of Internal Control Systems (Control environment, control activities, risk assessment) have a significant positive relationship with Value for Money in a business entity

Internal control  process reduces uncertainty and improves firm performance, Ivancevich (1976), Steers (1976), Imoisili (1989), Locke & Schweiger (1979), Mia (1989), Ezzamel (1990), Hirst & Lowy (1990) etc. Another study on control process and firm performance relationship by scholars (Merchant, 1980; Peel & Bridge, 1988; Edward, et al., 2001) and empirical results (Merchant, 1980) show that control systems enhance the accuracy the degree of information accuracy. In turn, it results in higher performance in organizations.  The increased use of comprehensive ICS practices can be assumed to result in better improved financial performance among firms (e.g. Chenhall 2003, see also discussions in Gul 1991, Gul & Chia 1994, Hoque & James 2000, Ittner et al. 1998, 1998, Scott & Tiessen 1999)

ICS acts as a driver variable in firm strategy and performance as found in Chong & Chong (1997) and Baines & Langfield-Smith (2003). Report of bank of Uganda (2002), Simon (1995), results showed that there is indeed a positive association between certain internal control practices when are used concurrently with other strategic initiatives and improvement in financial performance.  Abernethy and Brownell (1999) also discussed the interactive use of internal  control systems and their experimental findings indicated that interactive use of internal  control systems can alleviate disruptive performance when a company is changing its strategies

The findings confirm the report findings of Armesh (2010) on the influences of internal control system on organizational performance in Malaysia, which showed that Internal Control System influences the behavior and performance of the organizational to ensure that resources are obtained and used effectively and efficiently in the accomplishment of the organization s objectives.

On the other hand however, McMahon (2001) did not find any significant relationship between use of internal control practices and firm performance. Donaldson (2001) found no significant associations were between the use of comprehensive Management Control System and measures of growth in net sales and profitability. 

Additionally, McMahon & Davies (1994) and McMahon (2001) have not found any significant relationships between internal control practices and performance of businesses. Thus, the empirical results on the relationship between various dimensions of MCS and performance seem to be rather mixed

Jonathan (2005), study findings revealed that most of the microfinance institutions in Namibia are not yet financially sustainable and it was attributed to the fact that interest rates that Microfinance institutions require to break-even exceed the ceiling imposed. Portfolio quality has deteriorated more rapidly in Microfinance institutions than in financial institutions (Srinivasan, 2006), Studies by Bontis (2002), Chong and Richardson (2006), explained similar performance trends in Portuguese. Study findings revealed that average ROA for MFIs is 3.57%. This concur with study findings of Lafourcade (2005), the findings revealed that, Africa MFIs have the lowest financial performance of ROA of 2% as compared to 7.6%-10% of Eastern Europe and Central Asia. The findings are in agreement with Tilahun (2009), study findings on โ€˜the financial performance and sustainability of microfinance institutions in Ethiopiaโ€™; the result of the study indicates that there was a negative shift in the performance indicators particularly in the year 2009  and the gross loan portfolio has declined by 15.73% in the year 2009.

Furthermore, contrary to Chong and Richardson (2006),  study findings, McMahon (2001), did not find any significant relationship between use of control System of Australian business firms and profitability.

Furthermore, Perera et al. (1997) have also reported a respective non significant relationship in manufacturing firms. Malmi et al. (2004) likewise did not find a significant direct relationship between management practices and profitability, even though they reported an interaction effect of the practices and use of other relationship management control systems to be significant in relation to firm performance.

Both theoretical and empirical studies show that strong and efficient systems that maintain high levels of capital adequacy are important in determining financial institutions profitability. Sufian and Habibullah (2009), found out that good systems have a positive impact on bank profitability in China. This confirms Athanasoglou, et al. (2008, 2006) and Kosmidou (2008) who also finds a positive and significant effect of strong control system on bank profitability, reflecting the sound financial condition of banks.

This shows that maintaining strong and efficient internal control system is highly associated with high financial performance in Microfinance Institutions (Gramling et al. 2004; Hermanson & Rittenberg 2003; 2004

First, Reid & Smith (2000) found out those developing control  systems, especially in the areas of management and accounting applications, lead to high firm performance, Reid & Smith (2002) , Reid & Smith (2000, 2002) holds that high performers  firms  use and apply internal control systems for daily financial monitoring and for identifying important trends in key variables for their further survival.  On the other hand, Reid & Smith (2002), argue that static performers at satisfactory financial levels tend not to value control systems as much as the others. Consequently, the relationship between internal control system and firm performance seem to be U-shaped

The foregoing reviews reveal that the application of internal control system elements in any organization differ and different interactive use of internal  controls to raise firm performance. 

The level, application and interactive use of internal control system in Ugandan microfinance industry is elusive. This, therefore, caused the need for a scientific investigation on the use internal control system elements influences financial performance in Ugandaโ€™s microfinance industry. This necessitated the study to evaluate the relationship between internal control system and financial performance of the selected microfinance institutions in central region Uganda

Methodology 

The study adopted a positivist quantitative paradigm with cross sectional and correlation designs. Correlation design was used to establish relationships between internal control system and financial performance of MFIs. Logical positivism quantitative designs were applied in data collection, analysis and presentation which also helped to test hypothetical deductive generalizations. The study population consisted of 36 MFIs in central region Uganda registered with AMFIU from where the sample size of 33 MFIs were determined comprising a sample of 356 which was consistent with the sample size guidelines of Ntoumanis (2001) and Field (2006). Ntoumanis (2001) and Field (2006), multistage, simple rondom sampling and purposive tequniques were used. Primary and secondary data sources were used in the study.Structural Equations Modeling with Analysis of Moment Structures were also used to for statistical modeling.

Cronbachโ€™s alpha was used to test the reliability of the instruments and the instruments were found to be reliable at 0.78. Content  validity of  the  two  instruments was ensured  through use of  valid  concepts  which  measure  the  study  variables .  Content  validity  was  used  to  ensure  that  the questionnaire  was  content  valid. The content validity results were obtained and for all the constructs were above 0.7 as recommended by Sakaran (2000). The study used Means and standard deviations in order to summarize the results. The means were used because they show a summary of data and standard deviation clearly shows how well the means represent the data (Field, 2009). Hierarchical regression was used to estimate the predictive power of the predictor variable on the criterion variable in the model fit.

Findings and Discussion 

Descriptive Statistics of the Predictor Variable and Criterion Variable
 NRangeMinimumMaximumMeanStd. DeviationVariance
C. Procedure3562.671.243.903.2002.01436.27098.073
C. Environment3553.18.824.003.2101.01757.33106.110
R. Assessment 3562.701.304.003.1967.01465.27644.076
Monitoring3562.111.503.612.9259.01350.25466.065
I. Audit3562.251.754.003.2342.01894.35735.128
F.Performance3562.89.913.813.0993.01325.25005.063
         

Source: Primary Data 2017

Results showed that internal control system among MFIs is defined in terms of the five observed variables, control procedures, control environment, risk assessment, and monitoring and internal audit. And financial performance was conceptualised in terms of Return on Assets, return on Equity, profit margin and portfolio quality. The findings indicate small and minimal standard deviations compared to mean values; it is evident that the data points are close to the means and hence calculated means highly represent the observed data. The findings revealed that standardized regression weights for the predictor variable(Internal control system), in explaining financial performance  were significant(p<0.001) signifying a strong relationship between internal control system  and financial performance  of MFIs in  central region Uganda and Zero order correlation  was applied to determine the correlation  between internal control system  and financial performance  of MFIs

Zero order correlation between internal control system and financial performance of MFIs

VariablesaB       CDEf
C. Procedure     (a)1 1    
C. Environment(b).131*
R. Assessment  (c).310**.499**1
Monitoring       (d).259**.151**.264**1
I.Audit              (e).133*.131*.323**.127*1
F.Performance  (f).650**.183**.388**.638**.249**1
      
 *. Correlation is significant at the 0.05 level (2-tailed).
 **. Correlation is significant at the 0.01 level (2-tailed). 
HypothesisSupported/not supported 
H1There is a positive and significant relationship between control procedure and Financial performance of MFIs          (r= 0.650, p< 0.05).supported 
H2: There is a positive and significant relationship between control environment and Financial performance of MFIs      (r= 0.183, p< 0.05).supported 
H3: There is a positive and significant relationship between risk assessment and Financial performance of MFIs                             (r= 0.388, p< 0.05).supported 
H4: There is a positive and significant relationship between monitoring and Financial performance of MFIs                                  (r= 0.638, p< 0.05).supported    
H5: There is a positive and significant relationship between internal audit and Financial performance of MFIs                           (r= 0.249, p< 0.05).supported    
H5There is a positive and significant relationship between internal control system and Financial performance of MFIs              (r= 0.355, p< 0.05).supported 

To test the predictive power of the study variables, from the hypothesized model 

Y = ฮฑ+ฮฒ1X1+ฮฒ2X2+ฮฒ3X3+ฮฒ4X4+ ฮฒ5X5+e

Where Y is the Dependent Variable โ€“ Financial Performance

ฮฑ = Constant

X = representing the constructs of the predictor Variable- ICS

X1  = Control Procedure 

X2  = Risk assessment 

X3  = Control Environment

X4  = Monitoring

X5  = Internal Auditing

รŸ15 = Coefficients of beta 

e = error term in ascertaining the influence of individual element on Financial       performance, all the models as indicated the model fit 

Model1:          Y = ฮฑ+ฮฒ1X1+e 

Y = 1.154+0.607X1

(t =14.201), (t=7.830), R2= 0.431, F = 83.26, DW = 1.366

Model2:          Y = ฮฑ+ฮฒ1X1+ฮฒ2X2+e

Y = 1.470+0.536X1+0. 250X2

(t =13.011), (t=5.190), (t= 6.693) R2= 0.491, F = 76.07, DW = 1.366

Model 3           Y = ฮฑ+ฮฒ1X1+ฮฒ2X2+ฮฒ3X3+e

Y = 1.427+0.535X1+0.264X2+0.022X3

(t =12.102), (t=4.6513), (t= 5.353) (t=1.671) R2= 0.492, F = 42.08, DW = 1.366

Model 4           Y = ฮฑ+ฮฒ1X1+ฮฒ2X2+ฮฒ3X3+ฮฒ4X4+e

Y = 1.474+0.452X1+0.160X2+0.026X3+0.457X4

(t =10.261), (t=3.544), (t= 4.773) (t=1.482) (t =1.875) R2= .683, F = 39.28, 

DW = 1.366

Model 5           Y = ฮฑ+ฮฒ1X1+ฮฒ2X2+ฮฒ3X3+ฮฒ4X4+ ฮฒ5X5+e

Y = 1.295+0.450X1+0.131X2+0.023X3+0.455X4+0.061X5

(t =9.371), (t=3.623), (t= 4.897) (t=1.495) (t =1.910), (t = 2.130) R2= .690, F = 33.66, DW = 1.366

In Model 1, Control Procedure accounts for 43.2% of variance in financial performance of MFIs (F =  83.26, P < .005) and caused a statistically-significant non-standardized coefficient (B =0. 607, P <0.05).

In Model 2, the introduction of Risk Assessment in the equation yielded an extra effect 6% to the explanatory power of the model. This clearly implies that Risk Assessment accounts for an additional 6% of the variance in financial performance. This means that a unit change in Risk Assessment leads to 6% increase in financial performance (F=76.07, p < 0.05), and caused a statistically-significant coefficient (B =0. 250, p <0.05); 

Results for Model 3 indicate that the introduction of Control Environment in the equation yielded a low significant effect of 0.1% to the explanatory power of the model. This means that Control Environment explained an additional 0.1% of the variance in financial performance (F = 42.08, P < 0.05), and caused statistically very low significant coefficient (B =0.022, p<0.05); these results indicate that Control Environment influence financial performance of MFIs but with minimal effect. 

In Model 4, the introduction of Monitoring in the equation also yielded a less significant 19.1% to the explanatory power of the model. Thus monitoring account for additional 19.1% of the variance in financial performance (F =39.28, p<0.05) and lead to statistically significant contribution in coefficient (B = 0.457, p<0.05). 

In Model 5, after the internal audit was included, a less significant additional 0.7% was yielded and added to the explanatory power of the model. These results indicate Internal audit account for only 0.7% of the variance in financial performance (F= 33.66, p < 0.05), and caused a statistically less significant coefficient (B =0.061, p <0.05). However, model 5 shows the overall explanatory power of the model to be 69%.  This clearly shows that internal control system predicts 69 % of the variance in the financial performance of MFIs in central region Uganda. Considering, the unstandardized coefficients, control procedures has the highest beta followed by monitoring and then risk assessment, internal audit and finally control environment. 

This study revealed that two of the predictor variables are strong predictors of financial performance of MFIs. The study further revealed that internal control system was found to be strongly and positively correlated with financial performance leading to the acceptance of the hypothesis that internal control systems are positively related with financial performance among the MFIs in central region Uganda.. And internal control system elements were found to be positive predictors of financial performance. 

The present study supported a multi-theoretic approach in explaining financial performance of MFIs in Uganda. The study supports the stewardship theory in explaining the controls system together with stakeholder and resource based view as the theories that help in explaining financial performance of MFIs. The study confirmed that efficient control system factor structure of observed variables and the latent variables. As a result, the study provided models for efficient internal control systems. These models can then used to provide a trajectory for improving financial performance of MFIs in Uganda. It recommended that MFIs should enhance controls to ensure that resources are obtained and used effectively and efficiently in the accomplishment of the organizationโ€™s goals 

Policy makers, BOU, MOFEP AMFIU, PSFU and MFIs may use these findings as a way of improving financial performance of MFIs in Uganda since the MFIs are great contributors to the Ugandan economy.  

References

Adams, D. W. (1990): Funded Rural Finance Activities in Latin America and        the       Carribbean,    1942- 1990: A Strategy for the 1990sโ€, AID, Washington, DC

Adongo, J., & Christopher,S. (2005). Factors Influencing Sustainability of Selected          Microfinance Institutions in Namibia. The Namibian Economic Policy Research Unit         –           Research Report

Amin, M. (2005). Social Sciences Research: Conception, Methodology and Analysis.

Anthony, R.N. and Govindarajan, V. (2004), โ€œManagement Control Systemsโ€, McGraw-  Hill,New York, NY.

B.K. Sebbowa Bamweyana, (2009), the role of internal audit function in    organizations

Baguma, D.T. (2007). Association of Microfinance Magazine: Addressing thePoverty       challenge.

Baguma, D.T (2008).Uganda Microfinance Industry Assessment: Association of

            Microfinance Institutions of Uganda

Bald.J. (2000). Liquidity Management: A Toolkit for Microfinance Institutions.

Bank of Uganda (1999): BOU Policy Statement on Micro- Finance            Regulation,     Ban

Barney, J. B. (1991). Firm resources and sustained competitive advantage, Journal of

            Management, 17(1), 99 -120.

Bategeka, L. (1999): Ugandaโ€™s Achiefments and Callenges in the Financial           Sector:             Whose Interests Count In: โ€žThe Ugandan Bankerโ€œ, Vol. 7, No. 4,           Uganda            Institute of bankers

Beck, T., Cull, R. and Jerome, A. (2005). Bank privatization and performance: empirical evidence          from Nigeria. Journal of Banking and Finance, 29:2355-79. 

Bisbe, J. โ€œThe Effects of the Interactive Use of Management            Control            Systems on      Product Innovation,โ€ Accounting, Organization             and      Society, Vol. 29, No. 8,          2004,   pp. 709-737.

CGAP (2000). Consultative Group to assist the poorest, available at: http://www.cgap.org

Chandan, J.S. ( 2004). MangementTheories and Practices. New Delhi

Chenhall R (2003). Management control systems design within its organizationalcontext:            findings from contingency-based       research and directions for the future. Acc Org      Soc      28: 127โ€“168.

Chenhall, R.H., (2003). Management control systems design within its       organizational context: findings from contingency-based research   and             directions for the         future. Accounting,    Organizations and       Society 28, 127โ€“168

Chow, C.W., Shields, M.D., & Wu, A. (1999). The importance of national culture in the design of and preference for management     controls for multi-national operations.      Accounting, Organizations and Society, Vol. 24, 561-582.

Collis, J. and Hussey, R. (2003). Business Research: A Practical Guide for Undergraduate          and      Postgraduate Students, 2nd Edition, New York: Palgrave Macmillan.

Creswell, J. W. (2003). Research Design: Qualitative, Quantitative, and Mixed Methods Approaches, 2nd Edition, Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications. 

Creswell, J. W. and Plano Clark, V. L. (2007). Designing and Conducting Mixed Methods            Research, Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications.

Cull, R., Demirgรผc-Kunt, A and Morduch, J. (2007). Financial performance and outreach: a         global analysis of leading microbanks, Economic Journal, 117:F107-F133.

Davis, J.H., Schoorman, F.D., and Donaldson, L. (1997). Toward a Stewardship Theory of           Management.

Field, A. (2006). Discovering Statistics using SPSS (2nd Ed.). Sage, London.

Freeman, R.E. (1984). Strategic Management: A Stakeholder ApproachBoston: Pitman.

Gerrit Sarens and Mohammad J. Abdolmohammadi (2010), Monitoring     Effects of the Internal            Audit Function: Agency Theory versus other Explanatory Variables. International   Journal of Auditing. Blackwell Publishing Ltd

Gibbons, D.S. & Meehan, J.W. (2000), The Micro credit summitโ€™s challenge: working     towards           institutional financial self-sufficiency while maintaining a commitment       to serving the poorest families, Journal of micro finance, 1(1), 131 โ€“ 191.

Haning A (2002). Microfinance in Uganda: Lessons from FNCA clients    Analysis          Kampala, United Press Ltd.

Hulme .  (1996): Finance Against Poverty, Volumes 1 and 2, Routledge, London.

Hulme, D. (2000): โ€œImpact Assessment Methodologies for Microfinance    Theory,            Experience and Better Practiceโ€, University of             Manchester, Manchester, UK.

Jensen M., and Meckling, W. (1976). Theory of the firm: Managerial Behavior, Agency Costs     and Ownership Structure. Journal of Financial Economics, Vol. 3, No. 4: pp. 305-360.

Johnson, R. B. and Onwuegbuzie, A. J. (2004). Mixed methods research: a research paradigm      whose time has come. Educational Researcher, 33 (7), 14-26.

Kalyango,D.L.(2005). Ugandaโ€™s Experience with Tiered Banking Regulation, Bank of

            Uganda, Seminar Paper.

Karlan, D. and Goldberg, N. (2007) The Impact of Microfinance: A Review of Keat, R. and         Urry, J. (1982). Social Theory as Science, 2nd Edition, London: Routledge & Kegan            Paul.

Ledgerwood et al (1999). Microfinance Handbook: An Institutional and     Financial        Perspective.    Sustainable Banking with the Poor, World             Bank,   1818 H St.,      Washington

Lee. K. (2005). KMPI: Measuring Knowledge          Management   Performance,โ€            Information & Lessons from Selected African Countries.โ€Ÿ International Monetary           Fund    Limited, England.

LOGOTRI (2006) โ€žBuilding Sustainable Microfinance System: A Growth Catalyst

            Makerere University Printery, Kampala.

Malmi T (1997) Towards explaining activity-based costing failure: accounting and control in       a          decentralized organization. Management Accounting Research 8: 459โˆ’480.

McMahon RGP (2001) Business growth and performance and the financial reporting practices     of Australian manufacturing SMEs. Journal of Small Business Management 39(2):152โˆ’164.

Merchant, K et al. (2007). Management Control       Systems โ€“ Performance, Measurement,          Merchant, K. A,(2007). A review of the literature on control       and      accountability Handbook of Management Accounting          Research, (Ed.) C.      S. Chapman, A. G.      Hopwood, and M. D. Shields,      785-804, Amsterdam:             Elsevier Press.

Merchant KA (1997) Modern Management Control Systems: texts and cases. Prentice

            Hall, New Jersey, US.

Meyer, R. J. (2002) โ€žTrack Record of Financial Institutions in Assessing the Poor in         Asia.โ€Ÿ ADB Institute Research Paper, No. 49. 

Meyer, R. L. (2002). “Track Record of Financial Institutions in Assisting the         Poor    in         Asia” ADB Institute Research Paper, No 49. 2nd ed., Essex: Prentice Hall.

Michael A. Hitt, Robert E. Hoskisson, Richard A. Johnson, Douglas D.      Moesel. (1996).           The      Market for Corporate Control and Firm             Innovation

MicroBanking Bulletin. (1998), Issue No. 2. Calmeadow, 733 15th St. NW, Suite 700      Microfinance Information eXchange (MIX).

Ministry of Finance, Planning and Economic Development (2000): โ€žDraft Final   Report on        the District Resource Endowment Profile Survey             (DREPS)โ€œ,Vol.II, Survey of   Microfinance Institutions, The Republic of Uganda,             Kampala

Mitchell, R.K., Agle, B.R., and Wood, D.J. (1997). Toward a Theory of Stakeholder         Identification and        Salience: Defining the Principle of Who and What Really            Counts.            Academy of Management       Review, Vol.   22, No. 4: pp. 853โ€“886.

Nannyonjo, S. & Nsubuga,D. (2004). Bank of Uganda Working Paper, WP04

Navajas. S. M.et al. (2000), “Micro credit and the Poorest of the Poor: Theory and Evidence       from    Bolivia”, World Development, Vol. 28,             No. 2, pp 333- 346,     Elsevier           Science Ltd

Obwona, M. B.; Ddumba-Ssentamu, J. (1998): โ€žHousehold Savings in       Developing      Economies: Evidence from Microdata from Ugandaโ€œ, Makerere University, Uganda

Office of the Prime Minister (2000): โ€žBasic Facts about rural Microfinance          support            Projekt (RMSP)โ€œ, The Republic of Uganda, Kampala

Opiokello, D. (2000): Role Of The Central Bank In Developing Rural         Financial Markets:     The Case Of Uganda. In: โ€žAfter the Reforms:             Which Way Forward for Central        Banks in Rural Financeโ€œ, Afraca        Rural Finance Series, Vol.1, African Rural and        Agricultural             Credit Association, Nairobi

Otero, M. and E. Rhyne (1994), The New World of Micro enterprise Finance,        Hartford,         Kumarian Press Outreach and Financial Performance of Microfinance Institutions in Africa.

Pablos, P. (2004), “The nature of knowledge-based resources through the design of an      architecture of human resource management systems: implications for strategic        management”, International Journal of Technology Management, Vol. 27 No.6/7,             pp.23-45.

Pamela,  M.P.(2001). Management:  Performance in Spanish Bankingโ€.    Journal of Banking     and Finance,18

Performance monitoring tool (PMT) (2006|09) for Microfinance Institutions.

            Accessed at www.mixmarket.com.

Rutherford, S. (1997) Informal Financial Services in Dhakaโ€Ÿs Slums. In: Wood et al

Rutherford, S. (1999): โ€žSavings and the Poor the Methods, use and impact of        savings by       the poor of East Africaโ€œ, Micro Save-Africa, Kampala

Saunders, M. and Lewis, P. (2003). Research Methods for Business Students, Essex, Pearson       Education

Saunders, M., Lewis,P & Thornhill,A.(2006). Research Methods for Business

Silverman, D. (2001). Interpreting Qualitative Data โ€“ Methods for Analysing Talking, Text          and      Interaction, 2nd Edition, London: Sage Publications

Slater, S.F., & Narver, J.C., (2007). Market orientation and the learning organization,

            Journal of Marketing, 59(7), 63 โ€“ 74.

Snell, S. A.,(1992) โ€œControl Theory in Strategic Human Resource Management: the         Mediating Effect of Administrative Information,โ€ Academy of Management Journal, 

Tashakkori, A. and Creswell, J. W. (2007). Exploring the nature of research questions in mixed methods research. Journal of Mixed Methods Research, 1 (3), 207-211. 

Ticehurst, G.W. and Veal, A.J. (1999). Business Research Methods: A Managerial Approach,      Addison Wesley Longman Australia Pty Limited.

Waterfield, C. (1998). Handbook for Management Information Systems for Microfinance Institutions. Technical Tool Series No.1. Consultative Group to Assist the Poorest    (CGAP), 1818  H St. NW, Washington, D.C

Watts, H. (1999). A Conceptual Framework to Financial Reports and Internal Audits. Vol.          20,Pp. 753-778.

Widener, S. (2007). An empirical analysis of the levers of control   framework.      Accounting,    Organizations and Society 32, 757-788.

Woller, G. (2000) โ€žReassessing the Financial Viability of Village Banking: Past    Performance    and Future Prospects.โ€Ÿ Micro-Banking Bulletin, Microfinance

Woolf, E. (1992). Auditing Today (3rd ed.).Prentice Hall International (UK) Ltd.work       study,50           (5), 179 โ€“ 189. Working Paper Series No. 51

Agricultural Marketing: Enhancing Efficiency and Sustainability in the Agriculture Sector

Shashikant Nishant Sharma

Agricultural marketing is a critical component of the agricultural sector that involves various activities, processes, and systems that facilitate the movement of agricultural products from producers to consumers. It encompasses the planning, execution, and monitoring of the production, transportation, storage, and distribution of agricultural goods. Efficient agricultural marketing is essential for the growth and sustainability of the agricultural industry, as it ensures fair returns to farmers, availability of goods to consumers, and stability in prices.

Importance of Agricultural Marketing

Agricultural marketing plays a pivotal role in the agricultural value chain. Here are some of its key significance:

1. Economic Growth:

Efficient agricultural marketing contributes to the overall economic development of a country by promoting increased agricultural production and generating income for farmers and stakeholders. When farmers receive fair prices for their produce, they are incentivized to invest in better farming practices, leading to higher productivity.

2. Price Stabilization:

By balancing demand and supply, agricultural marketing helps in stabilizing the prices of agricultural products. This is achieved through effective storage, distribution, and market intelligence, which enables market players to anticipate changes in demand and supply and make informed decisions.

3. Market Access:

Agricultural marketing facilitates access to markets for farmers, allowing them to sell their produce beyond local markets. This increases market reach and creates opportunities for farmers to engage with larger markets, both domestic and international, thereby expanding their customer base.

4. Reduction of Wastage:

Efficient marketing reduces post-harvest losses by ensuring that produce reaches consumers in a timely manner. Proper storage and transportation facilities are vital components of this, minimizing spoilage and wastage of agricultural goods.

5. Consumer Satisfaction:

Agricultural marketing ensures that consumers have access to a variety of high-quality agricultural products at reasonable prices. This results in enhanced consumer satisfaction and promotes a healthier population.

Components of Agricultural Marketing

Agricultural marketing comprises several key components that work in conjunction to facilitate the smooth movement of agricultural goods in the market:

1. Market Research and Information:

This component involves the collection and analysis of data related to agricultural production, demand, prices, and consumer preferences. Accurate market information helps farmers and other stakeholders make informed decisions regarding production, pricing, and market entry.

2. Storage and Warehousing:

Proper storage and warehousing facilities are crucial for preserving the quality and value of agricultural products. Storage facilities help in reducing post-harvest losses and ensuring a continuous supply of products in the market.

3. Transportation:

Efficient transportation systems are essential for the timely and cost-effective movement of agricultural products from production centers to consumption areas. Well-maintained transportation networks, including roads, railways, and ports, are vital for the success of agricultural marketing.

4. Processing and Value Addition:

Processing and value addition involve converting raw agricultural products into more marketable and valuable forms. This adds value to the produce and creates new market opportunities, encouraging a higher price realization for farmers.

5. Market Infrastructure:

Market infrastructure includes physical facilities such as market yards, wholesale markets, cold storage facilities, and packaging centers. These infrastructures provide a platform for buyers and sellers to interact and conduct transactions efficiently.

Challenges in Agricultural Marketing

Despite its importance, agricultural marketing faces various challenges that hinder its efficiency and growth:

1. Lack of Infrastructure:

Inadequate market infrastructure, including storage facilities, transportation networks, and processing units, can limit the smooth flow of agricultural goods and increase post-harvest losses.

2. Information Asymmetry:

Uneven access to market information and lack of transparency in pricing mechanisms often result in farmers not receiving fair prices for their produce.

3. Fragmented Markets:

Fragmented markets and a lack of a unified market approach can lead to inefficient pricing and distribution, impacting both farmers and consumers.

4. Policy and Regulatory Barriers:

Complex regulations and policies can hinder market access and growth, particularly for small-scale farmers and new market entrants.

Future Prospects

To overcome these challenges and enhance agricultural marketing, various stakeholders including governments, farmers, private sector entities, and development organizations need to work collaboratively. Investing in modern infrastructure, promoting digital technologies for market information dissemination, encouraging farmer cooperatives, and reforming policies can significantly improve agricultural marketing efficiency.

Efforts should be directed towards creating an integrated and well-organized agricultural marketing system that not only benefits farmers but also ensures food security, stable prices, and economic development. By addressing the existing challenges and fostering a conducive environment for agricultural marketing, we can unlock the true potential of the agricultural sector and contribute to sustainable growth and development.

References

Agarwal, Sarika, and Shashikant Nishant Sharma. “Universal Design to Ensure Equitable Society.”ย International Journal of Engineering and Technical Research (IJETR)ย 1.

Ayuba, Dauda. “Understanding the Urban Development Dynamics.”ย Think India Journalย 26.3 (2023): 13-17.

Bhan, Suraj, and U. K. Behera. “Conservation agriculture in Indiaโ€“Problems, prospects and policy issues.”ย International Soil and Water Conservation Researchย 2.4 (2014): 1-12.

Dhawan, Vibha. “Water and agriculture in India.”ย Background paper for the South Asia expert panel during the Global Forum for Food and Agriculture. Vol. 28. 2017.

Deshpande, Tanvi. “State of agriculture in India.”ย PRS Legislative Researchย 53.8 (2017): 6-7.

Sharma, Shashikant Nishant, Shankar Chatterjee, and Kavita Dehalwar. “Mahatma Gandhi National Rural Employment Guarantee Scheme: Challenges and Opportunities.”ย Think India Journalย 26.1 (2023): 7-15.

Sharma, Shashikant Nishant. “Sustainable development strategies and approaches.”ย International Journal of Engineering and Technical Research (IJETR)ย 2 (2013).

Sharma, Shashikant Nishant. “Introduction to Sociology.”ย New Perspectives in Sociology and Allied Fieldsย (2016): 1.

Sharma, Shashikant Nishant. “Review of most used urban growth models.”ย International Journal of Advanced Research in Engineering and Technology (IJARET)ย 10.3 (2019): 397-405.

Sharma, Shashikant Nishant, ed.ย New perspectives in sociology and allied fields. EduPedia Publications (P) Ltd, 2016.

Learning Gap Assessment in English 9

1Glenn I. Arbis  2Reymon R. Dumale  3Michel D. Galavia  4Mark Kevin C. Marbani, 5Michelle M. Navarro, 6Veverlyn A. Salvador, 7Jet Seth Mae A. Segura

1 2 3 4 5 6 7Faculty, St. Paul University Surigao

ORCID: 0000-0002-8644-0298

ORCID: 0000-0003-1159-8936

ORCID: 0000-0001-7368-5408

4ORCID: 0000-0002-8777-2577

ORCID: 0000-0003-4620-9072

ORCID: 0000-0001-5043-7313

      7ORCID: 0000-0001-5817-0043    

Abstract โ€“ This study investigated the learning gaps in English 9 of the Junior high school students at St. Paul University Surigao. In this study, quantitative quasi-experimental research using a pretest-posttest design was employed. The results showed that the pre-test/post-test design is more effective in achieving the learnersโ€™ mastery of the competency given than post-test- only design. While the interventions given by the teacher for the First Quarter are effective in mastering the competencies, a significant difference is found, especially for those with low mastery levels. This indicates the need for targeted interventions to bridge the learning gaps and further develop students’ understanding of the aspects of language arts that are essential for comprehension, expression, and effective communication. The study recommends that Grade 9 students execute targeted interventions that address the identified learning gaps. These interventions should consist of more modified teaching methods and resources, effective communication between educators, administrators, parents, and communities, and continual formative assessment. By implementing these suggestions, educators can significantly improve their students’ academic performance and competency in English.  

Keywords: Learning gap, Learning gap assessment, English 9, Mastery, Performance

I. Introduction

            In modern educational systems, the assessment of learning gaps plays a vital role in identifying areas where students may require additional support and intervention. The concept of learning gaps refers to the disparities between what students have learned and what they are expected to know at a particular grade level or academic milestone. These gaps can hinder their progress and overall academic achievement if left unaddressed.

            Moreover, Integrated English 9 serves as a pivotal year in secondary education, as it builds upon the foundation laid in earlier grades and prepares students for advanced studies. It encompasses various aspects of language arts, including reading, writing, speaking, and listening, which are essential for comprehension, expression, and effective communication

            Understanding the root causes of these learning gaps is crucial for educators to develop targeted interventions and support systems that address the unique needs of individual students. By identifying the factors contributing to these disparities, educators can implement evidence-based strategies to minimize learning gaps and create a more inclusive and equitable learning environment.

            In addition, the COVID-19 pandemic has widened the learning gap in English proficiency among students, as online learning platforms may not adequately address the needs of diverse learners (Smith, 2021). According to a study by Johnson and Brown (2022), the disruption caused by the pandemic has led to significant setbacks in English language acquisition, particularly for students from low-income backgrounds.

            In connection with this, diagnostic tests were administered at the start of each quarter at the Basic Education Department of St. Paul University Surigao. Assessments of learning gaps give teachers the ability to precisely identify students’ gaps in English knowledge. By evaluating students’ comprehension and conceptual understanding, teachers gain knowledge of the areas in which studentsโ€™ struggle. The use of this data assists in the development of instructional strategies and materials that are specifically tailored to the needs of particular students or groups. Without such assessment, students with knowledge gaps might struggle and regress in comparison to their peers, preventing them from moving forward generally in English education.

             By utilizing efficient learning gap evaluation methodologies, a more inclusive and effective learning environment may be created where students can develop a solid foundation in English topics and reach their full potential. This study evaluated first-quarter students from St. Paul University Surigao’s identified learning gaps in English 9.

II. Statement of the Problem

This study aimed to determine the learning gaps in English 9 for the First Quarter of School Year 2022-2023. Specifically, it sought to answer the following questions:

  1. What are the identified learning gaps in English 9?
  2. What is the pre- and post-test performance of the learners for the First Quarter in English 9?
  3. Is there a significant difference in the pre- and post-test performance of the learners for the First Quarter in English 9?
  4. What interventions may be proposed?

III. Hypothesis

            At 0.05 level of significance, it is hypothesized that there is no significant difference in the pre- and post-test performance of the learners for the First Quarter in English 9.

IV. Methodology

In this study, the researchers used a quasi-experimental research method, employing a pretest and posttest design. In this design, the dependent variable is measured once before and once after the intervention or treatment in the test is administered. The participants involved in the research study were the Grade 9 students at St. Paul University Surigao- Basic Education Department during the First Quarter of the School Year 2022-2023, the resumption of face-to-face classes after the global crisis brought by COVID-19 pandemic. Utilizing a validated test-questionnaire, the test was administered to 32 students out of 33, which comprised 97% population of the total number of participants. The test-questionnaire encompassed the learning competencies indicated for the first quarter in the English 9 level, thus, concreting and measuring the desired level of competency for each specified criterion. The participants were given intervention as specified in their least learned competencies before employing the posttest. The administration of pretest and posttest was done during the synchronous face-to-face classes of the English subject.

Pertinent to the declaration of policy enshrined in the Data Privacy Act of 2012, the researchers ensured that the data gathered should be placed with utmost confidentiality. Hence, students were informed of the essential purpose of the undertakings and its benefits. Further, the researchersโ€™ questionnaires undergone rigorous review and validation to ensure its reliability, validity and purposefully achieve consistency of the desired outcomes.

To achieve the primary objective of having the most reliable and accurate results and findings on the learning gap analysis of the Grade 9 students in English, the researchers made use of the following statistical tools to treat and analyze the data:

Paired t-test. It is used to test the difference between a set of paired samples.

Frequency Count and Percentage Computation. These were used to determine the distribution of the correct responses of the respondents.

The collected data provided would play a crucial role in the study. In this regard, the researchers established an unbiased manner of providing the test questionnaire without having the participants know the questions to be administered to prevent inconsistencies that would have risked the data retrieved. Hence, under no circumstances should the researchers influence the participantsโ€™ answer by inappropriate interventions or disclosure of answers prior to the implementation of the pretest and posttest examinations.

V. Results and Discussions

Identified learning gaps in English 9

            Table 1 presents the identified learning gaps in English 9 for the First Quarter of School Year 2022-2023.

Table 1. Identified learning gaps in English 9

Learning CompetenciesPre-TestPost-Test
%Interpretation%Interpretation
The learnerโ€ฆ
EC: Identifies the use of modals in expressing permission, obligation, and prohibition75.00%Moving Towards Mastery68.75%Moving Towards Mastery
PPre-requisites:DDetermines the use of conditionals in expressing argumentsEC: uses conditionals in expressing arguments EN9G-IIe-2031.25%Low Mastery57.29%Average Mastery
EEmploys the appropriate communicative styles for various situations (intimate, casual, conversational, consultative, frozen) EN9OL-Ic60.42%Average Mastery76.04%Moving Towards Mastery

As presented in the table, this provides information on the learning competencies of a learner before and after a learning intervention. Firstly, the enabling competency identifying the use of modals in expressing permission, obligation, and prohibition got 75.00% in the pre-test and 68.75% in the post-test, both interpreted as Moving Towards Mastery. The percentage of correct responses in the post-test had a slight decrease of 6.25% compared to the pre-test. Nevertheless, the responses of the students in the competency remain as Moving Towards Mastery. 

Secondly, the pre-requisite competency determining the use of conditionals in expressing arguments and enabling competency uses conditionals in expressing arguments EN9G-IIe-20, got 31.25% in the pre-test, interpreted as Low Mastery. This was supported by the study of Jusuf et. al., 2021, states that one factor affecting the studentโ€™s performance is lack of exposure to English language. However, 57.29% in the post-test, interpreted as Average Mastery. This indicates that there is an improvement on the performance of the students.

Lastly, the competency employing the appropriate communicative styles for various situations (intimate, casual, conversational, consultative, frozen) got 60.42% in the pre-test, interpreted as Average Mastery and 76.04% in the Post-Test, interpreted as Moving Towards Mastery. This implies that there is an improvement in the percentage of correct responses of students after the intervention was conducted. 

On the whole, the learner’s performance has shown improvement in two out of the three learning competencies. They have made progress in identifying the use of modals and employing appropriate communicative styles. However, their performance in using conditionals to express arguments still needs improvement, although they have made some progress.

Pre- and Post-test Performance of the learners 

            Table 2 presents the identified learning gaps in English 9 for the First Quarter of School Year 2022-2023. 

Table 2. Identified learning gaps in English 9

Scoresf (n=32)%
Pre-Test
Average 26.25
Good 1856.25
Excellent1237.50
Post-Test
Good 1443.75
Excellent1856.25

As presented in the table, this provides the scores and percentages of the 32 participants in the pre-test and post-test. In Pre-test, two (2) participants got 6.25%, scored Average. Eighteen (18) participants got 56.25%, scored Good. And twelve (12) got 37.50%, scored Excellent. On the other hand, in the post-test, fourteen (14) participants got 43.75, scored Good and eighteen (18) participants got 56.25%, scored Excellent. 

Overall, in the pre-test, the majority of participants (56.25%) scored Good, followed by 37.50% of participants, scored Excellent, and a small percentage (6.25%) scored Average. In the post-test, the distribution shifted slightly, with 43.75% of participants scored Good and the majority (56.25%), scored Excellent. This indicates an improvement in the overall performance of the participants between the pre-test and post-test, as there was an increase in the percentage of participants in the Excellent range and a decrease in the percentage in the Good range. However, it’s important to note that the exact improvement or change in individual scores cannot be determined from this table alone.

Table 3. Significant Difference of the Identified learning gaps in English 9

Scorestdfp-valueDecision
Pre-Test – Post-Test-2.98310.006Reject Ho

Findings revealed that at 0.05 level of significance there is a significant difference in the pre-test and post-test results after giving an intervention, especially to those with low mastery levels (t (31)=-2.98, p =0.006). This means that the interventions used by the teacher are effective in mastering the competencies in the First Quarter of English 9 of the school year 2022-2023. 

According to the study by Thompson et al. (2022), the interventions implemented by the teachers were found to be effective in enhancing students’ mastery of competencies. The study reported significant improvements in student performance after the interventions were administered. This could entail a change in how they approach the students’ preferences, new instructional materials, and revised class activities. Additionally, teachers should spend more time on students who are falling behind in class, explain everything in detail, and stick to a structured lesson plan. Every student should have their needs met, and instruction should be given with more fervor, repetition, and regularity. Time should be given for students to consider what they have learned or absorbed. Teachers should implement formative assessments to track students’ performance, assess their progress, and work to close the achievement gap. They must establish standards, devise achievable objectives, be honest with the students regarding their performance, and utilize technology to advance. Furthermore, according to Johnson and Smith (2021), bridging the learning gap requires targeted interventions and instructional strategies tailored to students’ individual needs. Additionally, a study by Roberts et al. (2020) found that implementing personalized learning plans significantly improved academic outcomes for students at risk of falling behind.

                                                VI. Conclusions

Based on the findings of the study, the following conclusions were drawn;

  1. Pre-test/post-test design is more effective in achieving the learnersโ€™ mastery of the competency given than post- test- only design.
  2. Interventions given by the teachers play a very important role and are efficacious in mastering the competencies of the learners.

VII. Recommendation

From the conclusions drawn, the following recommendations are given;

  1. Effective communication between educators, administrators, parents, and communities is among the most crucial elements in bridging the learning gap.
  2. Teachers should intensify the use of pre- test/ post-test design, injecting a variety of engagement activities/ intervention to sustain its effectiveness and eventually enhance the academic achievement of the students.
  3. Students together with their parents are encouraged to collaborate and cooperate on the use of pre- test/ post- test design implemented by the teachers to track students’ performance, assess their progress, and work to close the achievement gap.

IX. References

Johnson, B., & Brown, C. (2022). Effects of the COVID-19 pandemic on English language learning: A case study of low-income students. International Journal of Applied Linguistics, 40(3), 189-205.

Johnson, R., & Smith, S. (2021). Bridging the learning gap: Targeted interventions and instructional strategies. Journal of Educational Psychology, 78(2), 145-162.

Jusuf, S., Fatsah H., Dako, R., 2021 Studentsโ€™ Performance in Speaking English (A Case Study on Studentsโ€™ Poor Performance In Speaking English)

Roberts, L., Brown, K., & Davis, M. (2020). Personalized learning plans: A pathway to improved academic outcomes. Journal of Applied Developmental Psychology, 35(4), 321-335.

Smith, A. (2021). The impact of COVID-19 on education: Challenges and opportunities. Journal of Education and Development, 25(2), 45-60.

Thompson, A., Smith, B., & Johnson, C. (2022). Enhancing students’ mastery of competencies: Effective interventions implemented by teachers. Journal of Education, 45(3), 215-230.

LINK TO DOWNLOAD FULL PAPER

Parental Awareness of Child Labor Laws and Welfare Schemes for Female Child Labor: A Study in Kurnool District

Dr. A. Kusuma

Assistant Professor,

Department Sociology, S.V. University, Tirupati.

Email: drsumasvu20@gmail.com

drsumavsu09@gmail.com

K. Chinna Veeranna

Research Scholar.

Abstract

Child labor remains a pervasive violation of human rights, drawing global attention to the welfare of children. The 20th century marked a significant turning point in the advancement of child welfare, leading to heightened awareness of children’s rights as distinct individuals. This study aims to assess the level of parental awareness regarding government welfare schemes designed to support female child laborers. Our findings reveal that 46.3% of respondents acknowledge that child labor forces children into premature adulthood, leaving them vulnerable to exploitation due to their vulnerability. Furthermore, 33.5% of respondents recognize that a sense of inferiority among child laborers stifles their courage and creativity. The creation of additional employment opportunities for unskilled and unemployed individuals in rural areas can contribute to economic growth. Implementing awareness generation programs focusing on child labor laws and involving various stakeholders such as government departments, youth associations, self-help groups (SHGs), and civil society members is crucial for reducing the prevalence of child labor.

Keywords: Child Labor, Welfare, Female Child Labor, Economic Development, Legislation, Parental Awareness

Introduction

Child labor remains a pressing concern in India, with a pronounced presence in rural areas. Although legislative measures have been introduced worldwide to restrict the employment of children below a certain age and define acceptable conditions for minors working in various professions, the effectiveness of laws designed to protect children from hazardous labor is often lacking. In many instances, children find themselves aiding family members in agricultural endeavors, working as part of contractual family labor arrangements, or participating in plantation work. Rural India witnesses a common practice of school-aged children engaging in agricultural work as part of their family responsibilities. Regrettably, the implementation of Child Labor Laws at the state and district levels has been inadequate.

This study seeks to shed light on the perspectives of parents and employers regarding child labor issues, aiming to enhance their awareness, knowledge, and understanding of the prevalence and conditions of child labor within the study area. The situation of female child laborers is especially distressing due to gender discrimination prevalent in many Indian societies. Agriculture, which contributes three-fourths of the national income and supports over 75 percent of the population for subsistence, is heavily intertwined with child labor. Poverty and the absence of social security remain primary drivers of child labor, trapping children in work that offers limited opportunities for physical, social, and mental development. Both girls and boys are ensnared in the worst forms of child labor, but societal expectations, duties, and responsibilities imposed on girls often render them more susceptible to exploitation. Addressing the issue of female child labor is a complex challenge, compounded by the fact that the labor of female children is often unacknowledged or underrepresented in formal labor statistics. The absence of quality universal education further contributes to children dropping out of school and entering the labor force, making it difficult to accurately detect the true extent of child labor.

Welfare schemes for female child labor are essential in combating this pervasive violation of human rights. Child welfare has garnered global attention, particularly in the 20th century, with growing awareness of children’s rights as independent entities. Article 18 of the United Nations Convention on the Rights of the Child in 1989 emphasizes the need to protect children from economic exploitation and hazardous work that interferes with their education, health, or overall development. The International Labor Organization (ILO) also opposes child labor, particularly in situations where children face educational and social disadvantages or work in exploitative conditions harmful to their well-being.

The Indian Government recognizes child labor because of poverty and has taken steps to address it through legislative measures. In 1986, the 

Child Labor (Prohibition and Regulation) Act was enacted, replacing the Employment of Children Act of 1938. While the 1986 Act does not completely ban child labor, it focuses on “projecting” working children. The government has established unique schools to rehabilitate children engaged in dangerous or hazardous occupations, offering them education, vocational training, monthly stipends, and nutrition and health services.

The commitment of the Government of India to eradicate child labor is enshrined in the Constitution, which provides for the protection of children from engaging in economic activities unsuitable for their age. The Directive Principles of State Policy in the Constitution reinforce this commitment. The Central Labor Service (CLS), established in 1987, aims to improve industrial relations, labor welfare, and the enforcement of labor laws. Various schemes offering medical, housing, educational, recreational, water supply, and family welfare benefits are implemented for workers as part of the government’s ongoing efforts to safeguard the welfare of children and laborers.

Material and Methodology

Objectives

The present study broadly aims at studying the socio-economic and social participation, employment support and knowledge on welfare schemes available to female child labors. The following are the main objectives of the present study:

  • To study the level of knowledge on welfare schemes provided by the Government for girl child labor. 
  • To study the level of knowledge on girl child rights
  • To examine the economic and social conditions of female child labor in the sample district. 

  Sample design and study area

The researcher has purposively selected the Kurnool district due to its proximity and familiarity. Stratified random sampling method was used in selection of study sample. The study has conducted in six Mandalโ€™s of three revenue divisions of the Kurnool district. Four villages from each Mandal were selected. 20 respondents each were selected at random in 24 villages and the total sample is comprises of 480 female child labor residing in agricultural families in the Kurnool district for the present study.  

 Results

Socio-Demographic Characteristics of the respondents

A study of the background characteristics of sampled population is an important task in the study. Several studies have been shown that there is a strong relationship between socio-economic status and Girl Child Labor in Agriculture Families. 

Table No.1: Percentage Distribution of the respondents by their Socio-Demographic Characteristics (N=480)

Socio-Demographic Characteristics of the respondentsFrequencyPercent
Age of the Respondent
5-8 Year479.8
9-11 Years11524.0
12-14 Years31866.2
Religion
Hindu24250.4
Muslim5912.3
Christian14630.4
Others336.9
Education
pre-school13728.5
Primary9820.4
Upper-Primary17736.9
High School6814.2
Work Experience (Years)
โ‰ค 2 Years15131.5
2- 4Years22346.5
โ‰ฅ 4 Years 10622.1
Girl Child Income
โ‰ค 5000163.3
5001 and above46496.7
Source of Family Income
Agriculture17736.9
Allied Labor15532.3
Business459.4
Others10321.5

  Age plays an important role in measuring the respondentโ€™s perception on their present working condition. Data has been collected on the girls who involved in the agriculture labor to analyze the girlโ€™s working condition in the agriculture field. In the study area nearly two-thirds (66.3 %) of the respondents were in 12-14 years age group. One-fourth (24.0 %) of them were in 9-11 years and the remaining (9.8 %) were in the age group of 5-9 years. One half (50.4 %) of the respondents were Hindus, less than one-third (30.4 %) of them were Christians, 12.3 percent were Muslims and 6.9 percent belong to other religions. It is observed from the above table that more than one third (36.9 %) of the respondents have completed upper-primary education in the study area. More than one-fourth (28.5%) the girls had pre-school education and two-fifth (20.4 %) had primary education and 14.2 percent of the respondents had high school education. More than two-fourth (46.5 %) of the respondents were having โ‰ค 2 years of experience in the agriculture field, less than one-third (31.5 %) of them were working experience of 2-4 years and more than one-fifth (22.1 %) of them were working 4 years and above in the agriculture field. Almost all (96.7 %) of the respondents were getting a monthly income Rs. 5000 and above the study area. More than one-third (36.9 %) of the respondentsโ€™ parents were having agriculture background, followed by allied labor (32.3%) and other types of activities (21.5 %). 

The data was collected on parents opinion on child labor, sociological and economical aspects of the girl child labors in agricultural families namely on 1) fulfillment of social obligation 2) prone to habits like smoking, gambling and extravagancy 3) loss of potential intellectuals and thinkers in 4) prone to exploitation 5) violation of human rights 6) enforcement of laws 7) punishment under child labor laws 8) parents knowledge on girl child welfare schemes etc.

Table No. 3: Percentage distribution of the respondents by Parents opinion on Sociological and economical aspects of female child labor

Sociological aspectsAgreeDisagreeUn-DecidedTotal
GCs need proper nurture and nourishment to make them best fits in future lifeN3557154480
P7414.811.3100
CL has no rationale as it is the decision of the parent who are second to none as well wishes of childrenN25616064480
P53.333.313.3100
CL is not unethical rather fulfillment of social obligation by employers towards poor of whom government fails to take care ofN199173108480
P41.53622.5100
CL keeps children away from education and breeds illiteracy in a societyN20918784480
P43.53917.5100
Working children are prone to the habits of smoking, gambling, and extravagancyN20920071480
P43.541.714.8100
Child labor compels children to lead pre-mature adultsโ€™ livesN22216197480
P46.333.520.2100
CL has high opportunity cost as it leads to loss of potential intellectuals and thinkers N22518867480
P46.939.214100
Inferiority complex suppresses courage and creativity of childrenN16195224480
P33.519.846.7100
Children as workers are prone to exploitation by reason of their docilityN164157159480
P34.232.733.1100
Child labor is an off school of poverty which is the result of unequal distribution of wealthN28814151480
P6029.4106100

In the table no.3 shows that 33.5 percent of the respondents agreed that inferiority complex among the children will suppress their courage and creativity. 46.3% of the respondents agreed that child labor compels children to lead premature adults and there is a chance to exploit by reason of their docility. 43.5 percent of the respondents agreed that child labor leads to children keep away from education and breeds illiteracy in society. 46.9 percent of the respondents agreed that child labor is one of the opportunities to forego the potential intellectuals and thinkers of nation. Nearly three-fifth (60 %) of the respondentโ€™s parents opinioned that unequal distribution of wealth is one of the reasons for child labor as it leads to more dropouts. Nearly three-fourth (74 %) of the parents agreed that girl child require proper nurture and nourishment to make them best fits in future life.

Table No 4: Percentage distribution of the respondents by Parents opinion on Sociological and economical aspects of female child labor 

Knowledge on Legal aspects AgreeDisagreeUn-DecidedTotal
Employing CL is a violation of human rightsN23521134480
P49447.1100
Employment of children in hazardous work is a crimeN20120079480
P41.941.716.5100
Child labor is a moral crime against humanityN21718380480
P45.238.116.7100
Hazardous nature of job coupled with excessive workload and long hours of work are so heinous crimeN138226116480
P28.847.124.2100
Child labor is a punishment to tender hands for no fault of theirs N111267102480
P23.155.621.3100
CL laws fail as these are unacceptable to people with unsound financial positionN14825181480
P30.852.316.9100
Weak enforcement of laws leads to child labor with impunityN141209130480
P29.443.527.1100
The parents of child workers shall be booked under the relevant lawsN144166170480
P3034.635.4100
Child labor shall be completely banned in all aspectsN20220573480
P42.142.715.2100
The employers of CL shall be dealt with stringent punitive measuresN136243101480
P28.350.621100
Enforcement of child labor laws shall be strictly observedN15527550480
P32.357.310.4100
Child labor is subject to punishment under child labor laws.N167112201480
P34.823.341.9100

In this study an attempt is made to assess the parentsโ€™ opinion on the sociological and economical aspect of the child labors related aspects. Nearly one-half (49 %) of the respondentโ€™s agreed that working as a child labor is violation of human rights. 45.2 percent of respondents accepted that child labor is moral crime against humanity and 41.9 percent of the respondents agreed that employment of child in hazardous work is crime and 28.8 percent of respondentโ€™s expressed that excessive workload and long hours of work in hazardous Work is heinous crime.  Only one-third (29.4 %) of the parents were having knowledge on child labor laws as they expressed that the Child labor laws are failed in implementation and weak enforcement of law were the causes of child labor.  Nearly one-third (32.3 %) of parents expressed that they have observed strict enforcement of child labor laws. 30% of the respondents were agreed that parents of the child labor should be punished under the child labor laws. More than one-third (34.8 %) of the respondents were aware that child labor is subject punishment under child labor laws. 42.1 percent of the respondents agreed that child labor shall be banned in all aspects. It is interesting to note that more than two-fifth (41.5 %) of the parents agreed that child labor is not an unethical and the employers of the child labor were giving an opportunity to get the financial source for those who are neglected by the governments. 

The findings from the above table shows that majority of the parents were aware of the ill effects of the child labor and the laws and functioning of law enforcement authorities related to child labor. 

Parentโ€™s knowledge on various welfare schemes implemented by the government to avoid Child Labor is presented in the table no. 5. Cent percent of the respondents (100 %) in the study area agreed that free education for girls up to higher education will help to eradicate the child labor.  Higher proportion (85 %) of the respondentโ€™s expressed that Balika Sam Rakshana scheme is very useful to balance sex ratio and prevent gender discrimination and the scheme is also encouraging employment skills, opportunities and creates awareness on health and family life education to girl Child.  More than one-half (51.7 %) of the respondents felt that Apana Beti Apne desh scheme is providing rehabilitation services for those who were rescued from child labor and brothel home. Similar percentage (62.5 %) of the respondents agreed that strict implementation of prenatal diagnostic technique act helps in reducing female feticides and the gender discrimination. The girl child agreed that implementing the constitutional provisions and human rights for girl child reduces gender discrimination (60 %) and welfare measures are sufficient to improve the girl child status provided by the government and non-government organizations (60.2 %). More than one-half (52.5 %) of the respondents agreed that national policy for children and legal enactment facilitates the development of girl child.

     Table No. 5: Percentage distribution of the respondents by Parents knowledge on welfare schemes for female child labor

Parents knowledge on welfare schemes AgreeDisagreeTotal
Free education for girls up to degree level is very beneficial for girl education N4800480
P1000.0100.0
Balika samrakshna pathakam is very useful to balance sex ratio and prevent gender discrimination N40872480
P8515100
The KB scheme is encouraging employment skills, opportunities, and health awareness of girl childrenN290190480
P60.439.6100
KB scheme is providing awareness on family life education to girl children N290190480
P60.439.6100.0
ABAD programmer is very useful to rehabilitate the girls who are rescued from CL and brothel homeN248232480
P51.748.3100.0
Strict implementation of pre โ€“natal diagnostic technique Act, 1994 helps in reducing female feticides N300180480
P62.537.5100.0
Constitutional provision and human rights for GC reduces gender discrimination  N288192480
P6040100.0
National policy for children and legal enactments facilitates development of GC N252228480
P52.547.5100.0
The present welfare measures taken by govt; NGOs are sufficient to improve the girl child statusN289191480
P60.239.8100.0

Conclusion

Equality of opportunities is the foundation of modern welfare states.  The crucial role that education can play in the reduction of girl child labor and improvement in the economic wellbeing of individuals can go a long way in achieving such ends.  In India, poverty remains the key determinant of children not being sent to school. Most of the parents are not able to afford to send them to school. The path to progress in terms reducing the number of girl child laborerโ€™s by taking into consideration the cultural and economic measures, their future will continue to remain bleak.  The study suggests that promotions of non-agricultural economic activities like micro and small industries and self-employment with the support of SHG groups (Women Groups) are the best alternatives to improve employment and income generation for the rural poor. Creation of more employment opportunities to the unskilled Unemployed will help to economic growth in rural areas. Through awareness generation programmes related to the Child Labor Laws with involvement of convergent departments, youth associations, SHGs, Civil Society members will be helping to   decrease the number of child labors. Educate the parents of girl child on importance of sufficient nutritious food and proper education for the growth of girl child and its impact on future generations.

Reference

  1. Asha Bajpai, (2011). Child Rights in India: Law, Policy, and Practice. Oxford University Press, New Delhi.
  2. B. Jaya Surian and D. Vezhavendan (2018). An Empirical Study on the Status of Child Labor before and after the Implementation of National Child Labor Project Scheme in India. International Journal of Pure and Applied Mathematics, Vol: 119, No. 17, 247-267; ISSN: 1314-3395.
  3. ILO (2010). Accelerating action against child labor โ€“ Global Report under the follow-up to the ILO Declaration on Fundamental Principles and Rights at Work. 
  4. Kumar Das and Sarojini Mishra (2005). Economic exploitation of girl child labor in India. Ahfad Journal, Vol. 22, Issue 2, Publisher: Ahfad University for Women
  5. M. Swaminathan (1998). โ€œEconomic growth and the persistence of child labor: evidence from an Indian cityโ€.  World Development, vol. 26, no. 8, pp. 1513โ€“1528.
  6. Pramod Kumar Agarwal, Dr. Anil Chandra Pathak (2015). A Socio โ€“ Economic Analysis of Child Labor in India. Lakshya: Journal of Science & Management (LJSM) – Volume -1, Issue-1.
  7. Rupinder Singh (2019). Child Labor In India: A Legal Study, International Journal of Research and Analytical Reviews, Vol: 6, Iss: 1. 
  8. Sanjay Mohapatra and Manusmita Desh  (2011). โ€œChild Laborโ€- A Product of Socio-Economic Problem for India, Findings and Preventives- A Case of Bhubaneswar (A State Capital of India). International Research Journals, (ISSN: 2141-5161) Vol. 2(6) pp. 1199-1209. http://www.interesjournals.org/ER&nbsp;
  9. Srikanth Bolla (2010). Child Labor in India. http://web.mit.edu/angles/2010_Srikanth_Bolla.html
  10. UNICEF (2021). Child Labor and Exploitation, UNICEF main web page, https://www.unicef.org/india/what-we-do/child-labour-exploitation
  11. Vineet J Samuel. (2018) Child Labor & Child Rights in India: Myth or Reality, Economic Justice.  https://www.oxfamindia.org/blog/child-labour-india
  12. World Day Against Child Labor (2020). Preventing child labor in agriculture during COVID-19 and beyond. News and Press Release Source FAO, Posted 12 Jun 2020.
  13. Y. Janardhana Reddy (2020). An Analytical Study of Child Labor in India. Vol-15-Issue-4.https://www.ilo.org/ipec/areas/Agriculture/WCMS_172261/lang-en/index.htm
  14. Rupinder Singh (2019). Child Labor in India: A Legal Study. International Journal of Research and Analytical Reviews, Vol: 6, Iss: 1.

LINK TO DOWNLOAD PDF

Irrigation Analysis and Trends in Telangana State

Guduri Kailasam

Dept. of Economics, Osmania University, Hyderabad 

Abstract

Telangana’s irrigation is based on two large rivers, the Godavari and Krishna, which have a combined allocation of 1266.94 TMC (967.94 TMC and 299 TMC, respectively) of guaranteed water and 500 TMC of surplus water in each river. Nine Major Irrigation Projects that have been finished have increased the state’s irrigation potential by 21.32 lakh acres. A comprehensive irrigation development strategy has been devised by the Telangana government in order to provide irrigation facilities for around 125 lakh acres of land throughout the state. The government has also launched a number of initiatives and developed a six-pronged strategy for the expedited completion of outstanding irrigation projects. One of the most significant connections between irrigation and agriculture. It increases productivity and shields farmers from unfavourable monsoons, guaranteed irrigation is essential for crop production and farmer incomes. Additionally, guaranteed irrigation can preserve groundwater levels and increase water usage efficiency. India is the second-most populous country in the world and has an agriculture-based economy. Agriculture output supports India’s food requirement and accounts for 17% of its GDP. A crucial element in the development of agriculture is irrigation. Irrigation is currently neither in a suitable state nor does is there a progressive strategy. The government must take the appropriate action to improve irrigation system effectiveness in order to fully enhance water demand for rich crop patterns.

Keywords: Agriculture, Irrigation, Telangana, Trends 

Introduction

Irrigation development in Telangana

According to the Socio-Economic Outlook 2023, during the 2014-15 to 2022-23 period, the Telangana government spent Rs 1.61 lakh crore on irrigation projects in the State, resulting in an increase of the Gross Irrigated Area (GIA) from 62.48 lakh acres in 2014-15 to 135 lakh acres in 2021-22, an increase of 117 percent. 26,885 crore has been proposed for the Irrigation Department for the 2023-24 fiscal. The Telangana government is determined to provide irrigation to 1 crore 25 lakh acres.

The Kaleshwaram Lift Irrigation Project or KLIP is a multi-purpose irrigation project on the Godavari River in Kaleshwaram, Bhupalpally, Telangana, India. The confluence of the Pranhita and Godavari rivers is the site of the largest multi-stage lift irrigation project in the world as of right now. Vidyasagar Rao Dindi Lift Irrigation Scheme for his enormous contribution to irrigation in Telangana. He fought for safe drinking water in the fluoride-affected Nalgonda district and provided water to the arid lands in the Telangana region.

Nizam Sagar is the oldest dam in the state of Telangana. This place is located at about 145 km north-west of the state capital Hyderabad and 81 km from Nizamabad District.

The Nizamsagar dam was built in 1923 by Mir Osman Ali Khan, the then-ruler of the royal Hyderabad. The correct answer is Wells. In Telangana throughout the past ten years, wells have mostly served as the source of irrigation. About 75% of Telangana’s net irrigated area is served by bore wells and other wells. Over time, irrigation beneath the ponds has decreased while increasing beneath the canals. In the State, Rangareddy has the largest percentage of well-irrigated land (95%) followed by the districts of Medak and Karimnagar. In India, canals are the secondary source of irrigation after wells and tube wells. Large plains, excellent soils, and enduring rivers are features of the territories that are being irrigated by the canals. Most of North India’s plains are irrigated by canals.

Review of Literature 

Sanjukumar (2015) attempted to understand that irrigation is the essential input for increasing

agricultural output, therefore, the development of irrigation has been a key approach in the development of farm sector in the country. In this work, he examined various forms of irrigation and their effects on agriculture. India’s farming is mostly reliant on the monsoon season. Additionally, this study provided information on how to manage irrigation for important Indian crops such rice, wheat, maize, pulses, and oilseeds.

Narayana and Narayanan Nair (1983) emphasized on assessment of the impact of irrigation on

agricultural output in Kerala and also to identify the main constraints on the development of irrigation. Researchers discovered that while winter and summer crops are not affected by irrigation, autumn crops are somewhat stabilised and yields are improved. Poor irrigation water management is to blame for the lack of any significant effects of irrigation on agricultural productivity. Numerous additional studies that have demonstrated that an increase in irrigation infrastructure will result in an improvement in productivity per worker and per unit of capital do not support the conclusion drawn.

Data and methodology

This study is completely based on secondary sources of data. The Department of Agriculture and Irrigation(TS), Directorate of Economics & Statistics, Hyderabad, various Socio-Economic outlooks, Statistical yearbooks, Agriculture census, and Ministry of Agriculture, Government of India publications were the sources for the secondary data. The study’s analytical section has used growth rates.

Telangana is newly formed 29th state of India, situated in the central stretch of the Indian Peninsula on the Deccan Plateau. Geographically, the state is situated in a semi-arid region with a climate that is primarily hot and dry. The state is drained by the two significant rivers, the Godavari and the Krishna, as well as a number of smaller rivers, including the Manjira, the Bhima, and the Musi. The southwest monsoons cause Telangana’s annual average precipitation to range between 900 and 1500 mm in the north and 700 to 900 mm in the south.Agriculture in the state is a proverbial bet in the monsoons since rainfall is unpredictable and inconsistent.

Historically, during the period of Kakatiyaโ€™s tank irrigation has developed hugely like big lakes Ramappa,Pakhal, Laknavaram and many others. . The area irrigated by canals and wells was later expanded throughout the planning phase by building new projects and canals. Some of the outstanding accomplishments made by the Nizam during his rule are Mir Alam, Hussain Sagar, Osman Sagar, Himayat Sagar, and the Nizamsgar projects, among others. But following the Green Revolution for two decades, well irrigation has increased significantly, especially due to private investment.

Water for irrigation can be obtained from a variety of sources, including groundwater (from springs or wells), surface water (from rivers, lakes, or reservoirs), or unconventional sources like treated wastewater, desalinated water, drainage water, or fog collection. spate irrigation, also known as floodwater harvesting, is a particular type of surface water irrigation. The moisture stored in the soil will be used thereafter to grow crops. Spate irrigation areas are in particular located in semi-arid or arid, mountainous regions. Rainwater harvesting is typically not regarded as a kind of irrigation, although floodwater harvesting is a recognized irrigation technique. Rainwater harvesting is the gathering and concentration of runoff water from roofs or vacant land. 90% of the world’s wastewater production goes untreated, leading to widespread water pollution, particularly in low-income nations. Untreated wastewater is increasingly being used as an irrigation water source in agriculture. Cities are appealing to farmers because they offer lucrative marketplaces for fresh food. Farmers frequently have no choice but to utilise water contaminated with urban waste, including sewage, to water their crops because agriculture must compete for increasingly limited water resources with industry and municipal consumers. Using water contaminated with pathogens in this way poses serious health risks, especially if consumers consume fresh vegetables that have been irrigated with contaminated water.

Table 1: Percentage of Net Area Irrigated by Source of Irrigation from 2008-09 to 2015-16

S.No.YearNet AreaIrrigated(lakh Ha.)% of Canal%Tank%Wells
12008-0918.2811.5513.0372.09
22009-1014.939.183.8284.33
32010-1120.0415.7611.8769.63
42011-1219.8516.379.2271.69
52012-1317.745.078.9183.77
62013-1422.8912.6710.0574.83
72014-1517.2610.085.6281.87
82015-16(K)13.133.438.3886.37

Source: Directorate of Economics and Statistics, Hyderabad. K= Kharif

The net area watered by well grew from 72.09 percent in 2008-09 to 86.37% in 2015-16(K), indicating a decline in public irrigation investment. Increased well irrigation causes groundwater supplies to be depleted and also requires greater private investment, which raises the cost of farming. While tank irrigation also dropped over the time, the area watered by canals climbed from 11.55 percent in 2008-09 to 12.68 percent in 2013-14 and decreased to 10.08% in 2014-15. In 2008โ€“09, the tankโ€™s net irrigated area made up 13.03% of the overall net irrigated area, however, it rapidly shrunk throughout the course of the year.

Status of groundwater development

In the State, groundwater-based irrigation was a reliable source of water during the late 19th-century monsoon drought years. The early 1980s drilling technology advancements in hard rock regions led to an increase in groundwater irrigation that eventually surpassed tank and canal irrigations (Pingale, G., 2011). Most of the state’s well irrigation systems are operated by individual farmers who have spent money on digging dug wells, dug cumbre wells, or bore/tube wells (bw/tw), installing pump sets, and constructing pipelines to their fields. These farmers only benefit from free power, which the previous administration has been giving them twice daily since 2004 (Pingale, G., 2011). As of January 1, 2018, the current administration is providing 24 hours of free, high-quality power to agricultural pump sets (PD, Telangana State Government, 2018). Currently, the state has 24.2 lakh connections for pump sets (The Hindu, 20 March 2020). COVID-19 for many benefits to some, extracting 8084 mcm of groundwater for drinking, irrigation, and industrial use.

Table 2 : Trends in Cropping Intensity

S. NoDistrict1997-982002-032007-082012-13
1Mahabubnagar1.081.081.071.11
2Rangareddy1.091.081.131.11
3Hyderabad
4Medak1.181.241.221.24
5Nizamabad1.491.471.621.66
6Adilabad1.051.031.091.08
7Karimnagar1.421.381.581.45
8Warangal1.301.231.311.32
9Khammam1.071.061.111.13
10Nalgonda1.241.161.291.23
11Telangana1.691.201.421.19

Note: 1) Cropping intensity is the ratio of gross cultivated area to net area sown 2)1997-98 refers to the average of 1996-1997, 1997-98 and1998-99. 2002-03 refers to           the average       of         2001- 02,2002-03 and 2003-04.2007-08 refers    to  average of 2006-07, 2007-08, and 2008-09. 2012-13 refers to representaverage of 2011-12, 2012-13, and 2013-14.

Source: Computed from data collected from Statistical Abstract of Andhra Pradesh and Agricultural Statistics at a Glance, Government of India of various years

                Table 3 : Trends in Intensity of Irrigation(In percentage)

S.NoDistrict1997-982002-032007-082012-13
1Mahabubnagar0.200.180.250.29
2Rangareddy0.220.220.260.30
3Hyderabad
4Medak0.280.260.330.32
5Nizamabad0.590.64o.650.61
6Adilabad0.010.150.140.15
7Karimnagar0.660.670.790.75
8Warangal0.590.600.660.63
9Khammam0.410.360.440.43
10Nalgonda0.390.330.490.43
11Telangana0.220.360.490.42

Note: 1) Intensity of irrigation is the percentage of net area irrigated to net area sown. 2)1997-98 refers to average of 1996-1997, 1997-98 and1998-99.

2002-03 refers to average of 2001-02, 2002-03 and2003-04.

2007-08 refers to represent average of 2006-07, 2007-08 and 2008-09.

2012-13 refers to represent average of 2011-12, 2012-13 and 2013-14.

Source: Computed from data collected from Statistical Abstract of Andhra Pradesh and Agricultural Statistics at aGlance, Government of India of various years

Conclusion

The growth of irrigation infrastructure benefits the State’s rural economy, especially the agricultural sector. It is evident from the research above that irrigation has been more important in the growth of the agricultural industry in Telangana state. It is obvious that irrigation facilities have grown over time, but additional facilities will need to be added in the future. We find that well irrigation, one of the dominant methods of irrigation in recent decades, has negative effects on groundwater levels and requires greater private investment, which drives up the cost of farming. However, irrigation in tanks and canals exhibited a decreasing tendency at that time. Additionally, irrigation encourages increased land use, causing a change in crop pattern in favour of new and improved crop types, commercial crops, and cropping intensity. Since agriculture is the foundation for all other types of growth, the state must develop its agricultural sector. In agricultural development, irrigation in the form of soil moisture plays a prominent role. thus, role. Therefore, irrigation is a key component in the growth of agricultural in the State.

Reference

Ashok Mitra (1965): โ€œLevel of Regional Development in Indiaโ€, paper published in edited Book, Regional Planning in Indiaโ€, Edited by Mahesh Chand and Vinay Kumar Puri, Allied Publishers, New Delhi

Bhatt J.S. (1972): โ€œRegional Planning in Indiaโ€, Statistical Publishing Society, Calcutta.

Bhullar, D.S. (1998): โ€œRegional Economic Disparities and Area Planningโ€, ABD Publishers, Jaipur.

Baran Paul (1973): โ€œOn the Political Economy of Backwardnessโ€ โ€˜in A N. Agrawal and

S.P. Singh (Editors) Economics of Under Development, Oxford University Press 1973 Pg. no75.

Deshpande, R. S., & Narayanamurthy, A. (2001). Role of irrigation in agricultural performance: Revisited.

Dhawan, B. D., & Datta, H. S. (1992). Impact of irrigation on multiple cropping. Economic and Political Weekly, A15-A18.

Government of India (2001): Economic Survey:2000-2001, Ministry of Finance Economic Division, New Delhi, p 152

Mathur A (1983): โ€œRegional Development and Income Disparities in India: A Sectoral Analysis, EconomicDevelopment & Cultural Changeโ€ Vol. No.3 April, Page. No, 475505.

Nath V (1970): โ€œRegional Development in India Planningโ€, Economic and Political Weekly, Jan 1970, pg no, 242-260

Sanjukumar, M. (2015). Irrigation and development of Indian agriculture: A systematic study. InternationalMultidisciplinary Research Journal, 2321-5488

Vaeshney, R., 1995, Modern Methods of Irrigation. Geo journal. Vol.35.

Verma, N., 1990, Irrigation Change and Agriculture Development. New Delhi: Uppal Publication.

LINK TO DOWNLOAD FULL PAPER